Instrukcja Napraw Celtis 426-456

10.
2003 – EN
60 05 029 688 03.2004 – EN
05.2005 – EN
A0 A1 A2
B1 B2
C1 C2
D1 D2 D3
E1 E2 E3
F F
G1 G2 G3
G4 G5 G6
H1 H2 H3 H4
J1 J2
ELECTRONIC INJECTION
MECHANICAL INJECTION
DPS 4045 DRT 70 ENGINE
DPS 4045 DRT 76 ENGINE
DPS 4045 TRT 70 ENGINE
A0
INJECTION DATA SHEETS
A1
INJECTION FEED
A2
DPS ENGINE
05.2005 Chapter A
CONTENTS
A0 – ELECTRONIC INJECTION SHEETS

CELTIS 426 - M 3612 .....................................................................................................................................................A0.3
CURVE 1 RATED ENGINE SPEED 2 200 RPM .............................................................................................................A0.3
CELTIS 426 - M 3612 ......................................................................................................................................................A0.5
ENGINE TESTS AT THE POWER TAKE OFF ...............................................................................................................A0.6
CELTIS 436 - M 3622 ......................................................................................................................................................A0.7
CELTIS 436 - M 3622 ......................................................................................................................................................A0.9
CELTIS 446 - M 3632 ....................................................................................................................................................A0.11
CURVE 1 RATED ENGINE SPEED 2 200 RPM ...........................................................................................................A0.11
CELTIS 446 - M 3632 ....................................................................................................................................................A0.13
CURVE 2 RATED ENGINE SPEED 2 350 RPM ...........................................................................................................A0.13
CELTIS 456 - M 3642 ....................................................................................................................................................A0.15
RATED ENGINE SPEED 2 200 RPM............................................................................................................................A0.15
A0 – CHECKING PROCEDURE AND MECHANICAL INJECTION

SHEETS
CHECKING PROCEDURE
LIST OF CHECKING OPERATIONS.............................................................................................................................A0.18
MEASUREMENT AND CHECKING POINTS

RECORD OF INSPECTION RESULTS.........................................................................................................................A0.23
APPENDIX
CHECKING THE HYDRAULIC PRESSURE .................................................................................................................A0.25
DYNAMIC ADJUSTMENT CHECK ...............................................................................................................................A0.27
MECHANICAL INJECTION SHEETS

CELTIS 426 - M 3612 ....................................................................................................................................................A0.33
CELTIS 436 - M 3622 ....................................................................................................................................................A0.35
CELTIS 446 - M 3632 ....................................................................................................................................................A0.37
Celtis 406 – 05.2005 – GB

A1 – INJECTION FEED
PRIMARY FILTER ...........................................................................................................................................................A1.3
FUEL FILTER ..................................................................................................................................................................A1.3
INJECTOR PUMP ...........................................................................................................................................................A1.4
INJECTORS ....................................................................................................................................................................A1.5
FUEL PUMP ....................................................................................................................................................................A1.6
SITUATION OF THE DIFFERENT SENSORS................................................................................................................A1.6
ACCELERATOR CONTROL ADJUSTMENT ..................................................................................................................A1.7
ENGINE INJECTOR D ADJUSTMENT ...........................................................................................................................A1.8
CRACKING PRESSURE ADJUSTMENT........................................................................................................................A1.8
NEEDLE STROKE ADJUSTMENT .................................................................................................................................A1.9
ENGINE INJECTOR T ADJUSTMENT............................................................................................................................A1.9
SUPPLY PRESSURE CHECK ......................................................................................................................................A1.10
FUEL FILTER REPLACEMENT ....................................................................................................................................A1.11
INJECTION SYSTEM BLEEDING.................................................................................................................................A1.11
INJECTION PUMP REMOVAL......................................................................................................................................A1.12
INJECTION PUMP INSTALLATION..............................................................................................................................A1.13
INJECTOR REMOVAL ..................................................................................................................................................A1.14
INJECTOR SEATING CLEANING (IF REQUIRED) ......................................................................................................A1.14
INJECTOR INSTALLATION ..........................................................................................................................................A1.14
SHEET N° 1 "ENGINE START-UP DEFECT" ...............................................................................................................A1.15
SHEET N° 2 "IRREGULAR ENGINE OPERATION" .....................................................................................................A1.16
SHEET N° 3 "GREY OR BLACK SMOKE EMISSION" .................................................................................................A1.17
SHEET N° 4 "WHITE SMOKE EMISSION" ...................................................................................................................A1.18
SHEET N° 5 "CHECK THE FUEL FEED CIRCUIT" ......................................................................................................A1.19
SHEET N° 6 "LACK OF POWER" .................................................................................................................................A1.20
A2 – DPS ENGINE
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS.........................................................................................................................................A2.2
IDENTIFICATION OF THE ENGINES.............................................................................................................................A2.2
ENGINES 4 CYLINDERS ................................................................................................................................................A2.3
DIMENSIONAL SPECIFICATIONS .................................................................................................................................A2.4
CYLINDER HEAD AND VALVES ....................................................................................................................................A2.4
CYLINDER HEAD AND VALVES ....................................................................................................................................A2.4
CYLINDER BLOCK .........................................................................................................................................................A2.6
LINERS AND PISTONS ..................................................................................................................................................A2.7
CONNECTING RODS .....................................................................................................................................................A2.8
CRANKSHAFT, BEARINGS AND FLYWHEEL...............................................................................................................A2.9
CAMSHAFT ...................................................................................................................................................................A2.10
ACCESSORY GEAR TRAIN .........................................................................................................................................A2.11
LUBRICATION...............................................................................................................................................................A2.12
OIL PUMP......................................................................................................................................................................A2.12
Celtis 406 – 05.2005 – GB

COOLING ......................................................................................................................................................................A2.13
THERMOSTAT ..............................................................................................................................................................A2.13
WATER PUMP AND FAN DRIVE SUPPORT ...............................................................................................................A2.13
TURBOCHARGER ........................................................................................................................................................A2.14
FRONT CHASSIS / ENGINE LINK................................................................................................................................A2.15
ENGINE/TRANSMISSION LINK....................................................................................................................................A2.15
TIGHTENING TORQUES..............................................................................................................................................A2.17
DISTRIBUTOR DIAGRAM.............................................................................................................................................A2.19
LUBRICATION SYSTEM...............................................................................................................................................A2.21
COOLING SYSTEM ......................................................................................................................................................A2.22
CHECKING COMPRESSION........................................................................................................................................A2.23
CHECK OF ENGINE OIL PRESSURE..........................................................................................................................A2.23
CHECK OF VALVE LIFT (ENGINE COLD) ...................................................................................................................A2.24
VALVE CLEARANCE (ENGINE COLD) ........................................................................................................................A2.24
VALVE ADJUSTMENT SEQUENCE.............................................................................................................................A2.25
CHECKING THE TURBOCHARGER PRESSURE .......................................................................................................A2.25
CHECK OF THE BELT AND THE TENSIONER SPRING ............................................................................................A2.25
PROCEDURE FOR CHECKING THE VISCOUS FAN COUPLING..............................................................................A2.27
PRELIMINARY OPERATIONS......................................................................................................................................A2.28
SEPARATE ENGINE/FRONT AXLE .............................................................................................................................A2.28
SEPARATE ENGINE/GEARBOX ..................................................................................................................................A2.29
ENGINE INSTALLATION SPECIFICATIONS ...............................................................................................................A2.31
CYLINDER HEAD..........................................................................................................................................................A2.32
CAMSHAFT ...................................................................................................................................................................A2.36
CYLINDER BLOCK .......................................................................................................................................................A2.37
LINERS..........................................................................................................................................................................A2.38
PISTONS AND CONNECTING RODS..........................................................................................................................A2.41
CRANKSHAFT, BEARINGS, AND FLYWHEEL............................................................................................................A2.47
CAMSHAFT, BALANCER SHAFTS AND DISTRIBUTOR ............................................................................................A2.56
LUBRICATION...............................................................................................................................................................A2.62
COOLING ......................................................................................................................................................................A2.67
TURBOCHARGER ........................................................................................................................................................A2.73
SHEET N° 1 "EXCESSIVE OIL CONSUMPTION" ........................................................................................................A2.74
INSPECTION PROCEDURE OF THE CYLINDER HEAD GASKET.............................................................................A2.75
SHEET N° 2 "ENGINE OIL PRESSURE TOO HIGH" ...................................................................................................A2.76
CHECKING PROCEDURE OF THE HIGH OIL PRESSURE IN THE CRANKCASE ....................................................A2.77
SHEET N° 3 "ENGINE OIL PRESSURE TOO LOW"....................................................................................................A2.78
SHEET N° 4 "COOLANT TEMPERATURE TOO HIGH"...............................................................................................A2.79
COOLANT TEMPERATURE TOO LOW .......................................................................................................................A2.80
FAILURE SEARCHING PROCEDURE OF CYLINDER HEAD SEAL...........................................................................A2.81
TOOLS
DPS ENGINE AND INJECTION FEED TOOLS ............................................................................................................A2.83
Celtis 406 – 05.2005 – GB

A0
ELECTRONIC INJECTION SHEETS
DPS 4045 DRT 70 engine
DPS 4045 TRT 70 engine
Celtis 406 – 05.2005 – GB

Notes
A0.2 Celtis 406 – 05.2005 – GB

INJECTION SHEET
CELTIS 426 - M 3612
DPS engine 4045 DRT 70 SUPPLY SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS
Curve 1 nominal engine speed 2,200 rpm
1 Fuel tank: 145 litres 5 Stanadyne rotary injection pump
type DE 10 DE 2435-5805.
2 Supply pump
Electronic regulation.
Flowrate measured at filter inlet: 1.5 l/min.
Pressure at tick-over speed at filter inlet: 0.15 bar. 6 Stanadyne conventional injectors
Pressure at nominal speed at filter inlet: 0.28 to 9.5-mm pencil (type 35541)
0.41 bar. Injector calibration pressure: 250 bar.
Pressure at nominal speed at filter outlet: 0.25 to
0.30 bar.
3 Primary fuel filter: 10 microns
4 Final fuel filter: 2 microns
DYNAMIC ADJUSTMENT
Electronic management
TEST CONDITIONS
To meet the requirements of the new noise and consumption standards, this type of engine is managed by two
engine curves.
Beyond 30 kph, the engine switches to the 2,350 rpm curve (curve 2), it is necessary to go below 25 kph to resume
curve 1.
Curve 1: nominal speed: 2,200 rpm
Measurement mode:
Supply system
– In order to measure curve 2, it is necessary to use Métadiag (see Métadiag notice in chapter G4).
Suction
– Max. engime speed off-load: to be checked with the rev counter before connecting the test bench.
Supply system
Supply pump pressure
– Reverser in neutral.
Discharge system
– Doubler: hare.
Return system – Hydraulic distributors in neutral.
– Transmission oil temperature: over 40°.
– Air conditioning stopped.

334A0001
– Carry out the measurements after 30 minutes’ operation of the engine at full load nominal speed.
60 05 029 684 - 10.2003 - EN

N A0.3
ENGINE TESTS AT PTO CELTIS 426 - M 3612
Curve 1 – 1,000 rpm position Curve 1
N:

32:(5 EKS

&859(,17(535(7$7,21 LQWHUPHGLDWH
(QJLQHVSHHG USP
3RZHUWDNHRIIVSHHG USP
N:
32:(5
EKS
72548(
1P
3RZHUWDNHRIIRXWSXW

&2168037,213(5+285 OK
JN:K

63(&,),&&2168037,21
JEKSK

USP 0D[LPXPWRUTXH 3RZHUWDNHRIIVWDQGDUGL]HGVSHHG 1RPLQDOHQJLQHVSHHG
1P 72548( PD[LPXPWRUTXH±QRPLQDOVSHHGWRUTX
7RUTXHIHHGEDFN [
QRPLQDOVSHHGWRUTXH
(1*,1(7(676$732:(57$.(2))

5HDU 3RZHU7DNHRII WRWDOUHGXFWLRQ
(QJLQH *HDUER[
D[OH 3RVLWLRQ 3RVLWLRQ(&2 3RVLWLRQ 3RVLWLRQ(&2
'57 % 3
63(('6 ,GOH 1RPLQDO 0D[QRORDG

3RZHU
USP (QJLQH 3RZHUWDNHRII (QJLQH (QJLQH 3RZHUWDNHRII
WDNHRII

Æ Æ Æ Æ
3RZHU
USP (&2 Æ Æ Æ Æ
WDNHRII
OK &2168037,213(5+285 Æ Æ Æ Æ
SRVLWLRQ

(&2
5()(5(1&(9$/8(63RZHU7DNHRIISRVLWLRQUSP
7ROHUDQFHVUHSUHVHQWHGLQWKHFXUYHV

(QJLQH USP
63(('
372 USP

N:
32:(5 0LQLPXP
EKS
72548(
USP
0LQLPXP 1P
SRZHUWDNHRIIRXWSXW
JN:K 63(&,),&&2168037,21 JEKSK
0LQLPXP OK
&2168037,213(5
+285
0D[LPXP OK
JN:K
63(&,),&
0D[LPXP
&2168037,21
JEKSK
7RUTXHDW3RZHUWDNHRIIRXWOHW 1P
3RZHU : WRUTXH 1P [VSHHG UDGV (TXLYDOHQWHQJLQHWRUTXH 1P
3RZHUWDNHRIIUHGXFWLRQ
+RXUO\FRQVXPSWLRQ OK [
,QMHFWLRQIORZ PP EKS N:
1XPEHURIHQJLQHF\OLQGHUV[HQJLQHVSHHG USP [
USP UDGV
+RXUO\FRQVXPSWLRQ OK [GLHVHOIXHOGHQVLW\ N: EKS
6SHFLILFFRQVXPSWLRQ
UDGV USP
JN:KRUJEKSK 3RZHU N:RUEKS
USP
A0.4 60 05 029 684 - 10.2003 - EN
INJECTION SHEET
CELTIS 426 - M 3612
type DE 10 DE 2435-5805.
2 Supply pump
Pressure at tick-over speed at filter inlet: 0.15 bar. 6 Stanadyne conventional injectors
0.30 bar.
DYNAMIC ADJUSTMENT
TEST CONDITIONS
engine curves.
curve 1.
Measurement mode:
Supply system
– In order to measure curve 2, it is necessary to use Métadiag (see Métadiag notice in chapter G4).
Suction
Supply system
Discharge system
– Doubler: hare.

334A0001
60 05 029 684 - 10.2003 - EN A0.5

N:

32:(5 EKS

&859(,17(535(7$7,21 LQWHUPHGLDWH
(QJLQHVSHHG USP
N:
32:(5
EKS
72548(
1P
3RZHUWDNHRIIRXWSXW

&2168037,213(5+285 OK
JN:K
63(&,),&&2168037,21
JEKSK

1P 72548(
PD[LPXPWRUTXH±QRPLQDOVSHHGWRUTX
7RUTXHIHHGEDFN
QRPLQDOVSHHGWRUTXH
[
(1*,1(7(676$732:(57$.(2))

(QJLQH *HDUER[
'57 % 3

3RZHU
WDNHRII
Æ Æ Æ Æ
3RZHU
USP (&2 Æ Æ Æ Æ
WDNHRII
OK &2168037,213(5+285 Æ Æ Æ Æ
SRVLWLRQ
(&2

(QJLQH USP
63(('
372 USP

N:
32:(5 0LQLPXP
EKS
72548(
USP 0LQLPXP 1P
SRZHUWDNHRIIRXWSXW
JN:K 63(&,),&&2168037,21 JEKSK
0LQLPXP OK
&2168037,213(5
+285
0D[LPXP OK

JN:K
63(&,),&
0D[LPXP
&2168037,21
JEKSK

USP UDGV
6SHFLILFFRQVXPSWLRQ
UDGV USP
USP
A0.6 60 05 029 684 - 10.2003 - EN
INJECTION SHEET
CELTIS 436 - M 3622
type DE 10 DE 2435-5805.
2 Supply pump
Pressure at tick-over speed at filter inlet: 0.15 bar. 6 Stanadyne staged-injection injectors
0.30 bar.
DYNAMIC ADJUSTMENT
TEST CONDITIONS
engine curves.
curve 1.
Measurement mode:
Supply system – In order to measure curve 2, it is necessary to use Métadiag (see Métadiag notice in chapter G4).
Suction
Supply system
Discharge system
– Doubler: hare.

334A0001
60 05 029 684 - 10.2003 - EN A0.7

N: 32:(5 EKS
&859(,17(535(7$7,21 LQWHUPHGLDWH

(QJLQHVSHHG USP
N:
32:(5
EKS

72548(
1P
3RZHUWDNHRIIRXWSXW
&2168037,213(5+285 OK

JN:K
63(&,),&&2168037,21
JEKSK

1P 72548( PD[LPXPWRUTXH±QRPLQDOVSHHGWRUTX
7RUTXHIHHGEDFN [
QRPLQDOVSHHGWRUTXH
(1*,1(7(676$732:(57$.(2))
(QJLQH *HDUER[
757 % 3

3RZHU
WDNHRII

Æ Æ Æ Æ
3RZHU
USP (&2 Æ Æ Æ Æ
WDNHRII
OK &2168037,213(5+285 Æ Æ Æ Æ
SRVLWLRQ

(&2

(QJLQH USP
63(('
372 USP

N:
32:(5 0LQLPXP
EKS
72548(
0LQLPXP 1P
USP SRZHUWDNHRIIRXWSXW
JN:K 63(&,),&&2168037,21 JEKSK
0LQLPXP OK
&2168037,213(5
+285
0D[LPXP OK
JN:K
63(&,),&
0D[LPXP
&2168037,21
JEKSK
USP UDGV
N: EKS
6SHFLILFFRQVXPSWLRQ +RXUO\FRQVXPSWLRQ OK [GLHVHOIXHOGHQVLW\
UDGV USP

USP
A0.8 60 05 029 684 - 10.2003 - EN
INJECTION SHEET
CELTIS 436 - M 3622
type DE 10 DE 2435-5805.
2 Supply pump
0.30 bar.
DYNAMIC ADJUSTMENT
TEST CONDITIONS
engine curves.
curve 1.
Measurement mode:
Suction
Supply system
Discharge system
– Doubler: hare.

334A0001
60 05 029 684 - 10.2003 - EN

N
N: 32:(5 EKS
&859(,17(535(7$7,21 LQWHUPHGLDWH

(QJLQHVSHHG USP

N:
32:(5

EKS
72548(
1P
3RZHUWDNHRIIRXWSXW
&2168037,213(5+285 OK
JN:K

63(&,),&&2168037,21

JEKSK
USP 1RPLQDOHQJLQHVSHHG
0D[LPXPWRUTXH 3RZHUWDNHRIIVWDQGDUGL]HGVSHHG
1P 72548(
7RUTXHIHHGEDFN
QRPLQDOVSHHGWRUTXH
[
(1*,1(7(676$732:(57$.(2))
(QJLQH *HDUER[
757 % 3


3RZHU
WDNHRII
Æ Æ Æ Æ
3RZHU
USP (&2 Æ Æ Æ Æ
WDNHRII
OK &2168037,213(5+285 Æ Æ Æ Æ
SRVLWLRQ
(&2

(QJLQH USP
63(('
372 USP

N:
32:(5 0LQLPXP
EKS
72548(
USP 0LQLPXP 1P
SRZHUWDNHRIIRXWSXW
JN:K 63(&,),&&2168037,21 JEKSK
0LQLPXP OK
&2168037,213(5
+285
0D[LPXP OK

JN:K
63(&,),&
0D[LPXP
&2168037,21
JEKSK

USP UDGV
6SHFLILFFRQVXPSWLRQ
UDGV USP
USP
A0.10 60 05 029 684 - 10.2003 - EN
INJECTION SHEET
CELTIS 446 - M 3632
type DE 10 DE 2435-5805.
2 Supply pump
0.30 bar.
DYNAMIC ADJUSTMENT
TEST CONDITIONS
engine curves.
curve 1.
Measurement mode:
Suction
Supply system
Discharge system
– Doubler: hare.

334A0001
60 05 029 684 - 10.2003 - EN A0.11

N: 32:(5 EKS
&859(,17(535(7$7,21 LQWHUPHGLDWH

(QJLQHVSHHG USP


N:

32:(5
EKS

72548(
1P
3RZHUWDNHRIIRXWSXW

&2168037,213(5+285 OK

JN:K

63(&,),&&2168037,21
JEKSK

USP 0D[LPXPWRUTXH 1RPLQDOHQJLQHVSHHG
3RZHUWDNHRIIVWDQGDUGL]HGVSHHG
1P 72548(
7RUTXHIHHGEDFN
QRPLQDOVSHHGWRUTXH
[

(1*,1(7(676$732:(57$.(2))
(QJLQH *HDUER[
757
% 3

3RZHU
WDNHRII
Æ Æ Æ Æ
3RZHU
USP (&2 Æ Æ Æ Æ
WDNHRII
OK &2168037,213(5+285 Æ Æ Æ Æ
SRVLWLRQ
(&2
(QJLQH USP
63(('
372 USP
N:

32:(5 0LQLPXP
EKS
72548(
USP 0LQLPXP 1P
SRZHUWDNHRIIRXWSXW
JN:K 63(&,),&&2168037,21 JEKSK
0LQLPXP OK
&2168037,213(5
+285
0D[LPXP OK

JN:K
63(&,),&
0D[LPXP
&2168037,21
JEKSK

USP UDGV
6SHFLILFFRQVXPSWLRQ
UDGV USP
USP
A0.12 60 05 029 684 - 10.2003 - EN
INJECTION SHEET
CELTIS 446 - M 3632
type DE 10 RE 518166 DE 2435-5805.
2 Supply pump
Pressure at tick-over speed at filter inlet: 0.15 bar. 6 Stanadyne injectors
9.5-mm pencil (type 35541RE 509896)
Injector calibration pressure: 250 bar.
DYNAMIC ADJUSTMENT
TEST CONDITIONS
engine curves.
curve 1.
Measurement mode:
Suction
Supply system
Supply pump pressure – Reverser in neutral.
Discharge system
– Doubler: hare.

334A0001
60 05 029 684 - 10.2003 - EN A0.13

N: 32:(5 EKS &859(,17(535(7$7,21 LQWHUPHGLDWH

(QJLQHVSHHG USP


N:

32:(5
EKS

72548(
1P
3RZHUWDNHRIIRXWSXW

&2168037,213(5+285 OK

JN:K

63(&,),&&2168037,21

JEKSK
USP 1RPLQDOHQJLQHVSHHG
0D[LPXPWRUTXH 3RZHUWDNHRIIVWDQGDUGL]HGVSHHG
1P 72548(
7RUTXHIHHGEDFN
QRPLQDOVSHHGWRUTXH
[
(1*,1(7(676$732:(57$.(2))
(QJLQH *HDUER[
757
% 3

3RZHU
WDNHRII
Æ Æ Æ Æ
3RZHU
USP (&2 Æ Æ Æ Æ
WDNHRII
OK &2168037,213(5+285 Æ Æ Æ Æ
SRVLWLRQ
(&2
(QJLQH USP
63(('
372 USP
N:

32:(5 0LQLPXP
EKS
72548(
USP SRZHUWDNHRIIRXWSXW
0LQLPXP 1P
JN:K 63(&,),&&2168037,21 JEKSK
0LQLPXP OK
&2168037,213(5
+285
0D[LPXP OK

JN:K
63(&,),&
0D[LPXP
&2168037,21
JEKSK

USP UDGV
6SHFLILFFRQVXPSWLRQ
UDGV USP
USP
A0.14 60 05 029 684 - 10.2003 - EN
INJECTION SHEET
CELTIS 456 - M 3642
Nominal engine speed 2,200 rpm
type DE 10 DE 2435-5805.
2 Supply pump
0.30 bar.
DYNAMIC ADJUSTMENT
TEST CONDITIONS
– Max. engine speed off-load: to be checked with the rev counter before connecting the test bench.
– Doubler: hare.
Supply system – Hydraulic distributors in neutral.

Suction
Supply system
Supply pump pressure – Air conditioning stopped.
Discharge system – Carry out the measurements after 30 minutes’ operation of the engine at full load nominal speed.
Return system
334A0001
60 05 029 684 - 10.2003 - EN A0.15

1,000 rpm position
N: 32:(5 EKS
&859(,17(535(7$7,21 LQWHUPHGLDWH

(QJLQHVSHHG USP


N:
32:(5
EKS

72548(
1P
3RZHUWDNHRIIRXWSXW

&2168037,213(5+285 OK

JN:K
63(&,),&&2168037,21
JEKSK

USP 0D[LPXPWRUTXH 1RPLQDOHQJLQHVSHHG
3RZHUWDNHRIIVWDQGDUGL]HGVSHHG
1P 72548(
7RUTXHIHHGEDFN
QRPLQDOVSHHGWRUTXH
[

(1*,1(7(676$732:(57$.(2))
(QJLQH *HDUER[
757 % 3

3RZHU
WDNHRII
Æ Æ Æ Æ
3RZHU
USP (&2 Æ Æ Æ Æ
WDNHRII
OK &2168037,213(5+285 Æ Æ Æ Æ
SRVLWLRQ
(&2
(QJLQH USP
63(('
372 USP
N:

32:(5 0LQLPXP
EKS
72548(
USP 0LQLPXP 1P
SRZHUWDNHRIIRXWSXW
JN:K 63(&,),&&2168037,21 JEKSK
0LQLPXP OK
&2168037,213(5
+285
0D[LPXP OK

JN:K
63(&,),&
0D[LPXP
&2168037,21
JEKSK

USP UDGV
6SHFLILFFRQVXPSWLRQ
UDGV USP
USP
A0.16 60 05 029 684 - 10.2003 - EN
A0
CHECKING PROCEDURE
MECHANICAL INJECTION SHEETS
Celtis 406 – 05.2005 – GB

Checking procedure
List of checking operations

The purpose of this procedure is to check a number of points before and after measuring on the power bench.
N.B.: Failing to carry out these tests may lead to an incorrect power reading.
Always check the following points before starting a PTO power test.
Reminder: Wait until the running-in period has elapsed (minimum 100 hours) before testing an engine on the power bench.
This period is necessary to ensure that measuring is carried out under the right conditions.
1. Visual checks
Make sure that the supply and return circuit lines are
correctly fitted (not trapped or kinked on fitting, etc.).
2. Engine oil level G

G
Check the oil level with dipstick (G):
I Normal operating level.
II Top up as soon as possible.
III Top up before restarting the engine.
ll
llll
lll
lll
111bsm00r Fig. 1
3. Hydraulic /transmission oil level

Check the oil level with dipstick (C):
I Normal operating level.
II Top up as soon as possible.
III Top up before restarting the engine.
A level above the normal operating level affects engine C
power and increases temperature. Example: Overfilling
will greatly affect performance in road transport at high
speed.
l
ll
lll
344bsn01 Fig. 2
A0.18 Celtis 406 – 05.2005 – GB

Checking procedure
4. Battery
Check the voltage with the engine off (between 12 and 13 V). Alternator-generated power consumption can reach 1,5 kW.
5. Radiators/coolers
Check that all radiators/coolers are clean.
6. Diesel filters
Change the filters. Fit the pressure gauge. Unit reference:
60 05 005 521. See "measurement and checking points"
sheet.
161msm14 Fig. 3
161msm00r Fig. 4
7. Air filter
Check condition and replace if necessary.
Celtis 406 – 05.2005 – GB A0.19

Checking procedure
8. Turbocharger pressure
Fit the pressure gauge.
Unit reference: 60 05 005 521.
See "measurement and checking points" sheet.
141msm03r Fig. 5
141msm02 Fig. 6
9. Hydraulic pressure
Fit the pressure gauge(s). See appendix for pressure connections.
A0.20 Celtis 406 – 05.2005 – GB

Checking procedure
10. Fit the dynamometer

Before starting the test, ensure that:
– The bench is correctly adjusted and calibrated.
– The universal joint is aligned, attached and protected.
– The tractor is chocked.
Place the tractor in an unenclosed

location.
002msm01 Fig.002 7
11. Range shift/reverser position (according to equipment)

To limit transmission power take-off make sure that the reverser is in neutral and the range shift in the high (hare) position.
12. Air conditioning/Ventilation

Make sure that the air conditioning and ventilation are switched off.
13. Front power take-off

Make sure that the front power take-off is disengaged.
14. Fastening the viscous fan coupling

To obtain the best possible measurement, the viscous fan
coupling must be engaged. Fit locking tabs (1), reference
n° 60 05 005 589.
– Remove the 4 nuts.
– Fit the 2 tabs.
– Fasten them with 4 nuts.
1
101hsm00r Fig. 8
Celtis 406 – 05.2005 – GB A0.21

Checking procedure
15. Checking the hydraulic pressure

Check hydraulic pressure by referring to the appendix. Make sure that no hydraulic application is running. If hydraulic
pressure is not within the specifications, the PTO power test results will be affected. See "measurement and checking
points" sheet.
16. Check the maximum off-load speed

Celtis 426/436/446: 2 490 ± 50.
17. Dynamic adjustment check

See appendix for pump adjustment.
18. Engage the PTO at the 1 000 rpm position

19. Set the engine to maximum speed for 1 min
20. Measure the power (see injection sheet)
21. After measuring, check the tractor temperature
Engine: 90°C.
Transmission: 60-65°C (measure the temperature via the gauge well with thermocouple probe n° 60 05 006 708).
22. Leave the engine running between 1 500 and 1 600 rpm for 3 to 5 minutes, then idle before
switching off
If the results do not match the manufacturer's data following these operations, a flowmeter will need to be installed and the
values compared to the injection sheets.
A0.22 Celtis 406 – 05.2005 – GB

Measurement and checking points
This sheet is intended to be duplicated and completed for each operation on the tractor. If you have to send it to the
manufacturer's after sales service, it is essential to indicate:
Tractor type: ...........................................................................................................................................................................
Serial n°: ................................................................................................................................................................................
Engine serial n°: .....................................................................................................................................................................
Total operating hours: ............................................................................................................................................................
Date of operation: ..................................................................................................................................................................
Transmission type: .................................................................................................................................................................
Checking operations
Concerns operations 2, 3, 4, 6, 7.
Checking operation Check

Oil level
Air filter
Engine
Diesel filter
Battery (V)
Transmission Oil level
Record of inspection results

Start of test End of test Reference values (bar)
Hydraulic pressure
(circuit without "Revershift" transmission)
See appendix
Hydraulic pressure
(circuit with "Revershift" transmission)
Outside temperature —
Transmission temperature 60°C ß 65°C
Engine temperature > 87°C
Diesel temperature
Celtis 406 – 05.2005 – GB A0.23

Measurement and checking points
Engine speed 900 1 000 1 100 1 200 1 300 1 400 1 500 1 600 1 800 2 000 2 100 2 200 2 300
Measurement of power (kW)

Measurement of torque (Nm)
(power take-off)
Measurement of hourly consumption
(l/h)
Measurement of boost pressure
(bar)
Measurement of minimum no-load
diesel supply pressure at filter outlet
(bar)
Boost pressure (bar)
— — — — — — — — — — — — —
Celtis 426
0,17 0,20 0,22 0,25 0,33 0,39 0,43 0,48 0,56 0,60 0,63 0,63 0,66
Celtis 436
0,20 0,20 0,23 0,27 0,34 0,41 0,45 0,50 0,59 0,62 0,65 0,69 0,72
Celtis 446
Minimum no-load diesel supply
0,15 ß 0,21
pressure at filter outlet (bar)
A0.24 Celtis 406 – 05.2005 – GB

Appendix
Checking the hydraulic pressure

Circuit without "Revershift" transmission
1
2
396bsm00r Fig. 9
Nomenclature
1 Steering circuit pressure (engine speed 2 200 rpm) = 175 bar 2 Lift circuit pressure = 180 bar (engine speed 2 200 rpm).
for tractor with front axle 20.19 and 145 for the others.
Celtis 406 – 05.2005 – GB A0.25

Appendix
Circuit with "Revershift" transmission
2
1
396bsm01r Fig. 10
Nomenclature
1 Steeering and lift circuit pressure = 180 bar, flow rate 48 l/min 2 Control pressure = 20,5 bar (engine speed 2 200 rpm).
or 60 l/min (engine speed 2 200 rpm).
A0.26 Celtis 406 – 05.2005 – GB

Appendix
Dynamic adjustment check

The TIME-TRAC kit (1), n° 60 05 005 530 electronically
checks the start of injection in relation to the top dead
centre (TDC) of the piston, enabling accurate adjustment
of the injection pump to achieve optimum power whilst
keeping exhaust gas emissions to a minimum. 1
The dynamic adjustment check is performed using 2

probes:
– One probe is located on No. 1 injection pipe, to indicate
the start of injection for the cylinder concerned,.
– The second probe is located on the engine flywheel
casing and accurately transmits the piston top dead
centre position (TDC).
These 2 probes are connected to a test set. The combined
signals from these probes provide an instantaneous and
accurate display of the DYNAMIC ENGINE
ADJUSTMENT.
891msm00r Fig. 11
Celtis 406 – 05.2005 – GB A0.27

Appendix
Installation of the TIME-TRAC kit

Important: The probe which senses the start of
injection should be installed on the injection pipe
adjacent to the injector. If access to injection pipe No.
1 is difficult, the probe may be mounted on injection
pipe No. 4 (4-cylinder engines) or No. 6 (6-cylinder
engines).
Two types of probe may be used on the engine in order to
detect the start of injection:
– A 6-mm dia. clip-on probe (A).
– An in-line probe (B).
1. To install the clip-on probe (A), strip all the paint from
the injection pipe at the position where the probe is to be
fitted.
2. Mount the probe (A) on the pipe (C)after cleaning it and
stripping all the paint off. 891msm01r Fig. 12
3. Tighten the probe and check it firmly grips the injection

pipe (C).
4. For engines where the in-line probe (B) is installed
between the injector and the injection pipe, mount the
stirrup (D).
5. Install the harness (E).
– Connect pin (F) to the probes (A) or (B) employed.
– Connect the spring clip (G) to ground.
– Connect plug (H) on harness (E) to the test set in the
socket marked (SR).
891msm02r Fig. 13
A0.28 Celtis 406 – 05.2005 – GB

Appendix
6. Insert adjustment pin No. 60 05 005 500 into the hole

(J) in the engine flywheel casing to ensure the engine IS
NOT stopped in the TDC position. If such were the case,
the probe (K) could enter the adjustment hole on the
engine flywheel and would then be damaged when the
engine starts.
7. Install the probe guide (M) in the engine flywheel casing
(J) tapping it lightly in order to lock it in position.
8. Insert probe (K) into the guide until it contacts the
engine flywheel. Using a dial gauge, draw back probe (K)
by 0,64 mm relative to the engine flywheel.
9. Connect plug (N) for probe (K) to the socket on the test-
set marked (MP).
891msm03r Fig. 14
891msm04r Fig. 15
Celtis 406 – 05.2005 – GB A0.29

Appendix
Checking the injection pump dynamic

adjustment
1. Engine off. Press the "ON/CLEAR" push-button (ON/
CLEAR).
The display should indicate: "R = 0".
2. Press the "MAG PROBE".
The display should indicate: "Trig level" (trigger level)
30 %.
3. Change this to 70 % and press "ENTER".
The display should indicate: "Offset": 20.0°.
4. Change the offset to 0° and press "ENTER".
The display should indicate: "Calibrate"
891msm05r Fig. 16
5. Start the engine and press "ENTER".
6. Run the engine at 1300 rpm. Press "ENTER".
The display should indicate: "Calilbrating" followed by
engine speed (rpm) and adjustment.
N.B.: If the display indicates «NO PROBE», this
means that the probe mounted on the engine flywheel
casing is not properly installed (the mounting
distance is greater than 0,64 mm) or that some debris
is lodged behind the engine flywheel. Check that the
mounting distance is correct or clean behind the
engine flywheel. Insert a soft wooden peg into the
engine adjustment pin hole whilst the engine is
ticking over.
891msm06r Fig. 17
7. Allow the engine to reach its normal operating
temperature.
891msm07r Fig. 18
891msm08r Fig. 19
A0.30 Celtis 406 – 05.2005 – GB

Appendix
8. Run the engine at maximum speed then gradually apply

a load until it reaches nominal speed.
Read the dynamic adjustment value and compare this
with the value provided in the specifications on the
injection sheet.
N.B.: A fluctuating value indicates that the signal from
the clip-on probe is poor. Check the probe and the
pipes are clean and that the installation is correct.
9. Record the engine speed (rpm) and the adjustment
angle.
Important: Stop the engine before attempting to set
the adjustment. There is a risk of the injection pump
seizing if the setting is performed whilst the engine is
running.
10. Stop the engine.
If the dynamic adjustment is retarded by more than 8
degrees in relation to the adjustment marks applied at the 891msm09r Fig. 20
manufacturer's, prior to delivery, on the pump flange and

on the front plate, this may indicate that the advance on
the pump is not functioning correctly. Check the following
points:
– Replace the fuel filter.
– Check the pressure between the supply pump and the
injection pump.
– If none of the above checks provides conclusive
results, remove the pump and have it repaired in an
approved diesel engine repair workshop.
Celtis 406 – 05.2005 – GB A0.31

Appendix
Setting the dynamic adjustment of the rotary

injection pump
1. Loosen the nuts (1) on the injection pump attachment
flange and set the pump adjustment. To advance the
pump adjustment, turn it clockwise (2) as viewed from the
rear of the tractor. To retard the adjustment, turn it anti-
clockwise (3). A 1,524 mm displacement of the injection
pump flange is equivalent to 2 degrees of engine
adjustment.
2. Torque tighten the pump attachment collar-nuts to
2,7 daN.m. Start the engine and check again the dynamic
adjustment of the injection pump. Set the adjustment as
required.
3. After completing all the final settings and achieving
satisfactory engine performance, grind away the original
adjustment mark and scribe a new mark (B) on the pump
flange, in line with mark (A) on the front plate.
891msm10r Fig. 21
891msm11r Fig. 22
A0.32 Celtis 406 – 05.2005 – GB

FICHE INJECTION
CELTIS 426 - M 3612
DPS 4045 DRT 76 engine FUEL SUPPLY LINE DATA
Nominal speed 2 300 rpm
1 Main fuel tank: 145 litres 5 Stanadyne rotary injection pump
type DB2-5930.
2 Filter : 150 microns
Mechanical adjustment all ratios.
3 Mechanical supply pumps. Automatic advance.
4 Fuel filter: 5 microns 6 Stanadyne injectors
9.5 mm holder body (type 36011/RE519569)
Set pressure on injector:
241 ± 5 bar.
DYNAMIC TIMING
Refer to check procedure for dynamic setting, at annex.
Dynamic setting: 2.5 (at nominal rpm, max loading).
5
1
4 2
TEST CONDITIONS
– Refer to inspection procedure.
NOTE
– Reference values: measurements made on a tractor, with central hydraulic system open at 62 l/min, fitted with
pneumatic brakes and air conditioning, at an ambient temperature of 25 C with the viscous clutch locked.
Supply system
Suction
Supply system
Discharge line
Return line
162msm03r
Celtis 406 – 05.2005 – EN A0.33

ENGINE TESTS AT PTO
CELTIS 426 – M 3612
Position 540 rpm
kW POWER bhp
40 54
REFERENCE VALUES - Power Take-off position 540 rpm
Engine
1000 1200 1400 1600 1800 2000 2100 2200 2300
35 47 (rpm)
SPEED
PTO
256 307 358 409 460 512 537 563 588
(rpm)
30 41 kW 22.5 24.9 31.3 33.8 35.4 36.5 36.2 35.9 35.7

POWER *
bhp 30.6 33.9 42.6 46.0 48.1 49.6 49.2 48.8 48.5
25 34
TORQUE **
N.m 840 774 833 790 735 680 645 610 579
(pow er take-off output)
20 27
1000 1200 1400 1600 1800 2000 2200 rpm CONSUMPTION PER HOUR l/h 7.3 8.2 10.7 12.1 13.2 14.1 14.7 15.2 15.7
N.m TORQUE
850 g/kW.h 276 284 294 308 321 332 347 362 378
SPECIFIC CONSUMPTION ***
800 g/bhp.h 203 209 216 227 236 244 255 266 278
750
POWER TO BE ADDED TO REFERENCE VALUES

700
Engine
OPTIONS 1000 1200 1400 1600 1800 2000 2100 2200 2300
(rpm)
650
Without air conditioning 0.19 0.47 0.75 1.03 1.31 1.59 1.73 1.87 2.00
600
Without pneumatic
0.39 0.57 0.75 0.93 1.11 1.29 1.38 1.47 1.56
550 braking
kW
1000 1200 1400 1600 1800 2000 2200 rpm With central system
l/h CONSUMPTION PER HOUR open 50 l/min (nominal 0.25 0.36 0.49 0.63 0.80 0.99 1.09 1.20 1.31
rpm)
16
14 ENGINE TESTS AT POWER TAKE-OFF

Pow er Take-off (total reduction)
12 Engine Gearbox Rear axle
Position 540 Position 540 ECO Position 1000 Position 1000 ECO
10 4045 DRT 76 B41 P11 3.91 3.08 2.12 -
8 SPEEDS Idle Nominal Max no load

Pow er
(rpm) Engine Pow er take-off Engine Engine Pow er take-off
6 take-off
1000 1200 1400 1600 1800 2000 2200 rpm 540 800 Æ 900 205 Æ 230 2300 588 2440 Æ 2540 624 Æ 650
g/kW.h SPECIFIC CONSUMPTION g/bhp.h
Pow er take-off 540 ECO 800 Æ 900 260 Æ 292 2300 747 2440 Æ 2540 793 Æ 825
380 279
position 1000 800 Æ 900 378 Æ 425 2300 1086 2440 Æ 2540 1152 Æ 1199
370 272
360 265
1000 ECO 800 Æ 900 - Æ - 2300 - 2440 Æ 2540 - Æ -
350 257
340 250 Torque at P o wer take-o ff o utlet (N.m)
* P o wer (W) = torque (N.m) x speed (rad/s) ** Equivalent engine to rque (N.m) =
P ower take-off reduction
330 243
Ho urly co nsumption (l/h) x 1000 000
320 235 Injector flo w (mm³/sho t) =
Number of engine cylinders x engine speed(rpm) x 30 1bhp = 0.7355 kW
310 228 1rpm = 0.1047 rad/s
1kW = 1.3596 bhp
300 221 *** Specific co nsumptio n Hourly consumptio n (l/h) x diesel fuel density (0.840) 1rad/s = 9.5510 rpm
(g/kW.h o r g/bhp,h) = P ower (kW o r bhp)
290 213
280 206
maximum to rque – no minal speed to rque
270 199 Torque feedback (%) = x 100
no minal speed torque
1000 1200 1400 1600 1800 2000 2200 rpm
A0.34 Celtis 406 – 05.2005 – EN

FICHE INJECTION
CELTIS 436 – M 3622
DPS 4045 TRT 77 engine FUEL SUPPLY LINE DATA
type DB4-5929.
245 ± 5 bar.
DYNAMIC TIMING
Dynamic setting: – 0,3 (at nominal rpm, max loading).
5
1
4 2
TEST CONDITIONS
NOTE
Supply system
Suction
Supply system
Discharge line
Return line
162msm03r
Celtis 406 – 05.2005 – EN A0.35

ENGINE TESTS AT PTO
CELTIS 436 – M 3622
Position 540 ECO rpm
kW POWER bhp
50 68
REFERENCE VALUES - Power Take-off position 540 ECO rpm
45 Engine
61 1000 1200 1400 1600 1800 2000 2100 2200 2300
(rpm)
SPEED
PTO
40 54
325 390 455 520 585 650 682 715 747
(rpm)
kW 26.3 30.0 39.4 42.5 44.6 43.3 42.5 41.9 40.8

35 48 POWER *
bhp 35.8 40.8 53.6 57.8 60.6 58.9 57.8 57.0 55.5
30 41
TORQUE **
N.m 773 736 828 779 726 637 594 560 520
25 34
N.m TORQUE
850
g/kW.h 272 276 273 285 299 320 330 340 349
800 SPECIFIC CONSUMPTION ***
g/bhp.h 200 203 201 210 220 235 243 250 257
750
700
650 Engine
OPTIONS 1000 1200 1400 1600 1800 2000 2100 2200 2300
(rpm)
600
550
Without pneumatic
0.39 0.57 0.75 0.93 1.11 1.29 1.38 1.47 1.56
500 braking
kW
1000 1200 1400 1600 1800 2000 2200 rpm
With central system
18
rpm)
16
ENGINE TESTS AT POWER TAKE-OFF
14
Engine Gearbox Rear axle
Position 540 Position 540 ECO Position 1000 Position 1000 ECO
12
4045 TRT 77 B41 P11 3.91 3.08 2.12 -
10 Idle Nominal Max no load

SPEEDS
Pow er
8 take-off
1000 1200 1400 1600 1800 2000 2200 rpm
540 800 Æ 900 205 Æ 230 2300 588 2440 Æ 2540 624 Æ 650
350 257
position 1000 800 Æ 900 378 Æ 425 2300 1086 2440 Æ 2540 1152 Æ 1199
340 250
1000 ECO 800 Æ 900 - Æ - 2300 - 2440 Æ 2540 - Æ -
330 242

310 228 Ho urly co nsumption (l/h) x 1000 000
Injector flo w (mm³/sho t) =
300 220 1rpm = 0.1047 rad/s
1kW = 1.3596 bhp
290 213 *** Specific co nsumptio n Hourly consumptio n (l/h) x diesel fuel density (0.840) 1rad/s = 9.5510 rpm
280 206
1000 1200 1400 1600 1800 2000 2200 rpm
A0.36 Celtis 406 – 05.2005 – EN

FICHE INJECTION
CELTIS 446 – M 3632
DPS 4045 TRT 78 engine FUEL SUPPLY LINE DATA
type DB4-5928.
245 ± 5 bar.
DYNAMIC TIMING
Dynamic setting: 2.5 (at nominal rpm, max loading).
5
1
4 2
TEST CONDITIONS
NOTE
Supply system
Suction
Supply system
Discharge line
Return line
162msm03r
Celtis 406 – 05.2005 – EN A0.37

ENGINE TESTS AT PTO
CELTIS 446 – M 3632
Position 1 000 rpm
kW POWER bhp
55 75
REFERENCE VALUES - Power Take-off position 1 000 rpm
50 68 Engine
1000 1200 1400 1600 1800 2000 2100 2200 2300
(rpm)
SPEED
45 61 PTO
472 567 661 755 850 944 992 1039 1086
(rpm)
40 54 kW 28.2 33.5 42.5 46.4 49.0 49.9 49.0 47.6 45.1

POWER *
35 48 bhp 38.3 45.5 57.8 63.1 66.6 67.8 66.6 64.7 61.3
30 41 TORQUE **
N.m 570 563 614 587 551 504 472 436 396
25 34
N.m TORQUE
650 g/kW.h 265 269 272 280 286 293 302 315 333
SPECIFIC CONSUMPTION ***
600 g/bhp.h 195 198 200 206 210 216 222 232 245
550

500
Engine
OPTIONS 1000 1200 1400 1600 1800 2000 2100 2200 2300
(rpm)
450
400
Without pneumatic
0.39 0.57 0.75 0.93 1.11 1.29 1.38 1.47 1.56
350 braking
kW
1000 1200 1400 1600 1800 2000 2200 rpm With central system
20 rpm)
18
16
ENGINE TESTS AT POWER TAKE-OFF
Engine Gearbox Rear axle
14 Position 540 Position 540 ECO Position 1 000 Position 1000 ECO
12 4045 TRT 78 B41 P11 3.91 3.08 2.12 -
10 SPEEDS Idle Nominal Max no load

Pow er
8 take-off
1000 1200 1400 1600 1800 2000 2200 rpm 540 800 Æ 900 205 Æ 230 2300 588 2440 Æ 2540 624 Æ 650
340 250
position 1000 800 Æ 900 378 Æ 425 2300 1086 2440 Æ 2540 1152 Æ 1199
330 243 1000 ECO 800 Æ 900 - Æ - 2300 - 2440 Æ 2540 - Æ -
320 235

300 221 Ho urly co nsumption (l/h) x 1000 000
Injector flo w (mm³/sho t) =
290 213 1rpm = 0.1047 rad/s
1kW = 1.3596 bhp
*** Specific co nsumptio n Hourly consumptio n (l/h) x diesel fuel density (0.840) 1rad/s = 9.5510 rpm
280 206
270 199
1000 1200 1400 1600 1800 2000 2200 rpm
A0.38 Celtis 406 – 05.2005 – EN

A1 – SUPPLY - INJECTION
DPS engine 4045 DRT 70
DPS engine 4045 TRT 70

Tightening torques
334A1001 Fig. 1
A1.2 60 05MR
029 684
334 - 10.2003– -EN
– 02.2003 EN
Description
Pre-filter
Filters: 149 microns
334A1002 Fig. 2
Fuel filter
Description
1 Fuel outlet 3 Drain screw
2 Fuel inlet 4 Filter
1 2 1 2
3 3
Final filter Primary filter

334A1003 Fig. 3
60 05MR
029 684
334 - 10.2003– -EN
– 02.2003 EN A1.3
Description
Injection pump
Stanadyne injection pump (DE 10)
334A1004 Fig. 4
Description
A Fuel inlet F Fuel control solenoid valve
B Drive shaft G Pump distributor
C Transfer pump H Distributor rotor
D Cam ring I Fuel temperature sensor
E Pipe fitting for injector J Fuel return
A1.4 60 05MR
029 684
334 - 10.2003– -EN
– 02.2003 EN
Description
Injectors
T engine D engine
12 23
14
15
16
13 15
12
14 13
16
10 17
11 18
19 21 22 19 21 22
10
9
9
7 5
20 6 20
4 5 6
8 8
4
3
3
2
2
1
334A1005 Fig. 5
Description 12 Stroke adjustment screw

1 Injector nozzle 13 Locknut
2 Carbon deposit arrestor seal 14 T-union
3 Needle 15 Locknut
4 Injector body 16 Pressure adjustment screw
5 Seal 17 Nut
6 Injection pipe coupling 18 Seal
7 Needle guide 19 Clamp
8 Union nut 20 Double cone
9 Spring retainer 21 Filter basket
10 Adjustable spring 22 Injection pipe
11 Spacer 23 Cap
60 05MR
029 684
334 - 10.2003– -EN
– 02.2003 EN A1. 5
Description
Supply pump
Blank off inlet and outlet pipes as soon as they are
disconnected, as well as the pump ports. In the same way, as
soon as the pump has been disassembled, blank off the opening
on the engine casing and on the pump. Do not forget the O-ring
on the pump supporting face at re-assembly.
Bleed the system.
3 daN.m
334A1006 Fig. 6
Position of the various sensors

Description
A 1.5-daN.m oil pressure sensor E 1.3 to 1.8-daN.m fuel temperature sensor
B Pump control solenoid valve F 1.5-daN.m engine cooling fluid temperature sensor
C Engine control unit G 1.0-daN.m manifold air temperature sensor
D 1.4-daN.m crankshaft position sensor
B
A
334A1007 Fig. 7
A1.6 60 05MR
029 684
334 - 10.2003– -EN
– 02.2003 EN
Checks - Adjustments
Accelerator control adjustment

1 Position the accelerator hand lever in contact with the 6 Install the potentiometer (G) in mid-position between the
tick-over stop (A). Secure the cable on the lever and lock the two oblong openings.
locknut on the cab floor. Make sure there is no interference
7 Finalise adjustment by rotating the potentiometer until
with the cab fittings.
obtaining the following values:
2 Adjustment of the upper stop (tick-over) on the accelerator – pedal up (at tick-over stop): 0.9V maximum,
pedal: – pedal fullly down: 3.1V minimum.
Adjust the screw (B) to obtain an overshoot of 16 mm from the Voltage measurement to be performed ignition on.
latter. Lock the locknut (C). Use cable P/N 60 05 005 577 to measure the output voltage.
3 Install the cable and secure it with the nut (D) after installing
the spring (E). Make sure the accelerator hand lever is still in
contact with the stop.
4 Pedal installation: Note: The pedal is immobilised on a tapered surface. For di-
Install a 55-mm shim on the cab floor mat (it must rest on several sassembly, use an M10 screw (an M10 thread has been tap-
undulations of the floor mat). Position the pedal along its axis, ped to that effect in the pedal body) with the thread initial
resting on the shim, and torque tighten the screw (F) to chamfer removed to obtain a flat supporting face on the pin.
3.2 daN.m.
5 Check the travel of the pedal and the accelerator lever (no
interferences).
Supporting face of the

tick-over screw head
B
16 mm
F
E
A D
C
Tick-over screw
B
334A1008 Fig. 8
60 05MR
029 684
334 - 10.2003– -EN
– 02.2003 EN A1.7
To assemble/disassemble the injectors, imperatively use tool

P/N 60 05 005 503.
D engine injector adjustment
Preliminary operations
1 Clamp the injector in a vice and loosen the locknut (A).
2 Then back off the needle lifting adjustment screw (B) by 3
turns.
3 Loosen the locknut (C).
4 Connect the injector to the calibration unit, inclining it at
about 30° from the vertical. Check the sealing at all the con-
nections.
5 Close the valve on pressure gauge and quickly pump several 334A1009 Fig. 9
strokes in order to bleed the injector, and for the needle to posi-
tion itself.
CAUTION: The injector nozzle must never be pointing towards
the person performing the adjustment. The jet escaping from a
port can pierce clothing and skin, and cause serious infec-
tions. It is recommended to contain the jet within a transparent
container.
Cracking pressure adjustment

Note: It is recommended to aim for the maximum rather than
the minimum value as, after some time operation, there is a
slight pressure loss before it stabilises. Repeat the adjust-
ment in order to obtain a reliable result.
Open the valve on the calibration unit and, whilst operating the D
pump, tighten or loosen the cracking pressure adjustment
C
screw (D) until obtaining the correct pressure (refer to ‘Injec-
tion sheets’).
To increase the pressure, tighten the screw. Close the valve E
and quickly operate the pump several times to open and close
the injector needle. Open the valve and check the cracking
pressure; correct it if necessary.
Torque tighten the locknut (C) to 1 daN.m.
334A1010 Fig. 10
A1.8 60 05MR
029 684
334 - 10.2003– -EN
– 02.2003 EN
Needle stroke adjustment

Carefully screw in the stroke adjustment screw (B) inside
screw (D) until screw (B) contacts the needle (E). Check as
follows:
– Increase the pressure beyond the cracking pressure, a few
drops of fuel may leak out, but this flow must remain limited.
– Loosen the screw (B) by 3/4 turn to achieve a correct stroke
of the needle. 334A1022 Fig. 22
– Torque-tighten the locknut (A) to 0.5 daN.m, whilst firmly
holding the screw.
– Perform another accurate cracking pressure adjustment.
Note: If after cleaning and servicing operations, the characte-
ristic hissing noise is not heard, it is possible that the injector
parts are incorrectly aligned. In such a case, tighten and loo-
sen the pressure adjustment screw (D) several times and
again adjust the needle stroke, as described above. D
C
Disconnect the injector from the calibration unit and fit the
protection cap. E
T engine injector adjustment
To assemble/disassemble the injectors, imperatively use tool P/

N 60 05 005 503.
– Unscrew the protection cap (F). 334A1023 Fig. 23
– Loosen and remove the locknut (A) from the needle lifting
adjustment screw.
– Loosen and remove the locknut (C) from the injection pressure B F
adjustment screw; use tool P/N 60 05 005 574.
– Connect the injector to the tester then adjust the pressure A 0,5 daN.m
D
to the specified value by turning the pressure adjustment
screw(D).
C 1 daN.m
– Tighten the locknut (C) and check the pressure.
Readjust if required.
CAUTION: it is recommended to aim for the maximum rather
than the minimum value as, after some time operation, there is
a slight pressure loss before it stabilises. Repeat the adjust-
ment to obtain a reliable result.
E
– Carefully screw in the needle lifting adjustment screw (B) until
it contacts the spring seat (E).
– Back off the needle lifting adjustment screw by
7/8 turns.
– Torque tighten the locknut (A).
CAUTION: The injector nozzle must never be pointing towards
the person performing the adjustment. The jet escaping from a
port can pierce clothing and skin, and cause serious infec-
tions. It is recommended to contain the jet within a transparent
container.
334A1024 Fig. 24
60 05MR
029 684
334 - 10.2003– -EN
– 02.2003 EN A1.9
Supply pressure check

1 Install the tool (1) P/N 60 05 005 521.
2 Start the engine. The fuel pump must maintain the mini- Outlet Inlet
mum pressure below. If the pressure is low, replace the filters
and repeat the check.
Pressures and flowrates (see injection sheets, chapter A0).
Primary filter
1
Outlet Inlet
334A1012 Final filter Fig. 12
A1.10 60 05MR
029 684
334 - 10.2003– -EN
– 02.2003 EN
Removal/installation
Fuel filter replacement

To replace the fuel filter:
1 Loosen the retaining ring (A) and remove the filter body
(B).
A
2 Recover the retaining ring and the install it on the new
filter.
B
3 Install the new filter, taking care to align the markings on
the filter with the slots in the filter head unit base.
4 Tighten the retaining ring (A) until it locks.
5 Bleed the fuel filter.
Note: Correct positioning of the retaining ring is achieved
when a relaxation is felt during tightening.
Replace both at the same time. Locator on cartridge and filter 334A1013 Fig. 13
(no possibility of reverse mounting).
Injection system bleeding
1st case
After replacing the fuel filter
1 Loosen the bleed screw located on the filter head front.
2 Actuate the mechanical supply pump.
3 Tighten the bleed screw. The engine should start.
2nd case
After running the system completely dry
1 Perform operations 1 to 3 described under the 1st case.
2 Loosen the return pipe (F) to completely bleed the air, then
tighten it again.
3 Whilst turning the engine using the starter motor, loosen 334A1014 Fig. 14
one of the couplings (H) until the fuel escaping from the coupling
is free from air bubbles. Tighten the coupling whilst still turning
the engine.
4 Repeat the procedure for the other injectors until the engine
starts.
334A1015 Photo 15
60 05MR
029 684
334 - 10.2003– -EN
– 02.2003 EN A1.11
Injection pump removal

IMPORTANT: Before any intervention on the injection pump, it
is IMPERATIVE to insert locking pin P/N 60 05 005 575 into
the orifice (E) and locking pin P/N 60 05 005 576 into the
flywheel using flywheel rotating tool P/N 60 05 005 501 by
rotating the pinion anticlockwise when facing the tractor. Make
sure these locking pins remain installed until installation.
IMPORTANT: Never use steam or cold water to clean a hot or

operating injection pump.
IMPORTANT : Take care not to turn the injection pump cou-

plings when loosening the injection pipes, as this may cause
internal damage to the pump.
1 Blank off all the couplings and ports from disassembly

(pump and pipes); do not use fraying materials. 334A1016 Fig. 16
2 Disconnect electrical connections.
3 Disconnect the fuel return pipe (A).
4 Disconnect the fuel supply pipe (B).
5 Disconnect the injection pipes (C).
6 Disassemble the diesel filter.
7 Remove the access plate to the pump pinion.
8 Remove the nut and washer securing the injection pump
drive pinion to the pump shaft.
9 Mount special tool P/N 60 05 005 514 on the pinion.
10 Remove the three nuts (D) securing the pump to the engine
front plate.
11 Turn the screw on tool P/N 60 05 005 514 clockwise until
the pump shaft lifts off the drive pinion.
12 Disengage the pump from the three studs by pulling it
backwards.
A1.12 60 05MR
029 684
334 - 10.2003– -EN
– 02.2003 EN
Injection pump installation

Beforeinstallingthepump,makesurethepumplockingpinand
the flywheel locking pin are installed. Otherwise, repeat the
operation described before removing the pump.
1 Fit a new seal on the front face of the injection pump
attachment flange.
2 Slide the injection pump onto the mounting studs, whilst at
the same time inserting the pump shaft into the drive pinion.
3 Hand-tighten the nuts (D).
4 After firmly engaging the drive pinion against the tapered
part of the shaft, fit the washer and nut (E).
5 Torque tighten the nut (E) to 19.5 daN.m.
6 Remove the pump and flywheel locking pins.
7 Torque-tighten the nuts (D) to 2.5 daN.m.
8 Tighten the injection pipes (C), then the return (A) and
supply (B) pipes.
9 Connect up the various electric harnesses disconnected
during the pump removal.
10 Bleed the air from the fuel system.
IMPORTANT: Never remove the pump and flywheel locking
pins before securing the pump and the pinion.
334A1017 Fig. 17
60 05MR
029 684
334 - 10.2003– -EN
– 02.2003 EN A1.13
Injector removal
IMPORTANT: To assemble/disassemble the injectors, IMPE-
RATIVELY use tool P/N 60 05 005 503. Thoroughly clean befo-
rehand the injector surroundings so that dirt does not enter
the port. As soon as disassembly is completed, blank off all
the ports.
1 Loosen the nuts (B) to disconnect the leak off pipes (A)
and the T-fittings.
2 Disconnect the injectors from the injection pipes (D). 334A1018 Photo 18
3 Remove the screw (C).
4 Extract the injectors from the cylinder head using extractor
tool P/N 60 05 005 503 (1).
334A1019 Photo 19
Injector seat cleaning

(if necessary)
Remove the carbon deposit in the injector housings using tool
P/N 60 05 005 519 (2).
IMPORTANT:Always turn the tool clockwise, even when remo-
ving it, to avoid blunting it.
334A1020 Photo 20
Injector installation
IMPORTANT: The lower carbon deposit arrestor seal (D) must
be replaced every time an injector is removed.
Slide the upper seal (E) onto the injector body. Position
installation tool P/N 60 05 005 513 (3) on the injector nozzle and
slide the new seal (D) onto the injector body until it seats
properly in the groove.
334A1021 Fig. 21
A1.14 60 05MR
029 684
334 - 10.2003– -EN
– 02.2003 EN
Diagnostics
Note: Before any diagnosis is made, check that the fuel is in sufficient quantity and quality.
Sheet No. 1 «Engine start failure»
The engine is started

but does not run
No active Connect Metadiag and Anomaly

codes switch ignition on codes active
Correct Check the presence Incorrect If the codes comprise a

of fuel in the injectors SPN 637, diagnose them first
Repair according to the code

See sheet (see chapter G1)
"Checking the
fuel supply
system"
Check for
clogging of Incorrect Repair or
intake replace the
exhaust components
Correct
Check Incorrect
compression Problem of pistons, rings,
liners or valve guides
Correct
Check the Incorrect Repair or

injectors replace the
injectors
Correct
Have the pump

repaired
334A1026 Fig. 26
60 05MR
029 684
334 - 10.2003– -EN
– 02.2003 EN A1.15
Diagnostics
Sheet No. 2 «Engine irregular operation»

Before starting, check for: – transmission problems;
– air leak in the intake manifold; – problems on the engine accessories;
– mechanical problems; – electromagnetic disturbances.
The engine is misfiring and/or

does not operate regularly

Wrap a cloth around the injector union. See sheet

Slowly loosen and observe If the codes
No "Checking the comprise a
a change in engine speed. fuel supply
Perform the operation for each cylinder. (on all the cylinders) SPN 637,
system" diagnose them
Misfiring on a single cylinder?
first
Yes
Check the Incorrect Replace Repair according

cylinder the cylinder to the code
head gasket head gasket (see chapter G1)
Correct

fuel inlet replace the
pipe pipe
Correct
Check Incorrect Apply some oil on the piston ring area Correct
compression through the injector bore.
Repeat the compression test.
Incorrect
Correct
Repair or Incorrect Check the Problem of pistons, rings,

Check the Incorrect
replace the clearance on liners or valve guides
injectors the valves
injectors
Correct
Correct
Adjust the
clearance and Check Correct
Have the pump perform the valve
repaired test again lifting
Incorrect
Wear on
camshaft boss,
rollers, rocker
arm rods
334A1027 Fig. 27
A1.16 60 05MR
029 684
334 - 10.2003– -EN
– 02.2003 EN
Diagnostics
Sheet No. 3 «Grey or black smoke emission»
The engine emits too much smoke,

black or grey, at the exhaust

Look for a possible clogging at If the codes

Yes intake or exhaust comprise a
or a possible air leak SPN 637,
diagnose them
Correct
first
Repair according
Repair or replace the Inspect the turbocharger: to the code
defective components - compressor inlet/outlet, (see chapter G1)
Correct - turbine inlet/outlet, Incorrect
- internal/external central body,
- end float,
- supercharging pressure.
Check the Repair or

Incorrect Correct replace the
clearance on
the valves defective
components
Adjust the Repair or

clearance and Check the Incorrect replace the
perform the fuel return defective
test again pipe components
Correct
Incorrect Repair or
Check the replace the
injectors injectors
Correct
Have the pump

repaired
334A1028 Fig. 28
60 05MR
029 684
334 - 10.2003– -EN
– 02.2003 EN A1.17
Diagnostics
Sheet No. 4 «White smoke emission»
The engine emits too much white

smoke at the exhaust

Yes Look for a possible failure of the cylinder If the codes

head gasket. comprise a
SPN 637,
diagnose them
No
first
Repair according
to the code
(see chapter G1)
See sheet
"Cylinder head Check Incorrect Problem of pistons, rings,
gasket inspection compression liners or valve guides
procedure"
Correct

injectors replace the
injectors
Correct
Have the pump

repaired
334A1029 Fig. 29
A1.18 60 05MR
029 684
334 - 10.2003– -EN
– 02.2003 EN
Diagnostics
Sheet No. 5 «Checking the fuel supply system»
The engine operates

irregularly

If the codes
No Look for possible presence Yes comprise a
of air in the supply system. SPN 637,
diagnose them
first
Incorrect Check fuel supply pressure Correct Bleed the Repair according
and flowrate system to the code
(see chapter G1)
Repair or
replace any
defective part
in the system.
Inspect the fuel pipes

Incorrect Inspect the fuel inlet pipes Correct Correct Incorrect
before injection betwwen
between the injector
the final filter outlet
and the pump
and the injection pump
Repair or Repair or
Have the pump
replace the replace the
repaired
pipe(s) pipe(s)
334A1030 Fig. 30
60 05MR
029 684
334 - 10.2003– -EN
– 02.2003 EN A1.19
Diagnostics
Sheet No. 6 «Lack of power»
The engine does not

give full power
Note: before carrying out this procedure check:

– Absence of problems at the transmission;
– Absence of mechanical problems on the engine;
– Absence of excessive load on the engine;
– Air and fuel filters not clogged;
– Fuel quality correct.

Set the engine If the codes comprise a

to full load, SPN 637, diagnose them
at nominal speed first
White Black or grey Repair according

exhaust exhaust to the code
smoke smoke (see chapter G1)
See diagnosis sheet

"white smokes
or grey or black smokes"
334A1031 Fig. 31
A1.20 60 05MR
029 684
334 - 10.2003– -EN
– 02.2003 EN
A2 – D.P.S. ENGINE
4045 DRT 70
4045 TRT 70
4045 TRT 71
4045 TRT 72
General specifications
Identification of the engines
Engine 4045 D R T 70 4045 T R T 70 4045 T R T 71 4045 T R T 72
Number of cylinders 4
Nominal pow er ECE R24 in kW 53 59 66 73,5
Manufacturer’s plate
The plate is located on the right-hand side of the engine, it
contains the following information:
First line
CD ............................ Production plant code (CD = Saran)
4045 .......................... Type of engine
4 = Number of cylinders
045 = Cubic inch displacement
(045 = 4,5 litres)
T ............................... Inlet
D = Natural suction
T = Turbocharged
800201 ...................... Serial number
Second line
4045 .......................... (See above)
T ............................... (See above)
RT ............................. RENAULT Agriculture application
71 .............................. Application issue 34A2001 Photo 1
A2.2 60 05MR 334

029 – 02.2003
684 - 10.2003– -EN
EN
4-cylinder engines
Engine 4045 D R T 70 4045 T R T 70 4045 T R T 71 4045 T R T 72
Makes D.P.S.
Type of injection Direct
Suction Atmospheric Turbocharged
Cooling by Liquid
Number of cylinders 4
Injection sequence 1–3–4–2
Bore (mm) 106.5
Stroke (mm) 127
Capacity (cc) 4,530
Compression pressure (bar) 24
Nominal speed (rpm) 2,200
Idle speed (rpm) 850 ± 10
Max. speed off load (rpm) 2,350 ± 10
Lubrication circuit (l)* Minimum: 10 – Maximum: 12.5
Cooling circuit (l)** 15.5 l 15.5 l 15.5 l 18 l
Note: beyond 30 kph, the engine switches to a curve of 2,350 Rotation direction of crankshaft
rpm at nominal speed. It is necessary to go below 25 kph to Clockwise when facing the end of the water pump.
resume the 2,200 rpm curve (except for the 4045 TRT 72 that
only has the 2,200 rpm curve). Identification of the front of the engine
The end of the water pump is the «front» of the engine.
* Lubricant: ELF TRACTORENAULT SDX Identification of the sides of the engine

corresponding to standard SAE 15W40 – To distinguish the ‘right» side from the «left» side, stand facing
ACEA E5 – APICH4 – DEUTZ – DPS – the end of the crankshaft (at the rear of the engine).
IVECO
** Fluid: RENAULT Agriculture cooling fluid Identification of cylinder No 1:
– Reference: GLACEOL RX GF The first cylinder, on the water pump side, corresponds to
(– 37°) cylinder No 1.
– Protection: – 37°C
60 05MR 334
029 – 02.2003
684 - 10.2003– -EN
EN A2.3
Dimensional specifications
Cylinder head and valves

Maximum acceptable rework of the cylinder head ........................... 0.76mm
Minimum acceptable cylinder head thickness ................................. 104.11mm
Maxi : 105,13
Mini : 104,87
0,08
Std: Standard
Rep: Repair
O: Ovality
Inlet
Ø Std 7,874 ± 0,01

Rep. 7,874 + 0,38
Std : 0,05 → 0,10
rep : 0,15
30 °
2
→
5
1, O = 0,08
O = 0,038 Ø 46,47 → 46,73
29,25 °
Std : 0,61 → 1,11

rep : 1,63
Exhaust
Ø Std 7,861 ± 0,013

Rep. 7,861 + 0,38
Std : 0,05 → 0,10
rep : 0,15
30 °
2
→
5
1, O = 0,08
O = 0,038 Ø 42,37 → 42,63
29,25 °
Std : 1,22 → 1,72

334A2003 rep : 2,26 Fig. 3
A2.4 60 05MR 334

029 – 02.2003
684 - 10.2003– -EN
EN
Cylinder head and valves
Pushrod/housing clea-
rance 0.06 – 0.13mm
at 46mm = 18 → 24daN.m
at 34.5mm = 59 → 68daN.m
Adm.: Inlet
Ech.: Exhaust
LU: Wear limit
334A2004 Fig. 4
60 05MR 334
029 – 02.2003
684 - 10.2003– -EN
EN A2.5
Cylinder block
Front view of the block
Dia. without bush

No.1 = dia. 59,96 → 59,98 0.025 over 150mm
Others = dia. 55.98 → 56.01
337,896 → 337,972
Dia. with bush
No.1 = dia. 55.96 →55.98
Ø 84,46 → 84,48
334A2005 Fig. 5
A2.6 60 05MR 334

029 – 02.2003
684 - 10.2003– -EN
EN
Liners and pistons
Max. offset between two points

the nearest from two liners = 0.05
Original
equipment
0,025 → 0,075
2Spare
0, → 0,075
Compare A, B, C, D to determine
whether the liner is tapered or out-of-
round.
Max. taper: 0.05
Max. ovalization: 0.05
Wear limit: 0.1
Measure a rea
⊥ at the piston pin)

(⊥
4045 DRT 70 = Dia. 34.935 →34.945

4045 TRT 70 = Dia. 34.935 → 34.945
4045 TRT 71 = Dia. 34.935 → 34.945
4045 TRT 72 = Dia. 41.285 → 41.295
334A2006 Fig. 6
60 05MR 334
029 – 02.2003
684 - 10.2003– -EN
EN A2.7
Connecting rods 4045 DRT 70 = Dia. 34.92 →34.93 – LU = 34.907

4045 TRT 70 = Dia. 34.92 →34.93 – LU = 34.907
4045 TRT 71 = Dia. 34.92 →34.93 – LU = 34.907 Measure taken with mounted bush
4045 TRT 72 = Dia. 41.27 →41.28 – LU = 41.257 4045 DRT 70 = Dia. 34.950 →– LU = 35.026
4045 TRT 70 = Dia. 34.950 →– LU = 35.026
LU: Wear limit 4045 TRT 71 = Dia. 34.950 →– LU = 35.026
4045 TRT 72 = Dia. 41.300 →– LU = 41.376
4045 DRT 70 = Dia. 38.087 →38.113

4045 TRT 70 = Dia. 38.087 →38.113
4045 TRT 71 = Dia. 38.087 →38.113
4045 TRT 72 = Dia. 46.025 →46.051
Bearing bush/crank pin clearance ................... 0.050 – 0.127mm LU:0.152mm

Max. bore ovality ............................................ LU:0.038mm
Repair bushes available .................................. 0.25mm
After measuring A, B and C, (bearing bush removed), the

max. difference must be 0.038.
334A2007 Fig. 7
A2.8 60 05MR 334

029 – 02.2003
684 - 10.2003– -EN
EN
Crankshaft, bearings and flywheel
Clearance = 0.050 → 0.127
End float
stop
to stop
0,05 → 0,25
C: Taper
O: Ovality
LU: Wear limit
Bearing operating clearance = 0.041 → 0.109

334A2008 Repair dimensions = 0.25 Fig. 8
60 05MR 334
029 – 02.2003
684 - 10.2003– -EN
EN A2.9
Camshaft
Adm.: Inlet Adm : 6,93 → 7,42 - LU = 6,68

Ech.: Exhaust Ech : 6,76 → 7,26 - LU = 6,50
LU: Wear limit 3,935 → 3,985 - LU = 3,83
Ø 55,872 → 55,898 - LU = 55,85
End float = 0.08 → 0.23 - LU = 0.38
Bearing clearance = 0.08 → 0.14

Bearing No.1 clearance
with bush = 0.06 → 0.11
334A2009 Fig. 9
A2.10 60 05MR 334

029 – 02.2003
684 - 10.2003– -EN
EN
Distribution
Axial clearance = 0.095 → 0.145

Ø 69,802 → 69,832
Ø 69,757 → 69,777
0,08 → 0,75
0,08 → 0,75
Clearance = 0.075 →0.125
0,005 → 0,68
End float = 0,095 →0.145

0,07 → 0,6 0,06 → 0,58
0,06 → 0,65
Ø 44,437 → 44,463
Ø 44,489 → 44,539
0,007 → 0,65
0,08 → 0,6
Clearance = 0.026 →0.102

334A2010 Fig. 10
60 05MR 334
029 – 02.2003
684 - 10.2003– -EN
EN A2.11
Lubrication
Oil pump
Oil pump delivery at maximum speed, at 3 bar pressure ...................... ...............................................70 l/min
Minimum oil pressure at tick-over, with the oil at 90 °C ........................ ...............................................1 bar minimum
Minimum oil pressure at maximum off-load speed, with the oil at 90 °C:
– All engine types ....................................................................................................................... 3 bar minimum
Bypass valve spring:
– Spring length (off load) ............................................................................................................. 51mm
– Spring force at a length of 29mm ............................................................................................... 8.7daN.m
B = Ø 16,05 → 16,10
A = Ø 16,02 → 16,03
35,97 → 36,05 End float

0,04 → 0,165
C = Ø 12,35 → 12,36
A = Ø 12,31 → 12,33
A: Shaft End float

B: Bush
C: Bore 0,04 → 0,165
0,131 → 0,211
1
,21
→0
31
0,1
334A2011 Fig. 11
A2.12 60 05MR 334

029 – 02.2003
684 - 10.2003– -EN
EN
Cooling
Thermostat
Thermostat opening temperature .................................................... 82°C (80-84°C)
Temperature for full opening of the thermostat ................................. 94°C
Cooling system pressure ............................................................... 0.7 bar
Water pump and fan drive support
334A2012 Fig. 12
60 05MR 334
029 – 02.2003
684 - 10.2003– -EN
EN A2.13
Turbocharger
Type of turbocharger .................................................................................................................. CZ
Normal turbocharger pressure at full load nominal speed ............................................................. 0.83 bar
334A2013 Fig. 13
A2.14 60 05MR 334

029 – 02.2003
684 - 10.2003– -EN
EN
Tightening torques
Front chassis/engine link

See figure opposite. 35 ± 6daN.m
30 ± 5daN.m
334A2014 Fig. 14
Engine/transmission link
14 screws see figure opposite.
14 x 6 –+ 02 daN.m
334A2015 Fig. 15
60 05MR 334
029 – 02.2003
684 - 10.2003– -EN
EN A2.15
Notes
A2.16 60 05MR 334

029 – 02.2003
684 - 10.2003– -EN
EN
Tightening torques
lubricated
lubricated
3daN.m
3.4 if
tightening problem
334A2016 Fig. 16
60 MR 334684
05 029 – 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN A2.17
Tightening
Couples torques
de serrage
+ 3 knocks
with a punch
(left-hand thread)
3 daN.m
3 daN.m
334A2017 Fig. 17
A2.18 60 60
05 05
029029
693684
- 10.2003 - EN
- 10.2003 - EN
Operating principles
Distribution diagram
Cranckshaft rotation direction
Top dead centre
Exhaust
Intake Bottom dead centre
334A2018 Fig. 18
Intake E xh au st
A B C D
Advance Delay Advance Delay
Opening Closing Opening Closing
Intake Intake Exhaust Exhaust
(DEG) (DEG) (DEG) (DEG)
8 42 51.3 12.7
MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN A2.19
Personal notes
A2.20 MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
Lubrication system
Description
A Oil pump
B Oil suction pipe
C Oil outlet tube
D Oil cooler casing
E Cooling fluid passage adapter
F Oil filter
G Oil filter manifold/adaptor
H Oil filling tube
I Oil cooler
K Crankshaft oil passages
L Bearing bushes
M Oil passages
N Main lubrication duct
O Connecting rod bearings
P Piston cooling orifices
Q Camshaft bushes
R Piston pin and bush
S Rocker pin
T Turbocharger oil supply duct
U Turbocharger drain duct
V Rocker arms
W Machined groove
X Oil passages AA Pressurized oil
Y Oil pressure regulator AB Non-pressurized oil
Z Oil bypass valve AC Upper fitting vertical oil filter assembly
334A2019 Fig. 19
60 MR 334684
05 029 – 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN A2.21
Cooling system
Description
A Water pump
B Cooling fluid passage adapter
C Oil cooler drain plug
D Oil cooler plates
E Cooling fluid passage
F Cooling fluid envelope
G Block upper part passages
H Passages
I Thermostat
J Water manifold/thermostat casing
L Bypass circuit
M Towards the radiator upper tank
N Cylinder block drain plug
O Water pump suction side
P High temperature cooling fluid
Q Low temperature cooling fluid
334A2020 Fig. 20
A2.22 60 MR 334684
05 029 – 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
Compression check
Note: Before starting the test, make sure that the battery is
fully charged and that the injector area is perfectly clean.
Start the engine and run it at idle speed during 10 to 15 minutes.
Remove the injectors.
Mount tool P/N 5516 (1) with the seal (3) on compression tester
P/N 8122 (2).
Disconnect the cable from the injection pump electrical STOP.
Turn the engine using the starter motor during a few seconds.
The compression value should be 24 bar minimum. It must be
measured on each cylinder, the difference between the min. and
the max. value should be less than 3.5 bar. Check at crankshaft
minimum speed at 150 rpm when cold or 200 rpm when hot.
334A2021 Fig. 21
334A2022 Fig. 22
Check of engine oil

pressure
Remove the oil pressure probe (A) and install pressure gauge
P/N 8204 instead on the block.
Before checking the pressure, warm up the engine.
At idle speed and a temperature of 93°C, the pressure gauge
should indicate a minimum pressure of 1 bar.
At full load nominal speed and an operating temperature of
105°C, the pressure gauge should indicate a pressure between
2.6 and 3.3 bar.
A
334A2023 Fig. 23
MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN A2.23
Check of valve lift (Engine cold)

Note: The lift valve measure enables the detection of a possi-
ble cam wear.
1 Run the engine and position the valves as indicated in the

following paragraph «Valve clearance».
2 Cancel the clearance at the valves.
3 Place a dial indicator gauge on the valve spring cup or on
the valve cap, then set it to «0».
4 Run the engine and observe the dial indicator gauge
until the valve opens at maximum. Check the values read
with the specifications at the beginning of this chapter.
5 Measure the valve lift as explained above and adjust the
clearance. 334A2024 Fig. 24
6 If the specifications are not met, remove and check the
camshaft condition.
Valve clearance (engine cold)

Using tool P/N 5501 (1) turn the flywheel in its normal rotation
direction (clockwise when viewed from the water pump) until
piston No. 1 (at the front) is at top dead centre (TDC) of its
compression stroke. Engage locking pin P/N 5500 (2) in the
flywheel bore.
Note: When piston No. 1 is at TDC of its compression stroke,
the valve springs of cylinder No. 1 are not pressurised.
Valve clearance 334A2025 Fig. 25

Refer to chapter «Dimensional specifications».
Loosen the locknuts (A) and adjust the valve clearance as
indicated next page.
334A2026 Fig. 26
A2.24 MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
Valve adjustment
sequence
4-cylinder engine
Adjust the clearance of the cylinder exhaust valves Nos 1 and
3, and of the cylinder intake valves Nos 1 and 2.
Turn the crankshaft 360° to bring piston No. 4 to TDC of its
compression stroke and install the locking pin.
Adjust the clearance of cylinder exhaust valves Nos 2 and 4,
and of cylinder intake valves Nos 3 and 4.
A Engine front
B Piston No. 1 at TDC (compression stroke)
C Piston No. 4 at TDC (compression stroke)
E Exhaust valve
334A2027 Fig. 27
I Intake valve
Check of supercharging
pressure 1
Remove the plug (1) and install pressure gauge P/N 5521.
Before checking, warm up the engine.
Observe the pressure gauge.
The pressure measured should be (when the engine running at
full load reaches nominal speed):
– 4045 TRT 70 engine 0.52 bar
If the pressure is too low, check the following points:
– air filter clogging,
– leak at the intake circuit, between the turbocharger and the
cylinder head,
– defective turbocharger.
334A2028 Fig. 28
Check of the belt and the

tensioner spring
Check of the belt condition

1 Visually inspect the cast stops (A) and (B) of the tensioner.
2 If the tensioner stop located on the swivel arm hits the
fixed stop (B), check the mounting supports (alternator,
tensioner, etc.) and the belt length. Replace the belt if
necessary.
334A2029 Fig. 29
MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN A2.25
Check of the tensioner

spring force
A belt force gauge does not provide accurate measurement of
the belt force when a spring-operating automatic tensioner is
used. Measure the tensioner spring force with a torque wrench
proceeding as follows:
1 Loosen the tension on the belt using a hinged handle and a
socket on the tension arm. Remove the belt from the pulleys.
2 Loosen the tension applied on the tension arm and remove
the hinged handle.
3 Scribe a mark (A) on the tensioner swivel arm as shown in
the figure.
4 Measure 21mm from (A) and scribe a mark (B) on the
tensioner mounting base.
5 Swivel the arm using a torque wrench to align the 334A2030 Fig. 30
markings(A) and (B) (C).
6 Note the measure on the torque wrench and compare it to
the specification below. Replace the tensioner if required.
Spring force: 1.8 to 2.2daN.m
334A2031 Fig. 31
A2.26 MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
Viscous coupling checking procedure

Engine Speed of the
Engine Maximum
R oom sp eed / viscous Minimum fan
sp eed acceptable
Option temperature viscous coupling sp eed
at full slipping
in °C coupling drive pulley in rpm (B)
load in %
ratio in rpm (A)
Without air
conditioning
25 2,200 1.12 2,464 1,602 35
w ith or w ithout
pneumatic brake
With air
conditioning
25 2,200 1.34 2,948 1,916 35
w ith or w ithout
pneumatic brake
Preliminary checks 2 Check the speed of the fan (B) using an electronic rev
– Cooling fluid level in the vessel and cleanliness of all the counter and compare it with the values in the above table.
radiators (water, oil and air). 3 The slipping measured should correspond to (or may be
– Belt condition. slightly different from) the above values. In any case, if slipping
– Correct operation of the thermostat(s). exceeds 35%, consider replacing the viscous coupling.
– Correct operation of the temperature probe.
Caution: The fan speeds given in the above table have been
Note 1: The rotation speed of the pulley (A) is given as an
measured at an ambient temperature of 25°C. During the check,
indication only for checking if required.
if the temperature is below 25°C (e.g. 20°C), «reasonably»
Note 2: With the engine cold, the viscous coupling slipping is reduce the speeds of the fan (B), and vice-versa if the ambient
about 7%, warm up the engine before measuring. temperature is above 25°C.
Viscous coupling check

1 Run the tractor on the power bench at 2,200 rpm at full load during
30 min minimum.
334A2032 Fig. 32
MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN A2.27
Preliminary operations
Cab
– Apply the hand brake.
– Set the gearbox lever to neutral.
Electricity
– Disconnect the battery.
Sheet metal elements

– Remove the side, front and top covers.
– Remove the exhaust pipe at the upper cover (according to the
engine type).
– Remove the exhaust/battery support assembly*.
Transmission shaft
– Disconnect and remove the transmission shaft and its pro- 334A2033 Fig. 33
tection casings.
Drains (according to the intervention)

– Drain the cooling system.
– Drain the engine casing.
– Drain the transmission.
– Drain the refrigeration system.
Front ballast weights

– Remove the removable ballast weights.
Tractor chocking
– Chock the rear wheels.
– Neutralize the tilt angle by propping the front axle.
Separate engine/front axle
Elements to be separated or removed 334A2034 Fig. 34

• Disconnect all the electrical harnesses (1) connected to the
engine:
– starter rmotor;
– ground and supply cables;
– injection pump UCE unit;
– cooling fluid temperature sensor;
– engine oil pressure sensor;
– engine/cab link, two connectors;
– alternator;
– refrigeration compressor*.
• Cut the plastic clamps and pull back the electrical harnesses
at the front of the tractor or towards the cab front.
• Loosen the clamps (2) and remove the air intake pipe.
• Disconnect the various hydraulic pipes, steering cylinder,
transmission oil cooler (3), suction strainer.
• Disconnect the cooling hoses (4).
• Disconnect both heater pipes.
* According to equipment 334A2035 Fig. 35
A2.28 MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
Remove both pipes on the cab front/LH side at the air conditioning/
evaporation unit (cab). These two pipes will go with the chassis part
during separation. It is possible not to disconnect the air
conditioning system if removing the air conditioning unit on the
cab front is preferred (unit removal/installation takes about 1 1/4
hours).
The various components of the refrigeration system
shall be handled with care to avoid any risk of coolant
leakage (when disconnecting a pipe, immediately
blank it off). After re-installing the assembly, check the system
tightness using the recommended electronic leak tester (See
chapter «Heating-Air conditioning»).
– Install the splitting carriages under the engine and under the
front main ballast weight.
Note: Adjust the various splitting assembly stops to properly
separate the front axle and to facilitate the assembly 334A2036 Fig. 36
recoupling.
– Remove the attachments (7) (2 screws and 4 nuts) from the
chassis.
– Separate the front axle.
334A2037 Fig. 37
For safety reasons, use a hoist and slings

adapted to the engine weight: minimum 600kg.
Separate engine/gearbox
LH side
If the tractor is equipped with the pneumatic brake option,
remove: the battery tray, tool box and LH side foot step. Place
a chock under the air tank to avoid removing it.
RH side
Remove the diesel tank. If the tractor is equipped with the side
exhaust, remove it: 334A2038 Fig. 38
MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN A2.29
Separate engine/gearbox
– Install the splitting carriage under the transmission.
Note: Adjust the various splitting assembly stops to properly
separate the engine and to facilitate the assembly recoupling.
– Fasten on the shackles (13) chains and slings adapted to the
engine weight.
For safety reasons, use a hoist and slings

adapted to the engine weight: minimum 600kg.
334A2040 Fig. 40
– Remove the 14 screws securing the engine/clutch casing.
14 x 6 –+ 02 daN.m
334A2041 Fig. 41
A2.30 MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
Engine installation specifications
Chassis shimming 14 x 6 –+ 02 daN.m

– Reconnect the chassis to the engine without installing the
lower securing screws.
– Tighten the securing nuts in (A) to the recommended torque.
– Measure the dimension (X) using a set of feeler gauges.
The theoretical dimension is 8.7mm.
The shimming required corresponds to the value read + 0.1mm
– Install the two lower screws after shimming and tighten them
to the recommended torque.
334A2042 Fig. 42
35 ± 6 daN.m
30 ± 5 daN.m
X
334A2043 Fig. 43
MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN A2.31
Cylinder head
Cylinder head removal

Remove the intake and exhaust manifolds.
Remove the injectors using special tool P/N 5503 (1).
Note: The injectors must be removed in order to prevent from
damaging them when removing the cylinder head. Mark all the
parts before removing them, to help installing them back in
their initial location.
Remove the rocker arm assembly.
Remove the cylinder head securing screws, and remove the
cylinder head.
IMPORTANT: After removing the cylinder head, never turn the
crankshaft before securing all the liners (C) using bolts (A)
and washers (B). 334A2044 Fig. 44
334A2045 Fig. 45
Injector housing cleaning

Remove the carbon deposit in the injector housings using tool
P/N 5519 (2).
IMPORTANT: Always turn the tool clockwise, even when
removing it, to avoid blunting it.
334A2046 Fig. 46
A2.32 MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
Removing the valves and their springs

1 Compress the valve springs using tool P/N 8131 (1) to
remove the half-cones (A).
Note: Locally manufacture the part (2) using a washer and a

bolt with specifications identical to that of a rocker arm pump
securing bolt.
Bolt P/N: 6005 021 506.
2 Release the tension on the springs; remove the rotators

(B) and the valve spring (C). Mark each element in order to
reassemble it in its respective location.
3 Remove the valves; mark them for reassembly.
334A2047 Fig. 47
4 Remove the valve stem seals (D) from the valve guide
shoulders.
334A2048 Fig. 48
Checking the cylinder head gasket face

The maximum flatness defect is 0.08 mm.
In case of more serious flatness defect, regrind the cylinder
head gasket face.
Note: The cylinder head gasket face may be reground by
0.76 mm maximum. Systematically check valve withdrawal
after regrinding the cylinder head.
334A2049 Fig. 49
MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN A2.33
Cylinder head installation

1 Clean the threaded holes in the cylinder block using the
special tap P/N 5517 (1). Remove any dust and liquid residue
using compressed air.
2 Lubricate the followers (3) on the camshaft before
reinstalling them in their housings.
3 Dry fit a new cylinder head gasket (without sealing
compound).
IMPORTANT: Check that all followers are in place before fitting

the cylinder head.
4 Insert two centring studs in the housings (A).
Note: Locally manufacture 2 centring studs using 2 bolts P/N

6005 012 886.
334A2050 Fig. 50
IMPORTANT: If the centring studs are not fitted, the O-ring
crimped in the cylinder head gasket (passage of lubrication
oil channel in the rocker arm assembly) may be damaged
when the cylinder head is moved onto the engine block to
align the bolt bores.
5 Fit the cylinder head correctly on the centring studs, and

lower it onto the cylinder block.
Tightening method
1 Before assembly, apply a small amount of graphite grease
onto the threads and under the heads of each bolt.
2 Remove the centring studs and fit all the cylinder head
bolts.
3 Tighten the cylinder head bolts to the recommended torque,
according to the sequence indicated, starting with bolt No.1.
Refer to chapter «Tightening torques».
334A2051 Fig. 51
A Centring stud housing
B Engine front
334A2052 Fig. 52
A2.34 MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
Angular tightening method

To ensure the 60° angle is achieved (4th stage), proceed as
follows:
Step A
Scribe a first mark on the socket and a second at 60° from the
first one anti-clockwise.
Step B
Scribe a mark on the cylinder head opposite each bolt.
Step C
Fit the socket onto the bolt while ensuring that the first mark is
aligned with the reference mark on the cylinder head.
Step D
Tighten all the bolts (in sequence) until the second mark on the
socket is aligned with the mark on the cylinder head. 334A2053 Fig. 53
IMPORTANT: The angular tightening method eliminates the
obligation to retighten the cylinder head bolts after the first
hours of operation.
A Reference mark
B Mark at 60°
Installation of the rocker arm

assembly (only after installing the
cylinder head)
1 Assemble the rocker stems in their original position.
Note: the ends of the valve stems are hardened; therefore,

fitting protection caps is unnecessary.
2 Install the rocker arm assembly on the engine.
IMPORTANT: Align the orifice (C) on the rocker arm assembly

with the lubrication orifice (D) on the cylinder head. 334A2054 Fig. 54
3 Lubricate all the rocker arms with engine oil.

4 Tighten the attachment studs to the torque recommended
in chapter «Tightening torques».
MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN A2.35
Camshaft
Camshaft removal
Note: Removing the cylinder head from the engine is not
required to remove the camshaft.
1 Remove the rocker arm assembly and stems.

2 Remove the distributor casing.
3 Turn the engine gear train until the bolts (A) can be removed. 334A2055 Fig. 55
4 Using a wire (C), push the followers through the lubrication
holes located on them to tetract them.
IMPORTANT: If the camshaft followers fall into the engine

casing, you must remove the cylinder head.
5 Remove the support plate (D) from the slot located behind
the camshaft pinion.
6 Slowly extract the camshaft to extract it from the cylinder
block.
7 Clean the camshaft, then inspect the camshaft cams and
bearings. If required, replace the camshaft.
334A2056 Fig. 56
334A2057 Fig. 57
A2.36 MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
Cylinder block
Camshaft bush replacement

Disassembly
1 Remove the camshaft.
2 Remove the Torx screw (A) and fit instead the tapered end
stud (B) of tool P/N 5531.
3 Install the other 2 flat-end studs (C) of tool P/N 5531 and
the removal/installation plate (D) of tool P/N 5520. 334A2058 Fig. 58
4 Insert the bush extractor (E) of tool P/N 5520 into the
camshaft bore as shown in the photo opposite.
5 Tighten the hex head nut (F) until the bush is released
from the bore.
6 Clean and inspect the bush bore. If the bore is damaged,
replace the cylinder block.
334A2059 Fig. 59
Assembly
IMPORTANT: Fit the bush ensuring that all lubrication holes in
the bush and the cylinder block are opposite each other.
1 Mark the orientation of the lubrication holes (G) on the

front face of the block and on the bush to facilitate alignment of
the bushes during installation.
2 Apply high temperature grease on the inside/outside
diameters of the new bush, and on the inside diameter of the
bore in the block.
334A2060 Fig. 60
3 Install the tool with the bush as shown in the photo opposite.
With the bush (J) engaged, tighten the screw (H) until the
flange (K) contacts the cylinder block face.
4 Remove the tool and check the lubrication hole is properly
aligned. If the holes are not aligned, remove and discard the
bush. Fit a new bush.
334A2061 Fig. 61
MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN A2.37
Liners
Liner removal
IMPORTANT: Before removal, number the liners and the pis-
tons. Mark the FRONT part of the liner to ensure its proper
reassembly position.
Extract the liners from the cylinder block using tool P/N 5504
(1).
IMPORTANT: After removing the cylinder head, never turn the
crankshaft before securing all the liners (C) using bolts (A)
and washers (B).
Checking the ovalization and

taper of the liners
Refer to chapter «Dimensional specifications». 334A2062 Fig. 62
334A2063 Fig. 63
334A2064 Fig. 64
A2.38 MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
Measurement of the liner protrusion

IMPORTANT: First fit the liners without seals to check liner
protrusion. When correctly installed, the liners can be rotated
easily by hand. Otherwise, remove the liners and polish the
lower liner guide in order to achieve frictionless rotation of
the liners.
1 Fit the liners without seals and secure them in four points;
tighten the bolts to 7daN.m.
2 Measure the protrusion of the liners, using checking tool
P/N 8180 (1).
• Calibrate the checking tool:
– Secure the calibration rule under the base;
– Calibrate the dial indicator gauge to zero;
– Remove the rule.
• Checking tool installation: 334A2065 Fig. 65
– Position the checking tool on the cylinder to be checked.
• Measure the liner protrusion in 4 points.
3 If the protrusion or the tolerance differ from the values
indicated, smear abrasive paste onto the cylinder block
shoulder (2) supporting the liner flange (3), fit the liner and
turn to the right and left until achieving proper protrusion (to
this effect, use special tool P/N 5504).
4 If the protrusion is insufficient, fit a shim under the flange.
Two thicknesses of shims are available: 0.05 and 0.10 mm.
IMPORTANT: Use only one shim per cylinder. If a liner requires

more than one shim, fit a new liner or a new cylinder block.
334A2066 Fig. 66
MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN A2.39
Fitting the rectangular section seal

Smear the new seal with soap, slide it onto the liner until it is
supported on its shoulder. The seal must be compressed
minimum at 0.13mm.
1 Liner
2 Rectangular section seal
A Incorrect fitting
B Correct fitting
334A2067 Fig. 67
Fitting liner O-rings

Smear the new O-rings with soap and fit them in their respective
grooves.
A Rectangular section seal
B Red and white O-ring
C Black O-ring
D Liner
E Cylinder block
334A2068 Fig. 68
Liner installation
Slide the liner with the shim and the rectangular section seal
in its housing in the cylinder block.
Seat the liners using tool P/N 5504 (1).
Block the liners with the large washers and the bolts.
IMPORTANT: During installation, match the marks scribed
before removing the liners.
334A2069 Fig. 69
A2.40 MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
Pistons and connecting rods

Before disassembling, mark the connecting rod and the cap with
the cylinder the connecting rod is fitted to.
Replacing the connecting rod end bushes –

4045 TRT 72 engines
Use tool P/N 5532 for a 41-mm pin.
Removal
1 Fit the extractor shaft (A) on one of the ends of the connecting
334A2070 Fig. 70
rod bush. Turn the shaft (A) until the tapered parts of the shaft
are parallel with the tapered parts of the bush (C).
2 Opposite the extractor shaft (A), install the receiver plate
(B).
3 Using a hydraulic press, push the connecting rod bush out
until the extractor shaft (A) falls into the receiver plate (B).
IMPORTANT:Ifthebushisbadlywornout,theextractorshaft(A)may
contacttheinsidediameteroftheconnectingrodbore.Whenextracting
thebush,ensureyoudonotdamagetheconnectingrodbore.
334A2071 Fig. 71
4 Clean, inspect and measure the inside diameter of the
connecting rod pin bore.
Installation
1 First slide the bush (C) onto the shaft (A), then the part (D).
Apply grease on the outside diameters of the bushes (C) and
(D), as well as in the connecting rod end bore.
2 Insert the shaft (A) into the connecting rod pin bore, ensuring
that the pilot bush (D) is guided in the connecting rod bore, and
that the taper of the bush (C) is aligned with the taper of the shaft
(A). 334A2072 Fig. 72
3 Install the receiver plate (B) on the other end of the connecting
rod.
4 Using a hydraulic press, push the bush into the connecting
rod bore until the rim is flush with or just below the connecting
rod face.
4045 DRT 70 – 4045 TRT 70 –

4045 TRT 71 engines
Use tool P/N 5505 for a 35-mm pin. 334A2073 Fig. 73
1 Push the connecting rod bush out using the tool (1).
2 Fit the new bush using the same tool.
3 Ream the new bush in order to enable the insertion of the
piston pin by pushing it with your thumb.
IMPORTANT: Check that the bush lubrication orifice (A) is aligned

with that of the connecting rod.
334A2074 Fig. 74
MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN A2.41
Checking the piston heads and skirts

Check that the pistons are not scratched and show no trace of
seizing or overheating.
Measure the piston diameter 19 mm from the bottom of the skirt,
perpendicularly to the piston pin.
Compare the dimension measured with the initial dimension.
Top compression ring groove

Use gauge P/N 5507 (4045 TRT 72) or 5563
(4045 DRT 70, 4045 TRT 70, 4045 TRT 71) to check the top
334A2075 Fig. 75
compression ring groove wear.
1 Piston
a Piston can be used
b Piston to be replaced
Compression and oil ring grooves

Use a new ring and a set of feeler gauges to determine the
clearance, which should not exceed 0.20mm.
If the clearance exceeds this dimension, replace the piston.
Piston ring fitting

Fit the piston rings using ring extender P/N 8110. The «·»
stamped marks, one for the top compression ring (No. 1) and
two for the compression ring (No.2), must be directed towards 334A2076 Fig. 76
the piston head.
Note: The rings Nos 1 and 2 can also be identified using
marks «Top», «T» or «·». During their installation, check that
the rings are correctly positioned.
Oil ring fitting

Fit the oil ring (3) in the lower groove, on the expander. Check
that the oil ring opening is opposite the opening on the expander.
334A2077 Fig. 77
334A2078 Fig. 78 334A2079 Fig. 79
A2.42 MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
Piston/connecting rod assembly

Note: Reassemble the pistons on the connecting rods they
were removed from.
1 Lubricate the piston pin and bush with clean engine oil.
2 Assemble the pistons and connecting rods, making sure
the marks «FRONT» (front) (A) on the side or the upper face
of the piston and on the same side of the connecting rod are
located on the same side.
IMPORTANT: If the mark «FRONT» is not visible on the piston

side or upper face , fit the piston on its connecting rod making
sure the combustion chamber offset on the piston is located
on the side opposite the camshaft. The long side of the
connecting rod must be fitted on the camshaft side.
1 Camshaft side 334A2080 Fig. 80
2 Liner bore pin
3 Combustion chamber offset
3 Insert the piston pin (B) in the piston pin bore. Install new
circlips (C) directing the circlip cutting edge opposite the pis-
ton pin. Check that the circlips are properly pushed into the
piston pin bore grooves.
334A2081 Fig. 81
Ring spacing
The figure opposite shows where the ring openings must be
located.
A Piston head
B Top compression ring opening
C Oil ring opening
D Expander opening
E Compression ring opening
F Clip opening in the expander
G Engine front
334A2082 Fig. 82
MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN A2.43
Inspecting the connecting rod and the cap

1 Inspect the connecting rods and the caps to ensure that
they are neither worn, nor damaged; look for chips and nicks
in the connecting zone (A).
IMPORTANT: Do not make nicks in the connecting surfaces of

the connecting rod and cap. This is absolutely vital on Préci-
sion JointTM connecting rods to guarantee correct coupling.
Never rub these surfaces (C) with a metallic brush nor any
other tool. The contact surfaces must be preserved.
2 Inspect the cap bolt holes (B) and the adjacent surfaces.
In the presence of any defect, replace the connecting rod and
the cap.
IMPORTANT: Never swap caps on connecting rods .

A Connecting zone 334A2083 Fig. 83
B Cap holes
C Précision Joint TM surfaces
Fitting the bearing in the cap

Note: Because of their manufacturing process, the Précision
JointTM connecting rod and caps both comprise a notch,
whereas the bearing bush insert has a single pin. Only one
notch on the cap is used for the bearing bush pin.
1 Fit the bearing bush insert into the connecting rod cap with
the pin (A) in the notch (B).
2 Apply clean engine oil to the bearing bush insert. Fit the
cap on the connecting rod with the pins on the same side.
A Pin
B Notch
C Additional notch (not used)
334A2084 Fig. 84
A2.44 60 05 029 684 - 10.2003 - EN

Installing the pistons and connecting rods

Note: The pistons must be installed in the liners they were
extracted from.
1 Smear the pistons and rings with clean engine oil. Fit the
pistons into the liners using the ring compressor P/N 8111 (1).
Note: Check for each piston that the mark «FRONT» (A) on the
upper face of the piston is turned towards the front of the
cylinder block.
334A2085 Fig. 85
2 Push the piston into the liner until the upper ring is fully
inside it.
Assembling the cap onto the connecting

rod
1 Smear the half-bearing bushes with clean engine oil, then
assemble the cap onto the connecting rod with the pins (A) on
the same side. The notch (C) is not used.
IMPORTANT: Ensure that the cap is correctly aligned on the

connecting rod with the junction surfaces perfectly coupled.
2 Dip the connecting rod bolts in clean engine oil and fit
them.
334A2086 Fig. 86
IMPORTANT: Never use the connecting rod bolts more than
once for the final assembly of the engine. When connecting
rod bolts have been tightened to the final torque, do not reuse
them.
3 Tighten the bolts alternately to 5.8 daN.m, then turn each

bolt by a 90-100 degree angle.
Tightening method
1 Position the wrench parallel to the engine axis (A).
2 Tighten the bolt until the wrench is perpendicular to the
engine axis (B).
334A2087 Fig. 87
334A2088 Fig. 88
MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN A2.45
Piston protrusion measurement

Use checking tool P/N 8180 (1).
1 Calibrate the checking tool.
– Fit the calibrating rule under the base.
– Calibrate the dial indicator gauge to zero.
– Remove the rule.
2 Checking tool installation
– Position the checking tool on the cylinder to be checked.
3 Piston protrusion measurement
– Bring the piston to the top dead centre using the dial indicator
gauge and the engine displacement tool.
– Directly read the piston protrusion value with respect to the
gasket face of the engine block.
– Move the apparatus along the longitudinal axis of the engine,
and record a second value.
– Calculate the average of the 2 values. 334A2089 Fig. 89
4 Check the values indicated in chapter «Dimensional
specifications».
5 If the protrusion exceeds the dimensions specified, check
all the parts involved to determine its cause.
1 Liner bore pin
2 Piston at TDC
334A2090 Fig. 90
334A2091 Fig. 91
A2.46 MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
Crankshaft, bearings, and flywheel
Bearing bush fitting

1 Bearing bush installation. Check that the bearing bush
tabs (A) are engaged in the slots (B) in the cylinder block and
the bearing seats. Also check that the bearing bush lubrication
holes (C) are aligned with the oil passages in the block (D).
During assembly, apply a thick layer of clean engine oil:
– on all cylinder block bearings,
– on both sides of the bearing bushes,
– on the outside diameter of the journals.
2 Fit the thrust bearing bush (E) in the rear bearing (F) of the
cylinder block after dipping them in clean engine oil.
A Tabs in the bearing bush
B Slot in the block
C Lubrication holes in the bearing bush 334A2092 Fig. 92
D Oil passages in the block
E Rear thrust bearing bush.
334A2093 Fig. 93
334A2094 Fig. 94
MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN A2.47
Bearing cap assembly

1 Apply a layer of clean engine oil on the bearing bushes.
Fully dip the bolts in clean engine oil and position them on the
bearing caps.
IMPORTANT: Check that the bearing caps are installed in

their initial location. The numbers (B) stamped on the caps
must be identical to those stamped on the block cup rail. The
arrows (C) on the cap must be turned towards the block
camshaft side.
2 Install the bearing caps so that the tabs (A) of the cap and
the cylinder block are all on the same side of the cylinder
block.
3 Fit all bolts and tighten them manually.
4 Tighten all the bolts on the bearing caps to 13.5daN.m
334A2095 Fig. 95
EXCEPT the rear (thrust) bearing cap bolts.
5 Before tightening the rear bearing cap bolts, align the upper
and lower bearing bushes as follows: using a lever, set the
tool between a crankshaft balancer mass and a partition of the
cylinder block. Then push the crankshaft forward then
backward to align the stop bearing bushes.
6 Tighten the (thrust) bolts on the rear bearing cap to
13.5daN.m.
7 Turn the crankshaft manually. If it does not rotate easily,
disassemble the parts and determine its cause.
8 Check the end float (see specifications at the beginning of
this chapter).
Crankshaft regrinding
If the faces show ovality, if they are tapered, scratched or
damaged in any way, regrind them and fit the 0.25-mm repair
dimension bearing bushes.
334A2096 Fig. 96
IMPORTANT: Have the crankshaft reground only by a skilled
person, on a machine enabling to comply with the specified
tolerances.
A2.48 MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
Flywheel removal
1 Remove the two securing screws and replace them by
studs (1), then remove the other securing screws.
Note: Locally manufacture 2 studs using 2 bolts

P/N 6005 021 489.
2 Screw two bolts (P/N 6005 021 489) in the tapped holes
(A) to push the flywheel off the crankshaft and ease its
handling.
CAUTION: As the flywheel is heavy, appropriate lifting

equipment is required to prevent accidents.
Replacing the flywheel ring gear

1 Extract the ring gear from the flywheel using a brass drift
and a hammer. 334A2097 Fig. 97
2 Heat the new ring gear to 150 °C in an oil bath, in an
appropriate oven or using a flame.
CAUTION: The oil and its fumes are flammable from 190 °C.
Use a thermometer and ensure you do not exceed 180 °C.
Heat the oil in a well ventilated room. Take care when handling
hot oil: burn hazard!
IMPORTANT: If the ring gear is heated using a flame, check

that the heat is applied evenly over the entire circumference
of the ring gear.
3 Shrink on the ring gear to fit it correctly onto the flywheel

shoulder. The chamfer (A) of the teeth must be turned towards
the engine.
Note: Check that the ring gear is supported all around the
flywheel shoulder.
334A2098 Fig. 98
334A2099 Fig. 99
MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN A2.49
Installing the engine flywheel casing

2
1 Clean the gasket faces of the cylinder block and flywheel
casing.
2 Install the casing seal (1) and the seal (2) (without sealing
compound).
3 Fit the flywheel casing onto the cylinder block and tighten
the securing bolts to the following tightening torques: Refer
to chapter «Tightening torques».
Flywheel installation
1 Fit the flywheel onto the studs, and slide it against the
crankshaft.
IMPORTANT: Always replace the flywheel bolts when it has

been removed. 1
2 Apply Loctite 242 (Frenetanch) to the thread of bolts
334A2100 Fig. 100
(E) and start tightening the bolts in the crankshaft. Remove
the centring studs and screw the last two bolts. Refer to
chapter «Tightening torques».
334A2101 Fig. 101
A2.50 60 05 029 684 - 10.2003 - EN

Replacing the rear bearing seal

Removal
1 Fit and centre tool P/N 5509 (1) on the rear end of the
crankshaft. Then use retaining ring pliers and place the tool’s
ring narrow shoulder (2) behind the rim and the inside cage of
the seal.
2 Hold the assembled parts using a clamp (3), then progressively
tighten the bolt (4) until the inside cage of the seal is extracted. 334A2102 Fig. 102
3 Cut and remove the sealing lip (5) which is now accessible.
334A2103 Fig. 103
4 Using a punch and hammer, push the outside cage of the seal
towards the engine until the cage swivels.
334A2104 Fig. 104
5 Extract the seal cage (6) using a slide hammer.
334A2105 Fig. 105
Installation (rear bearing seal)

1 Apply a fine layer of Loctite 518 on the edge of the
crankshaft flange.
2 Secure the guide P/N 5510 (A) on the end of the crankshaft
using bolts.
3 Position the new rear bearing seal (1) on the guide ensuring
that the seal opening is turned towards the engine.
334A2106 Fig. 106
MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN A2.51
4 Slide the fitting tool (B) onto the guide (A) and progressively
tighten the nut (C) until the tool contacts the guide.
334A2107 Fig. 107
334A2108 Fig. 108
Replacing the front bearing seal

Extract the bearing seal (A) from the distributor casing using
a slide hammer (B) as follows:
1 Punch the seal metal strap and drill a hole.
2 Fit the slide hammer, then extract the bearing seal.
CAUTION: Do not damage the distributor casing seal bore.
3 Inspect and clean the distributor casing seal bore.
IMPORTANT: Replace the wear bush whenever the front bearing 334A2109 Fig. 109
seal is replaced.
334A2110 Fig. 110
A2.52 60 05
60 029 693684
05 029 - 10.2003 - EN- E
- 10.2003
Removing the crankshaft wear bush

1 Lock the flywheel using locking pin P/N 5500.
2 Unscrew the bolt (A) and position the socket (B) of tool P/
N 5533 on the nose of the crankshaft until the inside threaded
diameter (B) is engaged on the bush (C).
3 Stop screwing the socket (B) when the wear bush (C)
starts turning.
4 Turn the extraction bolt (A) to extract the wear bush from
the crankshaft nose. Stop when the distance between the
334A2111 Fig. 111
crankshaft and the edge of the bush is 4mm.
334A2112 Fig. 112
5 Install the three jaws (D). Place the end of the jaws behind the
edge of the wear bush.
6 Install the threaded washer (E) inside the jaws, then slide
the tube (F) on the latter in order to lock the part assembly.
7 Extract the wear bush by tightening the bolt (G).
8 Clean and check the crankshaft nose before installing the
wear bush.
334A2113 Fig. 113
334A2114 Fig. 114 334A2115 Fig. 115
MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN A2.53
Installing the crankshaft wear bush

1 Smear the inside of the new wear bush (A) with Loctite
518.
2 Install the wear bush onto the crankshaft nose turning the
edge (B) of the bush towards the crankshaft.
3 Fit the installation tool (C) supplied with the wear bush.
Install the wear bush using a soft face hammer until the
tool is supported against the crankshaft nose.
Note: The edge of the wear bush must be in contact with the 334A2116 Fig. 116
crankshaft pinion.
4 Eliminate all sealing product spilt during the installation of

the wear bush.
Installing the front bearing seal
1 Inspect and clean the distributor casing seal bore. Check that
it has no dents, nor burrs.
2 Install the guide (D) of tool P/N 5534 on the crankshaft
nose and tighten the bolts.
3 Apply a fine layer of clean engine oil on the seal lips, and
position it on the guide (D). 334A2117 Fig. 117
IMPORTANT: Do not apply oil to the outside diameter of the

seal.
4 Fit tool P/N 5534 (E) on its guide and tighten the nut (F)
until the tool (E) is in contact with the crankshaft nose.
334A2118 Fig. 118
334A2119 Fig. 119
A2.54 60 05 029 684 - 10.2003 - EN

Distributor casing removal

1 Drain the cooling system and the oil in the casing.
2 Remove the closing plate (A) of the cooler.
3 Remove the pulley and the fan bracket (B).
4 Remove the crankshaft pulley.
5 Remove the water pump by-pass tube (F).
6 Unlock the bolts (C) of the oil casing to remove the
distributor casing.
7 Remove the nuts (E) and the bolts (D).
8 Remove the remaining bolts after marking them.
334A2120 Fig. 120
334A2121 Fig. 121
334A2122 Fig. 122
MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN A2.55
Camshaft, balancer shafts and

distributor
Measuring the backlash between the

pinion teeth
Use a dial indicator gauge to measure the backlash between
the pinion teeth and compare the values measured with the
«Specifications». If the backlash between the teeth is not
correct, replace the pinions.
A Camshaft pinion/upper intermediate pinion
B Injection pump pinion/upper intermediate pinion
C Upper intermediate pinion/crankshaft pinion
D Crankshaft pinion/lower intermediate pinion
E Oil pump pinion/lower intermediate pinion
F Balancer shaft/hydraulic pump pinion
G Balancer shaft/lower intermediate pinion 334A2123 Fig. 123
H Camshaft/power take-off
Balancer shaft removal

IMPORTANT: During removal, mark the left and right balancer
shafts to ensure correct installation. A mark «R» for right and
«L» for left are engraved on the face of the rear bearing of the
balancer shaft, in order to help their identification. The journals
of the shafts have been honed in a specific direction and there
is a risk of premature wear of the shafts and bushes if the right
and left shafts are reversed.
1 Remove the lower intermediate pinion and the oil pump

pinion.
2 Remove the counterweights (A) on the balancer shafts,
according to the equipment.
3 Loosen the bolts (B) and extract the balancer shafts from
the cylinder block.
334A2124 Fig. 124
Note: do not damage the journals, nor the bushes when
removing the balancer shafts.
334A2125 Fig. 125
A2.56 MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
Front plate removal

To remove the front plate, first remove the following
components:
– the distributor casing;
– the camshaft;
– the balancer shafts;
– the upper intermediate pinion;
– the injection pump;
– the lower intermediate pinion;
– the oil pump;
– the auxiliary hydraulic pump. 334A2126 Fig. 126
1 Remove the 4 TORX® countersunk head screws (A) from
the front plate.
2 Remove the 6 threaded studs (B) and (C).
3 Remove the front plate (D).
4 Remove the oil by-pass valve and the spring (E).
334A2127 Fig. 127
Removal/installation of the camshaft

pinion
1 Extract the pinion using a hydraulic press.
2 Inspect and check the camshaft and replace if required.
3 For reassembly, support the camshaft under the first jour-
nal (bearing) and place the assembly under a hydraulic press.
4 Smear the camshaft nose and the pinion bore with high
temperature grease.
334A2128 Fig. 128
5 Fit the Woodruff key in the camshaft nose.
6 Install the pinion so that the mark (A) is facing the distributor
casing. Then push the pinion onto the camshaft nose.
334A2129 Fig. 129
60 05 029 684 - 10.2003 - EN A2.57

Removal/installation of the crankshaft

pinion
1 Lock the flywheel using locking pin P/N 5500.
2 Remove the distributor casing, the oil pump, the upper and
lower intermediate pinions, and the front plate.
3 Use an appropriate extractor, then remove the crankshaft
pinion.
4 For assembly, heat the pinion to 148°C, in the oven. If the
heat of a flame is used, ensure the pinion is heated all around
334A2130 Fig. 130
its circumference. DO NOT OVERHEAT.
5 Install the guide (B) of tool P/N 5534 on the crankshaft
nose and tighten the bolts.
6 Fit the pinion (heated to 148°C) on the crankshaft nose.
Ensure that the key (D) is properly aligned with the keyway in
the pinion.
7 Place the tool (C) of tool P/N 5534 on its guide (B) and
tighten the nut (E) until the pinion is pushed against the
crankshaft flange. Let the pinion cool down before removing
the tool.
334A2131 Fig. 131
Pinion pin replacement

1 Insert the spring pins in the lower idle pinion pins (A) and
upper idle pinion pins (B) observing the protrusion value (C)
with respect to the pin.
C = 2.79 to 4.83 mm.
2 Fit the stop washer (D) and the upper pinion pin. Push the
pin (B) into the front plate until the washer is completely pushed
in and locked.
IMPORTANT: The greasing holes for the upper pin must be

properly aligned to enable adequate lubrication of the upper 334A2132 Fig. 132
intermediate pinion bush.
334A2133 Fig. 133
A2.58 MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
Removal/installation of the auxiliary drive

bearing
1 Remove the oil pipe (A).
2 Remove the bearing (B) by unscrewing the bolts (C).
3 Repair or replace the bearing as required.
4 Fit a new seal on the bearing and install the assembly on
the engine.
5 Tighten the bolts to: 9.5daN.m
6 Connect the oil pipe.
334A2134 Fig. 134
Front plate installation

1 If not yet done, using a scraper, remove any sealing
compound previously applied.
IMPORTANT: Ensure there is no oil, remaining sealing

compound or cleaning products on the cylinder block and the
front plate.
2 As shown in the diagram opposite, apply a regular bead

(E) of Loctite 515 on the cylinder block.
3 Apply the bead in the middle of the assembled surfaces
and completely surround the bolt holes.
4 Install the front plate (D) and tighten the bolts (A) and the
studs (B) and (C) to the torque specified in chapter «Tightening
torques».
Note: Do not forget to install the by-pass valve before 334A2135 Fig. 135
assembling the front plate.
334A2136 Fig. 136
MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN A2.59
Balancer shaft installation

1 Smear with clean engine oil the balancer shaft bushes in
the cylinder block, as well as the shaft journals.
IMPORTANT: Do not swap the shafts; if the pinions are

removed from the shafts upon disassembly, and reversed,
fit new bushes.
2 Fit the balancer shafts and the stop plates, and tighten the
bolts (B) to 4daN.m.
3 Fit the counterweights (A) onto the balancer shafts on the 334A2137 Fig. 137
counterbore side (C). The counterweights must be opposed to
the keys (D).
334A2138 Fig. 138
Upper distributor assembly

1 Bring piston No. 1 to the TDC using flywheel rotator P/N
5501. Install locking pin P/N 5500 in the flywheel and pin P/N
5575 in the injection pump.
2 Fit the camshaft and the injection pump.
3 Turn the crankshaft until the marker (A) is aligned with the
distributor tool P/N 5511 (mark 1).
4 Smear the shaft and the pinion sleeve with high temperature
grease.
334A2139 Fig. 139
5 Fit the upper intermediate pinion (C) on its shaft, ensuring
that neither the camshaft pinion nor that of the injection pump
rotate.
6 Fit the washer and the bolt, tighten it to 7daN.m.
7 Check the pinion distribution again.
334A2140 Fig. 140
A2.60 MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
Lower distribution assembly

1 Bring piston No.1 to the TDC using the flywheel rotator
No.5501 and the adjustment pin No. 5500.
2 Fit the oil pump and the balancer shafts.
3 Turn the right-hand balancer shaft until the marker (A) is
aligned with the distributor tool P/N 5511 (1).
4 Fit the lower intermediate pinion without turning the balan-
cer shaft.
Note: Install the stop washer orienting the «X» marker opposite
the pinion. Tighten the bolt to 7daN.m (oil the bolt).
5 Repeat operation 3 with the left-hand balancer shaft.

6 Fit the oil pump pinion on its shaft. Tighten the nut to
5daN.m and lock it with three punch strokes.
334A2141 Fig. 141
7 Check again the timing of the two balancer shafts.
IMPORTANT: When adjusting the balancer shafts, the keyway

on the shafts must be in the up position (12 o’clock), the markers
of the two pinions being turned inside towards the end of the
crankshaft.
334A2142 Fig. 142
Distributor casing assembly

1 Check that the casing and front plate gasket faces are
clean.
2 Fit the access cover (C) to the injection pump pinion nut
using a new seal (D) if required. Tighten the bolts to 0.6daN.m.
3 Install the gasket seal (A) and cut it in the lower part to
ensure it contacts the oil casing seal.
4 Install the distributor casing (B). Smear the bolt (E) with
sealing compound. Tighten the bolts and nuts to 3.5 daN.m.
334A2143 Fig. 143
MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN A2.61
Lubrication
Cooler removal
1 Drain the engine block and remove the plug (A) to drain
the cooling fluid remaining in the casing (D).
2 Remove the closing plate (B) and the elbowed adapter
(C).
3 Remove the casing (D) and the cooler (E).
Oil cooler inspection

1 Check that the oil cooler (E) is not damaged, nor clogged,
or that it has no leaks which could mix the oil and the cooling
fluid.
2 Rinse the oil cooler to eliminate all the debris which could
be in the harness.
334A2144 Fig. 144
3 Test the oil cooler under pressure in a liquid using

compressed air if you suspect that oil and cooling fluid are
mixing. The oil cooler should present no leak under a pres-
sure of 1.4 to 1.7 bar for at least 30 seconds.
4 Inspect the oil cooler casing (D).
5 Replace parts as required. Do not attempt to repair the oil
cooler.
334A2145 Fig. 145
Oil cooler installation

1 Lubricate the new O-rings (F) with clean engine oil.
2 Install the oil cooler (E) in the oil cooler casing (D).
3 Apply Loctite 242 (Frenetanch) on the bolts securing the
oil cooler to the oil cooler casing. Tighten the bolts to 1.2 daN.m.
334A2146 Fig. 146
A2.62 MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
Oil pressure valve removal/installation

Removal
1 Remove the distributor casing.
2 Install the extractor (A), on the oil pressure valve (B).
Check that the tabs (D) are properly engaged in the valve
openings (C).
3 Install the sleeve (E) on the extractor untill it is completely
covered.
4 Screw the slide-hammer (F) on the extractor and remove
the valve.
334A2147 Fig. 147
Note: To remove the extractor valve, turn the extractor on the
valve till the tabs come out of the openings and remove the
extractor.
Installation 1 Position the fitting tool (A) in the valve (B).

Note: it is recommended to install the valve only after having 2 Using a hammer, install the valve in the engine block bore
installed the front plate. The plate retaining studs thus protect (C) until it is correctly seated.
the valve.
334A2148 Fig. 148 334A2149 Fig. 149
334A2150 Fig. 150 334A2151 Fig. 151
MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN A2.63
By-pass replacement
1 Remove the distributor casing and the front plate.
2 Remove the by-pass (1) and the spring (2) and check their
condition.
3 Check the spring (2) strength for a length of 29mm: 87.8 N.
4 Fit the by-pass and the spring.
5 Fit the front plate and the distributor cover.
334A2152 Fig. 152
Oil pump removal

1 Remove the oil sump and the distributor cover.
2 Remove the nut (A) and remove the pinion (B) from the oil
pump tapered drive shaft. To remove the oil pump pinion,
unscrew the nut by several turns, and apply a force between
the front plate and the pinion on both sides of the pinion using
a small lever. If the method indicated above is not successful,
unscrew the bolts on the oil pump body and hit the nut at the
end of the shaft using a small lead head hammer, while applying
a force on the pinion until it comes off the tapered shaft.
3 Remove the suction strainer (C) from the oil pump, by
unscrewing the 2 bolts (D).
4 Remove the other two bolts (D) and the cover (E).
5 The bolt (F) of the lower intermediate pinion must be
removed to remove the body of the oil pump (G). 334A2153 Fig. 153
334A2154 Fig. 154
A2.64 MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
Oil pump installation
334A2155 Fig. 155
1 Cylinder block seal 4 Outlet pipe 7 Bolt (4)

2 O-ring (outlet pipe) 5 Strainer 8 Drive pinion
3 O-ring (strainer pipe) 6 Pump casing 9 Nut
1 Fit the new seal (1) in the cylinder block.

2 Fit the new O-rings (2) and (3) in the pump body at the
discharge pipe and on the strainer tube (5).
3 Fit the drive shaft and the intermediate pinion in the pump
body (6). The two pinions must rotate freely.
4 Install the pump cover and the suction strainer on the pump
body.
5 Tighten the four bolts (7) to 3.5daN.m and the bolt of the
lower intermediate pinion to 8daN.m according to the sequence 334A2156
Fig. 156
indicated in the diagram opposite.
6 Fit the pump drive pinion (8) and tighten the nut (9) to
5 daN.m.
7 Lock the nut with three punch strokes.
334A2157 Fig. 157
MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN A2.65
Fitting the oil sump

7 Apply a coat of Loctite 515 (or equivalent sealing
compound) on the gasket face of the oil sump, at the location
where the flywheel casing, the front plate and the distributor
cover are fitted on the cylinder block.
2 Choose and fit the seal matching the oil sump used.
3 Fit the oil casing and tighten the various bolts referring to
chapter «Tightening torques».
334A2158 Fig. 158
Fitting the filler tube guide on the oil sump

Note: This type of guide is also used as oil filling tube
1 Remove the filler tube guide.

2 Clean the oil sump gasket face.
3 Apply a coat of Loctite 515 sealing compound, then fit the
filler tube guide.
4 Tighten the bolts to 5daN.m.
334A2159 Fig. 159
A2.66 MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
Cooling
Water pump
334A2160 Fig. 160
Water pump removal

1 Drain the cooling fluid.
2 Remove the piping (J) connecting the thermostat casing to
the water pump.
3 Remove the inlet elbow (K).
4 Remove the water pump (D).
5 Remove the water pump pulley.
334A2161 Fig. 161
334A2162 Fig. 162
MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN A2.67
Water pump disassembly

1 Remove the inside retaining ring from the pump body front
bore.
2 Support the front face of the water pump body and press
the shaft on the turbine side (A) until the latter is pulled off the
shaft, and the shaft/bearing assembly is removed from the
body. Discard the turbine.
334A2163 Fig. 163
3 Push out the seal (B) from the pump body.
334A2164 Fig. 164
4 Support the inside bearing bush and press the shaft (C) to
extract the bearing. Discard the bearing.
334A2165 Fig. 165
A2.68 MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
Water pump assembly

1 Clean and carefully inspect the assembly surface of the
water pump in the distributor casing before installing it.
2 Install the outside circlip (C) in the groove shaft (B) using
appropriate circlip pliers.
3 Fit the bearing (A) on the shaft against the circlip, using an
appropriate mandrel supported on the bearing inside bush.
IMPORTANT: Do not press the end of the bearing shaft. Push

only the outside bush of the bearing when installing the bearing 334A2166 Fig. 166
and shaft assembly in the body.
4 Install the bearing and shaft assembly in the body by pushing

until it reaches the bottom of the body bore using a mandrel
(D).
5 Install the large inside circlip in the groove of the pump
body front bore.
Note: The water pumps are fitted with a single part water sealing
gasket.
6 Install the seal (dry) on the water pump shaft and in the
body pushing it in properly in the body using the tool provided
with the seal kit.
7 Support the front nose of the water pump shaft. 334A2167 Fig. 167
IMPORTANT: When installing the turbine, press only the brass

bush (E), otherwise the turbine could crack.
8 Using an appropriate mandrel, install the turbine on the

shaft according to the dimensions specified below. Gap between
the turbine and the end of the shaft: on the same level ± 0.13mm
as the end of the shaft.
9 Turn the turbine a full turn by hand, and check the clea-
rance between the turbine and the body using a set of feeler
gauges. Minimum clearance between the body and the turbine:
0.27 mm.
334A2168 Fig. 168
334A2169 Fig. 169
MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN A2.69
Removal/installation of the
automatic belt tensioner
(spring-operated)
CAUTION: The thread of the automatic tensioner bolt (A) is a
left-hand thread.
1 Loosen the tension on the belt using a wrench and a socket.

2 Remove the V-ribbed belt from the pulleys.
3 Remove the belt tensioner.
4 Install the tensioner and tighten the bolts to 5daN.m.
334A2170 Fig. 170
Removal/installation of the hub and

inspection of the fan support
1 Support the rear of the fan hub (A) and, using a mandrel
and a hydraulic press, push out the shaft (B).
2 Clean and inspect the bearing/shaft bore.
3 If one of the parts is damaged or worn, replace the assembly.
Note: the support should be installed taking care to align the

holes:
– D and 1;
– E and 3.
334A2171 Fig. 171
A2.70 MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
Checking and replacing the thermostat

1 Drain part of the system cooling fluid.
2 Remove the tube (A) connecting the thermostat cover to
the water pump.
3 Remove the thermostat cover (B).
4 Extract the thermostat (C).
5 In hot water, check the thermostat opening and closing
temperatures (see chapters «Specifications and diagnosis»).
6 Remove and discard the old seals (D) and (E). Clean the
seal faces on the cover (B) and the cylinder head.
7 Install the new seal (E) on the cylinder head, while
maintaining it in place using centring studs (F).
8 Install the thermostat (C) in its cover (B) while maintaining
the thermostat (F) in place using a screwdriver. Tighten the 2
334A2172 Fig. 172
bolts to 7daN.m.
9 Lubricate the new seal (D) with universal grease before
installing it on the thermostat cover (B).
10 Fit the tube (A) connecting the thermostat cover (B) to the
water pump, then tighten the clamps (H).
11 Fill the cooling system to check there are no leaks.
334A2173 Fig. 173
334A2174 Fig. 174
MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN A2.71
Drive belt replacement

1 Inspect the moulded stops (2) and (3) located on the belt
tensioner (1).
2 If the stop (2) on the tensioner swivel arm contacts the
fixed stop (3), check the condition of the various pulleys on
which the belt passes. If nothing abnormal is noticed, replace
the belt.
3 To replace, loosen the belt tension using a wrench placed
on the pulley (B).
4 Remove the old belt from the pulleys, then cut it.
5 Slide the new belt between the fan (4) and the cooling
nozzle (5).
6 Fit the new belt according to its passage on the various
pulleys (see diagram opposite).
334A2175 Fig. 175
7 Tension the belt using the tensioner (B). Remove the
wrench.
Legend of the markings on figure 177:

1 Without air conditioning or air brake system.
2 With air conditioning without air brake system or without
air conditioning with air brake system.
3 With air conditioning and air brake system.AAlternator
B Tensioner roller
C Water pump
D Cranckshaft
E Refrigeration compressor
F Transmission roller
G Fan pulley
H Air compressor
334A2176 Fig. 176
<100 ch 100ch
H H
A G A B E A B H G F A B A B E F A H F
2
1 3 1 2 3 E
B C D C D F G C D E C D G C D G B C D G
334A2177 Fig. 177
A2.72 MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
Turbocharger
Checking the shaft radial clearance

1 Mount on the turbocharger a dial indicator gauge fitted
onto a support with a graduated extension, and place the
graduated extension on the shaft of the compressor, passing it
through the lubrication orifice.
2 Alternately push and pull the compressor shaft.
3 With equal pressure applied to both ends of the shaft, the
clearance should not exceed the values indicated in chapter
«Dimensional specifications».
Checking the shaft end float

1 Using a dial indicator gauge contacting the shaft, measure
the end float.
2 Move the shaft axially by hand in both directions and com-
pare the value read with the values specified in chapter
«Dimensional specifications».
Turbocharger reconditioning
IMPORTANT: It is difficult to recondition a turbocharger
without the tools and training required: Do not totally
disassemble a turbocharger. If a turbocharger is defective
after checking, replace it.
334A2178 Fig. 178
60 05 029 684 - 10.2003 - EN A2.73

Diagnostics
Sheet No. 1 «Excessive oil consumption»

Prior to this procedure, check the tightness on the outside pipes and the cap seals.
334A2179 Fig. 179
A2.74 MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
Diagnostics
Inspection procedure of
the cylinder head gasket
Before removing the cylinder head, perform the following
checks:
1. Visual check
– Presence of cooling fluid at the cylinder head seal.
– Presence of cooling fluid in the engine casing.
– Insufficient level of cooling fluid.
– High oil level.
– Presence of cooling fluid in the engine breather (A).
2. Pressurized testing of the cooling

A
system
Before testing, make sure the engine is warm.
Let the engine cool down and carefully remove the 334A2180 Fig. 180
radiator cap. If no leak is visible, but pressure
drops, there may be an internal leak of cooling fluid
or at the seal between the block and the cylinder head.
334A2181 Fig. 181
MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN A2.75
Diagnostics
Sheet No. 2 «Engine oil pressure too high»

Prior to this procedure, check the level and quality of the oil and the oil filter.
334A2182 Fig. 182
A2.76 MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
Diagnostics
Procedure for checking high oil

pressure in the engine casing.
Excessive gas pressure inside the breather pipe may be
caused by a sealing defect on the turbocharger or the piston
rings.
– Remove the turbo oil return pipe (A) and direct the oil into a
container.
– Start the engine, at maximum off-load speed.
– Check whether the supercharging pressure expels the oil into
the drain pipe.
Yes: ¤ turbo tightness problem.
No; ¤ the gas pressure is present at the breather pipe and, in
that case, check the ring/liner seal.
334A2183 Fig. 183
Checking the turbocharger oil seal

tightness
– Check that the oil return pipe (A) is neither twisted, nor
cracked. Replace it if required.
– Check there is no obstruction in the air filter, hoses, and
connecting tube.
– Check there is no obstruction in the exhaust system, also
check the proper position of the exhaust orifice.
334A2184 Fig. 184
MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN A2.77
Diagnostics
Sheet No. 3 «Engine oil pressure too low»

Before applying this procedure, check the level and quality of the oil, the oil filter, and the operation of the oil pressure switch.
334A2185 Fig. 185
A2.78 MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
Diagnostics
Sheet No. 4 “Cooling fluid temperature too high”

Before applying this procedure, check the quality and quantity of cooling fluid. Check there are no leaks in the engine outside
system.
334A2186 Fig. 186
MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN A2.79
Thermostat inspection
Cooling fluid temperature too low
Defective thermostat
Check
Heat water in a container and check the thermostat triggering
temperatures. Stir while water is heating.
Caution: When heating the water, keep the thermostat or
thermometer away from the edge or bottom of the container.
This could result in overheating and breaking.
Take the thermostat out of the water and check its closing as
it cools down. At room temperature, the thermostat must close
completely (as soon as its temperature reaches 80°C), slowly
and progressively. Otherwise, replace it.
Reminder of the triggering values 334A2187 Fig. 187

Nominal opening value: 82°C.
Initial opening: 80 -84°C.
Full opening (nominal): 94°C.
A2.80 60 05 029 684 - 10.2003 - EN

Cylinder head gasket inspection
Cylinder head gasket diagnosis

procedure
Three types of seal failures

can occur
– combustion gas sealing defective,
– cooling system sealing defective,
– lubrication system sealing defective.
Visual inspection to be carried out

before any intervention on the
cylinder head gasket
– Presence of oil or cooling fluid on the seal bead or adjacent
surfaces.
– Seal displaced with respect to its normal position.
– Discoloration or presence of soot caused by a combustion
gas leak.
– Leak at the radiators (oil and water), the tank, overflow, or pipe
hoses.
– Cooling fluid leak at the water pump bleed hole.
Combustion gas sealing

Symptoms
– Gas exhausting through the cylinder head gasket. A: Combustion gas sealing surface
– Air bubbles in the water radiator or the overflow tank. B: Oil sealing surfaces
– Cooling fluid discharged through the overflow hose. C: Cooling fluid sealing surfaces
– Engine overheating.
– Loss of power.
– Irregular engine running.
– White smoke at the exhaust pipe.
– Loss of heating in driver’s cab.
334A2188 Fig. 188
– Seal off its seat or absent (ejection).
– Cooling fluid in a cylinder. – Engine block cracked in the liner support area.
– Cooling fluid in the engine casing oil. – Excessive fuel supply.
– Insufficient level of cooling fluid. – Injection pump timing too advanced.
– Hydraulic or mechanical disturbance of the combustion seal.
Possibles causes
– Insufficient liner protrusion.
– Excessive difference of liner protrusion between cylinders.
– Insufficient tightening torque.
– Roughness, damaged surface on the liner rim.
– Cracks, distortion on the gasket combustion heel.
– Distorted, damaged, or irregular cylinder head surface.
– Fire ring section of the seal missing or displaced.
Note: In case of cracked cylinder head or liner, combustion

gas might also flow in the cooling fluid.
MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN A2.81
Cylinder head gasket inspection
Cooling fluid sealing Oil circuit sealing

Symptoms Symptoms
– Discharge of cooling fluid through the cylinder head gasket – Oil discharge through the cylinder head gasket slot.
slot. – Oil in the cooling fluid.
– Cooling fluid in the oil pan. – Insufficient oil level in the engine casing.
– Insufficient level in the tank. – Restricted oil supply to the push rods (abnormal noises).
– High oil level.
– Discharge of cooling fluid through the engine casing vent. Possibles causes
– Excessive liner protrusion.
Possibles causes – Excessive difference of liner protrusion between cylinders.
– Excessive liner protrusion. – Insufficient tightening torque.
– Excessive difference of liner protrusion between cylinders. – Distorted, damaged, or irregular engine block surface.
– Insufficient tightening torque. – Distorted, damaged, or irregular cylinder head surface.
– Distorted, damaged, or irregular engine block surface. – Oil or fluid overheating.
– Distorted, damaged, or irregular cylinder head surface. – Cracks, folds in the gasket surfaces.
– Oil or fluid overheating. – Damages, punctures in the elastomer ribs.
– Cracks, folds in the gasket surfaces. – O-ring damaged or missing at the push rod oil supply port.
– Damages, punctures in the elastomer ribs.
Important: A defective oil cooler can cause the presence of oil
in the cooling fluid.
A2.82 MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
TOOLS
Tools for supply, injection and D.P.S. engine
Tools for engine
60 05 005 500 5500 60 05 005 501 5501
– Locking pin – Flywheel rotation tool
60 05 005 503 5503 60 05 005 504 5504
– Extractor for pencil-type injectors – Liner removal/installation tool
60 05 005 505 5505 60 05 005 507 5507
4045 TRT 72 engines
– Tool for connecting rod bushes «35 dia. pin» – Ring groove wear gauge
A2.84 MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
Tools for engine
60 05 005 513 5513 60 05 005 514 5514
– Injection seal installation tool – Injection pump extractor
60 05 005 515 5515 60 05 005 519 5519
– Cleaning tool for “pencil-type injector” bores

– Fuel pipe (calibration pump)
60 05 005 563 5563 60 05 005 516 5516
4045 DRT 70 – 4045 TRT 70/71 engine
– Pencil-type injector adapter for compression gauge

– Ring groove wear gauge P/N 8122
MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN A2.85
Tools for engine
60 05 005 517 5517 60 05 005 520 5520
– Tap for cleaning the threads on the cylinder block «bolt- – Set of camshaft bush extraction tools
cylinder head»
60 05 005 531 5531 60 05 005 532 5532
• Set of camshaft bush extraction tools to be used with tool

P/N 5520:
– 1 stud with tapered ends (M8 x 1.25) – Set of tools for removal/installation of the tapered end
– 3 studs with flat ends (M8 x 1.25) connecting rod bush
60 05 005 533 5533 60 05 005 534 5534
– Wear bush removal/installation tool – Installation tool for crankshaft front bearing and pinion
A2.86 MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
Tools for engine
60 05 005 573 5573 60 05 005 574 5574
– Oil pressure valve extractor – Tool for injector pressure adjustment screw
60 05 005 575 5575 60 05 005 576 5576
– Locking pin for DE10 injection pump – Flywheel locking pin
MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN A2.87
Personal notes:
A2.88 MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
ELECTRICITY
Chapter F
Celtis Edition 03.2004

60 05 029 684 - 03.2004 - EN
60 05 029 684 - 03.2004 - EN
GENERAL CONTENTS Aid to using the MR - Electricity Chapter
Search from the schematic diagram by function
Facing the schematic diagrams are some connectors that provide additional help in understanding the diagram.
ITEM LIST ...........................................................................................................................................................................................F.2 Search from a wire number
WIRING AND GENERAL LISTS .........................................................................................................................................................F.3 Example: 300.
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS ACCORDING TO FUNCTIONS................................................................................................................F.5 Refer to the plate "Wiring and general list", find in the figures in brackets : the example corresponds to the harness 3/1.
CONNECTOR AND HARNESS TRACKING ....................................................................................................................................F.39 Once the connector is identified, go to the chapter "Harness path and connectors" for the identification of the wire.
With this designation, refer to the corresponding function diagram or use the name of the connector.
TOOLS Search from a connector identified by the wiring path

With the designation of the wire, refer to the corresponding function diagram or use the name of the connector.
ELECTRICITY TOOLS......................................................................................................................................................................F.65 IMPORTANT: Some diagrams by function represent the versions with a maximum of options.
The wire markers may be different from one option to another or from one variant to another. Refer to the chapter "Harness
path and connectors" for the exact validity of the wire markers according to options.
Colour legend Abbreviations :

MR = Brown + AVC = More before contact
BU = Blue + APC = More after contact
NO = Black MINI = small fuse
RG = Red 4 WD = 4 wheel drive
VE = Green Cde = Controls
GR = Grey Tdb = Control panel
BC = White ATO = standard fuse
VI = Purple 2 WD = 2 wheel drive
JA = Yellow
60 05 029 684 - 03.2004 - EN

Notes Notes
60 05 029 684 - 03.2004 - EN

ITEM LIST
WIRING AND GENERAL LISTS
60 05 029 684 - 03.2004 - EN F.1

Item list
1 Rotating beacon. 188 Reverser control (ISC).
2a RH dipped light. 189a Clutch switch (ISC) De-clutched position.
2b RH headlight. 189b Clutch switch (ISC) Clutched position.
3a LH headlight.
192 Forward drive solenoid valve.
3b LH headlight.
193 Reverse drive solenoid valve.
4 RH side light.
196 PTO safety shunt switch.
5 LH side light.
8 Outside RH rear work light. 197 Accelerator control potentiometer.
10 RH rear side light. 200 Engine oil pressure switch.
11 LH rear side light. 201 Engine water temperature thermistor.
12 Number plate light. 202 Fuel gauge.
24 Engine calculator. 203 Left and right brake pedal contact.
25 Injection stop solenoid valve.
204 Handbrake switch.
27 Reverser module speed sensor.
205 Starting up safety engaged speed contact (BV).
30 Battery.
206 Air filter clogging valve.
31 Alternator.
226 Preheating spark plug relay.
32 Starter.
234 Front axle solenoid valve switch.
34 Preheating sparking plugs.
262 Diagnostic plug.
37 Tractor advance speed sensor (transmission).
405 Air temperature sensor.
40 Front power take-off switch.
406 Fuel temperature sensor.
46 Rear work light switch.
47 Front windscreen washer switch.
49 Hazard warning lights switch.
52 Rotating beacon switch.
53 Rear PTO clutch switch.
54 Rear PTO selection contact 540 rpm.
55 Rear PTO selection contact 1000 rpm.
59 Rear power take off clutch.
60 Ignition switch.
63 ISC declutching + / - range control.
65 Lighting switch.
72 Doubler relay.
81 Trailer signalling socket.
82 25 A power socket.
94 Front PTO clutch solenoid valve.
96 Front windscreen washer pump.
96a Rear windscreen washer pump.
101 Front axle solenoid valve.
102 Transmission oil pressure switch.
110 Relay and fuse panel.
117 Preheating fuse (70 A).
125 Electronic doubler solenoid valve.
131 Led.
139 Engine speed sensor.
173 Horn.
175 Relays.
176 Control panel display selector.
184 Transmission electronic central unit (ECU).
185 Dashboard.
186 On board computer.
187 Clutch potentiometer (ISC).
F.2 60 05 029 684 - 03.2004 - EN

Wiring and general lists
3/3 J68 30 3/1 34 3/2

405
J39
3A
P90 J90 117
2A 32
226
31 J200
173
96a
J67
139 96
J22
J66
3B 2B 201
206 7a 63 7b
P69 J69 J54 J49
37 37
X3 J65
1 E3E J54
11 5 406 53
200 63
25
J31 J49
192 J55 205
X2G 101
205 J57
24 193 J56
J64 125
J04
101 J57 202 J58
P02 J01
110 202
J07 J02 P01 125 J58 102
27
J59
P28 J28 102
J35 53
P69
J69 94
94
E0A 185 J60
J36 J20 J60
X2D 60 P50 P50
E08 J20 52 J50 J50
J79
65 110 110
46 J07 176
8 10 4 J79 189a 187
J21 J03 J03
110 J63 J62
J37 J51
59 J05 189b 188 197 J21 49 J88
J86 J09
J45 J06
204 234 E0A
J46 J08 203 J51
54 40 131 262 E0A
P29 J29 J47
J40 196
55
J41 J29 262
P30 J30
J47
12 J42 P29
J52 J53 8b
5 1 8a 175 72
184 J1
81 82 605bsm00
1 Instrument panel harness (001 to 104/M0A to M1B). 8a Transmission control harness with reverser under torque "REVERSHIFT" (800 to 867/M8A to M8H).
3/1 Front harness (engine) (300 to 344/M3A to M3K). 8b Transmission control harness with mechanical reverser/hydraulic doubler and electrohydraulic lift (800 to 842/M8A to M8H).
3/2 Pre-heating control harness (colour). Note: The figures indicated in brackets correspond to the marks of the wires used according to the harness type.
3/3 Radiator cowling harness (colour).
5 Platform/Roll bar harness (400 to 425/M4A to M4P).
7a Transmission harness with reverser under torque "REVERSHIFT" (701 to 726/M7A to M7I).
7b Transmission harness with mechanical reverser and hydraulic doubler (701 to 715/M7A to M7H).
60 05 029 684 - 03.2004 - EN F.3

F.4 60 05 029 684 - 03.2004 - EN
CONTENTS
FUSE AND RELAY BOX ....................................................................................................................................................................F.8

CONDUCTOR ALLOCATIONS ..........................................................................................................................................................F.9
STARTING/LOAD/PREHEATING/MECHANICAL REVERSER CIRCUIT........................................................................................F.10
STARTING/LOAD/PREHEATING/REVERSHIFT CIRCUIT .............................................................................................................F.12
SIDE LIGHTS/DIPPED HEADLIGHTS/HEADLIGHTS/CONTROL PANEL LIGHTING/HORN ........................................................F.14
REAR WORKING LIGHT/ROTATING BEACON ..............................................................................................................................F.16
BRAKE LIGHTS/FRONT AXLE ENGAGEMENT/HAND BRAKE .....................................................................................................F.18
FLASHING LIGHTS AND WARNING LIGHTS .................................................................................................................................F.20
FR POWER TAKE OFF CONTROL .................................................................................................................................................F.22
INDICATOR FOR FUEL/AIR FILTER CLOGGING/TEMPERATURE/ENGINE OIL PRESSURE ....................................................F.24
ENGINE SPEED ...............................................................................................................................................................................F.26
CONTROL PANEL DISPLAY/DIAGNOSTIC SOCKET SELECTION...............................................................................................F.27
25 A POWER SOCKET ....................................................................................................................................................................F.28
TRANSMISSION HYDRAULIC PRESSURE ....................................................................................................................................F.29
REAR PTO CONTROLS...................................................................................................................................................................F.30
CLUTCH/FORWARD REVERSHIFT AND MECHANICAL DOUBLER CONTROLS .......................................................................F.32
HYDRAULIC DOUBLER...................................................................................................................................................................F.34
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS ACCORDING ENGINE MANAGEMENT .................................................................................................................................................................F.36
TO FUNCTIONS
60 05 029 684 - 03.2004 - EN F.5

CONTENTS
FUSE AND RELAY BOX.................................................................................................................................................................... F.8

CONDUCTOR ALLOCATIONS .......................................................................................................................................................... F.9
STARTING/LOAD/PREHEATING/MECHANICAL REVERSER CIRCUIT ....................................................................................... F.10
STARTING/LOAD/PREHEATING/REVERSHIFT CIRCUIT............................................................................................................. F.12
SIDE LIGHTS/DIPPED HEADLIGHTS/HEADLIGHTS/CONTROL PANEL LIGHTING/HORN........................................................ F.14
REAR WORKING LIGHT/ROTATING BEACON.............................................................................................................................. F.16
BRAKE LIGHTS/FRONT AXLE ENGAGEMENT/HAND BRAKE..................................................................................................... F.18
FLASHING LIGHTS AND WARNING LIGHTS................................................................................................................................. F.20
FR POWER TAKE OFF CONTROL ................................................................................................................................................. F.22
INDICATOR FOR FUEL/AIR FILTER CLOGGING/TEMPERATURE/ENGINE OIL PRESSURE.................................................... F.24
ENGINE SPEED .............................................................................................................................................................................. F.26
CONTROL PANEL DISPLAY/DIAGNOSTIC SOCKET SELECTION .............................................................................................. F.27
25 A POWER SOCKET.................................................................................................................................................................... F.28
TRANSMISSION HYDRAULIC PRESSURE.................................................................................................................................... F.29
REAR PTO CONTROLS .................................................................................................................................................................. F.30
CLUTCH/FORWARD REVERSHIFT AND MECHANICAL DOUBLER CONTROLS ....................................................................... F.32
HYDRAULIC DOUBLER .................................................................................................................................................................. F.34
ENGINE MANAGEMENT ................................................................................................................................................................. F.36
F.6 60 05 029 684 - 03.2004 - EN

60 05 029 684 - 03.2004 - EN F.7
Fuse and relay box
+APC
+AVC
MASSE
FM16
FM10
FM4
FM5
FM7
FM9
FM8
FM6
FM12
FM13
FM14
FM15
FA2
221
6 5 4
3 2 1
R4 R3 R1 R2
FM11
FM1
FM2
FM3
FA1
D1
7 1 2 6 9 10 11 12 11 12 1 3 5 4 2 9 7 10 6 8 7 10 8 11 9 4 1 2 3 5 6 8 6 10 9 3 1 5 11 2 7 4 12 6 12 10 2 1 8 4 3 5 11 9 7 10 2 1 11
P04 P08 P07 P05 P06 P03
605bsm01
F.8 60 05 029 684 - 03.2004 - EN

Conductor allocations 2 4 6 8 10 12
P07
+ APC + AVC
Relays Ref 10 10
Fuses
MINI ATO Rating Ref Mudguard lights R1
FM2
FM3
Start-up R2 25 FA2
x Flashing indicators / Hazard warning lights 15 FM1 FM4 5
Shuttle reverser R3
x Right-hand lights 10 FM2 P04
x Left-hand lights 10 FM3 Flashing unit 221
5 R1
x Start-up 25 FA1
5 FM16
x ISO / implement electrical socket 5 FM4
Spare relays Ref
FM11
x Transmission 10 FM5 5 FM15
x Front power take-off 10 FM6 Spare relays 1 R4
10 FM14 P08
x Dashboard 5 FM7 FM5 10 R4
x Brakelights/Front axle engaging 15 FM8 15 FM12
x Revolving beacon 10 FM9 Green-P07 FM10 10
x Engine calculator 10 FM10 5 FM13
x Implement electrical socket 25 FA2 FM7 5
1 LH front light P03
x Rear right working lights 5 FM11 R3
2 LH rear light 5 FMR1
x Dipped/ road lights 15 FM12
D1
3 Police plate lighting FM8 15
x Dashboard 5 FM13 10 FMR2
4 Trailer LH light
x Engine calculator 10 FM14 FM9 10 15
5 Rear LH brake light FMR3
x Transmission calculator 10 FM15
6 Trailer rear brake light P05
7 Front LH indicator FM6 10 R2
25
25 25
8 Trailer rear LH indicator
Trailer RH light FM1 15
Spare fuses 9
MINI ATO Rating Ref
FA1
FAR1
LH rear flashing light
FAR2
10
x Spare fuses 10 FM16 11 Trailer rear RH indicator
12 — 221 P06
1 3 5 7 9 11
Spare fuses
MINI ATO Rating Ref Black-P04 606bsm10
x Spare fuse 15 FMR1

x Spare fuse 10 FMR2 1 + AVC electric tool socket
x Spare fuse 5 FMR3 2 + AVC electric tool socket Red-P08 Blue-P05
x Spare fuse 25 FAR1 3 —
x Spare fuse 25 FAR2 4 — 1 Relay contact R4 1 Starter control
5 — 2 Not neutral controls 2 + AVC Signalling control
6 Rear RH brake light 3 R relay control 3 Safety shunt PDF
Diodes Ref 7 + APC electric tool socket 4 Not neutral 4 Earth
Start-up D1 8 — 5 Relay coil R 5 Start-up
9 RH front light 6 LH indicator control 6 Lights relay controls
10 RH rear light 7 + APC reverser control ISC 7 + APC brake lights
11 RH RR flashing light 8 LH indicators/hazard warning lights controls 8 Brakelights
12 Front RH indicator 9 + APC potentiometer ISC 9 BDV
10 + APC pedal switch ISC 10 Reverser/BDV engaged
11 RH indicators/hazard warning lights controls 11 + APC control panel
12 RH indicators control 12 —
Brown-P03
Grey-P06
1 + AVC engine calculator
2 + AVC transmission calculator 1 + AVC hazard warning lights controls
3 — 2 + AVC Instrument panel
4 — 3 Flashing unit
5 — 4 + APC front PTO controls
6 — 5 Tractor steering
7 — 6 + AVC RH rear working light
8 — 7 Trailer 1 steering
9 — 8 + APC front axle controls
10 + APC transmission controls 9 Trailer 2 steering
11 + APC engine calculator 10 + APC rotating beacon controls
12 — 11 Power supply to indicator unit
12 + APC hazard warning lights controls
60 05 029 684 - 03.2004 - EN F.9

Starting/load/preheating/mechanical reverser circuit Ref Item
24 Engine calculator
Wire 2 J64 Ending
markers
25 Injection stop solenoid valve
30 Battery
341 G3 31 Alternator A2 321 1 + APC engine calculator P69 D
302 32 Starter A3 338 1 Injection pump J31 B
316 K3
32 34 Preheating sparking plugs B2 335 1 Engine speed J67 A
RG 205 712 P69 A 323 K1 54 Rear PDF switch 540 rpm D2 336 1 Engine speed J67 B
713 D 321 A2 55 Rear PDF switch 1000 rpm G3 341 1 Engine calculator defect P02 V
J69 J64 24
60 Ignition switch K1 323 1 + AVC engine calculator P69 A
31 B+ W D+ M 336 D2 110 Relay and fuse panel K2 337 1 Injection pump J31 A
335 B2 Preheating control
M7C E7A M7D

117 Preheating fuse K3 316 1 226
1 2 338 A3
337 K2 139 Engine speed sensor
705
+ J39 B A B A M3J J2 185 Dashboard K J H G F E D C B A
196 PDF safety shunt switch
J67 J31 316 341 326 333 331 338 3
70 A
205 Gear engaged contact

226 Preheating relay
E3E 337 M3J 308 344 336 335 321 2
117 226 P50 323 307 340 339 334 342 332 1
J50
NO 5 23 12 13
Wire 2 J35 Ending
25 markers
139
BC
M8B
805
821
822
OR
34 1 009 0.6 Reverser engaged J04 10
K
5 069 0.6 1000 rpm PTO J35 5
J
H
E3D 6 070 0.6 540 rpm PTO J35 6
G
324
F
J51** A1 J51* A5 M8A 10 047 0.6 PDF 540-1000 rpm 196
11 012 0.6 D+ alternator TDB J42 A6
E
303
341
322
300
301
304
Info TDB start-up
D
23 064 0.6 J41 B3
C
30 A2 A6
B
33 065 1 Engine calculator defect J02 V
A
P02 J01
1 2 3
J02 P01 1 5 9 13 17 21 25 29 33
C V RS U V 54 55
009 069 078 048 073 065
062
M0G 070 047 028 066 101 604bsm28
6
J03 J29
M4G
M4F
055 054 012 045 064 074
413
412
003 110 MR +APC
011
065
001
002 FM14 1 11 P29 EP4 102 059 024 043 042 046
006 FM10 +AVC
010
M4P 4 8 12 16 20 24 28 32 36
007
R2 R3 P28
E0A
D1 J28 110
11 3 2 J41 J28
070 196 J42 P28
069
J41 B2 MOL
FA1 J03
J05
B3 064
1 5 3 10 9
BU J29
B1 P29
J05 009
J51
196
010
009 J50
P50
013 047 604bsm10
064
070
069
A5 008
J42 065 065 065
A6 012 012 012 E0A
004 11 1 10 33 23 6 5 5
J35 7a
58 15 19 50 606bsm19
60
1P2 1P2 1P2 1P2
30
185
605bsm02
* Mechanical doubler
** Hydraulic doubler
F.10 60 05 029 684 - 03.2004 - EN

Starting/load/preheating/mechanical reverser circuit
P01
7
P69 J69
34
J69
110 J35
205
60
31
30 606bsm20
226
P01 J39
3/1
J02
606bsm15
32
606bsm14 606bsm12
205 55
54
P28
EP4
31
32
E3D
P50 J69
J01 3/1
3/3
P02 E7A
606bsm17
606bsm18
E3E
J31
J64
J67
606bsm13
60 05 029 684 - 03.2004 - EN F.11

Starting/load/preheating/REVERSHIFT circuit Ref Item
Wire 2 J09 Ending
markers
2 OR 30 Battery
316 K3 B1 099 0,6 +APC reverser controls J09 B1
712 P69 A 323 K1 31 Alternator
70 A J39 34 205 B2 091 0,6 Neutral control P30 6
1 713 D 321 A2 32 Starter
B4 103 0,6 Not neutral controls J08 2
302 J69 54 Rear PDF switch 540 rpm
B5 M1B 0,6 Reverser controls earth J40 B5
RG
117 304 336 D2 J64 55 Rear PDF switch 1000 rpm

24
335 B2 60 Ignition switch
31 B+ W D+ 226 32 338 A3 63 ISC declutching + / - range control
M7D
337 K2 110 Relay and fuse panel
B A B A M3J J2 139 Engine speed sensor 1 2 3 4 5
1
705
184 Transmission UCE A
2
+ J67 J31
M 185 Dashboard A 092 090
E7A
BC
4
188 ISC reverser controls B
E3E
5
B 099 091 104 103 M1B
63 189a ISC declutched clutch switch
196 PDF safety shunt switch
M7C
189a 205 Gear engaged contact
25 604bsm06
184 139 188
NO
J49 J1
Wire 2 J1 Ending
E3D markers
324 E D 826 5 Wire 2 J35 Ending
725 markers
723
846
823 B2 J51 5 805 0,75 Box engaged J50 5
322
300
301
304
J09 J63 8 823 0,75 Neutral control J30 6

824 P50
30 26 833 0,75 + APC feed EV J30 9 1 009 0.6 Reverser engaged J04 10
J50
B5
B1
B2
B4
833 1 2 5 069 0.6 1000 rpm PTO J35 5
22 5 231213 33 B1 A6 A5
540 rpm PTO
M1B
6 070 0.6 J35 6
099
091
103
097
096
J01 J30 805 M8B
852 25 36 10 047 0.6 PDF 540-1000 rpm 196
851
P01 P30 845 099 23 064 0.6 Info TDB start-up J41 B3
RS U V 6 9 838 833 811 810 813 812 809 822 825 821
103
097 097 24 837 832 836 835 815 814 840 13
1 5 9 13 17 21 25 29 33
001
002
003
062
091 091
096 M8F 830 805 826 827 823 865 820 819 839 009 069 078 048 073 065
062 062 B5 54 55 1 12 M0G 070 047 028 066 101

M8A
851 J40
822 055 054 012 045 064 074
A1
J03 102 059 024 043 042 046
M4G
M4F
MOJ
413
412
110 MR 4 8 12 16 20 24 28 32 36
003 1 1110
001 002 EP4
FM14
006 006 FM10 M4P
007 007 FM5 E0A P28
J28
R2 R3 11 3 2
D1 M0L
J41 B2
FA1 B3 064
064
070
069
B1
604bsm70
1 5 3 10 9 10 4 2 7 009 604bsm10
BU RG
J05 J08 1 10 23 6 5
004 099 J35
58 15 19 50 103
60 096
009
008
1P2 1P2 1P2 1P2
196
30 013 047 185

605bsm03
F.12 60 05 029 684 - 03.2004 - EN

Starting/load/preheating/REVERSHIFT circuit
31
Wire 2 J64 Ending
32
markers E3D
A2 321 1 + APC engine calculator P69 D

A3 338 1 Injection pump J31 B
B2 335 1 Engine speed J67 A
D2 336 1 Engine speed J67 B
J2 M3J 1 Engine calculator earth E3E J01
K1 323 1 + AVC engine calculator P69 A 3/3
K2 337 1 Injection pump J31 A
K J H G F E D C B A
55 P69
316 341 326 333 331 338 3
54
337 M3J 308 344 336 335 321 2
P28
323 307 340 339 334 342 332 1
EP4 J31
E3E
J64
J67
K
J
H
G
F
E
D
C
B
A
606bsm22
1 2 3
606bsm25
604bsm28
P69 J69
J49
110 J35 J69
60 205
P50 J69
3/1
30
226 J09 E7A
606bsm28
606bsm26
E0B
J39
J63
P01
606bsm15
3/1
606bsm21
60 05 029 684 - 03.2004 - EN F.13

Side lights/dipped headlights/headlights/control panel lighting/horn
NO5 NO4 2b
3b
3a NO3 NO2 2a
BU3
E3C
E3B BU2
RG3
RG2
E3A
31 B+ W D+
173
+AVC +AVC
110
+
R1
BU1
RG1
NO1
NO6
BC
185
P90
FM12
J90 FM3 FM2
4 1 2 3 6 J36 J35
M3B
17 20 24
M3C
BU NO VE
311
J05 J04 J07
MOB
022
024
310 2 6 9 10 3 1 2 4 9
023
306
F W X B5 J42
018
418
422
402
400
401
403
404
P02 J01 B2
J02 P01
B4
018
079
018
019
079
020
021
J40
MOB A2 B2 MOM
A1
MOK
MOJ
A1 B3 A5 A4 A2
J07
6 5
65 30 49 58 56b 56a 54s J28
E0A P28
12 10 1 7 4 81
2 3
M41
M40
400
M4B EP5 M4E
401
402 EP3
M4B
M4H
M4J
400
401
418
422
M4H
402
X2G X2D
2 1 5 2 1 5
1 2
5 11 4 10
12
M4B M4J 605bsm04
F.14 60 05 029 684 - 03.2004 - EN

Side lights/dipped headlights/headlights/control panel lighting/horn
Ref Item 31
2a RH dipped headlights
Wire 2 J35 Ending
markers
2b RH road lights
3a LH dipped headlights
24 024 0.6 TDB lighting J42 B6 J90
3b LH road lights
P90
4 RH sidelights
5 LH sidelights 1 5 9 13 17 21 25 29 33
10 RH rear side lights J01
009 069 078 048 073 065
11 LH rear side lights
12 Number plate light M0G 070 047 028 066 101 E3A 173
31 Alternator P02
65 Lighting switch E3B
055 054 012 045 064 074
81 Trailer signalling socket E3C
110 Relay and fuse panel 102 059 024 043 042 046
173 Horn 4 8 12 16 20 24 28 32 36
185 Dashboard
Wire 2 J36 Ending

markers
2A
17 022 0.6 Headlights indicator J07 A2
20 M0B 0.6 Instrument panel earth J40 A2 2B
1 5 9 13 17 3B
058 052 051 050 022 3A
015 040 056
604bsm10
071 053 044 057 606bsm30
041 016 M0F M0B

4 8 12 16 20
110 J35
J36
12
X2D
EP3
604bsm11
+APC
+AVC
X2G
110 J40 81
J42 J28
P28 P28
J07
J04 P01
EP5
J05 3/1
J02
606bsm29
E0A 606bsm31
5
7a
606bsm32
60 05 029 684 - 03.2004 - EN F.15

Rear working light/rotating beacon Ref Item +APC
+AVC
1 Revolving beacon
8 Working light
46 Working light switch
52 Rotating beacon switch 110 J40
110 Relay and fuse panel J28
P28
1 J79 J05
6 J06
BU
+APC +AVC
J05 110
R1 110
J20
X3
1 2
FM9
M4C
E0A
411
EP5 M40 EP3 5
FM11 7a
606bsm36
M41
414 EP1
606bsm33
GR
M4K
P28
J06
10 6 J28
1 12 10 4
076
BL
EP2
039
075
52 46
MR
5 063 5
1 1
J20 J20 J79 J79

068 077
10 9 MOM 10 9
B2
MOH A7 A5 MOD 8
J40
A1
MOK
MOJ
EP3
E0A
X3 EP1 8
EP2
P28
EP5 606bsm34
605bsm05
F.16 60 05 029 684 - 03.2004 - EN

Notes Notes
60 05 029 684 - 03.2004 - EN F.17

Brake lights/front axle engagement/hand brake
185
026 +
234
203
7
5 073
1 J45 J45
J35 J36
18 17 31 2 19 1 7
073 MOG
074
057
058
071
025
027
072
8 17 4 5
028
P29
J29
J42 A2 819 REVERSHIFT 11 J1 184
M8D
A1
808
803
804
8 23 25 3 4
J50
P50
417 J51* J51**
M7C
M8B A6 A2
405
A5 A1
406
M7A
703
704
708
J40 E7A
7 8 6 5 6
M7F
BU GR NO VE
M8A
J05 J06 J04 J07
B2 A1
1 2 3 1 2
MOJ
FM8
J05
J57 J54
110
+APC E0A
MOM
MOK
MOL
406
071
E0A
J28 37
P28 101
11 5 12 10
EP4 M4P
M41
415
M4A
M40 EP3
EP5
M4E
M4B
405
M4J
417
6 5
X2G X2D
1 7 4 1 4 1 4
204
2 3
81
11 10
605bsm06
F.18 60 05 029 684 - 03.2004 - EN

Brake lights/front axle engagement/hand brake +APC
205
J49
Ref Item
10 RH rear side lights
Wire 2 J35 Ending
J1 110 J40
markers J42 J28
11 LH rear side lights 184 P28
37 Tractor speed sensor J07
J04
81 Trailer signalling socket 2 M0G 0.6 Tractor speed earth P29 17 J54
17 073 0.6 Front axle controls J45 5 J05
101 Front axle solenoid valve J06
110 Relay and fuse panel 18 028 0.6 TDB brake lights J42 A2
184 Transmission UCE 31 074 1 Front axle solenoid valve P29 8 J29
P29
185 Dashboard J51
203 Left and right brake pedal contact 1 5 9 13 17 21 25 29 33
204 Hand brake contact J50
234 Front axle solenoid valve switch 009 069 078 048 073 065 P50
P50
M0G 070 047 028 066 101 E0A 3/1
J57
055 054 012 045 064 074
Wire 2 J36 Ending 5 E7A
markers 102 059 024 043 042 046 7a
606bsm39 606bsm40
4 8 12 16 20 24 28 32 36
1 058 0.6 Theoretical speed P29 5
7 071 1 Hand brake warning light J28 5
19 057 0.6 Theoretical speed supply P29 4
1 5 9 13 17
058 052 051 050 022
015 040 056
071 053 044 057
041 016 M0F M0B

4 8 12 16 20 604bsm10 X2D
EP3
J45
X2G
204
110 J35 P28 81
604bsm11 J36
EP4
EP5
606bsm38
203
606bsm37
60 05 029 684 - 03.2004 - EN F.19

Flashing lights and warning lights
+ AVC
+ APC
110
6 5 1 033
038
221
037
2 3 4 2 8 5 9
J21
49
FM1
VE NO RG BU
J07 J04 J08 J06 J21
8 11 7 10 11 12 6 12 8 11 5 7 9 11 3 1 12 6 3 1 7
035
034
032
185 T 13 050 036
031
030
R1 9 051
A7 A6
J36
R2 5 052 J41
A5 J40
20 MOB A2 A3 MOC
A1 B2
029
MOM
B4 B1 B2
MOK
409
410
407
408
420
419
MOJ
J07
J28
65 P28
30 49 58 56b 56a 54s 54d L
12 10
M41
M40
E0A
M41
EP5
EP3 M40
M4B
M4J
3 1 6 6 1 3
X2G X2D
6 5
5 11 10 4
81 1 7 4
2 3 605bsm07
F.20 60 05 029 684 - 03.2004 - EN

Flashing lights and warning lights +APC
110 +AVC
Ref Item
4 RH sidelights
Wire 2 J21 Ending J40
J41
markers J28
5 LH sidelights P28
10 RH rear side lights J04 J07 110
1 035 1,4 LH indicators/warning controls J08 8 J08 J21
11 LH rear side lights J36
2 037 1.4 + AVC warning controls J06 1 J05
49 Hazard warning lights switch
3 030 1.4 Indicators/warning supply J41 A6
65 Lighting switch
5 033 1,4 RH indicators/warning controls J08 11
81 Trailer signalling socket
6 036 1,4 Central supply J06 11
110 Relay and fuse panel
8 038 1,4 + APC warning controls J06 12
185 Dashboard
9 M0C 0,6 Warning light earth J40 A3
Wire 2 J06 Ending

markers 2 4 6 8 E0A
2
037 036 038 5
1 037 1.4 + AVC warning controls J21 2
4
Flashing unit 7a
6
3 031 1.4 J41 A7 035 030 033
8
606bsm43
5 050 0.6 TA steering J36 13 J07
7 051 0.6 REM 1 steering J36 9 1 3 5 7
9 052 0.6 REM 2 steering J36 5
11 036 1.4 Power supply to indicator unit J21 6
12 038 1.4 + APC warning controls J21 8
11 9 7 5 3 1 9 10
9
M0C
1
036 052 051 050 031 037
0
038 039 072 075 061 053 606bsm41
604bsm08
12 10 8 6 4 2
11
9
7
5
3
1
X2D
604bsm03
EP3
X2G
81
P28
EP5
606bsm42
60 05 029 684 - 03.2004 - EN F.21

FR power take off control Ref Item
40 PTO switch
94 Front PTO clutch solenoid valve
185 110 Relay and fuse panel
94 + APC
185 Dashboard
110
+APC
FM6
J60
J36 J40
110
A B 20 10
GR
J06 J06 P50
4 J29 3/1
M7H
P29
J51 E7A
J60
J50 606bsm45
MOB P50
040
E0A
711
E7A
5
7a
606bsm46
M7C
J46
A2
J40
110
J36
061
P50 A1
J50
11 23
M8B
A6* 606bsm44
849 REVERSHIFT
MOJ
A2**
J51
814
A5*
A1**
M8A
11
J29
P29
E0A
40
5
1 J46 J46
067 605bsm08
F.22 60 05 029 684 - 03.2004 - EN

Notes Notes
60 05 029 684 - 03.2004 - EN F.23

Fuel/air filter clogging/temperature/engine oil pressure indicator Ref Item
Wire 2 J35 Ending
markers
31 Alternator
201 202 185 Dashboard 15 045 1 Engine oil pressure J02 L
200 Oil pressure switch 28 043 1 Engine water temperature J02 K
201 Engine temperature thermistor 32 042 1 Engine water temperature alert J02 T
24 202 Fuel gauge 36 046 1 Air filter clogging J02 M
206 Air filter clogging valve
1 5 9 13 17 21 25 29 33
009 069 078 048 073 065
J66 J64
Wire 2 J36 Ending M0G 070 047 028 066 101
B A B1 D3 J1 G2 markers
055 054 012 045 064 074
8 041 0.6 Fuel level P29 3
326
328
332
12 016 0.6 + APC control panel J05 11 102 059 024 043 042 046
15 044 0.6 Rear work lights controls P29 1
4 8 12 16 20 24 28 32 36
16 M0F 0.6 Fuel level earth P29 16
E3F
1 5 9 13 17
058 052 051 050 022
31 B+ W D+
M7B
307
308
702
710
015 040 056
+APC 071 053 044 057

200 110
+
041 016 M0F M0B
4 8 12 16 20
FM7
604bsm10
2 10 24
+APC
BU P50
305
J05 J50
M3I
11
206 110
604bsm11
M8C
016
802
842
J05
J29
319
P29
M L K T 3 1 16
P02 J29 J50
P50
J02 P29
MOF
046
045
043
042
041
044
5
7a
606bsm50
36 15 28 32 12 8 15 16
J35 J36
185
605bsm09
F.24 60 05 029 684 - 03.2004 - EN

Fuel/air filter clogging/temperature/engine oil pressure indicator
J66
110 J35 J49

J36
202
31
606bsm51
3/1
J02
606bsm47 606bsm49
31
32
3/3
P02
J66
200
206
E3F
J64
606bsm48
60 05 029 684 - 03.2004 - EN F.25

Engine speed
J41
015 014 J02 J 309
A2 A1 P02
2
A3 J36
J36
REVERSHIFT 100
185
31 B+ W D+ P02
1
P30
J30
3/1
820
J02
10
J1
606bsm53
184
606bsm52 +APC
605bsm10
+AVC
Ref Item 25 36
P02 J90 J1 110
184 Transmission UCE 838 833 811 810 813 812 809 822 825 821 J41
185 Dashboard 184
24 837 832 836 835 815 814 840 13
M8F 830 805 826 827 823 865 820 819 839
Wire 2 J1 Ending 1 12 J30
markers P30
10 820 0,75 Engine speed J30 1
31 E0A
5
7a
606bsm54
604bsm70
606bsm55
F.26 60 05 029 684 - 03.2004 - EN

Control panel display/diagnostic socket selection Ref Item
176 Control panel display selector
262 184 Transmission UCE
185 Dashboard
262 Diagnostic plug 110 J35
REVERSHIFT
866
867
J47
A1 B1
14 6 7 15 16 5 Wire 2 J35 Ending
markers
824
823
A2 J88
3 055 0,6 Diag. D P29 9
B2
7 054 0,6 Diag. L P29 10
839
840
13 048 0,6 IP display selector 176 —

A3 B3
606bsm56
854
853
1 5 9 13 17 21 25 29 33
860
861
12 13
M8F
M8F
809
809
009 069 078 048 073 065
J1
824
823
15 14 M0G 070 047 028 066 101
184 J50
15 14 055 054 012 045 064 074
J50 A2 B7 A6 B1
102 059 024 043 042 046
P50 4 8 12 16 20 24 28 32 36
J51* J51**
714
715
MOJ A3 A5 A7 A1 P69
A1
M8A
M8A
812
812
E0A
715
714
J40
J64
B1 E0A E0A
C B
J69
604bsm10 606bsm57
MOI
P69
860
861
339
340
M8G
842
+APC P01
G1 F1 J29
J64 REVERSHIFT 7
176 P29
P69 J69
9 10 184 J1 110 J40
24 A3 B5
J47
J51 J03
048
055
054
B1 A5 J29
P29
J51
J88
M8A
845
J50
P50
13 3 7
+ APC E0A
J35 110 E0A
J03 7a
606bsm59 606bsm58
FM15
185 10
MR 605bsm11
60 05 029 684 - 03.2004 - EN F.27

25 A power socket Ref Item
82 25 A power socket
+APC
+AVC +APC +AVC

110
110
FA2 FM4 J28
P28
J04
NO
J04
1 2 7 J50
P50
416
421
423
E0A
7a
606bsm61
M4M
M4N
82
13 15
82 P28
P28
J28
MOO
MON
606bsm60
E0A
605bsm12
F.28 60 05 029 684 - 03.2004 - EN

Hydraulic pressure: Transmission Ref Item
102 Transmission oil pressure switch
131 Led
185 Dashboard
102 184 Transmission UCE J1
P 184
J29
P29
J51
M7E
J36 J50
P50
701
131
E7A
E0A
5
7a
M7C
606bsm64
606bsm62
1 23
P50
J50
M8B
801
A6 A2
J51* J51**
A5 A1
M8A
M8A
REVERSHIFT P50
131 102
865 800 3/1
9 E0A
J1 2 2
E7A
J29 J29
184 P29
056
606bsm63
18
J36
185
605bsm13
60 05 029 684 - 03.2004 - EN F.29

Rear PTO controls Ref Item
53 Rear PTO clutch switch
54 Selection switch rear PTO 540 rpm
55 Selection switch rear PTO 1000 rpm
59 Rear PTO clutch
54 55 59
REVERSHIFT 110
185 Dashboard J35
807
M4G
M4F
J51 A1
845 B1
Wire 2 J35 Ending
EP4 markers
53 5 069 0.6 1000 rpm PTO J35 5

+APC 6 070 0.6 540 rpm PTO J35 6
M4P
413
412
424
425
110 10 047 0.6 PDF 540-1000 rpm 196
20 059 0.6 PTO engaged P29 7 606bsm66
P28
807
J28
FM5 J51** A5 1 5 9 13 17 21 25 29 33
11 3 2 6 7
812 A7
707
706
009 069 078 048 073 065
M0G 070 047 028 066 101

MR 110
MOL
070
069
080
081
P50 055 054 012 045 064 074
J03 J28
P28
10 J50 102 059 024 043 042 046
807 7 6 4 8 12 16 20 24 28 32 36
J51* A1
806
812 A3 B1 816 J29

P29
J51
12 7
J29 E0A J50
P50
P29
605bsm02
E0A
080
081
059
5
7a
606bsm67
604bsm10
047
070
069
20 10 6 5
J35
55
53
54
P28 59
EP4
J50
185
606bsm65
606bsm68
605bsm14
F.30 60 05 029 684 - 03.2004 - EN

Notes Notes
60 05 029 684 - 03.2004 - EN F.31

Clutch/forward REVERSHIFT and mechanical doubler controls
+APC +AVC 185

110 605bsm03 FM5 FM15
RG MR J35
189a J08 J03
10 2 7 9 10 2 16 34 30
2 096
045
102
101
066
J63 837
1 097
B1
A5 B6 M8F P29
189b
J29
A2 838 13
2 095
J86 J51
822
M8A
3 094 B2 A6
J40
A1 MOJ 192
32 28 810 P50 16 716 A
103
J55
E0A 24 27 811 17 717 B
B4 B5 099
1
098 193
25 30 812 18 718 A
M1A
M1B
J56
34 29 813 19 719 B
101 J30 2 821 33

27
102 3 825 26 14 814 20 720 1
J1 184 J1
J59
097 9 833 18 15 815 21 721 2
187
1 A 094 8 832 4
125
3 J62 C 093 7 830 6 31 809 9 709 1
826 J58
2 B 090 4 7 23 M7C M7G 2
E7A
092 5 827 8 16
10 17
M8B M8B
823
6
091 824 824 22 725 E
835 28 724 A
1 820 836 26 722 C
B5 B4 B1 A4 A2 B2
P30 J49
J09
846 846 33 723 D
63
J41 J50
P02
100 A3 A1 014 J 309
31 B+ W D+
J02
A2
015
188 +
J36
185
605bsm15
F.32 60 05 029 684 - 03.2004 - EN

Clutch/forward REVERSHIFT and mechanical doubler controls +APC
+AVC
Ref Item
27 Reverser module speed sensor
Wire 2 J1 Ending
J1
110 J40
markers J41
31 Alternator 184
63 ISC declutching + / - range control 110 J35
1 M8F 1,5 DRIVETRONIC earth J51 B6 J08
110 Relay and fuse panel 4 830 0,75 Clutch potent. cursor J30 7
J03 J36
125 Hydraulic doubler solenoid valve 6 826 0,75 Forward drive control J30 4 J30
184 Lift central unit (TCE) 7 827 0,75 Reverse drive control J30 5 J29 P30
185 Dashboard P29
8 823 0,75 Neutral control J30 6 J51
187 Clutch potentiometer ISC 10 820 0,75 Engine speed J30 1
188 ISC reverser controls Module speed ISC
14 814 0,75 J50 20 J50
189a ISC declutched clutch switch (REVERSHIFT) P50 J09
189b ISC declutched clutch switch Module speed ISC
192 Forward drive solenoid valve 15 815 0,75 J50 21
(REVERSHIFT)
193 Reverse drive solenoid valve 16 835 0,75 Ranges control J50 28 E0A
17 836 0,75 Ranges control J26 50 5
18 832 0,75 Clutched position J30 8 7a
606bsm73 J63
Wire 2 J62 Ending
24 837 1,5 + AVC Drivetronic J03 2
J62
markers 25 838 1,5 + AVC Drivetronic J51 A2 J86
26 833 0,75 + APC feed EV J30 9 3/1
A M1A 0.6 Potentiometer ISC earth J40 B4 27 811 0,75 Return EV forward drive J50 17
B 098 0.6 + APC potentiometer ISC J08 9
28 810 0,75 Return EV forward drive J50 16
C 093 0.6 Potentiometer ISC curser P30 7 J02
29 813 0,75 Return EV reverse drive J50 19
30 812 0,75 Reverse drive solenoid valve J50 18
31
31 809 0,75 EV hydraulic doubler J50 9
32 822 0,75 Hydraulic doubler warning light J29 13
P02
C B A 33 825 0,75 Buzzer controls J30 3 606bsm69
093 098 M1A 34 821 0,75 DRIVETRONIC defect J30 2

C
B
A
25 36
604bsm18
838 833 811 810 813 812 809 822 825 821 J49
24 837 832 836 835 815 814 840 13
Wire 2 J09 Ending M8F 830 805 826 827 823 865 820 819 839
markers
1 12
A2 092 0,6 Reverse drive control P30 5
A4 090 0,6 Forward drive control P30 4 606bsm70
B1 099 0,6 +APC reverser controls J09 B1
B2 091 0,6 Neutral control P30 6
B5 M1B 0,6 Reverser controls earth J40 B5
P50
J56
3/1
J55
1 2 3 4 5
1
A J58
2
A 092 090 J49 606bsm72

4
B
5
B 099 091 104 103 M1B J56 J59
604bsm06 604bsm70
606bsm74
60 05 029 684 - 03.2004 - EN F.33

Hydraulic doubler Ref Item
63 ISC declutching + / - range control
72 Doubler relay
185 175 110 Relay and fuse panel
125 Hydraulic doubler solenoid valve
1 2 175 Relays
110 J35
185 Dashboard
J52 J52 J36
3
Wire 2
837
842
4
markers
J53 Ending
J36 J35
M8G
840
20 30 2 838 0,6 Hydraulic doubler warning light J29 13
3 842 0,6 Relay 100-101 J52 3
MOB
J40
066

MOB A2 5 836 0,6 Ranges control J50 28 606bsm75
6 M8H 0,6 101 relay earth J51 B3
J51 B6 B2 B5 7 841 0,75 + APC relay R101 J51 B7
A1 M8A A1
MOJ
J49
P29 2 838 1
A2 B7 B3 A7 2
J29 E0A 4 839 842 3
13 4
6 M8H 836 5 6 1
812
3
7 841
72 7 5
838 2
604bsm85
839 4
+APC P50
842 3 110
3/1
J58
M8H 6 J53
J52 J53 E7A
J40
606bsm76
836 5
841 7 J03
M8B
835
837
842
839
J29
P29
J51
J50
J50 P50
+APC
P50 110
33 26 28 23 9
E0A
5
M7C
723
722
724
709
FM5 7a
606bsm77
E7A
M7G
B C A
MR
J49
2 1 J03
10
J58
63 125
605bsm16
F.34 60 05 029 684 - 03.2004 - EN

Notes Notes
60 05 029 684 - 03.2004 - EN F.35

Engine management Ref Item
Wire 2 J35 Ending
markers
31 Alternator
2 M0G 0.6 Tractor speed earth P29 17
37 Tractor advance speed sensor
9 078 1 Engine curve change J02 R
33 065 1 Engine calculator defect J02 V
+AVC +APC 139 Engine speed sensor
110 185 184 Lift central unit (TCE)
185 Dashboard 1 5 9 13 17 21 25 29 33
197
FM14 FM10 197 Accelerator control potentiometer 009 069 078 048 073 065
405 Air temperature sensor
406 Fuel temperature sensor M0G 070 047 028 066 101
184
055 054 012 045 064 074
1 3 2
MR J37 J35 J36 J01
Wire 2 J64 Ending 102 059 024 043 042 046
markers
J03 4 8 12 16 20 24 28 32 36
A C B 9 33 2 2 19 1 11
1 11 A2 321 1 + APC engine calculator P69 D
Injection pump
MOG
A3 338 1 J31 B
REVERSHIFT
049
017
005
078
065
015
057
058
851 REVERSHIFT
852 REVERSHIFT
B1 332 1 Engine water temperature J66 A

J41 A2 B3 331 1 Accelerator potent. cursor P02 U
A3 P29 C1 342 1 Engine curve change P02 R
Fuel temperature
REVERSHIFT
J29 C3 333 1 J65 A
821
822
Air temperature
100
819 D1 334 1 J68 A
A1 17 4 5
014
12 13 D3 326 1 (Ref-) sensors E3F
J50 F1 339 1 CAN L P69 B
J02 G1 340 1 CAN H P69 C
P50 G2 308 1 Engine water temperature alert P02 T
M8D
604bsm10
803
804
P02 G3 341 1 Engine calculator defect P02 V
W U P R V J J1 307 1 Engine water temperature P02 K
25 3 4 J2 M3J 1 Engine calculator earth E3E
405 J50 + AVC engine calculator
Wire 2 J36 Ending
327
331
344
342
341
309
K1 323 1 P69 A
B 330 markers
712
713
P50
J68 K3 316 1 Preheating control 226
Theoretical speed
M7A
1 058 0.6 P29 5
703
704
31 B+ W D+
A 2 015 0.6 TDB alternator speed J41 A2
E3F 3 1 2 19 057 0.6 Theoretical speed supply P29 4
K J H G F E D C B A
J54
406 + 316 341 326 333 331 338 3
1 5 9 13 17
B 329 337 M3J 308 344 336 335 321 2 058 052 051 050 022
J69
J65 323 307 340 339 334 342 332 1
P69 A 015 040 056
A D B C 071 053 044 057
37
041 016 M0F M0B
328
25
K
605bsm11
605bsm02
4 8 12 16 20
J
A
H
G
F
J31
605bsm09 B
E
D
C
B
139
323
321
339
340
316
333
334
332
308
307
326
331
344
342
341
337
338
A
335 A
1 2 3
336 J67
B
M3J
K1 A2 F1 G1 K3 C3 D1 B1 G2 J1 D3 B3 E2 C1 G3 K2 A3 B2 D2 J2
604bsm28
604bsm11
J64 E3E
24
605bsm17
F.36 60 05 029 684 - 03.2004 - EN

Engine management
+APC J68
31
+AVC
184 J1 110
J41
J54
J03
3/3
J29 P02
P29
J69 P69 P69

J50
P50
606bsm81
J65
E3E
J31
5
7a J64
606bsm82
J67
31
606bsm79
J68
110 J35
J36
606bsm80
J37
3/1
J02
606bsm78
60 05 029 684 - 03.2004 - EN F.37

Notes Notes
F.38 60 05 029 684 - 03.2004 - EN

CONTENTS
0/1 INSTRUMENT PANEL HARNESS ............................................................................................................................................F.42

3/1 FRONT HARNESS (ENGINE) ...................................................................................................................................................F.47
3/2 PREHEATING CONTROL HARNESS.......................................................................................................................................F.49
3/3 RADIATOR COWLING HARNESS ............................................................................................................................................F.50
0/5 PLATFORM/ROLL BAR HARNESS ..........................................................................................................................................F.52
7A TRANSMISSION HARNESS, REVERSHIFT INVERTER .........................................................................................................F.54
7B TRANSMISSION HARNESS, MECHANICAL REVERSER WITH MECHANICAL OR HYDRAULIC DOUBLER......................F.56
8A TRANSMISSION CONTROLS HARNESS, REVERSHIFT INVERTER ....................................................................................F.58
8B TRANSMISSION CONTROLS HARNESS, MECHANICAL INVERTER WITH MECHANICAL
OR HYDRAULIC DOUBLER......................................................................................................................................................F.62
HARNESS AND CONNECTOR PATHS
60 05 029 684 - 03.2004 - EN F.39

CONTENTS
0/1 INSTRUMENT PANEL HARNESS ............................................................................................................................................ F.42

3/1 FRONT HARNESS (ENGINE)................................................................................................................................................... F.47
3/2 PREHEATING CONTROL HARNESS ...................................................................................................................................... F.49
3/3 RADIATOR COWLING HARNESS............................................................................................................................................ F.50
0/5 PLATFORM/ROLL BAR HARNESS .......................................................................................................................................... F.52
7A TRANSMISSION HARNESS, REVERSHIFT INVERTER ......................................................................................................... F.54
7B TRANSMISSION HARNESS, MECHANICAL REVERSER WITH MECHANICAL OR HYDRAULIC DOUBLER ..................... F.56
8A TRANSMISSION CONTROLS HARNESS, REVERSHIFT INVERTER .................................................................................... F.58
8B TRANSMISSION CONTROLS HARNESS, MECHANICAL INVERTER WITH MECHANICAL
OR HYDRAULIC DOUBLER ..................................................................................................................................................... F.62
F.40 60 05 029 684 - 03.2004 - EN

Harness and connector paths
Connectors................................................................... Pages Connectors ...................................................................Pages

J01 ...................................................................................F.47 J58................................................................................... F.55
J02 ...................................................................................F.42 J58................................................................................... F.57
J03 ...................................................................................F.62 J59................................................................................... F.55
J03 ...................................................................................F.58 J60................................................................................... F.55
J04 ...................................................................................F.52 J60................................................................................... F.57
J05 ...................................................................................F.43 J62................................................................................... F.45
J06 ...................................................................................F.43 J63................................................................................... F.46
J07* ..................................................................................F.43 J64................................................................................... F.48
J07**.................................................................................F.52 J65................................................................................... F.48
J08 ...................................................................................F.43 J66................................................................................... F.48
J09 ...................................................................................F.43 J67................................................................................... F.48
J1 .....................................................................................F.58 J68................................................................................... F.48
J20 ...................................................................................F.43 J69................................................................................... F.55
J21 ...................................................................................F.44 J69................................................................................... F.57
J22 ...................................................................................F.47 J79................................................................................... F.46
J28 ...................................................................................F.44 J86................................................................................... F.46
J29 ...................................................................................F.59 J88................................................................................... F.59
J29 ...................................................................................F.62 J90................................................................................... F.48
J200 .................................................................................F.48
J30 ...................................................................................F.59 P01 .................................................................................. F.46
J31 ...................................................................................F.47 P02 .................................................................................. F.49
J35 ...................................................................................F.44 P28 .................................................................................. F.53
J36 ...................................................................................F.45 P29 .................................................................................. F.46
J37 ...................................................................................F.44 P30 .................................................................................. F.46
J39 ...................................................................................F.49 P50 .................................................................................. F.55
J40 ...................................................................................F.44 P50 .................................................................................. F.56
J41 ...................................................................................F.45 P69 .................................................................................. F.49
J42 ...................................................................................F.45 P90 .................................................................................. F.50
J45 ...................................................................................F.45
J46 ...................................................................................F.45 X2D.................................................................................. F.53
J47 ...................................................................................F.62 X2G ................................................................................. F.53
J47 ...................................................................................F.59 X3 .................................................................................... F.53
J49 ...................................................................................F.54
J49 ...................................................................................F.55
J50 ...................................................................................F.60
J50 ...................................................................................F.63
J51 ...................................................................................F.59
J51 ...................................................................................F.63
J52 ...................................................................................F.63
J53 ...................................................................................F.63
J54 ...................................................................................F.54
J54 ...................................................................................F.56
J55 ...................................................................................F.54
J56 ...................................................................................F.54
J57 ...................................................................................F.55
J57 ...................................................................................F.57
* Instrument panel harness
** Platform/Roll bar harness
60 05 029 684 - 03.2004 - EN F.41

0/1 - Instrument panel harness Connectors Designation
J02 Engine front harness connection
J05 Interconnection panel
J07* Signalling control
J09 ISC controls
J79 J46 J20 Rotating beacon switch
J45 J21 Hazard warning lights switch
J28 Cab top harness connection
J35 Dashboard
J36 Dashboard
J37 Accelerator potentiometer
J40 Shunt base (brown)
J41 Shunt base (grey)
J45 Front axle switch
110 J35 J46 Front PTO switch
J62 ISC potentiometer
J21
J20 J63 ISC clutch release switch
J36 J79 Work working light control switch
J86 ISC clutch switch
P01 Engine front harness connection
P29 Transmission control harness connection
176
60
H
Wire 2 J02 Ending
X J
markers 014 K
G B
W 049 043
A — — — — —
B — — — — —
C 011 1 D + alternator J42 A5 V 085 F A C 045 L
J09
D — — — — — 019 011
E — — — — — U 017 046 M
J37 F 019 1 Horn J07 B3
G — — — — — 042 E D
H — — — — —
T 005 N
J 014 1 Alternator speed J41 A1 078
K 043 1 Engine water temperature J35 28 S R P
L 045 1 Engine oil pressure J35 15
203 M 046 1 Air filter clogging J35 36
N — — — — —
E0B P 005 1 + APC accelerator potentiometer J37 B
R 078 1 Engine curve change J35 9
J63 S — — — — —
J62 J07
J86 T 042 1 Engine water temperature alert J35 32
P01
U 017 1 Accelerator potent. cursor J37 C
V 065 1 Engine calculator defect J35 33
W 049 1 Accelerator pot. reference J37 A
3/1
X — — — — —
604bsm01
J02
606bsm83
F.42 60 05 029 684 - 03.2004 - EN

0/1 - Instrument panel harness 11 9 7 5 3 1
Wire 2 J08 Ending 033 098 099
markers
095
11 9 7 5 3 1 1 — — — — — 032 096 035 034 103
Wire 2 J05 Ending 016 025 008 013 004 2 103 0.6 Not neutral controls J09 B4 12 10 8 6 4 2
markers 3 — — — — —
009 060 023 M0E 018 4 — — — — —
1 004 5 Starter control 60 50 5 — — — — —
2 018 3 + AVC signalling controls J07 A1 12 10 8 6 4 2
11
6 034 1.4 LH indicators controls J07 B4
Safety shunt PDF
9
3 013 0,6 196 --- 7 099 0.6 +APC reverser controls J09 B1
7
4 M0E 1 Panel J40 A6 8 035 1.4 LH indicators/warning controls J21 1
5
5 008 3 Start-up J41 B1 9 098 0.6 + APC ISC controls J09 B1
3
11
Lights relay controls
1
6 023 0.6 J42 B5 095 0.6 + APC clutch engaged switch ISC J86 2
9
7 025 2 + APC brake lights 203 --- 10
096 1 + APC clutch released switch ISC J63 2
7
Panel brake lights
5
8 060 2 J42 A3 11 033 1.4 RH indicators/warning controls J21 5
3
9 010 0.6 BDV P29 6 12 032 1.4 RH indicators control J07 B1
1
604bsm05
10 009 0.6 Reverser/BDV engaged J35 1
11 016 0.6 + APC control panel J36 12
12 — — — — —
604bsm02
Reverser under torque version
Wire 2 J09 Ending

markers
1 2 3 4 5
1
11 9 7 5 3 1
Wire 2 A
2
markers
J06 Ending 036 052 051 050 031 037 A1 — — — — — A 092 090
Reverse drive control
4
A2 092 0,6 P30 5 B
5
038 039 072 075 061 053 A3 — — — — — B 099 091 104 103 M1B
1 037 1.4 + AVC warning controls J21 2 A4 090 0,6 Forward drive control P30 4
2 053 0.6 + AVC control panel J36 11 12 10 8 6 4 2
A5 — — — — —
3 031 1.4 Flashing unit J41 A7
4 061 0.6 + APC front PTO controls J46 5
B1 099 0,6 +APC reverser controls J09 B1 604bsm06
5 050 0.6 TA steering J36 13
B2 091 0,6 Neutral control P30 6
+ AVC rear working lights controls
11
6 075 1 J79 1
B3 104 0,6 + APC ISC controls P30 10
REM 1 steering
9
7 051 0.6 J36 9
7
8 072 0.6 + APC front axle controls J45 1
Reverser controls earth
5
9 052 0.6 REM 2 steering J36 5 B5 M1B 0,6 J40 B5
3
10 039 1.4 + APC rotating beacon controls J20 1
1
11 036 1.4 Power supply to indicator unit J21 6
12 038 1.4 + APC warning controls J21 8
604bsm03
Wire 2 J20 Ending
markers
1 2 3 4 5
1
A
2
1 039 1,4 + APC rotating beacon controls J06 10 A 092 090
2 — — — — —
4
1 2 3 4 5 B
5
Wire 2 J07* Ending A 018 021 020 079
3 — — — — — B 099 091 104 103 M1B
markers 022 GR 4 — — — — —
063 1,4 Rotating beacon control J28 1
B 032 029 019 034 5
A1 018 3 + AVC signal controls J06 2 068 0,6 Rotating beacon indicator J20 9
6 — — — — — 604bsm06
021 2 Headlights P01 X
A2 7 — — — — —
022 0.6 Headlights indicator J36 17
A3 — — — — — 8 — — — — —
A4 020 2 Dipped headlights P01 W 9 068 0,6 Rotating beacon indicator J20 5
Rotating beacon warning light
1
A5 079 0.6 Side lights controls J42 B4 A

2
10 M0H 0,6 J40 7

earth
4
B1 032 1.4 RH indicators control J08 12 B

5
B2 029 1.4 Warning light supply J41 A5

B3 019 1 Horn J02 F
B4 034 1.4 LH indicators controls J08 6
B5 — — — — — 604bsm04
* Instrument panel harness
60 05 029 684 - 03.2004 - EN F.43

0/1 - Instrument panel harness 1 5 9 13 17 21 25 29 33
Wire 2 J35 Ending 009 069 078 048 073 065
markers
M0G 070 047 028 066 101
1 009 0.6 Reverser engaged J04 10
Wire 2 J21 Ending 2 4 6 8
2 M0G 0.6 Tractor speed earth P29 17
055 054 012 045 064 074
markers 3 055 0.6 Diag. K P29 9
4 — — — — —
2
037 036 038 102 059 024 043 042 046
4
1 035 1,4 LH indicators/warning controls J08 8 5 069 0.6 1000 rpm PTO J35 5
6
2 037 1.4 + AVC warning controls J06 1 035 030 033 6 070 0.6 540 rpm PTO J35 6 4 8 12 16 20 24 28 32 36
8
3 030 1.4 Indicators/warning supply J41 A6 7 054 0.6 Diag. L P29 10
1 3 5 7
4 — — — — — 8 — — — — —
5 033 1,4 RH indicators/warning controls J08 11 9 078 1 Engine curve change J02 R
6 036 1,4 Central supply J06 11 10 047 0.6 PDF 540-1000 rpm 196
11 012 0.6 D+ alternator TDB J42 A6
7 — — — — —
12 — — — — —
13 048 0.6 IP display selector 244
9 M0C 0,6 Warning light earth J40 A3 9 10
9 14 — — — — —
10 — — — — — 15 045 1 Engine oil pressure J02 L
M0C
1
0
16 102 0.6 Buzzer controls P30 3
17 073 0.6 Front axle controls J45 5
604bsm08 18 028 0.6 TDB brake lights J42 A2
19 — — — — —
20 059 0.6 PTO engaged P29 7 604bsm10
21 — — — — —
22 — — — — —
23 064 0.6 Info TDB start-up J41 B3
24 024 0.6 TDB lighting J42 B6
25 — — — — —
Wire 2 J28 Ending 1 063 076 081 M0M M0N 13 26 — — — — —
markers
27 — — — — —
2 069 071 M0L 14
28 043 1 Engine water temperature J02 K
1 063 1.4 Rotating beacon control J20 5 29 — — — — —
2 069 0.6 Socket 1000 rpm J35 5 3 070 080 M0K M0D 15
30 066 0.6 Hydraulic doubler warning light P29 13
3 070 0.6 Socket 540 rpm J35 6 31 074 1 Front axle solenoid valve P29 8
4 076 1 Rear working light controls J79 5 32 042 1 Engine water temperature alert J02 T
5 071 1 Hand brake warning light J36 6 33 065 1 Engine calculator defect J02 V
6 080 0.6 + APC RR PTO clutch ctrl P29 12 34 101 0.6 DRIVETRONIC defect P30 2
7 081 0.6 PTO engaged P29 7 35 — — — — —
8 — — — — — 36 046 1 Air filter clogging J02 M
9 — — — — —
10 M0M 0.6 RH wing earth J40 B2
11 M0L 1.4 LH wing earth E0A 13
12 M0K 2 RH wing earth E0A 14
13 M0N 3 25 A socket earth E0A 15
14 — — — — — 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
15 M0O 3 25 A socket earth E0A 604bsm09
Wire 2 J40 Ending
markers A
A1 M0J 3 Rear earth E0A B

A2 M0B 0.6 Instrument panel earth J36 20
A3 M0C 0.6 Warning light earth J21 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
A4 — — — — —
Rear working light earth A M0J M0B M0C M0Q M0E M0H
Wire 2 J37 Ending
A5
A6
M0D
M0E
0.6
1 Panel earth
J79
J05
10
4
markers C B A B M0I M0M
Rotating beacon warning light M1A M1B
A7 M0H 0.6 J20 10
A 049 1 Accelerator pot. reference J02 W 017 005 049 earth
C
B 005 1 + APC accelerator potentiometer J02 P B
A Instrument panel display selector
C 017 1 Accelerator potent. cursor J02 U B1 M0I 0.6 244
earth
1
B2 M0M 0.6 RH wing earth J28 10
2
604bsm12 A
3
B3 — — — — —
B4 M1A* 0.6 Accelerator potentiometer earth J62 A B
5
Reverser controls earth
6
B5 M1B* 0.6 J09 B5
7
B6 — — — — —
B7 — — — — —
* REVERSHIFT version only
604bsm13
F.44 60 05 029 684 - 03.2004 - EN

0/1 - Instrument panel harness 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Wire 2 J42 Ending
markers A
1 5 9 13 17 A1 027 2 Brakelights 203 B

Wire 2 J36 Ending 058 052 051 050 022 A2 028 0.6 TDB brake lights J35 18
markers A3 060 2 Panel brake lights J05 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
015 040 056 A4 — — — — —
1 058 0.6 Theoretical speed P29 5 A5 011 1 D + alternator J02 C A 027 028 060 011 012
2 015 0.6 TDB alternator speed J41 A2 071 053 044 057 A6 012 0.6 D+ alternator TDB J35 11
3 — — — — — B 079 023 024
A7 — — — — —
4 — — — — — 041 016 M0F M0B
5 052 0.6 REM steering 2 J06 9 B1 — — — — —
6 — — — — — 4 8 12 16 20
B2 — — — — —
7 071 1 Hand brake warning light J28 5 B3 — — — — —
8 041 0.6 Fuel level P29 3
1
B4 079 0.6 Side lights controls J07 A5
2
9 051 0.6 REM steering 1 J06 7 B5 023 0.6 Lights relay controls J05 6 A
3
10 040 0.6 Front PTO warning light J46 1 B6 024 0.6 Instrument panel light J35 24
+ AVC control panel B
5
11 053 0.6 J05 2 B7 — — — — —
6
12 016 0.6 + APC control panel J05 11
7
13 050 0.6 Tractor steering J06 5
14 — — — — —
15 044 0.6 Rear work lights controls P29 1
16 M0F 0.6 Fuel level earth P29 16
17 022 0.6 Headlights indicator J07 A2 604bsm15
18 056 0.6 Trans. hydraulic pressure P29 2 604bsm11
19 057 0.6 Theoretical speed supply P29 4
20 M0B 0.6 Instrument panel earth J40 A2
Wire 2 J45 Ending
markers
2 4 6 8
2
+ APC front axle controls
4
1 072 0.6 J06 8
6
2 — — — — —
8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 3 — — — — — 072 073
Wire 2 J41 Ending
4 — — — — — 1 3 5 7
markers A 5 073 0.6 Front axle controls J35 17
6 — — — — —
A1 014 1 Alternator speed J02 J B 7 — — — — — 604bsm16
A2 015 0.6 TDB alternator speed J36 2 8 — — — — —
A3 100* 0.6 Engine speed P30 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
A4 — — — — —
A5 029 1.4 Indicator power supply J07 B2 A 014 015 100 029 030 031
A6 030 1.4 Indicator/warning power supply J21 3
A7 031 1.4 Centrale clignotante J06 3 B 008 062 064
B1 008 3 Start-up J05 5

Wire 2 J46 Ending
markers
B2 062 3 Start-up solenoid P01 V 2 4 6 8
2
B3 064 0.6 Info TDB start-up J35 23
Front PTO warning light
4
B4 — — — — — 040 0.6 J36 10
1
6
067 1 FR power take off control P29 11
2
B5 — — — — — A
8
040
3
2 — — — — — 067 061
B6 — — — — —
B 3 — — — — —
5
B7 — — — — — 1 3 5 7
6
4 — — — — —
7
* REVERSHIFT version only 5 061 0.6 + APC front PTO controls J06 4
6 — — — — — 604bsm17
7 — — — — —
8 — — — — —
604bsm14
Wire 2 J62 Ending C B A

markers
093 098 M1A C
A M1A 0.6 Potentiometer ISC earth J40 B4 B
A
B 098 0.6 + APC potentiometer ISC J08 9
C 093 0.6 Potentiometer ISC curser P30 7
604bsm18
60 05 029 684 - 03.2004 - EN F.45

0/1 - Instrument panel harness 16 13 10 7 4 1
Wire 2 P29 Ending M0F 066 054
059
057 044
markers 081
M0G 067 074 058 056
1 044 0.6 Rear work light controls J36 15
Wire 2 J63 Ending 1 2 3
2 056 0.6 Transmission hydraulic pressure J36 18 080 055 041
markers 3 041 0.6 Fuel level J36 8
18 15 12 9 6 3
097 096 4 057 0.6 Theoretical speed supply J36 19
1 097 0.6 De-clutched position P30 9 5 058 0.6 Theoretical speed J36 1
1
2 096 1 + APC clutch released switch J08 10 2 6 — — — — —
3 — — — — — 3 059 0.6 PTO engaged J35 20 16
7
081 0.6 PTO engaged J28 11 13
604bsm19 10
8 074 1 Front axle solenoid valve J35 31 7
9 055 0.6 Diag. K J35 3 4
1
10 054 0.6 Diag. L J35 7
11 067 1 FR power take off control J46 1
Wire 2 J79 Ending 12 080 0.6 + APC RR PTO clutch ctrl J28 6
markers 2 4 6 8
13 066 0.6 Hydraulic doubler warning light J35 30
2
14 — — — — —
+ AVC rear working light controls
4
1 075 1 J06 6 15 — — — — —
6
2 — — — — — 076
075 Fuel level earth
8
077 16 M0F 0.6 J36 16 604bsm23
3 — — — — — 17 M0G 0.6 Tractor speed earth J35 2
4 — — — — — 1 3 5 7
18 — — — — —
076 1 RH rear working light controls J28 4
5 RH rear working light warning
077 0.6 J79 9
light
6 — — — — —
7 — — — — — 9 10 9 Reverser under torque version
8 — — — — —
10
077 M0D 10 7 4 1
RH rear working light warning
9 077 0.6
light
J79 5 Wire 2 P30 Ending 104 093 090 100
10 M0D 0.6 RH rear working light earth J40 A5 604bsm20 markers
094 092 101
1 100 0.6 Engine speed J41 A3
2 101 0.6 DRIVETRONIC defect J35 34 097 091 102
3 102 0.6 Buzzer controls J35 16 12 9 6 3
Reverser under torque version 4 090 0.6 Forward drive control J09 A4
5 092 0.6 Reverse drive control J09 A2
6 091 0.6 Neutral control J09 B2
Wire 2 J86 Ending 7 093 0.6 Potentiometer cursor J62 C 10
markers 8 094 0.6 Clutched position J86 3 7
4
1 2 3 9 097 0.6 De-clutched position J63 1 1
1 — — — — — 10 104 0.6 + APC ISC controls J09 B3
2 095 0,6 + APC clutch engaged switch J08 10 095 094
11 — — — — —
3 094 0,6 Clutched position P30 8 1 12 — — — — —
2
3
604bsm21 604bsm24
S T U
Wire 2 P01 Ending
markers 002 003
R
R 001 10 + AVC general 60 30
S 002 7 + AVC general 110 Z 001 062 V
T --- — — — —
U 003 7 + AVC general 110 021 020
V 062 3 Starter solenoid J41 B2
W 020 2 Dipped headlights J07 A4 Y X W 604bsm22
X 021 2 Headlights J07 A2

Y — — — — —
Z — — — — —
F.46 60 05 029 684 - 03.2004 - EN

3/1 - Front harness (engine) Connectors Designation
J01 Cab bottom harness connection
J22 Front windscreen washer pump
606bsm84
J31 Injection pump
J64 Engine calculator
J65 Fuel temperature
J66 Engine water temperature
P69
J67 Engine speed
J68 Air temperature
J90 Radiator cowling harness connection
J200
J200 Rear windscreen washer pump
P02 Cab bottom harness connection
P02
J01
P69 Transmission harness connection
Wire 2 J01 Ending

S T U
markers 300 301
E3D
E3E
R 322 10 + AVC general E3D
S 300 7 + AVC general E3D Z R 322 V 304
T — — — — —
U 301 7 + AVC general E3D 311 310
V 304 3 Starter solenoid 32
200
W 310 2 Dipped headlights J1 1 Y X W
311 2 Headlights J90 2
Y — — — — —
Z — — — — —
E3F
J64
J66
J65
604bsm25
J31
Wire 2 J22 Ending

markers 3 2 1
1 M3K 1 FR windscr. washer pump earth E3E 320 M3K
2 — — — — — 3
3 320 1 Front windscreen washer pump P02 H 2
1
31
32
604bsm26
J67
A B
Wire 2 J31 Ending
markers 337 338 A
B
A 337 1 Injection pump J64 K2
206
B 338 1 Injection pump J64 A3
604bsm27
J90
P90
3/3
60 05 029 684 - 03.2004 - EN F.47

3/1 - Front harness (engine)
Wire 2 J66 Ending
markers
A B
K J H G F E D C B A A 332 1 Engine water temperature J64 B1
Wire 2 J64 Ending B 328 1 (Ref-) Engine water temperature E3F — 332 328
markers 316 341 326 333 331 338 3
A B
A1 — — — — — 337 M3J 308 344 336 335 321 2
A2 321 1 + APC engine calculator P69 D 604bsm30
323 307 340 339 334 342 332 1

B2 335 1 Engine speed J67 A Wire 2 J67 Ending
B3 331 1 Curseur pot. accélérateur P02 U markers
K
J
H
A B
G
C1 342 1 Engine change curve P02 R A 335 1 Engine speed J64 B2
F
C2 — — — — — B 336 1 Engine speed J64 D2 335 336
C3 333 1 Fuel temperature J65 A
A B
D
C
B
D1 334 1 Air temperature J68 A
A
1 2 3
D3 326 1 (Ref-) sensors E3F 604bsm31
E1 — — — — —
E2 344 1 (Ref+) accelerator pot P02 P
E3 — — — — — 604bsm28 Wire 2 J68 Ending
markers
F1 339 1 CAN L P69 B
F2 — — — — — A 334 1 Air temperature J64 D1 A B
F3 — — — — — B 330 1 (Ref-) Air temperature E3F — 334 330
A
G1 340 1 CAN H P69 C
B
G2 308 1 Engine water temperature alert P02 T
604bsm32
G3 341 1 Engine calculator defect P02 V
H1 — — — — —
H2 — — — — —
H3 — — — — — Wire 2 J90 Ending
markers
J1 307 1 Engine water temperature P02 K 1 2 3
J2 M3J 1 Engine calculator earth E3E 1 310 2 Dipped headlights J01 W 1
310 311 M3C 2
J3 — — — — — 2 311 2 Headlights J01 3
3 M3C 2 Front optics earth 31 306 M3B
K1 323 1 + AVC engine calculator P69 A 4 306 1 Horn P02 F
K2 337 1 Injection pump J31 A 5 — — — — — 4 5 6
K3 316 1 Preheating control 226 6 M3B 1 Horn earth 31 —
604bsm33
Wire 2 J65 Ending Wire 2 J200 Ending

markers markers 3 2 1
A B
A 333 1 Fuel temperature J64 C3 1 M3G 1 RR windscr. washer pump earth E3E — 325 M3G
B 329 1 (Ref-) fuel temperature E3F — 333 329 2 — — — — — 3
2
3 325 1 Rear windscreen washer pump P02 S 1
A B
604bsm34
605bsm29
F.48 60 05 029 684 - 03.2004 - EN

3/1 - Front harness (engine) 3/2 - Preheating control harness
H
X J
Wire 2 P02 Ending 320
309 K 34
markers
G B
W 327 307
A — — — — —
A — — — — — V 341 F A C 305 L
B 303 1 D+ alternator 31 —
306 303
C — — — — —
D — — — — — U 331 319 M
E 306 1 Horn J90 4
F — — — — — 308 E D
G 320 1 Front windscreen washer pump J22 3 T N
325 344
H 309 1 Alternator speed 31 — 342
J 307 1 Engine water temperature J64 J1 S R P
K 305 1 Oil pressure 200 —
L 319 1 Air filter 206 —
M — — — — —
N 344 1 (Ref+) accelerator pot J64 E2
P 342 1 Engine curve change J64 C1
R 325 1 Rear windscreen washer pump J200 3
S 308 1 Engine water temperature alert J64 G2 30
T 331 1 Accelerator pot. cursor J64 B3
U 341 1 Engine calculator defect J64 G3 226
V 327 1 (Ref-) pot E3F —
604bsm35
W — — — — —
J39
D C B A
Wire 2 P69 Ending 321 340 339 323
markers
606bsm85
A 323 1 + AVC engine calculator J64 K1
B 339 1 CAN L J64 F1
C 340 1 CAN H J64 G1
Connectors Designation
D 321 1 + APC engine calculator J64 A2
J39 Preheating fuse
D
C
B
A
605bsm36 Wire 2 J39 Ending

markers 1
1 2
1 RG 10 + Battery 30 — RG OR
2 OR 10 Preheating relay 226 — 2
604bsm37
60 05 029 684 - 03.2004 - EN F.49

3/3 - Radiator cowling harness Connectors Designation
P90 Front harness connection
Wire 2 P90 Ending

markers
4 5 6 4
1 RG1 2 Dipped headlights E3A 5
2 BU1 2 Headlights E3B BC NO6 6
3 NO1 2 Cowling earth E3C
RG1 BU1 NO1
3/1 4 BC 1 Horn 173
5 — — — — — 1 2 3
6 NO6 1 Horn 173 604bsm38
J90
P90
173
E3A
E3B
E3C
2A
2B
3B
3A
606bsm86
F.50 60 05 029 684 - 03.2004 - EN

Notes Notes
60 05 029 684 - 03.2004 - EN F.51

0/5 - Platform/Roll bar harness Connectors Designation
606bsm87
X2D RH lights
X2G LH lights
X3 Rotating beacon
P28 Instrument panel harness connection
11 9 7 5 3 1
Wire 2 J04 Ending
10
markers 420 418 423 418
1 416 3 + AVC electric tool socket 82 + 419 422 417 421

2 421 3 + AVC electric tool socket 82 + 12 10 8 6 4 2
3 — — — — —
4 — — — — —
5 — — — — —
11
6 417 1 Rear RH brake light X2D 4
9
7 423 1 + APC electric tool socket 82 +ap
7
8 — — — — —
5
RH front light
3
EP1
EP2
9 418 1 X2D 2
1
10 422 1 RH rear light X2D 5
11 420 1 RH RR flashing light X2D 6
12 419 1 Front RH indicator X2D 3
X2D 604bsm39
4
11 9 7 5 3 1
Wire 2 J07** Ending 410 404 407 405 402 400
EP3
markers
408 409 406 403 401
1 400 1 LH front light X2G 2
12
2 401 1 LH rear light X2G 5 12 10 8 6 4 2

3 402 1 Police plate lighting 12 1
4 403 1 Trailer LH light 81 7
5 405 1 Rear LH brake light X2G 4
11
6 406 1.5 Trailer rear brake light 81 6
9
7 407 1 Front LH indicator X2G 3
7
8 409 1 Trailer rear LH indicator 81 1
5
Trailer RH light
3
9 404 1 81 5
1
10 408 1 LH rear flashing light X2G 6
54
11 410 1 Trailer rear RH indicator 81 4

55
11
59
12 — — — — —
** Platform/Roll bar harness
604bsm40
204
EP4
EP5
X3
P28
X2G
5
F.52 60 05 029 684 - 03.2004 - EN

0/5 - Platform/Roll bar harness
Wire 2 P28 Ending 13 M4N M40 425 414 411 1
markers
14 M4P 415 412 2
5 6 7 8 1 411 1.5 Rotating beacon control X3 1
Wire 2 X2D Ending 422 420
2 412 1 Socket 1000 rpm 54 + 15 M4M M4I 424 413 3
markers 3 413 1 Socket 540 rpm 55 +
M4J 418 419 417 4 414 1 Rear working light controls Ep1 —
1 M4J 1.5 RH light earth Ep3 — 5 415 1 Hand brake warning light 204 —
2 418 1 RH front light J04 9 1 2 3 4 + APC rear PTO clutch engaged
3 419 1 Front RH indicator J04 12 6 424 1 59 — 13
controls 10
4 417 1 Rear RH brake light J04 6 7 425 1 PTO engaged 59 — 7
5 422 1 RH rear light J04 10 4
8 — — — — — 1
6 420 1 RH RR flashing light J04 11 9 — — — — —
7 — — — — — 10 M4O 1.5 RH wing earth Ep3 —
5
6
8 — — — — — 11 M4P 1 LH wing earth Ep4 —
7
12 M4I 2 RH wing earth Ep5 —
8
13 M4N 3 25 A socket earth 82 —
14 — — — — —
604bsm52
15 M4M 3 25 A socket earth 82
604bsm49
5 6 7 8
Wire 2 X2G Ending
markers 401 408
1 M4B 1.5 LH light earth Ep5 — M4B 400 407 405

2 400 1 LH front light J07 1 1 2 3 4
3 407 1 Front LH indicator J07 7
4 405 1 Rear LH brake light J07 5
5 401 1 LH rear light J07 2
6 408 1 LH rear flashing light J07 10
7 — — — — —
5
6
8 — — — — —
7
8
604bsm50
1 2
Wire 2 X3 Ending
markers 411 M4C
1 411 1.5 Rotating beacon controls P28 1

2 M4C 1.5 Rotating beacon earth Ep5 —
1
2
604bsm51
60 05 029 684 - 03.2004 - EN F.53

7a - Transmission harness, REVERSHIFT reverser Connectors Designation
J49 + / - range controls - Controls declutch ISC
J54 TA speed sensor
J55 Forward drive solenoid valve
J56 Reverse drive solenoid valve
J57 Front axle solenoid valve
205 J58 Hydraulic doubler solenoid valve
J49 J59 ISC module speed sensor
J60 Front PTO solenoid valve
H G F E
J54 Wire 2 J49 Ending
markers 725
59
A 724 0.75 Controls + P50 28 724 722 723
B — — — — — A B C D
P50 C 722 0.75 Controls - P50 26
D 723 0.75 + APC controls P50 33
E 725 0.75 Controls declutch ISC P50 22
F — — — — —
G — — — — —
H — — — — —
3/1 J69
A
B
102 J56
C
D
604bsm53
J55
J57
E7A
J58
J60 Wire 2 J54 Ending
markers
1 2 3
1 703 0,75 Tractor speed power supply P50 3
2 704 0,75 TA speed signal P50 4 703 704 M7A 1
2
3 M7A 0,75 TA speed earth P50 25 3
604bsm54
Wire 2 J55 Ending

markers
A B
A 716 0,75 Forward drive solenoid valve P50 16 716 717 A
B 717 0,75 Return EV forward drive P50 17 B
604bsm55
J49 J59
Wire 2 J56 Ending
markers
202 A B
A 718 0,75 Reverse drive solenoid valve P50 18 718 719 A
B 719 0,75 Return EV reverse drive P50 19 B
205
604bsm56
606bsm88
F.54 60 05 029 684 - 03.2004 - EN

7a - Transmission harness, REVERSHIFT reverser
Wire 2 P50 Ending
markers
4 704 703 702 701 1
1 701 0,75 Hydraulic pressure 102 9 709 708 707 706 705 5
Wire 2 J57 Ending 2 702 0,75 Fuel level 202
markers 1 2 3 703 0,75 TA speed supply J54 1 15 715 714 713 712 711 710 10
4 704 0,75 TA speed signal J54 2 22 725 721 720 719 718 717 716 16
1 708 0,75 Front axle solenoid valve P50 8 708 M7F
5 705 0,75 Box engaged 205 — 28 724 722 M7A M7B M7C 23
2 M7F 0,75 Front axle EV earth E7A — 6 706 0,75 Rear PTO clutch engaged 53 —
33 723 29
+ APC rear PTO clutch
1
7 707 0,75 53 —
engagement
2
37 34
604bsm57 8 708 0,75 Front axle solenoid valve J57 1
10 710 0,75 Low fuel warning light 202 —
11 711 0,75 FR power take off control J60 A
+ AVC engine calculator
Wire 2 J58 Ending
12
13
712
713
1,4
1,4 + APC engine calculator
J69
J69
A
D
markers
1 2 14 714 0,75 CAN L engine calculator J69 B
1 709 0,75 EV hydraulic doubler P50 9 709 M7G 15 715 0,75 CAN H engine calculator J69 C
2 M7G 0,75 EV hydraulic doubler earth E7A — 16 716 0,75 Forward drive solenoid valve J55 A
17 717 0,75 Return EV forward drive J55 B
1 2
18 718 0,75 Reverse drive solenoid valve J56 A
19 719 0,75 Return EV reverse drive J56 B
604bsm58 20 720 0,75 Module speed ISC J59 1
21 721 0,75 Module speed ISC J59 2
604bsm62
22 725 0.75 Controls declutch ISC J49 E
23 M7C 1,4 Transmission earth E7A —
Fuel level earth
Wire 2 J59 Ending 2 24
25
M7B
M7A
0,75
0,75 TA speed earth
202
J54
—
3
markers
721 2 1 26 722 0.75 Controls - J49 C
1 720 0,75 Module speed ISC P50 20 27 — — — — —
720 1 28 724 0.75 Controls + J49 A
2 721 0,75 Module speed ISC P50 21
29 — — — — —
604bsm59 30 — — — — —
31 — — — — —
32 — — — — —
33 723 0.75 + APC controls J49 D
Wire 2 J60 Ending B A
34 — — — — —
markers 35 — — — — —
M7H 711 36 — — — — —
A 711 0,75 FR power take off control P50 11 B 37 — — — — —
B M7H 0,75 Front PTO earth E7A — A
604bsm60
Wire 2 J69 Ending A B C D

markers A
712 714 715 713 B
C
A 712 1,4 + AVC engine calculator P50 12 D
B 714 0,75 CAN L engine calculator P50 14
C 715 0,75 CAN H engine calculator P50 15
604bsm61
D 713 1,4 + APC engine calculator P50 13
60 05 029 684 - 03.2004 - EN F.55

7b - Transmission harness, mechanical reverser with mechanical or hydraulic doubler
Wire 2 P50 Ending
markers
1 701 0,75 Hydraulic pressure 102 — 4 704 703 702 701 1

2 702 0,75 Fuel level 202 —
9 709 708 707 706 705 5
3 703 0,75 Tractor speed power supply J54 1
4 704 0,75 TA speed signal J54 2 15 715 714 713 712 711 710 10
J49
5 705 0,75 Box engaged 205 — 22 16
6 706 0,75 Rear PTO clutch engaged 53 — 28 724 722 M7A M7B M7C 23
7 707 0,75 53 — 33 723 29
engagement
8 708 0,75 Front axle solenoid valve J57 1 37 34
9 709** 0,75 EV hydraulic doubler J58 1
J54 10 710 0,75 Low fuel warning light 202 —
11 711 0,75 FR power take off control J60 A
12 712 1,4 + AVC engine calculator J69 A
P50 13 713 1,4 + APC engine calculator J69 D
14 714 0,75 CAN L engine calculator J69 B
15 715 0,75 CAN H engine calculator J69 C
16 — — — — —
17 — — — — —
18 — — — — —
19 — — — — —
J57 20 — — — — —
J69
3/1 21 — — — — —
22 — — — — —
23 M7C 1,4 Transmission earth E7A — 604bsm69
J58 24 M7B 0,75 Fuel level earth 202 —
25 M7A 0,75 TA speed earth J54 2
26 722** 0,75 Controls - J49 C
27 — — — — —
28 724** 0,75 Controls + J49 A
29 — — — — —
J60 30 — — — — —
31 — — — — —
606bsm89 32 — — — — —
33 723** 0,75 + APC range controls J49 B
34 — — — — —
Connectors Designation 35 — — — — —
J49 + / - range controls 36 — — — — —
J54 TA speed sensor 37 — — — — —
J57 Front axle solenoid valve ** Hydraulic doubler version only
J58 Hydraulic doubler solenoid valve
Wire 2 J54 Ending
markers
Hydraulic doubler version only 1 2 3
1 703 0,75 TA speed supply P50 3
2 704 0,75 TA speed signal P50 4 703 704 M7A 1
Wire 2 J49 Ending 3 M7A 0,75 TA speed earth P50 25
2
3
markers
A B C
604bsm64
A 722 0.75 Controls - P50 26
B 723 0.75 + APC range controls P50 33 724 723 722 C
B
C 724 0.75 Controls + P50 28 A
604bsm63
F.56 60 05 029 684 - 03.2004 - EN

7b - Transmission harness, mechanical reverser with mechanical or hydraulic doubler
Wire 2 J57 Ending

markers 1 2
1 708 0,75 Front axle solenoid valve P50 8 708 M7F

2 M7F 0,75 Front axle EV earth E7A —
1
2
604bsm65
Hydraulic doubler version only
Wire 2 J58 Ending

markers 1 2
1 709 0,75 EV hydraulic doubler P50 9 709 M7G

2 M7G 0,75 Masse EV doubleur hydraulique E7A —
1 2
604bsm66
Wire 2 J60 Ending B A

markers
M7H 711
A 711 0,75 FR power take off control P50 11 B
B M7H 0,75 Front PTO earth E7A — A
604bsm67
Wire 2 J69 Ending A B C D

markers A
712 714 715 713 B
C
A 712 1,4 + AVC engine calculator P50 12 D
A 712 1,4 + AVC engine calculator P50 12
604bsm68
C 715 0,75 CAN H engine calculator P50 15
D 713 1,4 + APC engine calculator P50 13
60 05 029 684 - 03.2004 - EN F.57

8a - Transmission controls harness, Revershift inverter 25 36
Wire 2 J1 Ending
markers 838 833 811 810 813 812 809 822 825 821
24 837 832 836 835 815 814 840 13
1 M8F 1,5 DRIVETRONIC earth J51 B6
2 — — — — — M8F 830 805 826 827 823 865 820 819 839
3 — — — — —
4 830 0,75 Clutch pot. cursor J30 7 1 12
5 805 0,75 Box engaged J50 5
6 826 0,75 Forward drive control J30 4
7 827 0,75 Reverse drive control J30 5
8 823 0,75 Neutral control J30 6
9 865 0,75 Hydraulic pressure 131
J1 10 820 0,75 Engine speed J30 1
11 819 0,75 Tractor sp. J29 5
12 839 0,75 CAN H J88 A2
110
J47 13 840 0,75 CAN L J88 B2
J03 14 814 0,75 ISC module speed (revershift) J50 20
15 815 0,75 ISC module speed (revershift) J50 21
16 835 0,75 Ranges control J50 28
131 J30 17 836 0,75 Ranges control J26 50
J29 18 832 0,75 Clutched position J30 8
19 — — — — —
J51 E0A 20 — — — — —
J88 21 — — — — —
22 — — — — — 604bsm70
J50 23 — — — — —
24 837 1,5 + AVC DRIVETRONIC J03 2
25 838 1,5 + APC Drivetronic J51 A2
26 833 0,75 + APC feed EV J30 9
7a 31 809 0,75 EV hydraulic doubler J50 9
32 822 0,75 Hydraulic doubler warning light J29 13
606bsm90
33 825 0,75 Buzzer controls J30 3
34 821 0,75 DRIVETRONIC defect J30 2
36 — — — — —
J1 Transmission electronic control unit
J29 Instrument panel harness connection
J30 Instrument panel harness connection
J47 CAN network socket and diagnostic socket
J50 Transmission harness connection
J51 Shunt base
J88 Shunt base
Wire 2 J03 Ending

11 9 7 5 3 1
markers 837 845
1 852 1.5 + APC engine calculator J50 13 852 851

2 837 1.5 + APC DRIVETRONIC J1 24 12 10 8 6 4 2
3 — — — — —
4 — — — — —
5 — — — — —
6 — — — — —
11
7 — — — — —
9
7
8 — — — — —
5
9 — — — — —
3
10 845 1.5 + APC transmission controls J51 B1

1
11 851 1.5 + AVC engine calculator J50 12

12 — — — — —
604bsm71
F.58 60 05 029 684 - 03.2004 - EN

8a - Transmission controls harness, Revershift inverter 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Wire 2 J47 Ending
markers 866 861 842
1 847 803 806 861 822 M8C 16 1 — — — — — M8G 867 860

Wire 2 J29 Ending 2 — — — — — 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
markers 2 800 804 808 849 M8H 17 3 — — — — —
801 819
4 — — — — —
1 847 0,6 Fuel minimum alert J50 10 3 802 860 18 5 M8G 1 Diagnostic plug J51 B5
2 800 0,6 Hydraulic pressure 131 — 6 867 1 CAN L J88 B1
2 801 0,6 Hydraulic pressure J50 1 7 860 1 K line J29 9
3 802 0,6 Fuel level J50 2 8 — — — — —
4 803 0,6 Tractor speed power supply J50 3 9 — — — — —
5 804 0,6 Tractor sp. J50 4 10 — — — — —
5 819 0,75 Tractor sp. J1 11 11 — — — — —
6 — — — — — 12 — — — — —
Rear PTO clutch engagement 13 — — — — —
7 806 0,6 J50 6
lever 14 866 1 CAN H J88 A1
8 808 0,75 Front axle solenoid valve J50 8 16 15 861 1 L line J29 10 604bsm74
9 860 1 K line J47 7 17 16 842 1 Diag. socket power supply J51 A3
10 861 1 L line J47 15
18
11 849 0,6 Front PTO EV controls J50 11
12 — — — — — 604bsm72
13 822 0,75 Hydraulic doubler warning light J1 32 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
14 — — — — —
Wire 2 J51 Ending
markers A
15 — — — — —
16 M8C 0,6 Fuel level earth J50 24
+ APC rear PTO clutch B
17 M8H 0,6 TA speed earth J50 25 A1 807 0,6 J50 7
18 — — — — — engagement switch
A2 838 1,5 + APC Drivetronic J1 25 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
A3 842 1 Diagnostic socket power supply J47 4
A 807 838 842 M8A M8B
A4 — — — — —
A5 M8A 1,5 Transmission control earth E0A B 845 846 M8G M8F
1 820 826 830 10 A6 M8B 1,5 Transmission earth J50 23
Wire 2 J30 Ending A7 — — — — —
markers 2 821 827 832 11
B1 845 1,5 + APC transmission controls J03 12
1 820 0,75 Engine speed J1 10 3 825 823
824 833 12 B2 846 0,6 + APC + / - ranges control J50 33
1
2 821 0,75 DRIVETRONIC defect J1 34 B3 — — — — —
2
A
3
3 825 0,75 Buzzer controls J1 33 B4 — — — — —
4 826 0,75 Forward drive control J1 6 B5 M8G 1 Diagnostic socket earth J47 5 B
5
6
5 827 0,75 Reverse drive control J1 7 B6 M8F 1,5 DRIVETRONIC earth J1 1
7
6 823 0,75 Neutral control J1 8 B7 — — — — —
6 824 0,6 Controls declutch ISC J50 22
7 830 0,75 Clutch pot. cursor J1 4
8 832 0,75 Clutched position J1 18 10
9 833 0,75 + APC feed EV J1 26 604bsm76
11
10 — — — — —
11 — — — — — 12
12 — — — — — 604bsm73
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Wire 2 J88 Ending
markers A
A1 866 1 CAN H J1 6 B
A2 839 0,75 CAN H J50 12
A3 854 0,6 CAN H engine calculator --- 15 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
A4 — — — — —
A5 — — — — — A 866 839 854
A6 — — — — — B 867 840 853
A7 — — — — —
J47
B1 867 1 CAN L J1 14
B2 840 0,75 CAN L J50 13
B3 853 0,6 CAN L engine calculator --- 15
1
2
B4 — — — — — A
3
B5 — — — — —
B
5
B6 — — — — —
6
B7 — — — J1 —
7
604bsm77
60 05 029 684 - 03.2004 - EN F.59

8a - Transmission controls harness, Revershift inverter
Wire 2 J50 Ending

markers 1 801 802 803 804 4
1 801 0,6 Hydraulic pressure J29 2 5 805 806 807 808 809 9
2 802 0,6 Fuel level J29 3 10 847 849 851 852 853 854 15
3 803 0,6 TA speed supply J29 4
16 810 811 812 813 814 815 824 22
4 804 0,6 Tractor sp. J29 5
5 805 0,75 Box engaged J1 5 23 M8B M8CM8H 836 835 28
Rear PTO clutch engagement 29 846 33
6 806 0,6 J29 7
switch
34 37
7 807 0,6 J51 A1
engagement switch
8 808 0,75 Front axle solenoid valve J29 8
10 847 0,6 Fuel minimum alert J29 1
11 849 0,6 Front PTO EV controls J29 11
12 851 1,5 + AVC engine calculator J03 11
13 852 1,5 + APC engine calculator J03 1
14 853 0,6 CAN L engine calculator J88 B3
15 854 0,6 CAN H engine calculator J88 A3
16 810 0,75 Forward drive solenoid valve J1 28
604bsm75
22 824 0,6 Controls declutch ISC J30 6
23 M8B 1,5 Transmission earth J51 A6
25 M8H 0,6 TA speed earth J29 17
27 -- -- ---- --- --
29 — — — — —
30 — — — — —
31 — — — — —
32 — — — — —
33 846 0,6 + APC + / - ranges control J51 B2
34 — — — — —
35 -- -- ---- -- --
36 -- -- ---- -- --
37 -- -- ---- -- --
F.60 60 05 029 684 - 03.2004 - EN

Notes Notes
60 05 029 684 - 03.2004 - EN F.61

8b - Transmission controls harness, mechanical inverter with mechanical or hydraulic 1 800 803 806 811 838 M8C 16
doubler
Wire 2 J29 Ending
markers 2 801 804 808 814 M8D 17
1 800 0,6 Fuel minimum alert J50 10 3 802 805 810 18
2 801 0,6 Hydraulic pressure J50 1
3 802 0,6 Fuel level J50 2
4 803 0,6 TA speed supply J50 3
5 804 0,6 Tractor sp. J50 4
6 805 0,6 Box engaged J50 5
7 806 0,6 Rear PTO clutch engaged J50 6
J53 9 810 1 K line J47 7
J52 10 811 1 L line J47 15
11 814 0,6 Front PTO EV controls J50 11 16
+ APC rear PTO clutch 17
12 816 0,6 J51 B1
engagement
18
13 838** 0,6 Hydraulic doubler warning light J53 2
J47
14 — — — — — 604bsm79
J03 15 — — — — —
17 M8D 0,6 TA speed earth J50 25
18 — — — — —
J29
** Hydraulic doubler version only
J51 E0A
J50
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Wire 2 J47 Ending 823 811 809
markers
M8F 824 810
1 — — — — —
2 — — — — — 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
3 — — — — —
7a 4 — — — — —
5 M8F 1 Diag. socket earth J51 B1
606bsm91 6 824 1 CAN H engine calculator J50 15
7 810 1 K line J29 9
8 — — — — —
J03 Interconnection panels 10 — — — — —
J29 Instrument panel harness connection 11 — — — — —
J47 CAN network socket and diagnostic socket 12 — — — — —
J50 Transmission harness connection 13 — — — — —
J51 Shunt base 14 823 1 CAN L engine calculator J50 14
J52 Doubler relay 15 811 1 L line J29 10 604bsm80
J53 Doubler relay 16 809 1 Diagnostic socket power supply J51 A6
11 9 7 5 3 1
Wire 2 J03 Ending 812
markers
821 822
1 821 1,5 + AVC engine calculator J50 12
2 — — — — — 12 10 8 6 4 2
3 — — — — —
4 — — — — —
5 — — — — —
11
6 — — — — —
9
7 — — — — —
7
8 — — — — —
5
3
9 — — — — —
1
10 812 1 + APC transmission controls J51 A7

11 822 1,5 + APC engine calculator J50 13
12 — — — — —
604bsm78
F.62 60 05 029 684 - 03.2004 - EN

8b - Transmission controls harness, mechanical inverter with mechanical or hydraulic Mechanical reverser
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
doubler Wire 2
markers
J51 Ending A
B
Wire 2 J50 Ending A1 807 0,6
engagement switch
J50 7
markers
A2 809 1 Diagnostic socket power supply J47 16
A3 812 1 + APC transmission controls J03 10
1 801 0,6 Hydraulic pressure J29 2
A4 — — — — —
1
2 802 0,6 Fuel level J29 3
2
A5 M8A 1 Transmission control earth E0A A
TA speed supply
3
3 803 0,6 J29 4
A6 M8B 1 Transmission earth J50 23
4 804 0,6 Tractor sp. J29 5 B
5
Box engaged A7 — — — — —
6
5 805 0,6 J29 6
7
6 806 0,6 Rear PTO clutch engaged J29 7
+ APC rear PTO clutch B1 816 0,6 J29 12
7 807 0,6 J51 A5 engagement
engagement switch
B2 — — — — —
9 839* 0,75 EV hydraulic doubler J53 4 B3 — — — — —
1 801 802 803 804 4
B4 — — — — — 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
10 800 1 K line J47 7
5 805 806 807 808 839 9 B5 — — — — —
11 814 0,6 Front PTO EV controls J29 11 A 807 809 812 M8A M8B
12 821 1,5 + AVC engine calculator J03 1 B6 — — — — —
10 800 814 821 822 823 824 15
B7 M8F 1 Diagnostic socket earth J47 5 B 816
13 822 1,5 + APC engine calculator J03 11 16 22 M8F
14 823 1 CAN L engine calculator J47 14
23 M8B M8CM8D 837 836 28 604bsm82
15 824 1 CAN H engine calculator 47 6
16 — — — — — 29 835 33
17 — — — — —
34 37
18 — — — — — Hydraulic reverser
19 — — — — — 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
20 — — — — —
21 — — — — — 604bsm81
Wire 2 J51 Ending A
markers
22 — — — — —
23 M8B 1 Transmission earth J51 A2 —
B
24 M8C 0,6 Fuel level earth J29 16 A1 M8A 1 Transmission control earth E0A
25 M8D 0,6 TA speed earth J29 17 A2 M8B 1 Transmission earth J50 23
26 837* 0,6 Ranges control J52 1 A3 — — — — —
27 — — — — — A4 — — — — —
1
28 836* 0,6 Ranges control J53 5 + APC rear PTO clutch
2
A
3
29 — — — — — A5 807 0,6 J50 7
engagement switch
30 — — — — — Diagnostic socket power supply B
5
A6 809 1 J47 16
6
31 — — — — — A7 812 1 + APC transmission controls J03 10
7
32 — — — — —
33 835* 0,6 + APC + / - ranges controls J51 B5 B1 M8F 1 Diagnostic socket earth J47 7
34 — — — — — B2 M8G 0,6 Relay 100 earth J52 2
35 — — — — — B3 M8H 0,6 101 relay earth J53 6
36 — — — — — + APC rear PTO clutch
B4 816 0,6 J29 12 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
37 — — — — —
engagement
A M8A M8B 807 809 812
B5 835 0,6 + APC + / - ranges controls J50 33
B6 840 0,6 + APC relay 100 J52 4 B M8F M8G M8H 816 835 840 841
B7 841 0,75 + APC relay 101 J53 7
604bsm83
Wire 2 J52 Ending

5
5
markers
2 M8G 840 837 1 Hydraulic doubler version only
1 837 0,6 Ranges control J50 26 4 4
2 M8G 0,6 Relay 100 earth J51 B2
842
1 Wire 2 J53 Ending
2 838 1
3 842 0,6 Relay 100 - 101 J53 3 markers
3 4 839 842 3 2
4 840 0,6 + APC relay 100 J51 B6 3
5 — — — — — 604bsm84 1 — — — — — 4
2 838 0,6 Hydraulic doubler warning light J29 13 6 M8H 836 5 6 1
3 842 0,6 Relay 100 - 101 J52 3 7 841
3
4 839 0,75 EV hydraulic doubler J50 9 7 5
6 M8H 0,6 101 relay earth J51 B3
7 841 0,75 + APC relay 101 J51 B7 604bsm85
60 05 029 684 - 03.2004 - EN F.63

Notes Notes
F.64 60 05 029 684 - 03.2004 - EN

TOOLS
60 05 029 684 - 03.2004 - EN F.65

Electricity tools Electricity tools
60 05 006 703 6703 60 05 006 704 6704 77 00 065 236 5236
607msm01 607msm02 607msm06
Crimping pliers Pin extractor Extractor for relay panel switches and interconnections
60 05 006 707 6707 60 05 006 744 6744
607msm03 607msm04
Ammeter pliers (a.c. and d.c.) Multifunction multimeter

0 to 2 A - 0 to 200 A (except temperature)
60 05 006 758 6758 77 00 065 236 5236
607msm05 607msm07
Extractor to unlock clips and tabs of MIC type Extractor to unlock terminals on control panel switches
F.66 60 05 029 684 - 03.2004 - EN

B1 – LUK CLUTCHES
DT 310 – 310 G POWER
TAKE-OFF HYDRAULIC
CLUTCH (REVERSHIFT)
B2 – B41 GEARBOX
10 - 2003 Chapter B
60 05 029 684 - 10.2003 - EN
CONTENTS
B1 – DRIVE AND POWER TAKE-OFF MECHANICAL

CLUTCHES
DRIVE AND POWER TAKE OFF MECHANICAL CLUTCHES ............................................................................... B1.2
DT 310 – 310 G CLUTCH ...................................................................................................................................... B1.3
CLUTCH REMOVAL ............................................................................................................................................. B1.4
CLUTCH DISASSEMBLY ..................................................................................................................................... B1.4
CLUTCH REASSEMBLY ...................................................................................................................................... B1.4
FRICTION DISC INSPECTION ............................................................................................................................. B1.4
INSPECTION AND RECONDITIONING OF THE ENGINE FLYWHEEL THRUST SURFACES .............................. B1.5
INSPECTION OF THE ENGINE FLYWHEEL SPIGOT BEARING ......................................................................... B1.5
ENGINE FLYWHEEL REMOVAL .......................................................................................................................... B1.5
CLUTCH INSTALLATION ...................................................................................................................................... B1.6
CLUTCH RELEASE LEVER ADJUSTMENT ......................................................................................................... B1.6
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION OF THE POWER TAKE-OFF CLUTCH SHAFT ......................................................... B1.7
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION OF THE CLUTCH STOPS AND GUIDE ...................................................................... B1.8
CLUTCH CLEARANCE ADJUSTMENT .............................................................................................................. B1.10
CLUTCH CLEARANCE ADJUSTMENTS ............................................................................................................. B1.11
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION OF THE POWER ASSISTANCE CYLINDER ............................................................ B1.13
REVERSHIFT HYDRAULIC-CONTROL POWER

TAKE-OFF CLUTCHES
REVERSHIFT GEARBOX POWER TAKE-OFF CLUTCH ................................................................................... B1.16
CLUTCH REMOVAL ........................................................................................................................................... B1.17
CLUTCH INSPECTION ...................................................................................................................................... B1.17
INSPECTION AND RECONDITIONING OF THE ENGINE FLYWHEEL THRUST SURFACES ............................ B1.19
INSPECTION OF THE ENGINE FLYWHEEL SPIGOT BEARING ....................................................................... B1.19
ENGINE FLYWHEEL REMOVAL ........................................................................................................................ B1.19
CLUTCH INSPECTION ...................................................................................................................................... B1.20
CLUTCH INSTALLATION .................................................................................................................................... B1.20
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ................................................................................................................................. B1.21
SHIMMING OF THE DRIVE SHAFT BEARING .................................................................................................. B1.22
REVERSHIFT COVER INSTALLATION .............................................................................................................. B1.23
60 05 029 684 - 10.2003 - EN

B2 – B41 GEARBOXES
DESIGNATION OF THE GEARBOXES ................................................................................................................ B2.2
LUBRICATION – SPECIFIC OIL ........................................................................................................................... B2.2
MECHANICAL GEARBOX KINEMATICS ............................................................................................................. B2.3
HYDRAULIC GEARBOX KINEMATICS ................................................................................................................ B2.4
GEARBOX CONTROLS
CONTROL LOCKING ......................................................................................................................................... B2.15
MECHANICAL REVERSER CONTROL AND DOUBLER .................................................................................... B2.16
MECHANICAL REVERSER CONTROL AND HYDRAULIC DOUBLER ................................................................ B2.16
MECHANICAL REVERSER/DOUBLER .............................................................................................................. B2.17
MECHANICAL CONTROL ADJUSTMENT .......................................................................................................... B2.18
REVERSHIFT INPUT HOUSING

(REVERSER UNDER TORQUE – HYDRAULIC DOUBLER AND REVERSER)
PRESENTATION ................................................................................................................................................ B2.20
SECTION DRAWING ......................................................................................................................................... B2.21
REVERSER AND CLUTCHES ............................................................................................................................ B2.24
REVERSER AND CLUTCHES ............................................................................................................................ B2.24
REMOVAL OF THE COMPLETE REVERSHIFT INPUT HOUSING .................................................................... B2.25
REVERSHIFT HOUSING COVER DISASSEMBLY ............................................................................................ B2.26
DOUBLER REMOVAL ........................................................................................................................................ B2.26
SHIMMING OF THE DRIVE SHAFT BEARING .................................................................................................. B2.35
REVERSER ....................................................................................................................................................... B2.37
TWINSHIFT HOUSING WITH HYDRAULIC DOUBLER

MECHANICAL OPERATION ............................................................................................................................... B2.44
ADJUSTMENTS AND TIGHTENING TORQUES ................................................................................................ B2.46
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION – DRIVE SHAFT ...................................................................................................... B2.46
MECHANICAL REVERSER ................................................................................................................................ B2.48
REMOVAL OF THE COMPLETE TWINSHIFT HOUSING ................................................................................... B2.49
DOUBLER REMOVAL ........................................................................................................................................ B2.50
REVERSER ....................................................................................................................................................... B2.60
MECHANICAL REVERSER AND DOUBLER

DRIVE SHAFT ................................................................................................................................................... B2.66
INPUT HOUSING WITHOUT DOUBLER AND WITH MECHANICAL REVERSER ............................................... B2.68
INPUT HOUSING WITH MECHANICAL REVERSER AND DOUBLER (WITH DEAD SLOW GEAR) ................... B2.70
ADJUSTMENT OF THE CLUTCH SHAFT (0.02-MM PRELOAD) ................................................................................. B2.72
60 05 029 684 - 10.2003 - EN

ADJUSTMENT OF THE REVERSER/DOUBLER HARNESS CLEARANCE .................................................................... B2.73
SHIMMING OF THE MECHANICAL REVERSER TRANSMISSION SHAFT ................................................................... B2.74
GEARS AND RANGES

PRELIMINARY OPERATIONS ................................................................................................................................. B2.77
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION OF THE PRIMARY SHAFT .............................................................................................. B2.77
TWINSHIFT GEARBOX .......................................................................................................................................... B2.77
SHAFT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION .......................................................................................................................... B2.81
BEARING PRELOADING ........................................................................................................................................ B2.81
FINALS STEPS ..................................................................................................................................................... B2.81
SHAFT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION .......................................................................................................................... B2.82
ADJUSTMENT ...................................................................................................................................................... B2.83
FINALS STEPS ..................................................................................................................................................... B2.83
SECONDARY SHAFT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ..................................................................................................... B2.85
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION OF THE POWER TAKE-OFF INTERMEDIATE SHAFT ........................................................ B2.85
ADJUSTMENT OF THE APEX DISTANCE ................................................................................................................ B2.86
FINALS STEPS ..................................................................................................................................................... B2.88
TYPES OF INTERVENTIONS ON THE SECONDARY SHAFT .................................................................................... B2.88
LOW PRESSURE HYDRAULIC CIRCUITS

TIGHTENING TORQUES FOR HYDRAULIC COMPONENTS AND UNIONS .................................................................. B2.90
PRESSURE SWITCHES ......................................................................................................................................... B2.90
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS ....................................................................................................................................... B2.91
PRESSURE RESTRICTER ..................................................................................................................................... B2.97
FLOW DIVIDER/REGULATOR ................................................................................................................................. B2.97
HYDRAULIC UNITS ................................................................................................................................................ B2.98
CONNECTION OF THE TEST EQUIPMENT (ALL TRACTORS EXCEPT REVERSHIFT) .............................................. B2.101
CONNECTION OF THE TEST EQUIPMENT (REVERSHIFT TRACTORS ONLY) ......................................................... B2.102
“CHECK VALUES READING” SHEET ..................................................................................................................... B2.103
PUMPFLOWCHECK ........................................................................................................................................... B2.103
DIVIDER FLOW CHECK ........................................................................................................................................ B2.103
DRIVE PRESSURE CHECK .................................................................................................................................. B2.103
CHECK OF POWER TAKE-OFF HOUSING PRESSURE ............................................................................................ B2.104
TWINSHIFT DOUBLER PRESSURE CHECK ........................................................................................................... B2.104
REVERSHIFT CLUTCH PRESSURE CHECK ........................................................................................................... B2.105
REVERSHIFT CLUTCH PRESSURE CHECK (CONT’D) ............................................................................................ B2.106
REVERSHIFT POWER TAKE-OFF HYDRAULIC CONTROL ...................................................................................... B2.106
60 05 029 684 - 10.2003 - EN

TOOLS
TRANSMISSION TOOLS ..................................................................................................................................... B2.107
60 05 029 684 - 10.2003 - EN

B1 – DRIVE AND POWER TAKE
OFF MECHANICAL CLUTCHES
Drive and power take off mechanical clutches

Note: The Revershift transmission drive clutches are covered in the gearbox chapter.
Tractors 72 ch * 80 ch * 90 ch * 100 ch *
Clutch Mechanical dry
Make LU K
Type Double w ith separate control
Pressuriz ation By orifice plate
Load on the plate (daN.m) 800 ± 50 800 ± 55
Drive disc 1 1 1 1
Lining Organic Cerametallic Cerametallic Cerametallic
Diameter 310 310 310 310
Control By lever
Rear pow er take-off disc 1 1 1 1
Lining Organic Organic Organic Organic
Diameter 310 310 310 310
Control Mechanical or mechanically assisted
* Power ECE R24.
B1.2 MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
DT 310 – 310 G clutch A B
10 2 6 to 8daN.m 6 to 8daN.m
Clearance
1 9
Overall view
15 18
3 19
4 21
Pin position
on clutch fork
5 20
Description
1 Flywheel
2 Clutch cover
6 22
3 Drive friction disc
4 Drive pressure plate
5 Diaphragm + Retainer ring 14daN.m
6 Power take-off pressure plate Loctite 242 14 16
7 Power take-off friction disc
8 Drive toggle levers Assembly
9 Power take-off toggle levers dimension
10 Power take-off toggle lever adjustment nut 25 17
11 Drive toggle lever adjustment screw
12 Drive toggle lever locknut
13 Centring pin mm
7 23 38
14 Flywheel attachment bolt
15 Clutch cover attachment bolt
16 Drive shaft
17 Power take-off shaft 8 24
18 Drive thrust bearing
19 Power take-off thrust bearing
20 Drive thrust bearing support 13
21 Power take-off thrust bearing support
22 Clutch guide
23 Drive control fork assembly
11 Tractors 72 ch 80 – 90 – 100 ch
24 Power take-off control fork assembly
25 Bearing Fingers A 8 +3 8 +3
Clutch release
26 Bolt
dimension Fingers C 9 +3 10 + 2
12
Loctite 271 Fingers B 12 12
Wear dimension
Fingers D 18 20
Clearance
C D
334B1001 Fig. 1
60 MR 334 684
05 029 – 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN B1.3
Drive and power take-off mechanical clutches
Clutch removal
72-ch tractor
– Disconnect the tractor between the engine and the gearbox.
– Apply reference marks in A and B to identify the position of
the clutch in relation to the flywheel (Fig. 2). 7
– Remove the clutch attachements and remove the clutch from
the flywheel.
Note: As the clutch is relatively heavy, for safety reasons, it
is recommended to use the special tool P/N 77 01 388 433 for
removal. In any case, use appropriate lifting means.
334B1002 Fig. 2
3
Clutch disassembly
Important
– Before disassembling the clutch, it is imperative to identify
the relative positions of the pressure plates.
– Apply a reference mark to the power take-off pressure plate
(6), and the drive pressure plate (4) to identify their position with
respect to the clutch cover(2) (Fig. 3).
Important
– Identify the positions of the 3 drive toggle levers (8) and the
4 power take-off toggle levers (9) in relation to the clutch cover 334B1003 Fig. 3
(2) as shown in Fig. 4.
During diassembly, do not loose the pins (13).
7
80 – 90 – 100-ch tractors
3
334B1004 Fig. 4
Friction disc inspection

– Measure the minimum thickness and the maximum runout of – Replace them when the dimensions specified below are not met.
the drive friction discs (3) and the power take-off friction discs
(7).
Items Disc thickness Theoretical Minimum Max runout 0.6mm

T
(3) Drive 10.5 ± 0.3 mm 8 mm
(7) Pow er take-off 7.6 ± 0.3 mm 5.1 mm
Clutch reassembly
– Perform the operations in the reverse disassembly – Install each element in accordance with the markings performed 334B1005 Fig. 5
sequence. before removal.
B1.4 60 MR 334 684

05 029 – 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
Drive clutch control
Inspection and reconditioning of the flywheel thrust surfaces

– Using a dial indicator gauge, measure the flatness (B) of the flywheel (1) friction surface.
If the out-of-flatness is > 0.8 mm, dress the surface (A) as per the dimension (C) without removing more than 2 mm of material.
If the dimensions cannot be achieved, replace the flywheel.
Note: The dimension «C» is equal to the dimension between the crankshaft supporting face and that of the clutch.
Inspection of the flywheel spigot bearing

– Check the bearing (28) is rotating freely. If any seizing is found, replace the bearing.
Engine flywheel removal

Important: As the flywheel is relatively heavy, it is
recommended to use the tool P/N 8433 as a lifting means. In
any case, use an appropriate lifting means.
– Remove the starter motor.
– Remove the two attachement bolts (E) of the flywheel (Fig.
7) and replace them with two guide studs (locally
manufactured using two bolts tool 6005 021 489).
– Then remove the other bolts (E).
– Screw two bolts P/N 6005 021 489 into the threaded holes
(F) to extract the flywheel.
0,8 maxi
Engine flywheel installation
– Insert the flywheel’s matching bores on the guide studs, and B
slide the flywheel against the crankshaft.
– Install new bolts coated with Loctite 242.
– Tighten the bolts in the free threaded holes, then remove the
guide studs and fit the last bolts instead.
– Torque tighten to 14daNm.
C = 72,56 mm
334B1007 Fig. 7 334B1006 Fig. 6
MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN B1.5
Clutch installation Note: The legs installed are calibrated to the lever adjustment
dimension.
Note: For safety reasons, use the lifting means used for – Position the legs on the flywheel (1) as shown in Fig. 8.
removal. – Tighten the three nuts (10) for the drive toggle levers to the
– Perform the operations in the reverse removal sequence, point of resistance, taking care not to move the legs (use a thin
observing the markings made before removal. feeler gauge). Lock the nut with Loctite 242.
– Torque tighten the clutch attachments to: – Tighten the 3 bolts (11) for the power take-off toggle levers
8 dia. bolt = 3 ± 1 daN.m; 12 dia. bolt = 8 ± 1 daN.m. to the point of resistance, then lock the locknuts (12), taking
care not to move the legs (use a thin feeler gauge). Lock the nut
with Loctite 242.
– Reconnect the gearbox casing to the engine casing.
– Torque-tighten the casing fittings to 6 to 8daN.m.
Clutch release lever adjustment
– Mount the stop hub (P/N 5900) and socket (P/N 8424) on the
centring tool (P/N 8423), insert the adjustment legs (P/N 8430)
(Fig. 8).
DT 310/310 G
8424
334B1008 Fig. 8
B1.6 MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
Description
1 Power take-off shaft
2 Circlip
3 Cover
4 Adjustment shim
5 Circlip
6 Circlip
7 Sealing bushes
8 Speed clutch shaft
9 Sealing bush
334B1009 Fig. 9
Removal/installation of the power Installation

– Check the operation of the needle cages fitted inside the rear
take-off clutch shaft intermediate shaft and in the speed clutch shaft.
– Imperatively replace the seals (7) and (9).
Removal – Slightly oil them before installing them.
– Remove in sequence the circlip (2), the cover (3), the – Insert the power take-off shaft (1) inside the shafts.
adjustment shim(s) (4), the circlips (5) then (6). – Install in sequence the circlips (6) and (5), the adjustment
– Extract the power take-off shaft (1). shim(s) (4), the cover (3) and the circlip (2).
MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN B1.7
clutch stops and guide
Note: The operations below are valid for all types of mechanical- 19
18
control clutches.
Removal
– Uncouple the tractor between the engine and the gearbox.
– Release the stop controls.
– Move the stops forward manually actuating the controls (23)
and (24) (Fig. 10 and 11).
– Remove the two clips (29) securing the drive fork (23) onto 24
the drive stop support (20) (Fig. 11).
334B1010 Fig. 10
Twinshift
gearboxes
Mechanical
17 gearboxes
22
20 16
18 25
29
25
21 17
22
19
20 16
18
26
23
29
21
19
24
23
334B1011 Fig. 11
B1.8 MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
– Remove the two clips (29) securing the power take-off fork – Remove the seal (25) fitted on the drive shaft (16) (Fig. 11).
(24) onto the power take-off stop support (21) (Fig. 10 and 11).
– Remove both stop supports (21) and (20) sliding them forward Installation
on the clutch guide (22) (Fig. 10, 12 and 13). – Proceed in the reverse removal sequence.
– Remove the drive stop (18) (Fig. 10 and 11). – Replace the seal (25).
– Remove the power take-off stop support (21) sliding it on the – Install the clutch guide (22) on the gearbox casing and torque
drive stop support (20) (Fig. 11). tighten its attachment bolts to 4.5 ± 0.5 daN.m (Fig. 11).
– Remove the power take-off stop (19) (Fig. 10 and 11). – Assemble the controls on the clutch levers (23) and (24).
– Remove the clutch guide (22) by removing its attachment – Adjust the controls if necessary.
bolts.
MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN B1.9
Clutch clearance adjustment In the case of complete clutch replacement (clutch + cable),
pre-adjust the cable leaving the threaded endpiece to protrude
Important: Adjust beforehand the pedal to 98mm in relation to by 20mm.
the top of the mat and the tie bar (6) (X1 = 400mm approx.). – Adjust the pedal and act on the lever (1) to bring the fork (2) to
a stop on the clutch plate.
– Bring the M10 locknut (3) to contact (1).
– Insert a 4.1-mm adjustment shim between the locknut and the
lever (1).
– Bring the nut (4) to contact the lever.
Note: The tie bar (5) shall be adjusted after connecting the – Tighten the M10 locknut (3) onto the lever.
linkage. – Check there is clearance at the pedal (about 20mm).
6
X1
98 mm
2 1
5 4 3
334B1014 Fig. 14
B1.10 MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
Power take-off clutch control
Clutch clearance adjustments

– Set the lever (6) to the low position in the cab. – Remove the yoke (2) and increase the cable length by 5mm
– Connect the yoke (2) to the control (3) for the power take-off unscrewing the nut (5) to provide clearance.
clutch. – Check there is clearance at the lever (6).
– Tension the cable using the nuts (4) and (5).
4
6
334B1015 Fig. 15
MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN B1.11
Adjustment of the assisted mechanical control The distributor sends hydraulic pressure to the assistance cylinder.
The clutch is released using the hydraulic distributor lever located Note: When inactive, the lever is in the engaged position.
at the cab rear RH side.
Clutched control
To hydraulic distributor
position
Declutched
position
Assistance Distributor
cylinder control
lever
Control hydraulic
distributor
Power take-off clutch fork
Assistance cylinder
supply
334B1016 Fig. 16
Clearance = 3.5mm
334B1017 Fig. 17
Clearance adjustment at the assistance

cylinder (Fig. 17)
Reajust if clearance below 3.5mm.
Adjustment of the clearance between the

support and the distributor (Fig. 18)
– Adjust in (A) the bolt and the locknut to obtain a 1 -+0,5
1
mm
clearance between the support (1) and the distributor (2).
Note: On some versions, the spacer (3) must be inserted
between the support and the distributor.
334B1018 Fig. 18
B1.12 MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
Adjustment of the clearance at the control lever (Fig. 19)

– Act on the slide (4) attachments to prevent it from rotating in relation to the support (1), to obtain a 1 -+0,5
1
mm clearance
between the support (1) and the distributor lever (5).
Once adjustment is completed, check clutch release is operating correctly and that the lever is properly locked.
Locked
position
334B1019 Fig. 19
Removal/installation of the power

assistance cylinder
Note: Complete cylinder removal requires disconnecting the Installation
hydraulic hose and draining the hydraulic circuit. – Install the cylinder and couple the fork control.
– Reconnect the hydraulic hose to the cylinder.
Removal – Check or readjust the cylinder clearance.
– Fill and bleed the hydraulic circuit.
– Disconnect the hydraulic hose.
– Uncouple the fork control at the cylinder.
– Remove the cylinder.
MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN B1.13
Personal notes:
B1.14 MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
REVERSHIFT HYDRAULIC-
CONTROL POWER TAKE-OFF
CLUTCHES
Revershift gearbox power take-off clutch
Tractors 72 ch 80 ch 90 ch 100 ch
Clutch Mechanical dry
Make LU K
Type Simple
Pressuriz ation By orifice plate
Load on plate (daN.m) 920 ± 70
Disc 1
Lining Organic
Diameter 310
Control Hydraulic
Note: The Revershift transmission drive clutches are covered in the gearbox chapter.
Note: The control hydraulic checks are covered in the low pressure hydraulic circuit part.
* Power ECE R24.
B1.16 MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
Revershift hydraulic-control power take-off clutches
Clutch removal – Inspect the orifice plate. Replace the complete mechanism in
case of a failure.
– Mark the clutch position in relation to the flywheel. Friction disc inspection
– Remove the clutch attachments. – Check the min. thickness and the max. runout of the friction
disc (4). Theoretical thickness = 8 ± 0.3 mm
– Replace it when the dimensions given in Fig. 1 are not met.
Clutch inspection
Inspection of the damper hub
Inspection of the power take-off plate – Check the good condition of the damper hub. Replace the
– Check the wear on the power take-off plate (5) friction complete mechanism in case of a failure.
surface (Fig. 20).
– Replace the complete mechanism (5) when:
Y > 0.5mm or Z > 1mm
Inspection of the orifice plate
4 3
Theoretical = 8 ± 0.3 mm
T = 5.4 mm minimum
T
Max. runout = 0.6mm
Y = 0.5mm maximum
Z = 1mm maximum
334B1020 Fig. 20
60 MR 334 684
05 029 – 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN B1.17
Revershift hydraulic-control power take-off clutches
Revershift gearbox
Overall view Exploded view
3 18 4 7 5 13 6 to 8daN.m 10 16 17 15 14 9 8 25 26 27 Clearance = 0.2 to 0.3mm
6 to 8daN.m 6 to 8daN.m 8
13 9
11
12
14
15
16
5 17
6
2
1 4
7
30
21
23
24
2 29
29 31
6 6 to 8daN.m 28 31 30 33 7 Verbus bolts = 8 ± 0.5 daN.m 32 28
6 Hm6 screws: 4.5 ± 0.5 daN.m
27
26
25
Description 13 Cover securing bolt
1 Flywheel 14 Square section seal 24
23
2 Bearing 15 Ball bearing
22
3 Engine flywheel attachment bolt 16 Ring
4 Power take-off friction disc 17 Stop ring
5 Clutch mechanism 18 Circlip 26 Circlip
6 Clutch attachment bolt 19 Cover 27 Adjustment shim
7 Centring pin 20 Adjustment shim 28 Bearing
32
8 Supply box 21 Circlip 29 Needle cage 21
9 Spring 22 Circlip 30 Drive shaft 20
10 Casing 23 Sealing bush 31 Circlip 19
18
11 Square section seal 24 Sealing bush 32 Power take off shaft
12 Piston 25 Seal 33 Supply housing attachement bolt
334B1021 Fig. 21
B1.18 60 MR 334 684

05 029 – 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
Revershift hydraulic-control power take-off clutch
Inspection and reconditioning of the flywheel thrust surfaces

– Using a dial indicator gauge, measure the flatness (B) of the flywheel (1) friction surface. If the out-of-flatness is > 0.8 mm,
dress the surface (A) as per the dimension (C) without removing more than 2 mm of material. (C) = 60mm minimum. If the
dimensions cannot be achieved, replace the flywheel.
Note: The dimension «C» is equal to the dimension between the crankshaft supporting face and that of the clutch.
Inspection of the flywheel spigot bearing

– Check the bearing (2) is rotating freely. If any seizing is found, replace the bearing.
Engine flywheel removal

Important: As the engine flywheel is relatively heavy, it is
recommended to use tool P/N 8433 as a lifting means. In any
case, use an appropriate lifting means.
– Remove the starter motor.
– Remove two attachement bolts (E) from the flywheel (Fig. 22)
and replace them by two guide studs (locally manufactured
using two bolts).
– Then remove the other bolts (E).
– Screw two bolts into the threaded holes (F) to extract the
flywheel.
0,8 maxi
Engine flywheel installation
– Insert the flywheel’s matching bores on the guide studs, and B
slide the flywheel against the crankshaft.
– Install new bolts coated with Loctite 242.
– Tighten the bolts in the free threaded holes, then remove the
guide studs and fit the last bolts instead.
– Torque tighten to 14daNm.
C = 72,56 mm
334B1022 Fig. 22 334B1023 Fig. 23
MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN B1.19
Revershift hydraulic-control power take-off clutch
Clutch inspection 64 mm ± 1
61,5 mm mini
– Apply a 920 ± 70-daN.m load on the clutch rubber pad.
– Check the dimension between the flywheel and the rubber pad
according to the clutch disc wear: The theoritical dimension is
1
64 ± 1 mm (friction disc = 7.6mm). The minimum dimension is
61.5 mm ± 1 (for a friction disc with max. wear, i.e.5.1mm).
920 ± 70 daN.m
– Check the wear on the stroke of the clutch indicated on Fig.
20.
– The clutch stroke (C) is 8mm ± 2.
– The maximum wear stroke (U) is 11mm.
– If the measured dimensions do not match the values given in
Fig. 20, replace the friction disc.
Clutch installation
C = 8 mm ± 2 U = 11 mm maxi
Note: Use centring device P/N 8435 to center the power take-off 334B1024 Fig. 24
clutch disc
– Perform the operations in the reverse removal sequence,
observing the markings made before removal.
– Torque tighten the clutch attachments to: 3.5 ± 0.5 daN.m.
334B1025 Fig. 25
B1.20 MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
Revershift power take-off hydraulic clutch control
Removal
– Drain the hydraulic circuit.
– Disconnect the hydraulic supply pipes at the housing (8).
– Remove the bolts (33).
– Extract the supply housing assembly.
Removingthepiston
– Extract the retaining ring (17) and the ring (16) by
compressing the spring using the locally-manufactured spring
compression tool.
– Extract the piston (12) with its seals and rings.
– Recover the spring (9).
Removingthebearing
– Extract the seal (25) then the circlip (26), the adjustment shim 334B1026 Fig. 26
(27).
– Extract the bearing (28) using the locally-manufactured shaft
and bearing extractor.
– Shim the bearing.
MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN B1.21
Revershift input housing
Shimming of the drive

shaft bearing
The clearance must be 0.25 ± 0.05 mm
Shimming can be performed only when the supply housing (19)
is attached to the doubler housing.
– Mount the ball bearing (11) on the housing.
– Measure the dimensions:
X: depth between the outside face of the supply housing (19)
and the bearing support face.
Y: depth between the outside face of the supply housing (19)
and the support face of the circlip in place in its housing.
Z: thickness of the circlip (26).
– Determine the shimming thickness C:
C = X – (Y + Z + 0.25 mm).
Note: Make sure the bearing is installed. 334B1027 Fig. 27
Note: Perform some tests.

C = 1.28 mm
Example: Including 2 x 0.50 shims + 2 x 0.15 shims
X = 96.45 mm Available shims: (0,10 – 0,15 – 0,50 – 1,50).
Y = 92.47 mm
Z = 2.45 mm
Clearance = 0.25 mm Note: I you use tool P/N 6107, do not forget to subtract
C = 96.45 – (92.47 + 2.45 + 0.25) the tool thickness for the computation.
Assembly without shim
6107
26
Z
X
334B1028 Fig. 28
B1.22 MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
Revershift cover installation

– Perform installation in the reverse removal sequence.
– Imperatively replace the seals. Slightly oil them before
installing.
Note: To fit the lip seal, use the locally-manufactured seal
fitting tool.
Note: To fit the bush on the clutch stop bearing, use the locally-
manufactured tool.
– Imperatively replace the piston seals and rings.
– Torque-tighten the supply housing bolts (8) to:
Hm 10 bolt: 4.5 daN.m ± 0.5
Verbus M10 bolt: 8 daN.m ± 0.5
– Reconnect the pipes on the supply housing.
– Recouple the gearbox to the engine.
– Fill and bleed the hydraulic circuit. 334B1029 Fig. 29
MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN B1.23
Personal notes:
B1.24 MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
B2 – B41 GEARBOXES
60 05 029 684 - 10.2003 - EN

Designation of the gearboxes

Example: B41.20 H
B = gearbox
41 = gearbox series
20 = gearbox type
H = gearbox with 4-planet gear doubler
Note: On 30 km/h gearboxes, in the road range, the fifth gear is blocked mechanically.
Revershift
Mechanical Tw inshift
Mechanical hydraulic
Gearboxes reverser + hydraulic
reverser doubler +
doubler doubler
reverser
B41-10 B41-20 B41-32 B41-50

Without craw ler
5 sp eed s 5 sp eed s 5 sp eed s 5 sp eed s
range
2 ranges 2 ranges 2 ranges 2 ranges
40 km/h
B41-11 B41-21 B41-33 B41-51
With craw ler range 5 sp eed s 5 sp eed s 5 sp eed s 5 sp eed s
B41-15 B41-25 B41-37 B41-55

Without craw ler
5 sp eed s 5 sp eed s 5 sp eed s 5 sp eed s
range
30 km/h
B41-16 B41-26 B41-38 B41-56
With craw ler range 5 sp eed s 5 sp eed s 5 sp eed s 5 sp eed s
Lubrication – Specific oil
ELF TRACTORENAULT G.A. 12.

Type of oil Specific oil for mechanical transmissions fitted w ith submerged clutches and disc brakes.
Approved: GIMA M-1143 – ALLISON C4 – API GL4 – MIL-L-2105.
Gearbox + axle
55 l*
minimum oil capacity
* See the maintenance manual corresponding to the tractor.
B2.2 MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
Mechanical gearbox kinematics
TRANSMISSION COMPLETE REVERSER DOUBLER DEAD SLOW GEARS ROAD/FIELD

ROAD/FIELD
B41-10 — B41-15 gearbox (Mechanical reverser)
Engine Reverser H range (road)
Rear axle
Road/ 4 wheel drive

field housing
334B2001a Fig. 1a
B41-20 — B41-25 gearbox (Mechanical Reverser + Doubler)
Engine Reverser Doubler

Forward drive
Rear axle
Road/ 4 wheel drive

field housing
334B2001b Fig. 1b B41-10/15 gearbox = 16/41

Other gearboxes = 19 / 40
B41-11 — B41-16 gearbox (Mechanical reverser + Crawler range)
H range (road)
Engine Reverser Doubler Reverse drive M range (field)
Rear axle M range (field)
Road/ 4 wheel drive

Crawler range field housing
334B2002 Fig. 2
B41-21 — B41-26 gearbox (Mechanical reverser + Doubler + Crawler range) L range (crawler)
Engine Reverser Doubler
Rear axle
Road/ 4 wheel drive

Crawler range field housing
334B2003 Fig. 3 334B2004 Fig. 4 334B2005 Fig. 5 334B2006 Fig. 6 334B2007 334B2008
Fig. 7 Fig. 8
60 MR 334 684
05 029 – 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN B2.3
Hydraulic gearbox kinematics
TRANSMISSION COMPLETE REVERSER DOUBLER DEAD SLOW RANGE GEARS

(3 and 4 planet gears) ROAD/FIELD RANGE
B41-32 — B41-37 gearbox Forward drive

(Mechanical reverser + Twinshift hydraulic doubler)
H range (road)
Engine
Rear axle
Reverse drive
Twinshift Reverser 4 wheel drive

Doubler Road/ housing
field
334B2009a Fig. 9a 334B2011 Fig. 11 334B2013 Fig. 13

(Hydraulic reverser + Revershift hydraulic doubler)
Engine
Rear axle
Reverse drive
Doubler Revershift reverser 4 wheel drive

under torque Road/
housing
field
334B2009b Fig. 9b 334B2012 Fig. 12 334B2014 Fig. 14

(Mechanical reverser + Twinshift hydraulic doubler + Dead slow range) H range (road)
M range (field)
Engine
Rear axle M range (field)
Reverse drive
Twinshift Reverser 4 wheel drive

Doubler Road/
field housing
334b2010a Fig. 10a 334B2011 Fig. 11 334B2013 Fig. 13
B41-51 — B41-56 gearbox Forward drive L range (crawler)

(Hydraulic reverser + Revershift hydraulic doubler + Dead slow range)
Rear axle
Reverse drive
Engine
Doubler Revershift reverser under
torque Road/ 4 wheel drive
field housing
334B2010b Fig. 10b 334B2012 Fig. 12 334B2014 Fig. 14 334B2006 Fig. 6 334B2015 334B2016
Fig. 15 Fig. 16
B2.4 60 MR 334 684
05 029 – 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
B-41-51 and B41-56 gearboxes (hydraulic reverser and doubler – 3 ranges)
Tighteningtorques 2 Gearbox/clutch housing 5 Gearbox front cover 9 Dead slow range and/or clutch supply Assemblyinstructionsandadjustments C Reverser under torque and clutch
1 Rear axle gearbox 2 Verbus bolts M 12 x 175 – 70 11 Verbus bolts M 10 x 150 – 25 cover A Secondary shaft Operating clearance 0.05 to 0.15mm.
Version with P11 Tightening torque: 18daN.m ± 2daN.m Tightening torque: 6 Verbus bolts M 8 x 125 – 40 The biconical bearing is preset. It is D Hydraulic doubler
2 & 4 wheel drive housing: 10 Verbus bolts M 14 x 200 – 40 8 daN.m ± 1.5daN.m. Tightening torque: imperative not to dissociate the elements. Operating clearance 0.2 to 0.3mm.
2 Verbus bolts M 12 x 175 – 40 Tightening torque: 4.5daN.m ± 0.5daN.m. Adjustment of the apex distance: dimension
6 M21 power take-off housing
4 Verbus bolts M 12 x 175 – 50 : 10daN.m ± 1daN.m. 66.60mm. E Reverser
8 Verbus bolts M 10 x 150 – 25 10 Reverser supply cover
Tightening torque: 16daN.m Fit the nut and torque tighten it to 18daN.m Shimming for operating clearance:
3 Biconical plate on secondary shaft 2 Verbus bolts M 10 x 150 – 35 7 Verbus bolts M 8 x 125 – 40
6 Verbus bolts M 14 x 200 – 40 ± 2daN.m. Rotate the bearing. Torque J = 0.1 ± 0.05mm.
4 HM bolts 12 x 175 – 25 + 4 Grower Tightening torque: Tightening torque:
Tightening torque: 27.5daN.m washers. 8 daN.m ± 1.5daN.m. 4.5daN.m ± 0.5daN.m. tighten again to 18daN.m ± 2daN.m. Rotate F Doubler brake
Version with P11H Tightening torque: the bearing. Loosen the nut. Torque tighten Shimming under a load of 1,000daN.
2 & 4 wheel drive housing: 7 Clutch housing-engine 11 Hydraulic doubler supply cover the nut to 9daN.m ± 1daN.m. Rotate the
10daN.m ± 1daN.m.
2 Verbus bolts M 12 x 175 – 40 15 Verbus bolts M 10 x 150 – 40 6 Verbus bolts HM 10 x 150 – 30. bearing. G Primary shaft and rear intermediate
2 Verbus bolts M 12 x 175 – 50: 4 Gearbox rear cover Tightening torque: Tightening torque: shaft
8 Verbus bolts M 10 x 150 ± 25 8 daN.m ± 1.5daN.m. 4.5daN.m ± 0.5daN.m. B Front intermediate shaft and Preload for a drag torque of 0.04 to
Tightening torque: 18daN.m
Tightening torque: 6 Verbus bolts M 10 x 150 – 50 secondary shaft 0.10daN.m taken on the rear intermediate
6 Verbus bolts M 14 x 200 – 40: 8 Dead slow range housing
8 daN.m ± 1.5daN.m. Tightening torque: Preload to 0 to 0.05mm. shaft. The primary shaft should be locked
2 Verbus bolts M 14 x 200 – 50 4 Verbus bolts M 10 x 150 – 25
Tightening torque: 8daN.m ± 0.5daN.m. rotationwise.
Tightening torque:
27.5daN.m 8 daN.m ± 1.5daN.m.
334B2017 Fig. 17
60 MR 334 684
05 029 – 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN B2.5
B-41-32 and B41-37 gearboxes (mechanical reverser and hydraulic doubler – 2 ranges)
Tighteningtorques 2 Gearbox/clutch housing 5 Gearbox front cover 6 Verbus bolts M 10 x 150 – 50 Fit the nut and torque tighten it to C Mechanical reverser
1 Rear axle gearbox 2 Verbus bolts M 12 x 175 – 70 11 Verbus bolts M 10 x 150 – 25 Tightening torque: 18daN.m ± 2daN.m. Operating clearance 0.05 to 0.15 mm.
Version with P11 Tightening torque: Tightening torque: 8daN.m ± 1.5daN.m. 8daN.m ± 0.5daN.m. Rotate the bearing.
D Hydraulic doubler
2 & 4 wheel drive housing: 18daN.m ± 2daN.m. Torque tighten again to 18daN.m ± 2daN.m.
6 M21 power take-off housing 9 Clutch nose Operating clearance 0.2 to 0.3mm.
2 Verbus bolts M 12 x 175 – 40 10 Verbus bolts M 14 x 200 – 40 Rotate the bearing.
8 Verbus bolts M 10 x 150 – 25 3 Verbus bolts M 8 x 125 – 20
4 Verbus bolts M 12 x 175 – 50 Tightening torque: 10daN.m ± 1daN.m. Loosen the nut. E Doubler brake
2 Verbus bolts M 10 x 150 – 35 Tightening torque: 45daN.m ± 0.5daN.m.
Tightening torque: 16daN.m Torque tighten the nut to Shimming under a load of 1,000daN.
3 Biconical plate on secondary shaft Tightening torque:
6 Verbus bolts M 14 x 200 – 40 10 Clutch housing LH cover 9daN.m ± 1daN.m.
4 HM bolts 12 x 175 – 25 + 4 Grower 8daN.m ± 1.5daN.m. F Front intermediate shaft and secondary
Tightening torque: 27.5daN.m. 10 Verbus bolts M 10 x 50 – 25 Rotate the bearing.
washers. Tightening torque: shaft
Version with P11H 7 Clutch housing-engine Tightening torque: 8daN.m ± 1.5daN.m.
10daN.m ± 1daN.m. B Primary shaft and rear intermediate Preload to 0 to 0.05mm.
2 & 4 wheel drive housing: 15 Verbus bolts M 10 x 150 – 40
Assembly instructions and adjustments shaft
2 Verbus bolts M 12 x 175 – 40 4 Gearbox rear cover Tightening torque: G Shimming of the reverser synchro
Preload for a drag torque of 0.04 to
2 Verbus bolts M 12 x 175 – 50 8 Verbus bolts M 10 x 150 ± 25 8daN.m ± 1.5daN.m. A Secondary shaft assembly
0.10daN.m taken on the rear intermediate
Tightening torque: 18daN.m Tightening torque: The biconical bearing is preset. Operating clearance 0.10 ± 0.05mm.
8 Hydraulic doubler supply cover shaft.
6 Verbus bolts M 14 x 200 – 40 8daN.m ± 1.5daN.m. It is imperative not to dissociate the
6 Verbus bolts HM 10 x 150 – 30. The primary shaft should be locked
2 Verbus bolts M 14 x 200 – 50. elements.
Tightening torque: 4.5daN.m ± 0.5daN.m. rotationwise.
Tightening torque: 27.5daN.m. Adjustment of the apex distance: dimension
66.60mm.
334B2018 Fig. 18
B2.6 60 MR 334 684

05 029 – 02.2003 –EN
- 10.2003 - EN
B-41-20 and B41-25 gearboxes (mechanical reverser and doubler – 2 ranges)
Tighteningtorques 2 Verbus bolts M 14 x 200 – 50 4 Clutch nose 7 M21 power take-off housing The primary shaft should be locked F Reverser/doubler shaft
1 Rear axle gearbox Tightening torque: 27.5daN.m. 3 Verbus bolts M 8 x 125 – 20 8 Verbus bolts M 10 x 150 – 25 rotationwise. Preload to 0 to 0.05mm.
Version with P11 Tightening torque: 45daN.m ± 0.5daN.m. 2 Verbus bolts M 10 x 150 – 35
2 Gearbox/clutch housing B Clutch shaft G Secondary shaft
2 & 4 wheel drive housing: Tightening torque:
2 Verbus bolts M 12 x 175 – 70 5 Gearbox rear cover Preload to 0 to 0.05mm. The biconical bearing is preset.
2 Verbus bolts M 12 x 175 – 40 8daN.m ± 1.5daN.m.
Tightening torque: 8 Verbus bolts M 10 x 150 ± 25 Set shimming (1.5-mm shim). It is imperative not to dissociate the
4 Verbus bolts M 12 x 175 – 50 18daN.m ± 2daN.m Tightening torque: 8 Clutch housing-engine Shimming performed in (F). elements.
Tightening torque: 16daN.m 10 Verbus bolts M 14 x 200 – 40 8daN.m ± 1.5daN.m. 15 Verbus bolts M 10 x 150 – 40 Adjustment of the apex distance: dimension
6 Verbus bolts M 14 x 200 – 40 C Reverser transmission shaft
Tightening torque: Tightening torque: 66.60mm.
Tightening torque: 27.5daN.m. 6 Gearbox front cover Operating clearance 0.02 to 0.1mm.
10daN.m ± 1daN.m. 8daN.m ± 1.5daN.m. Fit the nut: Torque tighten it to
Version with P11H 11 Verbus bolts M 10 x 150 – 25
Assemblyinstructionsandadjustments D Front intermediate shaft and secondary 18daN.m ± 2daN.m.
2 & 4 wheel drive housing: 3 Biconical plate on secondary shaft Tightening torque:
shaft Rotate the bearing. Loosen the nut.
2 Verbus bolts M 12 x 175 – 40 4 HM bolts 12 x 175 – 25 + 4 Grower 8daN.m ± 1.5daN.m. A Assembly instructions and adjustments
Preload to 0 to 0.05mm. Torque tighten the nut to 9daN.m ± 1daN.m.
2 Verbus bolts M 12 x 175 – 50 washers. Tightening torque: Preload for a drag torque of 0.04 to
Rotate the bearing.
Tightening torque: 18daN.m. 10daN.m ± 1daN.m. 0.10daN.m taken on the rear intermediate E Reverser harness
6 Verbus bolts M 14 x 200 – 40 shaft. Operating clearance 0.02 to 0.10mm.
334B2019 Fig. 19
60 MR 334 684
05 029 – 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN B2.7
B-41-11 and B41-16 gearboxes (mechanical reverser -3 ranges)
Tighteningtorques 2 Verbus bolts M 14 x 200 – 50 4 Clutch nose 8 Clutch housing-engine B Clutch shaft G Secondary shaft
1 Rear axle gearbox Tightening torque: 3 Verbus bolts M 8 x 125 – 20. Tightening 15 Verbus bolts M 10 x 150 – 40 Preload to 0 to 0.05mm. The biconical bearing is preset.
Version with P11 27.5daN.m. torque: 45daN.m ± 0.5daN.m. Tightening torque: Set shimming (1.5-mm shim). It is imperative not to dissociate the
2 & 4 wheel drive housing: 8daN.m ± 1.5daN.m. Shimming performed in (F). elements.
2 Gearbox/clutch housing 5 Gearbox rear cover
2 Verbus bolts M 12 x 175 – 40 Adjustment of the apex distance:
2 Verbus bolts M 12 x 175 – 70 8 Verbus bolts M 10 x 150 ± 25. Tightening 9 Dead slow range housing C Reverser transmission shaft
4 Verbus bolts M 12 x 175 – 50 dimension 66.60mm.
Tightening torque: torque: 8daN.m ± 1.5daN.m. 4 Verbus bolts M 10 x 150 – 25 Operating clearance 0.02 to 0.1mm.
Tightening torque: 16daN.m Fit the nut:
18daN.m ± 2daN.m. Tightening torque:
6 Verbus bolts M 14 x 200 – 40 6 Gearbox front cover D Front intermediate shaft and secondary Torque tighten it to
10 Verbus bolts M 14 x 200 – 40. Tightening 8daN.m ± 1.5daN.m.
Tightening torque: 27.5daN.m. 11 Verbus bolts M 10 x 150 – 25. shaft 18daN.m ± 2daN.m.
torque: 10daN.m ± 1daN.m.
Version with P11H Tightening torque: Assembly instructions and adjustments Preload to 0 to 0.05mm. Rotate the bearing.
2 & 4 wheel drive housing: 3 Biconical plate on secondary shaft 8daN.m ± 1.5daN.m. Loosen the nut.
A Primary shaft and rear intermediate E Reverser harness
2 Verbus bolts M 12 x 175 – 40 4 HM bolts 12 x 175 – 25 + 4 Grower Torque tighten the nut to
7 M21 power take-off housing shaft Operating clearance 0.02 to 0.10mm.
2 Verbus bolts M 12 x 175 – 50 washers. Tightening torque: 9daN.m ± 1daN.m.
8 Verbus bolts M 10 x 150 – 25 Preload for a drag torque of 0.04 to
Tightening torque: 18daN.m. 10daN.m ± 1daN.m. F Reverser shaft Rotate the bearing.
2 Verbus bolts M 10 x 150 – 35 0.10daN.m taken on the rear intermediate
6 Verbus bolts M 14 x 200 – 40 Preload to 0 to 0.05mm.
Tightening torque: shaft.
334B2020 8daN.m ± 1.5daN.m. The primary shaft should be locked Fig. 20
rotationwise.
B2.8 60 MR 334 684

05 029 – 02.2003 –EN- EN
- 10.2003
B-41-10 and B41-15 gearboxes (mechanical reverser -2 ranges)
Tighteningtorques 2 Verbus bolts M 14 x 200 – 50 4 Clutch nose 7 M21 power take-off housing shaft. The primary shaft should be locked F Reverser shaft
1 Rear axle gearbox Tightening torque: 27.5daN.m. 3 Verbus bolts M 8 x 125 – 20 8 Verbus bolts M 10 x 150 – 25 rotationwise. Preload to 0 to 0.05mm.
Version with P11 Tightening torque: 45daN.m ± 0.5daN.m. 2 Verbus bolts M 10 x 150 – 35
2 Gearbox-clutch housing B Clutch shaft G Secondary shaft
2 & 4 wheel drive housing: Tightening torque: 8daN.m ± 1.5daN.m.
2 Verbus bolts M 12 x 175 – 70. 5 Gearbox rear cover Preload to 0 to 0.05mm. The biconical bearing is preset.
2 Verbus bolts M 12 x 175 – 40 Tightening torque: 8 Verbus bolts M 10 x 150 ± 25 8 Clutch housing-engine Set shimming (1.5-mm shim). It is imperative not to dissociate the
4 Verbus bolts M 12 x 175 – 50 : 18daN.m ± 2daN.m. Couple de serrage : 15 Verbus bolts M 10 x 150 – 40 Shimming performed in (F). elements.
Tightening torque: 16daN.m 10 Verbus bolts M 14 x 200 – 40. 8 daN.m ± 1,5 daN.m. Tightening torque: Adjustment of the apex distance: dimension
6 Verbus bolts M 14 x 200 – 40 C Reverser transmission shaft
Tightening torque: 10daN.m ± 1daN.m. 8daN.m ± 1.5daN.m. 66.60mm.
Tightening torque: 27.5daN.m. 6 Couvercle avant boîte de vitesses Operating clearance 0.02 to 0.1mm.
Assemblyinstructionsandadjustments Fit the nut: Torque tighten it to
Version with P11H 3 Biconical plate on secondary shaft 11 Verbus bolts M 10 x 150 – 25
D Front intermediate shaft and secondary 18daN.m ± 2daN.m.
2 & 4 wheel drive housing: 4 HM bolts 12 x 175 – 25 + 4 Grower Tightening torque: A Primary shaft and rear intermediate
shaft Rotate the bearing. Loosen the nut.
2 Verbus bolts M 12 x 175 – 40 washers. 8daN.m ± 1.5daN.m. shaft
Preload to 0 to 0.05mm. Torque tighten the nut to
2 Verbus bolts M 12 x 175 – 50 : Tightening torque: 10daN.m ± 1daN.m. Preload for a drag torque of 0.04 to
9daN.m ± 1daN.m.
Tightening torque: 18daN.m. 0.10daN.m taken on the rear intermediate E Reverser harness
Rotate the bearing.
6 Verbus bolts M 14 x 200 – 40 Operating clearance 0.02 to 0.10mm.
334B2021 Fig. 21
60 MR 334 684
05 029 – 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN B2.9
Casing tightening torque and tightness
Gearbox and rear axle casings.
16 ± 2daN.m
Input housing and gearbox casings.
18 ± 2daN.m 25 ± 2.5daN.m 16 ± 2daN.m
18 ± 2daN.m
Loctite 518
8.5daN.m 27.5 ± 2.5daN.m

Loctite 518
8.5daN.m
Loctite 518
8.5daN.m
Loctite 518
Input housing casing and engine casing.

8 ± 1.5daN.m – Loctite 518 (Revershift hydraulic unit 3daN.m – Assembly without Loctite)
8daN.m ± 1.5daN.m. 8daN.m ± 1.5daN.m. See chapter D
Note: On gearboxes that are not equipped with a 4 wheel drive power
take-off unit, the gearbox casing is closed. As a spare, fit a 4 wheel
drive casing with cover and seal.
334B2022 Fig. 22
B2.10 60 MR 334 684

05 029 – 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
GEARBOX CONTROLS
Gearbox controls
B41-10/15
Mechanical reverser
(5 gears – 2 ranges)
334B2023 Fig. 23
B41-20/25
Mechanical reverser
and doubler
334B2024 Fig. 24
B41-32/37
Tw inshift
Mechanical reverser
and hydraulic doubler
334B2025 Fig. 25
B41-50/56
Revershift reverser
hydraulic doubler
334B2026 Fig. 26
B2.12 MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
Gearbox controls
B41-11/16
Mechanical reverser
334B2106 Fig. 106
B41-21/26
Mechanical reverser
and mechanical doubler
334B2107 Fig. 107
B41-33/38
Tw inshift
Mechanical reverser
and hydraulic doubler
334B2108 Fig. 108
B41-51/56
Revershift
Hydraulic reverser and
doubler
334B2027 Fig. 27
MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN B2.13
Gearbox controls
Gears
8
3
8
1
9 6
7 8
6
9 7 9
4
5 4
4
2 10 5
5 14
11
12 Road/field
13
ranges
Description
Gearcontrols 18
1 Fork pin for 1st/2nd gear 21

2 Fork for 1st/2nd gear 26
20
3 Starter switch 28
4 Plunger 25
27
5 Spring 31
30
6 Needle 29
7 Finger 15
8 Pin 17
19
9 Fork locking screw
10 Fork pin for 3rd/4th gear 16
11 Fork for 3rd/4th gear
12 Fork pin for 5th gear
13 Fork for 5th gear
14 Finger 2 11 13
}
Mechanical
doubler Gears
Road/field
Mechanical ranges
reverser
Dead slow range
Road/fieldrangecontrols
15 Road/field fork pin 20 Plunger 28 Spacer
16 Road/field fork 21 Cab spring 29 Bush
17 Pin 25 Washers 30 Washer
18 Pin 26 Cam lever 31 Nut
19 Fork locking screw 27 Pin
Caution: During the gear switching test, only handle the gear control using a full lever applying the force on the knob to avoid
swivel flutter.
334B2028 Fig. 28
B2.14 MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
Gearbox controls
Control locking
Gearboxes with crawler range + mechanical reverser and doubler
Inhibition finger for the crawler

range in road range
5th gear inhibition finger in
road range (on 30 km/h
gearbox only)
Gearboxes without crawler

range
5th gear inhibition finger in road range (on 30 km/h

gearbox only)
334B2029 Fig. 29
MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN B2.15
Gearbox controls
Mechanical reverser control and doubler

Rear axle side view
1 4
5 6
Mechanical reverser control and hydraulic doubler

Rear axle side view
5
Description
1 Reverser control
2 Needle bearing to be inserted fully in the bore
3 Clutch casing
4 Doubler control
5 6 x 20 pin
6 Setscrew
2
334B2030 Fig. 30
B2.16 MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
Gearbox controls
Mechanical reverser/doubler
6
7
14
8
13
12
11
9
10
8
7
6
5
15
18
15
16
17
2
4
3
1
334B2031 Fig. 31
Description
1 Reverser control lever 7 Washer 13 Doubler connecting rod
2 Securing clip 8 Collar bearing 14 Doubler lever
3 Reverser sheath stop 9 Doubler cable 15 HM 8 x 1.25 nut
4 Clip 10 Reverser lever 16 HM 10 x 16 bolt
5 Reverser cable 11 Doubler/reverser swivel pin 17 Doubler control lever
6 Circlip 12 Doubler pivot pin 18 Sheath stop
MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN B2.17
Gearbox controls
Mechanical control adjustment

A
Reverser control
– Set the reverser lever (A) to neutral, on the instrument panel
(in the middle of the opening).
– Set the reverser to neutral
– Connect the yoke to the control and lock the nuts.
334B2032 Fig. 32
Doubler control
– Set the doubler lever (B) to neutral, on the instrument panel
(in the middle of the opening). B
– Set the doubler to neutral
– Make sure the connecting rod is about 200-mm long.
– Connect the yoke to the control and lock the nuts. m m
200
334B2166 Fig. 166
Dead slow range

Note: The dead slow range is engaged with the lever forward.
– Set the transmission levers to neutral.
– Connect the yoke to the control (C).
– Screw the cable nuts to bring the nuts to the middle of the
sheath thread.
334B2167 Fig. 167
B2.18 MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
REVERSHIFT INPUT HOUSING
(Reverser under torque – Hydraulic doubler and reverser)
Presentation
Lubrication Hydraulic doubler Doubler Link shaft Reverse Reverser clutch

supply mechanism (3 multiple disc
Power take-off supplies
planet gears) clutch
clutch control
supply Multiple disc Reverser
brake mechanism (3
planet gears) Forward
multiple Primary
disc clutch shaft
Shimming
Clearance =
0.2 to 0.3 mm
PTO
shaft
Hydraulic-control
power
take-off
clutch
Multiple disc
clutch
Drive shaft
Shimming 4.5 daN.m ± 0.5 8 daN.m ± 1.5
Load = 1,000daN.m
Shimming
Hm 10 bolt = 6 x 4.5daN.m ± 0.5 Clearance = 0.05 to 0.15 mm
Verbus bolt M10 10 x 50 = 7 x 8 daN.m ± 0.5 Shimming
Clearance = 0.05 to 0.15 mm
334B2039 Fig. 39
Power take-off clutch Supply for the doubler

control supply brake piston + doubler
piston
Lubrication
334B2040 Photo 40
B2.20 MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
Section drawing
334B2165 Fig. 165
60 MR 334 684
05 029 – 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN B2.21
Exploded view
I H H I B C
15
19 18
20
21
A
22
23 17
24 16
25
26
G E
F
Doubler (3 planet gears)
F G D 12
10
14
C B
I H
6 13
G 5 11
E 4
2 9
8
7
1
3
334B2041 Fig. 41
Description
1 Power take-off shaft 10 Adjustment shim 19 Supply box
2 Circlip 11 Bearing 20 Spring
F 3 Cover 12 Circlip 21 Square section seal
A 4 Adjustment shim 13 Needle cage
Doubler (4 planet gears) 22 Piston
Reverser 5 Circlip 14 Drive clutch shaft 23 Square section seal
6 Circlip 15 Casing 24 Ball/needle thrust bearing
7 Sealing bushes 16 Hydraulic union 25 Ring
334B2033 Fig. 33 8 Seal 17 Seal 26 Stop ring
9 Circlip 18 O-ring
B2.22 60 MR 334 684

05 029 – 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
Doubler overall view (3 planet gears) Doubler exploded view (3 planet gears)
34
33
35
37
36 39
27 32
20
29 19
25
38
23 27
38
31 29
1
30 ears
planet g
28 ucer
Red
26
24
18
22
17
21 15
e
Brak
13
12
10
16
14
334B2034 Fig. 34
11
Description 14 Backplates 27 Washers 9
1 Ball and needle thrust bearing 15 Friction discs 28 Ball and needle thrust bearing
2 Supply box 16 Circlip 29 Washer 7
3 Brake piston 17 Ball and needle thrust bearing 30 25-tooth sun gear pinion
4 O-ring 18 Washer 31 27-tooth sun gear pinion
5 O-ring 8
19 Housing 32 Ball and needle thrust bearing
6 Bolt 33 15- and 17-tooth double planet gears 5
20 Planet gear bracket housing Hydraulic-control
7 Guide 21 Circlip 34 Needle cages 3 power take-off clutch
8 Circlips 22 Backplates 35 Spacer
9 Clutch piston 23 Friction discs 36 Pin
10 Seal 24 Piston supporting plate 37 Pin
11 O-ring 38 Thick backplates 4
25 Belville washers
12 Belville washers 26 Adjustment shim 39 Needle bearing
13 Circlip 334B2035 6 Fig. 35
60 MR 334 684
05 029 – 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN B2.23
Reverser and clutches Reverser and clutches
Exploded view Overall view
Reverser planet gears
Reverse drive clutch

(4 to 6 discs according to the engine power)
334B2037 Fig. 37
Description
19 Housing 59 Pin 80 Adjustment shim
39 Needle bearing 60 Ball and needle thrust bearing 81 Needle bearing
40 Link shaft 61 Washer 82 Ball and needle thrust bearing
42 Adjustment shims 62 Backplates 83 Circlip
43 Ball and needle thrust bearing 63 Friction discs 84 Closing plate
44 Washer 64 Pin 85 Splined hub
45 Washers 65 Spring 86 Backplates
46 Splined hub 66 Circlip 87 Friction discs
47 21-tooth sun gear pinion 67 Deflector 88 Pin
48 Ball and needle thrust bearing 68 Belville washers 89 Spring
Forward drive clutch 49 Ball and needle thrust bearing 69 O-ring 90 Circlip
(2 to 3 discs according to the power) 49a Washer 70 O-ring 91 Deflector
50 15- and 17-tooth double planet gears 71 Piston 92 Belville washers
51 Needle cages 72 Supply cover 93 O-ring
52 Spacer 73 Bolt 94 O-ring
53 Pin 74 Nozzle 95 Piston
54 Pin 75 Plug 96 Clutch housing
55 19-tooth reverser planet gear 76 Stop ring 97 O-ring
56 Needle cage 77 Shaft 98 Supply box
334B2036 Fig. 36 57 Spacer 78 Ball and needle thrust bearing 99 Bolt
58 Pin 79 Splined hub
B2.24 60 MR 334 684

05 029 – 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
Removal of the complete Revershift

input housing
Refer to the overall and exploded views Fig. 38 to 41.
Note: Unlock the clutch casing bolts before uncoupling the
tractor, to facillitate loosening the casing bolts.
– Lift the cab (see chapter on cab removal).
– Remove the Revershift hydraulic unit using the locally-
manufactured tool to be installed on the trolley jack (Photo 42),
then unscrew the spacer.
– Uncouple the tractor at the clutch.
– Remove the circlip, the friction washer and the second circlip
from the power take-off shaft.
– Extract the power take-off shaft.
– Remove the three hydraulic pipes supplying the Revershift
housing. 334B2042 Photo 42
– Remove the clutch casing and place it vertically (Photo 43).
– Remove the 7 Verbus bolts.
– Loosen two of the six diagonally opposite Hm bolts.
– Replace by two M 12 x 80 bolts to apply pressure on the casing
and extract the housing assembly by screwing the bolts after
installing a chain to extract the complete housing (Photo 44).
– Extract the complete assembly cautiously (Photo 45).
Note: The forward drive clutch remains in place on the primary
shaft.
334B2043 Photo 43
334B2044 Photo 44 334B2045 Photo 45
MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN B2.25
Revershift housing cover

disassembly
(Fig. 34 and 35)
– Compress the spring (20) on the drive clutch stop (Photo 46)
using the locally-manufactured tool (spring compression tool).
– Remove the stop ring (28).
– Remove the compression tool.
– Extract the lip seal (8) from the drive shaft.
Doubler removal
Doubler clutch disassembly

(Fig. 34 and 35)
– Remove the six Hm bolts on the front cover (2) to extract it.
– Extract the clutch assembly. 334B2046 Photo 46
– Extract the circlip (16) to remove the friction discs and
backplates, the circlip (13) to remove the Belleville washers
(12).
Doubler brake disassembly

– Compress the Belleville washers using the dummy piston 6105
tool P/N 6151.
6151
Note: Tool P/N 6151 may be used with tool P/N 6105 (fitted
upside down, see photo 47).
– Remove the circlip, the backplates and the discs.
Note: Correctly mark the piston with the cover before removing
the piston.
– Extract the piston.
Note: Replace the O-rings greasing them before assembly.
Doubler planet gear disassembly 334B2047 Photo 47

(Fig. 38 to 41)
– Extract the housing (20), and the needle and ball thrust
bearing (17) as well as the washer (18).
– Recover the metal foil washers (27).
– Extract the pins (37).
– Then, extract the double pinion assembly.
– Extract the needle and ball thrust bearing, and the sun gear
pinions.
B2.26 MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
Assembly and adjustment of the doubler

planet gears (3 planet gears) Punch strokes Paint mark
– All the parts must be oiled before assembly. (manufacturer’s mark) (repairer’s mark)
– Imperatively replace all the seals.
– Fit the needle and ball thrust bearing (28), then the washer
(29).
– Comply with the location of the washer holes (27) upon
installation.
Important: Mark with paint the two teeth that have the «punch
strokes» to facilitate synchronization of the three planet gears
(Fig. 48).
– Install two double planet gears complying with the installation
direction. Position the paint marks in relation to the «punch»
marks as shown on photo 49.
– Install the sun gear (30) without moving the planet gears.
– Then install the third double planet gear complying with the
installation direction. 334B2048 Fig. 48
Marking with paint (2 teeth visible inside the housing)
334B2049 Marking with paint (1 tooth visible outside the housing, the other is hidden) Photo 49
MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN B2.27
– Fit the needle and ball thrust bearing (32).

– Check the proper operation of the assembly by rotating Punch strokes Paint mark
several turns. (manufacturer’s mark) (repairer’s mark)
Note: Check the assembly rotates freely by manually turning

the planet gears and checking their position three times
(photo 49).
(18) in the housing (20).
Adjustment of the doubler planet gears

(4 planet gears)
Note: Mark with paint the planet gear teeth that have the punch
strokes (see fig. 180).
334B2180 Fig. 180
1
Number 1 planet gear
Punch stroke marks (manufacturer) on the planet gears

41
/4 t
Paint mark (repairer) on sun gear

urn
s
25-tooth sun gear
Planet gear bracket housing
334B2181 Fig. 181
– Install the 25-tooth sun gear and mark a tooth with paint. Position
the first planet gear and align the marks on the assembly (between
the two punch marks). 2
turns
/4
41
334B2182
334B2182 Fig. 182
Fig. 182
B2.28 MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
– Install the first planet gear then rotate the sun gear by 4 1/4 turns.
Position the second planet gear, with the mark on the teeth between
3
the punch marks.
– Install the second planet gear then rotate the sun gear by 4
1/4 turns. Position the third planet gear, with the mark on the
teeth between the punch marks.
41
/4 t
urn
s
334B2183 Fig. 183
– Install the third planet gear then rotate the sun gear by
4 1/4 turns. Position the fourth planet gear, with the mark on the
teeth between the punch marks. 4
ns
tur
/4
41
334B2184 Fig. 184
– Install the fourth planet gear then rotate the sun gear by
4 1/4 turns. Return on number 1
5 the marks fall back
Important: The mark on the tooth must automatically fall back
opposite one another
between the two punch marks on the first planet gear, otherwise
the adjustment is to be carried out again.
334B2185 Fig. 185
MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN B2.29
Doubler brake assembly

Note: When replacing the doubler brake piston, oritentate it
as shown on photo 200 to facilitate cover assembly.
Note: Perform a blank assembly to determine subsequent

adjustment.
– In the housing (19), fit the two Belleville washers complying
with their fitting direction.
Important: Correctly carry out the following operations to as-
semble the doubler brake, not to damage it.
334B2200 Photo 200
– Install the first backplate (3-mm thick) complying with the position
shown (Photos 201 and 202).
One of the notches in the backplate should be inserted in the
orifice located in the middle of the longest distance between
centres of the two holes (Photo 202).
Photos 201 and 202

d shortest distance between centres of two holes in the
housing.
D longest distance between centres of two holes in the
housing. d
D
334B2201 Photo 201

d
334B2202 Photo 202
B2.30 MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
– Install the second backplate (3-mm thick) complying with the

position shown, i.e. in the same orifice as the first backplate
(Photo 203).
– Install the first disc.
334B2203 Photo 203
– Install the third backplate (1.5-mm thick) complying with the

position shown. Two of the notches in the backplates have to
be located in front of the holes with the longest distance between
centres (Photo 204).
– Install the second disc.
334B2204 Photo 204
– Install the fourth backplate (3-mm thick) complying with the

position shown. i.e. in the same position as the third one
(Photo 205).
334B2205 Photo 205
MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN B2.31
Doubler brake adjustment

Important: When replacing the discs and backplates, it is not
necessary to carry out adjustment at the Belleville washers.
On the other hand, this adjustment must imperatively be carried
out when replacing the Belleville washers.
– Install ruler P/N 6107.
– Install tool P/N 6151 (Photo 56) in order to compress the
Belleville washers.
Note: Be careful not to use the wrong notch when installing the
tool.
– Fit the assembly under press.
Note: Tool P/N 6151 may be used with tool P/N 6105 (fitted 6107
upside down).
334B2055 Fig. 55
– Compress the Belleville washers to 1,200daN (to install the

Belleville washers).
6151
334B2056 Photo 56
– Position rule P/N 6107 in the stop ring groove (Fig. 57).
334B2057 Fig. 57
B2.32 MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
– Reduce the load by 200daN and adjust as follows: C = 14.33 – (10 + 3.71)
– Using a depth gauge, measure dimension Y (Fig. 58). C = 0.62 mm
Dimension Y is determined from the supporting face of the Use one 0.6-mm thick shim
stop ring and the supporting face of the friction backplate. Available shims (0.6 – 0.8 – 1.00)
The purpose of dimension C is to exert sufficient pressure – Remove the assembly to insert the appropriate shim
on the friction discs through the Belleville washers. Too thickness, then reinstall the assembly.
small a shimming thickness may result in the friction discs – Install the Belleville washers (25) correctly orientated (see
slipping due to lack of pressure. Too much thickness may page B2.30 and B2.31) (7) .
result in permanent drive rotationwise. – To insert the stop ring, use tool P/N 6151 to pressurise the
3.71 is a value given by the manufacturer depending on the assembly.
mechanical characteristics of the Belleville washers (for – Install the piston (3) imperatively replacing the seals (4) and
1,000daN.m). (5).
10 is the rule thickness.
Dimension C is equal to: Y – 3.71: Y = X – 10
hence C (shimming thickness) = X – 10 – 3.71.
X being the dimension read on the depth gauge. Doubler assembly
Therefore, ultimately C = X – 13.71. – Install the piston (9) on the guide (7).
Examples: – Imperatively replace the seals (10) and (11).
X = 14.33 mm – Install the Belleville washers (12) and the friction discs on the
guide and lock with the stop ring (16).
– Imperatively replace the seals (8) and install them on the
guide.
Blank assembly (with no shim in C)
334B2058 Fig. 58
MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN B2.33
Doubler brake inspection

This inspection is performed with the clutch doubler housing
removed. Use the locally-manufactured tool (Photo 69) and
the torque wrench . Under zero load, the brake should not slip
when applying a force equal to or less than 14daN.m set on
the torque wrench.
334B2069 Photo 69
Doubler clutch inspection

Using a press, apply a 1,300-daN.m load.With the clutch
installed, it should be possible to initiate the rotation of the
friction discs (max. load 0.5daN.m, photo 70).
6151
334B2070 Photo 70
B2.34 60 05
MR029
334684 - 10.2003
– 02.2003 - EN
– EN
Shimming of the drive shaft

bearing
The clearance must be 0.25 ± 0.05mm

Shimming can be performed only when the supply housing (19)
is attached to the doubler housing.
– Install the ball bearing (11) on the housing.
– Measure the dimensions:
X: depth between the outside face of the supply housing (19)
and the bearing supporting face.
Y: depth between the outside face of the supply housing (19)
and the supporting face of the circlip in place in its housing.
Z: thickness of the circlip (28).
– Determine the shimming thickness C:
C = X – (Y + Z + 0.25 mm).
Note: Before positioning the bearing, make sure the spring 334B2059 Photo 59
clip (28) installed on the drive shaft fits correctly in its recess
before installing the bearing. Z = 2.45 mm
Clearance = 0.25 mm
Note: Make sure the bearing is installed. C = 96.45 – (92.47 + 2.45 + 0.25)
C = 1.28 mm
Note: Perform some tests. Including 2 x 0.50 shims + 2 x 0.15 shims
Example: Available shims: (0,10 – 0,15 – 0,50 – 1,50).
X = 96.45 mm
Y = 92.47 mm Note: If you use tool P/N 6107, do not forget to subtract
the tool thickness for the computation.
Assembly without shim
6107
28
Y
Z
X
334B2060 Fig. 60
MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN B2.35
Revershift cover installation

– Perform installation in the reverse removal sequence.
– Imperatively replace the seals. Slightly oil them before
installation.
Note: To fit the lip seal, use the seal fitting tool (locally-
manufactured tool).
Note: To fit the bush on the clutch stop bearing, use the
locally-manufactured tool.
– Imperatively replace the piston seals and rings.
– Refit the cover (2) applying a slight bead of Loctite 518.
– Torque-tighten the supply housing bolts (8) to:
Hm 10 bolt: 4.5daN.m ± 0.5,
Verbus M10 bolt: 8daN.m ± 0.5.
– Reconnect the pipes on the supply housing.
– Couple the gearbox to the engine. 334B2061 Photo 61
– Fill and bleed the hydraulic circuit.
B2.36 MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
Reverser Paint mark (repairer’s Punch strokes

mark) (manufacturer’s mark)
Disassembly of the reverser and the
reverse drive clutch
– Mark the cover before disassembly.
– To disassemble the reverse drive clutch, compress the
Belleville washers using a press.
– Remove the stop ring.
Assembly of the reverser and the reverse

drive clutch
(Fig. 109).
– Fit the two friction washers (45) inside the planet gear bracket
334B2109 Fig. 109
housing (19) complying with the fitting direction.
– Install the three double planet gears on the large-diameter
bores, then the three reverser planet gears on the small-
diameter bores.
– Position the planet gear marks (punch strokes) as shown in
Fig. 110.
Marking with paint (2 teeth

visible inside the housing)
Marking with paint (1 tooth visible, the other is hidden)

334B2110 Photo 110
MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN B2.37
– Install the shaft (40), the sun gear (47) inserting the needle/
ball thrust bearings (48) and (49) and the washer (49a). 1 tooth in the axis Large bore
– Install the washer (44), the needle/ball thrust bearings (43) diameter
and the shim(s) (42). 1 mark on each
– Check the proper operation of the assembly. side of the axis
Small
bore
Paint mark visible on one of the diameter
two teeth
334B2062 Fig. 62
Reverser shimming
(Figure 63)
Blank assembly
Stop washer
Bare casing
Needle
thrust
bearing
334B2063 Fig. 63
B2.38 MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
The shimming dimension is calculated by measuring dimen-

sion (A) and dimension (B). Using a dial indicator gauge or A
electronic gauge P/N 1573, read the measurements (A) and
(B). It is necessary to perform a blank assembly of the reverser
mechanical assembly.
C = A – (B + 0.10 ± 0.15)
The clearance required is 0.05 to 0.15mm.
Dimension A = 114.81 – 4.11 = 110.7mm
4.11mm is the rule thickness.
Dimension B = B1 – B2 = 114.62 – 4.87 = 109.75mm
Example:
Calculate the thickness of the shimming (C) by applying the
following formula:
C = 110.7 – (109.75 + 0.1)
C = 110.7 – 109.85
C = 0.85 mm
Available shims (0.5 and 0.1)
334B2064 Photo 64
Note: If it is correctly shimmed, the discs rotate.
Final assembly
– Install the reverser and reverse drive clutch assembly,
systematically replacing the seals.
– Insert the appropriate shimming thickness.
– Install the cover (72) and torque tighten the bolts (73) to
4.5daN.m. B1
Installation
– Install the supply housing (98) on the primary shaft.
– Install the piston (95) equipped with new O-rings.
– Install the complete clutch.
– Check the proper operation of the assembly.
Example:
334B2065 Photo 65
B2
334B2066 Photo 66
MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN B2.39
Reverser shimming
(forward drive clutch) Extract the adjustment shims
(Fig. 68) placed inside
Note: This shimming is valid for assembling a dead slow range.
334B2067 Photo 67
334B2068 Fig. 68
B2.40 MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
Assembly before adjustment

– Install the forward drive clutch assembly. 81
– Install the reverse drive clutch and doubler assembly.
– Secure the housing (98) by torque tightening its attachment
bolts to 8daN.m ± 1.5.
Make sure to insert the combined bearing upside down (see
photo 111). Adjust as indicated below.
– Extract the adjustment shims placed inside the splined hub
(79) (see photo 67).
– Insert the bearing (81) upside down (see photo 111).
The shimming dimension is calculated by measuring dimen-
sion (A) and dimension (B). Using a dial indicator gauge or
electronic gauge P/N 1573, read the measurements (A) and
(B). For dimension (A), fit the bearing (81) upside down as
shown in Fig. 68 and on photo 111.
Calculate the thickness of the shimming (C) by applying the
following formula: 334B2111 Photo 111
C = A – (B + 0.10 ± 0.05)
The clearance required is 0.05 to 0.15mm.
Measure dimension A
A = (145.73 – 4.17) = 141.56mm
4.17 is the rule thickness.
334B2112 Photo 112
Measure dimension B (in two steps)

B1 = inside dimension
B2 = outside dimension
(in relation to the casing surface photo 113)
B1 = 29.42 mm
334B2113 Photo 113
MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN B2.41
Measure dimension B2 in three different places on the casing and

keep the smallest value.
B2 = (172.28 – 4.17) = 168.11mm
4.17 is the rule thickness.
B = B2 – B1 = 168.11 – 29.42 = 138.69mm
C = A – (B + 0.15)
0.15 is the clearance value to be applied.
C = 141.56 – (138.69 + 0.15) = 2.72mm
The shimming thickness is 2.72mm.
334B2210 Photo 210
79
334B2211 Photo 211
Final assembly
Important: To make coupling the clutch casing/gearbox easier,
make sure to install the pinion (79) on the forward drive clutch
(see photo 115).
Speed sensor adjustment

– Coat the sensor thread with Loctite 518.
– Screw the sensor so that it contacts the Revershift housing.
– Loosen by ¾ turn to obtain a correct air gap.
– Moderately lock the locknut.
334B2212 Photo 212
B2.42 MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
TWINSHIFT HOUSING
HYDRAULIC DOUBLER
Twinshift input housing
Mechanical operation
I H H I B C
G E
F
Doubler (3 planet gears)
F G D
C B
I H
G
E
F
A
Doubler (4 planet gears) Reverser
334B2116 Fig. 116
B2.44 MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
334B2117 Fig. 117
60 MR 334 684
05 029 – 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN B2.45
Adjustments and tightening torques Removal/installation – Drive shaft
20
19
18
15
Hydraulic Multiple-disc Doubler Shimming Mechanical 14

13
supply brake (3 planet gears) Clearance = 0.10 ± 0.05mm reverser 12 21
11
4.5 ± 0.5daN.m
16
22
4.5 ± 0.5daN.m
10
6
5
4 8
2
9
7
1
Drive shaft Link shaft Primary shaft 3
25
26
23
28
24 17
24 27
26
Shimming Multiple-disc 12 x 2 ± 0.2 daN.m Shimming

Clearance = 0.2 to 0.3 clutch Clearance = 0.10 ± 0.05mm
mm
334B2120 Fig. 120
Hm bolt 10 x 50 = 6 x 4.5daN.m Shimming under

Verbus bolt 10 x 50 = 7 x 8daN.m load = 1,000daN.m Description 10 Coupling bush 20 Tapered bearing
1 Power take-off shaft 11 Drive clutch thrust bearing 21 Stop ring
2 Stop ring 12 Power take-off clutch thrust bearing 22 Fork attachment
3 Cover 13 Thrust bearing support (power take-off) 23 Control lever (forward drive)
4 Adjustment shim 14 Thrust bearing support (drive) 24 Control lever (power take-off)
5 Stop ring 15 Clutch guide 25 Fork (drive)
6 Stop ring 16 Securing screw 26 Fork (power take-off)
7 Sealing bushes 17 Assistance cylinder 27 Control cable
334B2118 Fig. 118 8 Drive clutch shaft 18 Lip seal 28 Control cylinder supply
9 Needle cage 19 Adjustment shim
B2.46 60 MR 334 684

05 029 – 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
Doubler overall view (3 planet gears) Doubler exploded view (3 planet gears)
Reducer planet gears

1
37
Doubler brake 34
33
35 36
34
20
25
38 29
23
32 19
31
30 27
28
27
26
24 18
17
22
21 15
13
12
16
14
334B2121 Fig. 121
11
Description 13 Stop ring 26 Adjustment shim 9
1 Doubler housing assembly 14 Backplates 27 Washers 10 Clutch
2 Supply box 15 Friction discs 28 Ball and needle thrust bearing 7
3 Brake piston 16 Stop ring 29 Washer
8
4 Inside O-ring 17 Ball and needle thrust bearing 30 25-tooth sun gear pinion
5
5 Outside O-ring 18 Washer 31 27-tooth sun gear pinion 3
6 Bolt 19 Housing 32 Ball and needle thrust bearing 4
7 Guide 20 Planet gear bracket housing 33 15- and 17-tooth double planet gears
2
8 Piston rings 21 Stop ring 34 Needle cages
6
9 Clutch piston 22 Backplates 35 Spacer
10 Inside seal 23 Friction discs 36 Pin
11 Outside seal 24 Piston supporting plate 37 Pin 334B2122 Fig. 122
12 Belleville washers 25 Belleville washers 38 Plate
60 MR 334 684
05 029 – 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN B2.47
Mechanical reverser
Overall view
Exploded view
51
52
50
51
54
53
45
76
49
47
48
39 46
45
59
44
43
42 55
41 56
57
40 58
60
75
74
73
70
71
72
66
67
72
71
70
334B2124 Fig. 124
Description 51 Needle cages 64 Washer

68
39 Planet gear bracket housing 52 Spacer 65 Bolt
69
40 Link shaft 53 Pin 66 Sliding gear
41 Needle socket 54 Pin 67 Synch hub
64 42 Adjustment shims 55 19-tooth reverser planet gear 68 Springs
63 43 Ball and needle thrust bearing 56 Needle cage 69 Keys
62 44 Washer 57 Spacer 70 Synch bush
65 45 Washers 58 Pin 71 Synchro ring
61 46 25-tooth sun gear pinion 59 Pin 72 Synchro ring
47 21-tooth sun gear pinion 60 Flange 73 Ball and needle thrust bearing
48 Ball and needle thrust bearing 61 Cover 74 Differential hub
334B2123 Fig. 123 49 Ball and needle thrust bearing 62 Washer 75 Adjustment shim
50 15- and 17-tooth double planet gears 63 Ball and needle thrust bearing 76 Needle cage
B2.48 60 MR 334 684

05 029 – 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
Removal of the complete Twinshift housing
Refer to the overall and exploded views Fig. 121 to 124. – Remove the clutch casing and place it vertically.
– Remove the 7 Verbus bolts.
Note: Unlock the clutch casing bolts before uncoupling the
– Loosen two of the six diagonally opposite Hm bolts.
tractor, to facillitate loosening the casing bolts.
– Replace by two M 12 x 80 bolts to apply pressure on the
– Lift the cab (see chapter on cab removal). casing and extract the housing assembly by screwing the bolts
– Remove the LH hydraulic cover. after installing a chain to extract the complete housing.
– Uncouple the tractor at the clutch. – Extract the complete assembly cautiously.
– Remove the circlip, the friction washer and the second circlip
Note: The forward drive clutch remains in place on the primary
from the power take-off shaft.
shaft.
– Extract the power take-off shaft.
– Remove the two hydraulic pipes supplying the Twinshift
housing.
MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN B2.49
Doubler removal
Doubler clutch disassembly

(Fig. 121 and 122)
– Remove the six Hm bolts on the front cover (2) to extract it. 6151
– Extract the clutch assembly.
– Extract the circlip (16) to remove the friction discs and
backplates, the circlip (13) to remove the Belleville washers
(12).
Doubler brake disassembly

(Figure 126)
– Compress the Belleville washers using the dummy piston
tool P/N 6151.
upside down). 334B2126 Photo 126
– Remove the circlip, the backplates and the discs.
Note: Correctly mark the piston with the cover before removing
the piston.
Note: Replace the O-rings greasing them before assembly.
Doubler planet gear disassembly

(Figure 123 and 124)
– Extract the housing (20), and the needle and ball thrust bearing
(17) as well as the washer (18).
– Recover the metal foil washers (27).
– Extract the pins (37).
– Then, extract the double pinion assembly.
– Extract the needle and ball thrust bearings, and the sun gear
pinions.
B2.50 MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
Assembly and adjustment of the doubler Punch strokes Paint mark

planet gears (3 planet gears) (manufacturer’s mark) (repairer’s mark)
– All the parts must be oiled before assembly.
– Imperatively replace all the seals.
(29).
– Comply with the location of the washer holes (27) upon
installation.
Important: Mark with paint the teeth that have the «punch
(Fig. 127).
– Install two double planet gears complying with the installation
direction. Position the paint marks in relation to the «punch»
marks as shown on photo 128.
– Then install the third double planet gear complying with the
installation direction. 334B2127 Fig. 127
Marking with paint (2 teeth visible inside the housing)
334B2128 Marking with paint (1 tooth visible outside the housing, the other is hidden) Photo 128
MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN B2.51
– Fit the needle and ball thrust bearing (32).

– Check the proper operation of the assembly by rotating Punch strokes Paint mark
several turns. (manufacturer’s mark) (repairer’s mark)
Note: Check the assembly rotates freely by manually turning

the planet gears and checking their position three times
(photo 128 on preceding page).
(18) in the housing (20).
Adjustment of the doubler planet gears

(4 planet gears)
Note: Mark with paint the teeth that have the punch strokes
(see fig. 190).
334B2190 Fig. 190
Number 1
1
Planet gears
Punch stroke mark (manufacturer) on the planet gears

41
/4 t
Paint mark (repairer) on sun gear

urn
s
25 teeth
Planet gear bracket housing
334B22191 Fig. 191
– Install the 25-tooth sun gear and mark a tooth. Position the first
planet gear and align the marks on the assembly (between the two
punchmarks). 2
ns
/4 tur
41
334B2192 Fig. 192
B2.52 MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
– Install the first planet gear then rotate the sun gear by 4 1/4 turns.
Position the second planet gear, with the mark on the teeth between
3
the punch marks.
– Install the second planet gear then rotate the sun gear by 4
1/4 turns. Position the third planet gear, with the mark on the
teeth between the punch marks.
41
/4 t
urn
s
334B2193 Fig. 193
– Install the third planet gear then rotate the sun gear by 4 1/4
turns. Position the fourth planet gear, with the mark on the teeth
between the punch marks. 4
ns
tur
/4
41
334B2194 Fig. 194
– Install the fourth planet gear then rotate the sun gear by
4 1/4 turns. Return on number 1
5 the marks fall back
Important: The mark on the tooth must automatically fall back
opposite one another
between the two punch marks on the first planet gear, otherwise
the adjustment is to be carried out again.
334B2195 Fig. 195
MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN B2.53
Doubler brake assembly

– Perform a blank assembly to determine shimming.
– In the housing (19), fit the two Belleville washers complying
with their fitting direction.
Important: Correctly carry out the following operations to as-
semble the doubler brake, not to damage it.
– Install the first backplate (3-mm thick) complying with the
position shown (Photo 130). One of the notches in the
backplate should be inserted in the orifice located in the middle
of the longest distance between centres of the holes.
d
Photos 129 and 130 D
d shortest distance between centres of two holes in the

housing.
D longest distance between centres of two holes in the
housing. 334B2129 Photo 129
334B2130 Photo 130
– Install the second backplate (3-mm thick) complying with the

position shown, i.e. in the same orifice as the first backplate.
– Install the first disc.
334B2131 Photo 131
B2.54 MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
– Install the third backplate (1.5-mm thick) complying with the

position shown. Two of the notches in the backplates have to
be located in front of the holes with the longest distance between
centres.
– Install the second disc.
334B2132 Photo 132
– Install the fourth backplate (3-mm thick) complying with the

position shown. i.e. in the same position as the third one.
334B2133 Photo 133
MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN B2.55
Doubler brake adjustment

Important: When replacing the discs and backplates, it
is not necessary to carry out adjustment at the Belle-
ville washers. On the other hand, this adjustment must
imperatively be carried out when replacing the Belle-
ville washers.
– Install ruler P/N 6107.
– Install tool P/N 6151 (Photo 135) in order to compress the
Belleville washers.
Note: Be careful not to use the wrong notch when installing the
tool.
– Fit the assembly under press. 6107
upside down).
334B2134 Fig. 134
– Compress the Belleville washers to 1,200daN to install the

Belleville washers.
6151
334B2135 Photo 135
– Position ruler P/N 6107 in the stop ring groove (Fig. 136).
334B2136 Fig. 136
B2.56 MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
– Reduce the load by 200daN and adjust as follows: C = 14.33 – (10 +3.71)
– Using a depth gauge, measure dimension Y (Fig. 137). C = 0.62 mm
Dimension Y is determined from the supporting face of the stop Use one 0.6-mm thick shim
ring and the supporting face of the friction backplate. Available shims (0.6 – 0.8 – 1.00)
The purpose of dimension C is to exert sufficient pressure on – Remove the assembly to insert the appropriate shim
the friction discs through the Belleville washers. Too small a thickness, then reinstall the assembly.
shimming thickness may result in the friction discs slipping – Install the Belleville washers (25) correctly orientated (see
due to lack of pressure. Too much thickness may result in page B2.54 and B2.55) (7) .
permanent drive rotationwise. – To insert the stop ring, use tool P/N 6151 to pressurise the
3.71 is a value given by the manufacturer depending on the assembly.
mechanical characteristics of the Belleville washers (for – Install the piston (3) imperatively replacing the seals (4) and
1,000daN.m). (5).
10 is the ruler thickness.
Dimension C is equal to: Y – 3.71: Y = X – 10 Doubler assembly
hence C (shimming thickness) = X – 10 – 3.71. – Install the piston (9) on the guide (7).
X being the dimension read on the depth gauge. – Imperatively replace the seals (10) and (11).
Therefore, ultimately C = X – 13.71. – Install the Belleville washers (12) and the friction discs on the
Example: guide and lock with the circlip (16).
X = 14.33 mm – Imperatively replace the seals (8) and install them on the
guide.
Blank assembly (with no shim in C)
334B2137 Fig. 137
MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN B2.57
Doubler brake inspection

This inspection is performed with the clutch doubler housing
removed. Use the locally-manufactured tool (Photo 138) and
the torque wrench . Under zero load, the brake should not slip
when applying a force equal to or less than 14daN.m set on
the torque wrench.
334B2138 Photo 138
Doubler clutch inspection

Using a press, apply a 1,300-daN.m load.With the clutch
installed, it should be possible to initiate the rotation of the
friction discs (max effort 0.5 daN.m).
6151
334B2139 Photo 139
B2.58 MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
Shimming of the drive shaft

The clearance must be 0.25 ± 0.05 mm
Shimming can be performed only when the supply housing (19) Y: depth between the outside face of the supply housing (19) and
is attached to the doubler housing. the supporting face of the circlip in place in its housing.
– Install the ball bearing (11) on the housing. Z: thickness of the circlip
– Measure the dimensions: – Determine the shimming thickness C:
X: depth between the outside face of the supply housing (19) C = X – (Y + Z + 0.25 mm).
and the bearing supporting face.
334B2145 Fig. 145
MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN B2.59
Reverser Punch strokes Paint mark

(manufacturer’s mark) (repairer’s mark)
Disassembly of the reverser and the
reverse drive clutch
– Mark the cover before disassembly.
– To disassemble the reverse drive clutch, compress the
Belleville washers using a press.
– Remove the stop ring.
strokes» to facilitate synchronization of the three planet
gears (Fig. 143).
Assembly of the reverser

and the reverse drive clutch
– Fit the two friction washers (45) inside the planet gear bracket 334B2143 Fig. 143
bores, then the three reverser planet gears on the small- – Install the shaft (40), the sun gear (47) inserting the needle/ball
diameter bores. thrust bearings (48) and (49) and the washer (49a).
– Position the planet gear marks as shown in figures143 and – Install the washer (44), the needle/ball thrust bearings (43)
144. and the shim(s) (42).
Marking with paint (2 teeth

visible inside the housing)
Marking with paint (1 tooth visible outside the housing, the other is hidden)
334B2144 Photo 144
B2.60 MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
Installation (Fig. 144 and 146) 1 tooth in the axis Large bore
– Fit the two friction washers (45) inside the planet gear bracket
diameter
1 mark on each
side of the axis
bores, then the three reverser planet gears on the small-
diameter bores.
– Position the planet gear marks (punch strokes) as shown in
Fig. 146.
– Install the sun gears (46) and (47) inserting the needle/thrust
bearing (48) and (49).
– Install the washers (62) and (64) and the needle/ball thrust
bearing (63).
Small bore
Reverser shimming calculation diameter
1 visible mark
(Figure 147) 1 hidden mark
Dimension C is determined between the supporting face of the 334B2146 Fig. 146
housing (19) and the shaft bearing: dimension X and the
supporting face of the planet gear bracket housing (39) and the
supporting face of the thrust bearing (43).
Dimension C is equal to: X – Y – 0.10 clearance.
X Y
39
43
44
19
334B2147 Fig. 147
MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN B2.61
Measurement of dimension X (Fig. 148)

– Use tool P/N 6107. Measurement of dimension X
– On the housing (19), measure dimension X using the depth
gauge.
– Subtract the height of the ruler, i.e. 14.15 mm.
– Perform 4 diagonally opposite readings minimum and calculate
the average of the four.
Measurement of dimension Y (Fig. 149)
– Use tool P/N 6107.
– Insert two shims of same thickness.
– Measure dimension A’.
– On the planet gear bracket housing (39), fit the washer
(44) and the needle thrust bearing (43) to measure dimen-
sion A using a depth gauge. Dimension Y = A’ – A.
– Perform 4 diagonally opposite readings minimum and
calculate the average of the four.
334B2148 Fig. 148
Final assembly
– Insert the appropriate shim thickness and fit the reverser
assembly in the housing (19).
– Refit the cover (61) and torque tighten the bolts to 2 ±
0.2daN.m.
Measurement of dimension X
Dimension A’ Dimension A
Y = A’ – A
334B2149 Fig. 149
B2.62 MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
Adjustment of the reverser synchro clearance (functional clearance 0.1 ± 0.05mm)

– Use the locally-manufactured tools.
– Measure the dimensions before installing the supply cover, the brake and the clutch, in order to have proper support for the
doubler assembly.
The shimming dimension «C» is equal to:
X – Y – 0.10.
C = X – Y – 0.10
Locally-manufactured tool
180 mm b
Locally-manufactured tool
180 mm
a
334B2150 Fig. 150
MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN B2.63
Personal notes:
B2.64 MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
MECHANICAL DOUBLER
AND REVERSER
Mechanical doubler and reverser
Drive shaft
17
19
18
16
15
14
13
35
12 36
11
10 26
8
25
34
9 24
33
6 7
5 23 1
4 21
2 22
29
27
31
28
31
334B2071 Fig. 71
B2.66 MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
Drive shaft
Description
1 Power take-off shaft 19 Tapered bearing
2 Stop ring 20 Thrust bearing
3 Cover 21 22-tooth pinion
4 Adjustment shim 22 Needle cages
5 Stop ring 23 Synchro rings
6 Stop ring 24 Sliding gear
7 Sealing bushes 25 Synchro rings
8 Drive clutch shaft 26 Tapered bearing
9 Needle cage 27 Control lever (drive)
10 Drive clutch thrust bearing 28 Control lever (power take-off)
11 Power take-off clutch thrust bearing 29 Fork (drive)
12 Thrust bearing support (power take-off) 30 Adjustment shim
13 Thrust bearing support (drive) 31 Fork (power take-off)
14 Clutch guide 32 Stop ring
15 Seal 33 Fork attachment
16 Stop ring 34 Guide attachments
17 Clutch casing 35 Key
18 Adjustment shim 36 Spring
334B2072 Fig. 72
MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN B2.67
Input housing without doubler and with mechanical reverser

15
14
13
12
11
8
10 6
9
7
1
2
3
4
5
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
18
19
13
17
13
18
27 18
334B2073 Fig. 73
B2.68 MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
Input housing without doubler and with mechanical reverser

Description
1 Drive clutch shaft 12 25-tooth pinion 23 Spacer
2 22-tooth pinion 13 Link shaft 24 Tapered bearing
3 Needle cage 14 Sleeve 25 Adjustment shim
4 Thrust bearing 15 Tapered bearing 26 Stop ring
5 Tapered bearing 16 Clutch guide 27 Transmission shaft
6 Sliding gear 17 Bolt 28 23-tooth pinion
7 Synchro rings 18 Transmission shaft 29 Needle cage
8 Synchro rings 19 Tapered bearing 30 Washer
9 Key 20 25-tooth pinion 31 Pin
10 Spring 21 Spacer 32 1.5-mm shim
11 Tapered bearing 22 28-tooth pinion 33 Adjustment shim
334B2074 Fig. 74
MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN B2.69
Input housing with mechanical reverser and doubler (with dead slow range)
22
21
18
16
15
19
17
20
48
13
37
36
49
14
35
47
8
12
34
6
46
50
51
11
33
45
32
44
52
9
10
43
31
30
7
1
28
27
29
25
3
24
4
5
23
334B2075 Fig. 75
Description (dead slow range) 46 Shim 50 External circlip

43 Pin 47 Bolt 51 Planet gear
44 Needle cage 48 Housing 52 Crownwheel
45 Planet gear bracket housing 49 Sliding gear
B2.70 MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
Input housing with mechanical reverser and doubler (without dead slow range)
Description
1 Drive clutch shaft 16 Sliding gear 31 Spacer
2 22-tooth pinion 17 Synchro rings 32 28-tooth pinion
3 Needle cage 18 Synchro rings 33 Spacer
4 Shim(s) 19 Key 34 25-tooth pinion
5 Tapered bearing 20 Spring 35 Tapered bearing
6 Sliding gear 21 27-tooth pinion 36 Adjustment shim
7 Synchro rings 22 Needle cage 37 Circlip
8 Synchro rings 23 Link shaft 38 Transmission shaft
9 Key 24 Sleeve 39 23-tooth pinion
10 Spring 25 Tapered bearing 40 Needle cage
11 Tapered bearing 26 Lip seal 41 Washer
12 Bush 27 Bolt 42 Pin
13 25-tooth pinion 28 Transmission shaft 43 1.5-mm shim
14 Needle cage 29 Tapered bearing 44 Adjustment shim
15 Synch hub 30 25-tooth pinion
334B2076 Fig. 76
MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN B2.71
Note: Refer to the overall and exploded views for removal/installation.
Adjustment of the clutch shaft (0 to 0.05-mm preload)
Load = 0.5 to 1.5

daN Adjustment
(preload to 0 to 0.05mm)
25
Shim 1.5 mm
1 X
334B2161 Fig. 161
Adjustment Z: thickness of the circlip

The preload required is 0 to 0.05mm maximum. – Determine the shimming thickness C, shims (2):
C = X – (Y + Z)
Important: Adjustment is performed in (2). The shim Add 0.02-mm shim thickness to C to preload the shaft.
thickness in (1) is fixed (1.50mm).
– After installing the shaft with the 1.50-mm shim (1) and
a 1.50-mm shim in (2), pull the shaft turning it alternatively
to correctly seat the cones in the bearing cups.
– Mount the ball bearing (25) on the housing.
Check the shimming
– There should be no play in the shaft.
– Remove the circlip and the shim (2), and measure dimen-
– The force, measured using a spring balance and a piece of string
sion X.
wound around the reverser sliding gear should be comprised
– Remove the circlip and measure dimension Y.
between 0.5 and 1.5daN (through the LH orifice of the clutch
X: depth between the outside face of the clutch casing and
casing).
the bearing supporting face.
Y: depth between the outside face of the clutch casing and Note: The measurement shall be performed:
the supporting face of the circlip in place in its housing. – without the transmission shaft,
– without the reverser harness,
– without the primary shaft.
B2.72 MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
Note: Refer to the overall and exploded views for removal/installation.
Adjustment of the reverser/doubler harness clearance
Groove mark on pinion
Clearance = 0.02 to
0.1 mm
334B2077 Fig. 77
Note: The asymmetric pinions are mounted with the longest Install about 13/10th-thick shims in (A) and the stop ring.
skirt orientated towards the clutch casing front face. Using a dial indicator gauge, check the functional clea-
rance at the shaft end (B): between 0.02 and 0.1 (Readjust
the shim thickness if required and measure again).
MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN B2.73
Shimming of the mechanical reverser transmission shaft
10
À
3
334B2162 Fig. 162
– Using a dial indicator gauge, measure the end float on the reverser transmission shaft.
– Add or remove shims (10) in (3) to obtain a 0.02 to 0.10-mm end float.
B2.74 MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
GEARS AND RANGES
60 05 029 684 - 10.2003 - EN

Personal notes
B2.76 MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
Primary line: Primary shaft
Preliminary operations – Use a slide hammer.

– As the shaft comes out, extract the 5th synchro block and the
– Uncouple the gearbox from the engine casing. tapered bearing. Then extract the 3rd gear pinion, the synchro
– Remove the clutch thrust bearings and controls. block assembly, the 4th gear pinion, the 1st gear pinion and the
– Remove the input housing pins and forks. lubrication housing.
– Remove the input housing.
– Remove the main gearbox upper cover. Note: if required, remove the 5th gear pinion fitted onto the
rear intermediate shaft.
Removal/installation of the primary Installation

shaft – Inspect and replace any defective part.
– Before installation, oil all rotating parts.
Important: When replacing the 3rd, 4th and 5th gear synchro- – Check the proper operation of all parts.
niser bush, it is not necessary to remove the rear axle gearbox. – Perform the reverse removal sequence of operations.
Remove the complete primary shaft pulling forward. – Smear grease on all double cone synchros before installing
them.
Removal – Observe the installation direction of the 5th synchro hub.
The difference between the types of primary shafts mainly
concerns the shaft (100-cv version) and the synchronisers that Twinshift gearbox
can be single- or double-cone according to the versions.
– Remove the fork pins, the forks, and the 3rd, 4th and 5th gear
control actuators. Tightening the flange (27)
– Remove the lubrication piping. – Insert the washer (26) on the shaft when installation is complete.
– Refer to the overall and exploded views for complete primary – Install the flange and torque tighten its attachements to
shaft removal. 4.5daN.m ± 0.5.
– To extract the primary shaft, use tool P/N 8552. Dress the – Install the stop ring (28).
inside bore to adapt the tool to the shaft. Bore diameter = 49mm.
MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN B2.77
Note: The installation of the primary shafts is different from one gearbox to the other. Specific operations are indicated on the
exploded view.
Overall view
334B2078 Fig. 78
Description 11 Spring 23 Tapered bearing

1 Primary shaft 12 Key 24 Lubrication housing
2 Tapered bearing 13 Synch bushes
3 19-tooth pinion 14 Synch bushes Part specific to the crawler range
4 36-tooth pinion (30 km/h) 15 29-tooth pinion gearbox
4 35-tooth pinion (40 km/h) 16 Bush 25 Sleeve
5 Bush 17 Needle cage
6 Needle cage 18 5th gear sliding gear Parts specific to the Twinshift gearbox
7 4th/3rd gear sliding gear 19 Synch hub 26 Washer
8 Synch hub 20 Synchro ring 27 Flange
9 Synchro ring 21 Spring 28 Stop ring
10 Synchro ring 22 Key
B2.78 MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
Exploded view
Housing with
reverser only 21
10 22
7
8
12
11
13 23
9 14
20
18
19
3 17
16
24 15
1 10
2 7
8
11
12
9
4
6
5
Gearboxes with mechanical reverser and doubler
21
22
2 Gearbox (with crawler
1
range only)
25 10
23
7 20
8 18
14 19
13 17
Revershift gearbox 16
(without crawler range) 3 15
13
24 14
1 11
2 12
9
4
6 Gearbox with hydraulic reverser and doubler
5
1
2
26
27 Twinshift gearbox only
28 (without crawler range)
334B2079 Fig. 79
MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN B2.79
Primary line: Rear intermediate shaft
Overall view
Force for a: Preloading =0.04 to
16-tooth pinion 1.3 to 3.3daN 0.10daN.m
19-tooth pinion 1.15 to 2.8daN
Primary
shaft locked
Exploded view
334B2080 Fig. 80
Description
1 Rear intermediate shaft 4 Tapered bearing 7 5th gear 39-teeth pinion
2 Stop ring 5 Seal 8 Cylindrical bearing
3 Adjustment shim 6 Needle bearing 9 Tapered bearing
B2.80 MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
Primary line: Rear intermediate shaft
Note: Interventions on the rear intermediate shaft are usually Bearing preloading
performed during interventions on the other shaft lines.
The adjustment is performed on the Primary – Rear intermediate
line. It must be completed before installing the front intermediate
Preliminary operations – secondary line. The bearing preload must be comprised between
0.04 and 0.1daN.m.
– Uncouple the rear axle from the gearbox. • Wind a piece of string around the rear intermediate shaft. Using
– Remove the gearbox upper cover. the dynamometer, pull the string until the shaft rotates. The
primary shaft should be locked.
Shaft removal/installation • Measure the matching force (F).
F must be comprised between 1.3 and 3.3daN for the 16-tooth
(Fig. 80) pinion and between 1.15 and 2.8 daN for the 19-tooth pinion.
• If the value (F) is not correct, perform the adjustment operations
Removal again changing the shimming, then perform again the inspection
– Remove the circlip (2) and the shims (3). operations:
– Systematically replace the seal (5). – increase shim thickness if (F) is too small,
– reduce the thickness of the shims if (F) is too high.
Installation • Apply this method until you obtain a correct value for (F).
– Clean all parts and replace any defective part. Oil the bearings
and the rotating parts.
– Perform the installation in the reverse removal sequence. Final operations
– Install the 3rd/4th gear controls, pins and forks.
– Install the gearbox upper cover.
– Couple the rear axle to the gearbox.
MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN B2.81
Secondary line: Front intermediate shaft
Exploded view
25
11 2
10
1
18 24
17
16 23
13 22
16 21
17 20
19
8
6 9
12
14
15
18
7
5
4
3
334B2081 Fig. 81
Description 9 1st gear 37-tooth pinion 18 Synchro rings

1 Front intermediate shaft 10 Bush 19 4th gear 23- or 24-tooth pinion
2 Synchro ring 11 Needle cage 20 Spacer
3 Stop ring 12 Sliding gear 21 3rd gear 28-tooth pinion
4 Adjustment shims 13 Synch hub 22 Spacer
5 Tapered bearing 14 Spring 23 5th gear 19-teeth pinion
6 Bush 15 Key 24 Needle bearing
7 2nd gear 34-tooth pinion 16 Synch bush 25 Tapered bearing
8 Needle cage 17 Synch bush
Note: Interventions on the front intermediate shaft are Shaft removal/installation

usually performed during interventions on the other shaft
lines. Remove the secondary shaft. (Fig. 81)
Removal
Preliminary operations – Remove the 1st/2nd gear pins and fork.
– Remove the lubrication hose at the end of the shaft.
– Uncouple the gearbox from the engine casing.
– Using a brass drift, hit the end of the shaft and extract it through
– Remove the clutch thrust bearings and controls.
the rear of the gearbox. Recover the parts as the shaft comes out.
– Remove the input housing.
– Remove the input housing pins and forks.
Installation
– Remove the gearbox covers.
– Clean all the parts and inspect them thoroughly. Do not
hesitate to replace any defective part. Oil the bearings and the
rotating parts.
– First replace the tapered bearing (5) on the casing bearing.
– Perform the installation in the reverse removal sequence.
– Install the 1st/2nd gear pins and fork.
Note: imperatively grease the dual cone synchs.
B2.82 MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
Secondary line: Front intermediate shaft
Adjustment – The shimming required is equal to:

X if bearings worn,
The preload required is 0 to 0.05 mm. X + 0.05 if new bearings.
Note: Adjustment of the apex distance on the secondary
shaft must be performed beforehand.
– After installing the shaft without shims, place a dial
indicator gauge at the shaft end (Fig. 82) to measure the
Final operations
shaft displacement.
Note: for the following operations, refer to the corresponding
– Pull the shaft turning it alternatively in order to «seat»
chapters.
the cones correctly in the bearing cups (5).
– Set the dial indicator gauge to zero. – Install the input housing.
– Pull the shaft turning it alternatively in order to «seat» – Install the gearbox covers.
the cones correctly in the bearing cups (25). – Couple the gearbox to the engine casing.
– Measure dimension « X « (shaft sideways displacement). – Install the input housing controls, pins and forks.
Overall view
Shimming = X + 0 to 0.05
334B2082 Fig. 82
MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN B2.83
Secondary line: Secondary shaft
Overall view
Shimming
Exploded view
Intermediate shaft
Power take-off housing
4 wheel drive
334B2083 0.5 to 1daN.m Fig. 83
B2.84 MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
Description 13 Spring
1 Secondary shaft 14 Key
2 Cover 15 Tapered bearing
3 Bolt + washers Versions without drive engaging
4 Biconical bearing 16 Smooth pinion
5 Adjustment shim(s) Drive engaging intermediate shaft
6 Nut 17 Intermediate shaft
7 33-tooth pinion (4WD housing constant drive) 18 Nut
8 Needle cage 19 Stop ring
9 40- or 41-tooth pinion 20 Tapered bearing
10 Sliding gear 21 22-tooth pinion
11 Synch hub 22 Tapered bearing
12 Synchro ring 23 Spacer
Preliminary operations – Unlock and unscrew the nut (6) then extract the biconical bearing
(4).
– Uncouple the rear axle from the main gearbox. – Recover the adjustment shim(s) (5).
– Uncouple the gearbox from the engine. – Replace any defective part.
– Remove the covers on the main gearbox.
Installation
– Oil all rotating parts before installation.
Secondary shaft removal/ – Perform installation in the reverse removal sequence.
installation – Adjust the apex distance and the bearing preload on the front
intermediate shaft.
When replacing the secondary shaft, imperatively
replace the rear axle crown wheel.
Removal/installation of the power take-
Removal off intermediate shaft
– Remove the front intermediate shaft at the same time. Refer to the exploded view.
– Using a slide hammer, extract the secondary shaft assembly. – Unlock the nut (18).
– Extract the bearing cone (15), then the synchro block and the – Replace any defective part.
pinions to reach the nut (6). – Oil all rotating parts before installation.
– Torque tighten the nut (18) to 0.5 to 1daN.m.
MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN B2.85
Apex distance adjustment

The theoretical apex distance (Atheoretical) is 66.60mm. The
use of shims (5) enables to adjust this distance according
to the indications on the actual parts. Checking the
theoretical apex distance is performed using master spacer
P/N 8516 (Fig. 85).
Atheoretical = 66.60mm (manufacturer’s value)
Marking and calculation of the adjustment

value
Markings on the drive pinion, the crown wheel and the rear
axle boss enable to specify the corrections (in hundredths
of millimeters) to be applied to the apex distance
according to the actual part dimensions (Fig. 87). These
corrections enable to determine the value for the apex
distance (A adjustment). 334B2084 Fig. 84
The mark (C), common to the drive pinion (1) and the crown
wheel (1a) enables to match them (Fig. 87).
Do not use the mark (D) on the secondary shaft
(manufacturing marking).
When it exists, the mark (E) corresponds to the value in
hundredths of millimeters to be subtracted to obtain the
adjustment value (A adjustment).
The marker (F), located on the RH side of the rear axle
(Fig. 86), corresponds to the value in hundredths of
millimeters to be subtracted (sign “–”) or added (sign “+”) to
obtain the adjustment value (A adjustment).
Caution: Do not mistake the dimension (F) located on
the LH side and the hypoid dimension (Fig. 15) located
on the RH side of the rear axle.
Note: The hypoid value is a machining dimension not

used for after-sales.
334B2085 Fig.85
Fig.
C+1
334B2086 Fig. 86 334B2087 Fig. 87
B2.86 MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
Example of calculation of the apex distance (Aadjustment)
E F AAdjustment
(on the drive pinion, (on rear axle LH (adjustment apex
front face fig. 87) boss fig. no 86) distance, to be calculated)
No indication 0 A = 66.60mm – 0.20
No indication + 10 A = 66.60 + 0.10 = 66.70mm – 0.20
10 –5 A = 66.60 – 0.10 – 0.05 = 66.45mm – 0.20
No indication – 15 A = 66.60 – 0.15 = 66.45mm – 0.20
Practical adjustment
– Install the biconical bearing on the shaft without fitting
shims.
– Install the secondary shaft to adjust the apex distance.
– Read the values of the corrections to be applied (E) and
(F) (Fig. 87 and 86). Calculate the adjustment apex dis-
tance (A adjustment).
– Using the dial indicator gauge, measure the difference
(Emeasured) between the raw apex distance (A’) (Fig. 88) and
the theoretical apex distance (A’’) with master spacer P/N
8516 (Fig. 88):
E measured = A’’ – A’
– The thickness of shims to be used (G) corresponds to the
sum of the following differences:
G = (A adjustment – A theoretical) + E measured
Example:
– A theoretical = 66.60mm 334B2015 Fig. 15
– E measured = A’’ – A’ = 0.60mm
– A adjustment = 66.70mm
– G = (66.70 – 66.60) + 0.60 = 0.70mm
In this example, shim thickness must be 0.70 mm.
– Remove the shaft and the biconical bearing.
Installation of the secondary shaft

– First torque tighten the nut (6) to 18daN.m and turn the
tapered pinion to ensure the bearings fall into place.
– Torque tighten again to 18 daN.m and turn the tapered
pinion.
– Loosen and finally torque tighten to 9daN.m ± 1daN.m.
– Fold the nut skirt to lock it.
334B2088 Fig. 88
MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN B2.87
Final operations – preloading of bearings on the front intermediate shaft.
Gearbox casing replacement

Note: For the following operations, refer to the corresponding This intervention requires the following operations:
chapters. – adjustment of the apex distance with the values of the old casing,
– Install the gearbox covers. – installation of the shafts and bearings without clearance, nor
– Install the rear axle on the gearbox casing. preloading (the bearings are already run in).
Replacing the secondary shaft

Types of interventions on This intervention requires the following operations:
the secondary shaft – replacement of the crown wheel in the rear axle,
– replacement of the secondary shaft,
– adjustment of the apex distance,
Replacing the secondary shaft – preloading of bearings on the front intermediate shaft.
bearings
This intervention requires the following operations: Note: To replace the crown wheel, refer to the “Rear axle”
– adjustment of the apex distance, chapter.
– preloading of bearings on the front intermediate shaft.
Replacing a pinion or a bearing on the

secondary shaft
This intervention requires the following operations:
– adjustment of the apex distance,
Fork adjustment (Gear 1, 2, 3, 4)

• Install a flat iron (1) to compress the fork springs and
pushers.
• Place a dial indicator gauge on the pin end of the fork to
be adjusted (example gears 1 and 2).
• Set the synchroniser to neutral.
• Engage a gear (e.g. gear 1).
• Measure the end float using the dial indicator gauge.
• Engage the other gear (e.g. gear 2).
• Measure the end float.
• Calculate the average of the 2 end floats.
• As appropriate, offset the fork in relation to its axis by:
– screwing the bolt (2) and unscrewing the bolt (3);
– unscrewing the bolt (2) and screwing the bolt (3);
to obtain that average end float value on the dial indicator
gauge.
• Repeat the same operation with the third gear and fourth
gear synchroniser.
The fifth gear and the ranges are adjusted using a set of
shims placed between the sliding gear and the fork. You
must obtain the same end float value on both sides.
1 2 3
Note: Check there is clearance between the fork and the
sliding gear to avoid friction and premature wear of the
synchroniser bushes.
334B2220 Photo 220
B2.88 MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
LOW PRESSURE HYDRAULIC
CIRCUITS
60 05 029 684 - 10.2003 - EN

Presentation
Tightening torques for hydraulic components and unions

Solenoid valve connections:on the block = 1.5 + 0.3daN.m ; on the coil = 0.35daN.m .
Pressure switch: 5.5 ± 0.5 daN.m.
Pressure restricter: 2.5 + 0.5daN.m
Swivel T union on hydraulic unit: 6 to 8daN.m for Twinshift, manual tightening + indexing for the others.
To identify a union, proceed as follows:

Determine the inside or outside diameter in mm of the union to identify.
Example: measured outside diameter 14.30 mm; the equivalent union is therefore 14.29, i.e. 9/16 – 18
9/16 = 9/16th inch (14.29mm) – 18 = number of threads per inch.
Torque in daN.m
Outside diameter Inside diameter Type of union
in mm in mm JIC
Minimum Maximum
9.53 8.4 3/8 – 24 2.5 3.5
11.11 9.71 7/16 – 20 4 5
12.7 11.12 1/2 – 20 4 5
14.29 12.7 9/16 – 18 5.5 6.5
19.05 17.33 3/4 – 16 6 8
22.23 20.26 7/8 – 14 6 8
26.99 24.7 1” 1/16 – 12 8 10
30.16 27.87 1” 3/16 – 12 12 15
Measurement method
334B2089 Fig. 89
Pressure switches
“Twinshift”, “Revershift” oil pressure and Power take-off drive (Revershift only). The pressure switch contact opens at 16
bar ± 0.5 and closes at 14 bar ± 0.5.
B2.90 MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
Presentation
Schematic diagrams
2 wheel drive tractors
3 dia. diaphragm
2.3 dia. diaphragm
334B2090 Fig. 90
2 wheel drive tractors with power-assisted power take-off
Pressure
restricter
The calibrated holes are

directly machined in the
connecting T.
334B2091 Fig. 91
Description 5 Flow divider/regulator 10 Steering cylinder

1 Tank 6 By-pass filter 11 Cooler
2 Suction strainer 7 Power take-off distributor A Gearbox lubrication
3 Pumps 8 Assistance cylinder B Brake lubrication
4 Hydraulic unit 9 Steering unit P Pressure pick-up
MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN B2.91
Presentation
2 wheel drive tractors with “Twinshift” doubler
Solenoid valve
Pressure
restricter
Pressure switch

connecting T.
334B2092 Fig. 92
2 wheel drive tractors with power-assisted power take-off and “Twinshift” doubler
Solenoid valve
Pressure
restricter
Pressure switch

connecting T.
334B2093 Fig. 93
Description 6 Filter A Gearbox lubrication

1 Tank 7 Power take-off distributor B Brake lubrication
2 Suction strainer 8 Assistance cylinder C Doubler lubrication
3 Pumps 9 Steering unit E Doubler clutch and brake supply
4 Hydraulic unit 10 Steering cylinder P Pressure pick-up
5 Flow divider/regulator 11 Cooler
B2.92 MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
Presentation
4 wheel drive tractors
Pressure
restricter
334B2094
The calibrated holes are directly machined in the connecting T. Fig. 94
4 wheel drive tractors with power-assisted power take-off
Pressure
restricter
334B2095
The calibrated holes are directly machined in the connecting T. Fig. 95
Description 6 Filter A Gearbox lubrication

1 Tank 7 Power take-off distributor B Brake lubrication
2 Suction strainer 8 Assistance cylinder D 4 wheel drive housing clutch supply
3 Pumps 9 Steering unit
4 Hydraulic distributor 10 Steering cylinder P Pressure pick-up
5 Flow divider/regulator 11 Cooler
MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN B2.93
Presentation
4 wheel drive tractors with “Twinshift” doubler
Pressure
restricter
334B2096 The calibrated holes are directly machined in the connecting T. Fig. 96
4 wheel drive tractors with “Twinshift” doubler and power-assisted power take-off
Pressure
restricter
334B2097 The calibrated holes are directly machined in the connecting T. Fig. 97
Description 7 Power take-off distributor C Doubler lubrication

1 Tank 8 Assistance cylinder D 4 wheel drive housing clutch supply
2 Suction strainer 9 Steering unit E Doubler clutch and brake supply
3 Pumps 10 Steering cylinder P Pressure pick-up
4 Hydraulic distributor 11 Cooler
5 Flow divider/regulator A Gearbox lubrication
6 Filter B Brake lubrication
B2.94 MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
Presentation
2 wheel drive tractors with power-assisted power take-off and “Revershift” reverser
Lifting and steering system
Flow regulator
By-pass
Pressure
restricter
12
Solenoid valves
13 14
334B2098 Fig. 98
Description 9 Cooler E Doubler clutch and brake supply

1 Tank 10 Check valve F Reverse drive clutch supply
2 Suction strainer 11 Power take-off thrust bearing G Forward drive clutch supply
3 Pumps 12 Nitrogen accumulator 13 b/0.5l H Reverser clutch lubrication
4 Hydraulic distributor 13 Proportional solenoid valves (rever- R Return to tank
5 Nitrogen accumulator ser)
13 b/0.075l 14 «On-off» solenoid valve (doubler) P1-P2 Pressure pick-ups
6 Pressure switch A Gearbox lubrication
7 Power take-off distributor B Brake lubrication
8 Power take-off clutch housing C Doubler lubrication
MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN B2.95
Presentation
4 wheel drive tractor with power-assisted power take-off and “Revershift” reverser
Lifting and steering system

Pressure
Flow regulator
restricter
By-pass
4 wheel drive
solenoid valve
12
Solenoid valves
13 14
334B2099 Fig. 99
Description 11 Power take-off thrust bearing H Reverser clutch lubrication

1 Tank 12 Nitrogen accumulator 13 b/0.5l R Return to tank
2 Suction strainer 13 Proportional solenoid valves (rever-
3 Hydraulic pumps ser) P1-P2 Pressure pick-ups
4 Hydraulic distributor 14 «On-off» solenoid valve (doubler)
5 Nitrogen accumulator A Gearbox lubrication
13 b/0.075l B Brake lubrication
6 Pressure switch C Doubler lubrication
7 Power take-off distributor D 4 wheel drive housing clutch supply
8 Power take-off clutch housing E Doubler clutch and brake supply
9 Cooler F Reverse drive clutch supply
10 Check valve G Forward drive clutch supply
B2.96 MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
Presentation
Pressure restricter
Calibration 20.5 bar
334B2100 Fig. 100
Flow divider/regulator
Inlet
Regulated Excess flow

flow outlet outlet
13.5 l/min
334B2101 Fig. 101
MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN B2.97
Presentation
Hydraulic units
2 wheel drive tractor with mechanical doubler
A-A B-B C-C

A
B C Plug
Plug
Pressure restricter
B C
Supply A
Brake + gearboxlubrication
334B2102 Fig. 102
4 wheel drive tractor with mechanical doubler
A-A B-B C-C D-D E-E
E 4 wheel drivehousing
D
Supply Plug supply A
B C
Plug
Pressure
restricter
B C A
D
E
4 wheel Brake Plug
drivehousing + gearboxlubrication
334B2103
solenoid valve Fig. 103
B2.98 MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
Presentation
2 and 4 wheel drive tractor with “Twinshift” doubler
4 wheel drive
A–A D–D E–E
2.3 dia.
E Doubler clutch supply
D Doubler clutch
diaphragm B C solenoid valve
Plug
Supply
Pressure
restricter B 4 wheel drive
housing
4 wheel drive
C solenoid valve
D
housing supply
4.5 dia. E
Pressure switch
diaphragm
2 wheel drive
Doubler Doublerclutch supply
Diaphragm2.3 clutch solenoid
dia. valve
Plug
Supply
Pressure
restricter
4.5 dia. Plug

diaphragm 2 and 4 wheel drive
B–B C–C
Clutch + doubler brake
lubrication A
Return to
tank
A
Brake + gearbox lubrication
334B2104 Fig. 104
MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN B2.99
Presentation
4 wheel drive tractor with “Revershift” reverser and power take-off

Reverse drive Forward drive clutch
clutch pressure pressure socket
Gearbox lubrication socket
Reverse drive Pressure
solenoid valve restricter
Brake
lubrication 4 wheel drive housing
supply
Forward drive
Power take-off Solenoid valve 4 solenoid valve
+ accumulator wheel drive housing
Accu-
supply Doubler supply mulator
Return to tank and Cooler supply

cooler Hydraulic unit supply
Doubler
inlet
lubrication
Pressure switch Flow
Doubler divider/
solenoid valve regulator
Filter
Seal
Anti-extrusion bush
Nitrogen pressureaccumulator: 13 bar

Capacity: 0.075l
Note: The accumulators do not require maintenance, nor

Filtration quality: 60 microns charging.
Accumulator installed on tractor with a

hydraulic-control power take-off
13-bar nitrogen pressure accumulator

Capacity: 0.5l
334B2105 Fig. 105
B2.100 MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
Hydraulic controls
Connection of the test equipment (all tractors except Revershift)

Checking the actuation pressure is performed between the flow divider and the hydraulic unit at the T fitting.
Description
1 Hydrauly supply for doubler brake and doubler
2 Flow divider
3 4 wheel drive housing
4 Power take off clutch actuation
5 Doubler lubrication
6 Brake lubrication
7 Hydraulic unit
8 4 wheel drive housing supply
9 Brake lubrication
Pump flow: tester P/N 60 05 005 736

42 l/min minimum to 51 l/min maximum.
6
9
Divider flow
regulated outlet:
13.5 l/min.
T fitting for actuation pressure pick-up: 20.5-

7 bar tester P/N 60 05 705 076. Hydraulic
doubler check*. Power take-off check*.
1
3
5
4 8
334B2163 Fig. 163
60 MR 334 684
05 029 – 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN B2.101
Hydraulic controls
Connection of the test equipment (Revershift tractors only)

Checking the actuation pressure is performed in substitution to the pressure switches and on the clutch pressure sockets.
5
6
7
14
1
Description 8
1 Distributor and power take-off supply
2 Accumulator 13 b/0.075 l Power take-off drive pressure switch:
3 Check valve tester P/N 60 05 705 076 pressure pick-up.
4 Accumulator 13 b/0.5 l 9 Power take-off check: 20.5 bar.
5 Check valve 4
6 Power take off control
7 Power take off supply Forward drive clutch pressure socket: 20.5-bar tester P/N
8 Brake lubrication 2 60 05 705 076.
9 Doubler supply
Reverse drive clutch pressure socket: 20.5-bar tester
10 Gearbox lubrication
P/N 60 05 705 076.
12 Doubler lubrication
13 Power take off clutch control Pressure switch: actuation pressure socket: 20.5-bar tester
14 Return 3 P/N 60 05 705 076. Doubler check. Power take-off check*.
Pump flow: tester P/N 60 05 005 736

334B2164 42 l/min minimum to 51 l/min maximum. Fig. 164
B2.102 60 MR 334 684

05 029 – 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
Hydraulic controls
“Check values reading” sheet

This sheet may be photocopied to be filled in at each intervention on a tractor. To send it to the Renault Agriculture After-sales
Service, you must imperatively specify:
– the type of tractor: .............................................................................................................
– the serial number: .............................................................................................................
– the number of hours of use: .............................................................................................................
– the date of intervention: .............................................................................................................
Pump flow check

Connect a flowmeter on the pump outlet.
Test conditions Q Value

Oil temperature: 40°C l/min measured
Engine speed 2,350 rpm 51 maximum/42 minimum
Divider flow check

Connect a flowmeter to the divider regulated flow outlet.
Test conditions Q (nominal) Value

Direction at rest
13.5
Engine speed 2,350 rpm
Actuation pressure check

Mechanical and Twinshift gearboxes: Connect the pressure gauge to the pressure pick-up T.
Revershift gearbox: Connect the pressure gauge instead of the pressure switch.
Test conditions Q (nominal) Value

Gear lever in "Neutral"

Mechanical doubler in "Neutral"
or Tw inshift in “Turtle” 20.5
Front axle engaged
Engine running
MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN B2.103
Hydraulic controls

This sheet may be photocopied to be filled in at each intervention on a tractor. To send it to the Renault Agriculture After-sales Service,
you must imperatively specify:
Check of power take-off housing pressure

Connect the pressure gauge on the pressure pick-up T.
Test conditions Front axle solenoid valve Value

Oil temperature: 40°C condition pressure (P) measured
Gear lever in "Neutral"

Mechanical doubler in "Neutral"
or Tw inshift in “Turtle”
Engine running
Pow er take-off disengaged
Front axle contact engaged

Solenoid valve not activated
Front axle light on
(clutch)
or hand brake applied
P = 0 b ar
or action on the brake pedals
Front axle contact disengaged

Solenoid valve activated
Front axle light off
(clutch release)
Hand brake released
P = 20.5 bar
Brake pedals not actuated
Twinshift doubler pressure check

Twinshift gearboxes (with mechanical reverser): Connect the pressure gauge to the pressure pick-up T.
Revershift gearboxes: Connect the pressure gauge instead of the pressure switch.
Test conditions Doubler solenoid valve Value

Oil temperature: 40°C condition pressure (P) measured
Gear lever in "Neutral”

Engine running
Front axle engaged
Solenoid valve not activated

Doubler in “Turtle”
(clutch)
Doubler light on
P = 0 b ar
Solenoid valve activated

Doubler in “Hare”
(clutch release)
Doubler light off
P = 20,5 bar
Note: when shifting from «Turtle» to «Hare», the pressure must drop by a few bars and rise fast to 20.5 bar.
B2.104 MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
Hydraulic controls

Revershift clutch pressure check

For electric checks, refer to chapter G2 « Drivetronic «.
Connect the tester P/N 60 05 705 076 on the forward and reverse drive clutch pressure pick-ups of the hydraulic unit.
SV solenoid valve condition/

Test conditions pressure (P)
Value measured
Oil temperature: 40°C
Front clutch Rear clutch

Doubler light on
Engine running
Front axle engaged
Clutch pedal not actuated
FWD drive REV drive SV

Reverser in forw ard drive SV activated not activated
P = 20.5 bar P = 0 b ar
FWD drive SV REV drive

Reverser in reverse drive not activated SV activated
P = 0 b ar P = 20,5 bar
FWD drive SV REV drive SV

Reverser in neutral not activated not activated
P = 0 b ar P = 0 b ar

Reverser lever up (clutch released) not activated not activated
P = 0 b ar P = 0 b ar

Clutch pedal fully dow n
not activated not activated
Reverser in "forw ard" position
P = 0 b ar P = 0 b ar

Clutch pedal fully dow n
Reverser in "reverse" position
P = 0 b ar P = 0 b ar
MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN B2.105
Hydraulic controls

Revershift clutch pressure check (cont’d)
SV solenoid valve condition/

Test conditions pressure (P)
Value measured
Oil temperature: 40°C
Front clutch Rear clutch

Doubler light on
Engine running
Front axle engaged
POTENTIOMETER TEST
Clutch pedal presses dow n then
progressive not activated
progressifvely released
P = 0 to 20.5 bar P = 0 b ar
Reverser in "reverse" position FWD drive SV REV drive SV

not activated progressive
P = 0 b ar P = 0 to 20.5 bar
Reverser in "reverse" position

Press the clutch release button
(gear lever knob)
P = 0 b ar P = 0 b ar

Press the clutch release button
(gear lever knob)
P = 0 b ar P = 0 b ar
Revershift power take-off hydraulic control

The power take-off hydraulic system comprises a pressure switch indicating the power take-off is engaged. Check the 20.5 bar
pressure using a pressure gauge connected at the pressure switch T connection. The pressure switch contact opens at
16 bar ± 0.5 and closes at 14 bar ± 0.5.
B2.106 MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
TOOLS
Transmission tools
Transmission tools
60 05 711 573 1573 60 05 005 900 5900
– Slide caliper/digital depth gauge – Stop hub
60 05 006 105 6105 60 05 006 107 6107
– Stop ring extractor and fitting tool

(to be used with tool P/N 6151) – Revershift ruler
77 01 388 008 8008 77 01 388 058 8058
– Dynamometer 0 to 40 daN – Slide hammer
B2.108 MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
Transmission tools
77 01 388 423 8423 77 01 388 424 8424
– Centring mandrel – Centring spacer
77 01 388 430 8430 77 01 388 433 8433
– Adjustment template – DT 310/280 – Clutch casing support carriage
77 01 388 435 8435 77 01 388 516 8516
– Master spacer for adjusting the apex distance to

– Centring mandrel 66.60mm
MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN B2.109
Transmission tools
77 01 388 529 8529 77 01 388 544 8544
– Installation/removal tool for the bearing cup – Rod for bearing extractor
77 01 388 546 8546 77 01 388 552 8552
– Bearing extractor – Primary shaft extractor
77 01 388 571 8571 77 01 388 640 8640
– Sheath – Holding pin
B2.110 MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
Transmission tools
60 05 006 151 6151 60 05 705 076 5076
– Dummy piston for doubler brake disassembly and check – Tester
60 05 005 736 5736
– Hydraulic tester
MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN B2.111
Transmission tools
Locally-manufactured
– Synchro shimming dimension checking tool
B2.112 MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
Transmission tools
170
Ø 23
1/2 20
25
17
10
Welded worn socket

30
– Doubler brake checking tool
200
165
157
Ø 63
Ø 82
63
78
– Roller bearing extraction tool (hydraulic) to be used with Facom pliers P/N YU49AD8
130 85 60
125
Ø 90
Ø 70
Ø 31
– Hydraulic unit lifting tool (Revershift)
MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN B2.113
Transmission tools
Welded nut
M10 threaded rod
10 dia. tapped hole
8
250
250
ø 117
ø 135
– Bearing and drive shaft extractor to be used with Facom pliers P/N XU49AD7
ø 111
10
ø 92
40
30
10 5
– Bearing race fitting tool
B2.114 MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
Transmission tools
81
65
Welded nut
M10 threaded rod
ø 85
ø 65
40
ø 10
81
350
Top view
250
8
10
(ø 65)
(ø 85)
– Piston spring compression tool to be used with Facom pliers P/N XU49AD7
150
ø 73,5
ø 53
– Lip seal fitting tool
MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN B2.115
Personal notes:
B2.116 MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
C1
REAR AXLE
C2
BRAKES
10 - 2003 Chapter C
60 05 029 684 - 10.2003 - EN
CONTENTS
C1 - REAR AXLE
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS ..................................................................................................................... C1.2

KINEMATICS ............................................................................................................................................... C1.3
PRELIMINARY OPERATIONS ..................................................................................................................... C1.3
ATTACHMENT POINTS (MM) REAR AXLE P11 AND P11H ......................................................................... C1.4
OVERALL VIEW ......................................................................................................................................... C1.5
EXPLODED VIEW ...................................................................................................................................... C1.6
TIGHTENING TORQUES AND ADJUSTMENT VALUES P11 AND P11H AXLE ............................................ C1.7
TIGHTENING TORQUES AND ADJUSTMENT VALUES P11 AND P11H AXLE ............................................ C1.8
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ........................................................................................................................ C1.10
ADJUSTMENT OF THE PTO SPEED SELECTION CONTROL .................................................................. C1.12
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ........................................................................................................................ C1.13
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION OF THE DIFFERENTIAL AND THE CROWN WHEEL ..................................... C1.14
ADJUSTMENT OF THE PRELOAD OF THE BEARINGS OF THE DIFFERENTIAL BEARING BLOCKS .... C1.16
CHECKING THE CLEARANCE OF THE CROWN WHEEL TEETH ........................................................... C1.17
CHANGING THE CROWN WHEEL ........................................................................................................... C1.17
CHANGING THE REAR AXLE CASING ..................................................................................................... C1.17
EXPLODED VIEW .................................................................................................................................... C1.18
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION OF THE AXLE TUBES AND SHAFTS ............................................................. C1.19
ADJUSTMENT OF THE HALF SHAFT END FLOAT .................................................................................. C1.22
FINALS STEPS ........................................................................................................................................ C1.22
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION OF THE DIFFERENTIAL LOCK MECHANISM ................................................ C1.24
ADJUSTMENT OF THE DIFFERENTIAL LOCK INSIDE MECHANISM ....................................................... C1.25
ADJUSTMENT OF THE DIFFERENTIAL LOCK CONTROL ........................................................................ C1.25
C2 - OIL-BATH DISC BRAKES
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS ..................................................................................................................... C2.2

ADJUSTMENT AND TIGHTENING TORQUE VALUES ................................................................................ C2.3
EXPLODED VIEW ...................................................................................................................................... C2.4
BRAKE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ............................................................................................................. C2.5
OPERATING BRAKES AND HANDBRAKE ADJUSTMENTS ...................................................................... C2.6
BRAKE CONTROL ADJUSTMENT .............................................................................................................. C2.6
HAND BRAKE CONTROL ADJUSTMENT ................................................................................................... C2.7
OPERATING BRAKE CONTROLS ADJUSTMENT ....................................................................................... C2.8
TOOLS
REAR AXLE TOOLS AND BRAKES ......................................................................................................... C2.10
60 05 029 684 - 10.2003 - EN

60 05 029 684 - 10.2003 - EN
C1 – REAR AXLE
Presentation
Rear axle casing P11 P11H
Width between plates 1, 530 mm

Rear differential lock
Type Dog clutch
Control Mecanic (by lever)
Release Automatic (brake pedal)
Final reduction
Type Right torque
Reduction ratio 5.1
Number of satellites 4
Crown wheel 6.85
Total reduction 34.97
Pow er take-off
S peeds 540 or 540 economic or 1,000 rpm
correspondent engine speeds 2,111/1,662/2,118
Economical speed ratio 540 rpm 0.325 (13/40 dts)
Speed ratio 540 rpm 0.255 (11/43 dts)
Speed ratio1 000 rpm 0.472 (17/36 dts)
Recommended oil ELF TractoRenault GA-12
Refer to the tractor operation and maintenance

Capacity (box + rear axle)
manual
Minimum capacity (gearbox + rear axle) 50 l
P11: tractors mounted on with a power lower than 100 ch.

P11H: tractors mounted on with a 100 ch power.
C1.2 60 05 029 684 - 10.2003 - EN

Presentation
Kinematics
(1,000 rpm)
(economic)
(540 rpm)
(540 rpm)
(1,000 rpm)
(economic)
C1-001 Fig. 1
Preliminary steps
To intervene effectively inside the rear axle, remove the cabin.
It is not required to remove the axle from the gearbox (except when intervening on the crown wheel).
– Put the tractor on jack stands.
– Drain the axle.
– Remove the rear wheels, the linkage and lift cover, the controls, and pipes.
– Clean the threads of the attachement holes for the bolts fitted with Loctite.
– Clean and remove any grease from the supporting faces.
– Upon installation, always change the seals and oil them beforehand.
– Grease all bearings before installation.
Beware any untimely forward movement of the tractor. When the rear axle is blocked on jack stands, never
start the tractor. The tractor could move if the brakes are actuated (operating or handbrake). If you must start
the engine, block the front axle with jack stands or disconnect the transmission shaft from the front axle.
60 MR 334684
05 029 - 02.2003 - EN
- 10.2003 - EN C1.3
Presentation
Attachment points (mm) rear axle P11 and P11H
Wheel axle plate Rear face
8 studs Ø 18
Engine axis
PTO pin
Stud rear
wheel axis
15 holes M16 x 2
Bore depth: 38
Tapped diameter: 28
5 holes M16 x 2
Lower face
C1-002 Fig. 2
C1.4 60 MR 334684
05 029 - 02.2003 - EN
- 10.2003 - EN
Presentation
Overall view
27
28 26 29 30 31 29 26 1
Description
1 Rear axle casing
2 Rear plate
3 Screw
4 Washer
5 Plug
6 Seal
7 Bearing assembly
8 O-ring 15 17 51 49 21 22 22 18 23
9 Screw
10 Dowels
11 Dowels 43
12 Plug
15 Correction dimension 52 53
indication for apex distance
16 Tapered bearing
17 Seal 51
18 Axle tube
19 Protector 36
20 Rivet
21 Screw
22 Tapered bearing 33
23 Wheel shaft
24 Wheel stud 47 48
25 Nut
26 Bull gear
27 Left shaft nut 50
28 Right shaft nut
29 Nut locking screw
32
30 Sliding dog
25 24 19 16 23 18
31 Fixed dog
32 Differential shaft 40
33 Adjustment shims 32
34 Left bearing
38
35 Right bearing
36 Screw 36
37 O-ring 39
38 Inside arrestor ring 39
39 Bearing
40 External circlip 48 Planet half-axes
41 Tapered bearing 49 Planet axis 37
42a Pinion 50 Sun gears
42b Crown wheel 51 Washers 35
43 Screw 52 Planet gears
44 Differential housing 53 Planet washers
45 Bush 54 Power take off control 41 50 52 46 45 42a 44 42b 41 1 34 37
46 External circlip 55 Differential lock control 53
47 Adjusting nut 56 Hypoid difference indication
C1-003 Note: the illustration shows the P11 rear axle Fig. 3
MR
60 05 334
029 - 02.2003
684 - EN
- 10.2003 - EN C1.5
Presentation
Description
Exploded view 1 Rear axle casing
2 Rear plate
3 Screw
4 Washer
Tractor front 5 Plug
6 Seal
7 Bearing assembly
8 O-ring
9 Screw
10 Dowels
11 Dowels
12 Plug
15 Correction dimension for the apex distance (refer
to chapter B2 for adjustment)
16 Tapered bearing
17 Seal
18 Axle tube
19 Protector
20 Rivet
21 Screw
22 Tapered bearing
23 Wheel shaft
24 Wheel stud
25 Nut
26 Bull gear
27 Left shaft nut
28 Right shaft nut
29 Nut locking screw
30 Sliding dog
C1-004
31 Fixed dog
32 Differential shaft
33 Adjustment shims
34 Left bearing support housing
35 Right bearing
36 Screw
37 O-ring
38 Inside arrestor ring
39 Bearing
40 External circlip
41 Tapered bearing
42 Pinion
42 Crownwheel
43 Screw
44 Differential housing
45 Bush
46 External circlip
47 Adjusting nut
48 Planet half-axes
49 Planet axis
50 Sun gears
51 Washers
52 Planet gears
53 Planet washers
54 Power take off control
Differential axis 55 Differential lock control
Tractor front 56 Hypoid difference dimension (not used) Fig. 4
C1.6 MR
60 05 334
029 - 02.2003
684 - EN
- 10.2003 - EN
Presentation
Tightening torques and adjustment values P11 and P11H axle
Mark Screw or loctite type Adjustment
9
20 screws HM 14 X 2.00-40 (VERBUS) 27.5 daN.m ± 2.5
P11
4 screws HM 14 X 2,00-40 (VERBUS) 27.5 daN.m ± 2.5
9 12 studs M 16 X 2 - 1 loctite 638 5 daN.m ± 1
P11H 2 studs M 16 X 2 - 1 loctite 638 5 daN.m ± 1
14 nuts M 16 X 2 (VERBUS) 35 daN.m ± 2
10 12 screws CHC M 12 X 1.75-60 12 daN.m ± 1
11 22 screws HM 10 X 1.50-30 6.5 daN.m ± 0.5
12 12 screws HM 12 X 1.50-35 14 daN.m ± 0.5 (loctite 638)
3.5 daN.m ± 0.5 (refer to wheel

14 2 screws CHC M 8 12 X 1.25-30
shaft adjustment)
Clearance 0 to 0.05 mm
Tool No.8654
Clearance 2mm (engaged)

5mm (not engaged)
Rotation torque 0.12
to 0.28 daN.m
Tool No.8651
1,530 mm (width between plates)
C1-005
4 screws HM 8 X 1.25-25 1,9 daN.m ± 0.2

15
4 screws HM 8 X 1.25-40 1.9 daN.m ± 0.2
20 16 wheel nuts 34 daN.m ± 4
.30 mm
1 nut M 58 X 1.5 turn i n by 10 turns and loosen by
nce 0.15 to 0
Cleara
22 1 nut M 58 X 1.5 1/6 turn 12 daN.m ± 1
wheel shaft looseni ng check 30 daN.m ± 2
23 locti te LI 518
24 coupli ng scale nuts 25 to 30 daN.m
Note: the illustration shows the P11 rear axle Fig. 5
MR
60 05 334
029 - 02.2003
684 - EN
- 10.2003 - EN C1.7
Presentation
Tightening torques and adjustment values P11 and P11H axle
5 screws HM 8 X 1.25-25 1.9 daN.m ± 0,2

1
3 screws HM 8 X 1.25-30 1.9 daN.m ± 0,2
2 7 screws HM 12 X 2.00-30 6.7 daN.m ± 0,5
8 screws HM 12 X 1.75-40 16 daN.m ± 1
4 2 screws HM 16 X 2-45 35 daN.m ± 2
P11H 2 screws HM 16 X 2-50 35 daN.m ± 2
2 screws HM 12 X 1.75-70 16 daN.m ± 1
10 screws HM 12 X 1.75-40 15 daN.m ± 1
4
2 screws HM 12 X 1.75-50 15 daN.m ± 1
P11
2 screws HM 12 X 1.75-70 15 daN.m ± 1
6 5 screws HM 10 X 1.50-35 8.5 daN.m ± 1
7 3 screws HM 8 X 1.25-20 1.9 daN.m ± 0.2
53 ± 0.5
90.5 ± 0.5
18 1 plug M 26 X 1.00 6.5 daN.m ± 0.5
19 1 fork set screw 2.5 daN.m ± 0.2
23 locti te LI 518
21 1 nut M 35 X 1.5 11.5 daN.m ± 0.5
24 coupli ng scale nuts 25 to 30 daN.m
C1-006 Note: the illustration shows the P11 rear axle Fig. 6
C1.8 MR
60 05 334
029 - 02.2003
684 - EN
- 10.2003 - EN
Presentation
C1-007 Fig. 7
MR029
60 05 334684
- 02.2003 - EN
- 10.2003 - EN C1.9
Power take off
Inputshaft
Removal
– Remove the selector rail and fork (Fig. 8).
– Extract the circlip (64).
– Use the slide hammer 8058 to extract the shaft (Fig. 9).
Installation
– Apply the reverse removal sequence.
– Install the bearing (63) on the casing using the tool 8669
(Fig. 10).
C1-008 Fig. 8
C1-009 Fig. 9
C1-010 Fig. 10
C1.10 MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
Power take off
– Use the tool 8338 to fit the spacer (68)

(Fig. 11).
– Torque tighten the closing plate bolts to 1.9 daN.m ± 0.2.
Outputshaft
Removal
– Remove the selector rail and fork (Fig. 12).
– Using a 33 size wrench, hold the shaft grooved tip to loosen the
nut (Fig. 13). 1.9 daN.m ± 0.2
– Using the screw extractor 8058, with the socket 8345, extract the
entire shaft (Fig. 13).
Installation
– Install the entire shaft in the casing bores.
– Install and torque tighten the nut to 11.5 daN.m ± 0.5, then lock
it (Fig. 14).
– Torque tighten the closing plate’s bolts to 1.9 daN.m ± 0.2. C1-011 Fig. 11
C1-012 Fig. 12
11.5 daN.m ± 0.5
C1-014 Fig. 14 C1-013 Fig. 13
MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN C1.11
Power take off
Re-install and adjust the PTO speed selection control.
Adjustment of the PTO speed selection

control
– Set the transmission levers to neutral.
– Connect the yoke to the PTO speed selection lever (1) (Fig. 15).
– Tighten the two cable nuts.
– Control functional check.
C1-015 Fig. 15
C1.12 MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
Differential shaft
Removal
– Remove the entire brake assembly of the differential shaft to
be removed (refer to the “Brakes” chapter).
– Using the extractor 8058 and the adapter 8345, extract the
differential shaft assembly (Fig. 16 and 17).
– Inspect the condition of the 10-teeth pinion, and the bearing.
Change any faulty parts (Fig. 16).
Installation
– Perform the reverse sequence of operations.
– Install the differential shaft (32) in its bearing (35)
(Fig.18).
– Install the brake assembly and adjust it (refer to the “Brakes”
chapter).
C1-017 Fig. 17
C1-018 Fig. 18
Description
32 Differential shaft
35 Bearing assembly
38 Inside arrestor ring
39 Bearing
40 External circlip
C1-016 Fig. 16
MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN C1.13
Differential and bevel gear crown wheel
Removal/installation of the differential

and the bevel gear crown wheel
Removal
– Remove the differential lock internal control mechanism.
– Remove the differential shafts (32) (Fig. 19).
– Extract the bearings (34) and (35) from the casing
(Fig. 19 and 20).
– Remove the adjustment shims (33) and the O-rings (37)
on the bearings (34) and (35).
– Extract the bearing (41).
– Remove the differential crown/housing assembly from the
casing.
C1-019 Fig. 19
C1-020 Fig. 20
C1-022 Fig. 22 C1-021 Fig. 21
C1.14 MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
– Using the appropriate puller, remove the bearing (41)

(Fig. 21 and 22).
– Remove the crown wheel from the differential housing.
– Extract the sun gears (50) and the washers (51)
(Fig.3).
– Extract the axis (49) and the two planet gears (52) with
their washer (53) (Fig. 3 and 23).
– Then extract the half-axes (48) and the two planet gears
(52) with their washer (53) (Fig.25).
– Remove the adjusting nut (47) from the housing (44).
– If required, change the washers.
Installation
– Perform the operations in the reverse removal sequence.
– Install the housing on the crown wheel while applying a
seal of Loctite 638 on the bolt threads (43), then torque
tighten them to 14 daN.m ± 1 (Fig. 26).
– Imperatively change the O-ring (37). C1-023 Fig. 23
– Lubricate the differential mechanism appropriately, and
operate it usin a differential shaft (Fig. 26).
Note: when using new washers, the mechanism should
operate with a slight constraint.
C1-024 Fig. 24
C1-026 Fig. 26 C1-025 Fig. 25
MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN C1.15
Adjustment of the preload of the

bearings of the differential bearing
blocks
Important: preload is required only when fitting new bearings.
– Perform a pre-assembly of the differential without the crown
wheel.
– Install the bearings (35) with the original adjustment shims
(33) (Fig.3).
– Tighten the two bolts (A) and (B) on the right bearing (Fig.27).
– Tighten gradually the two bolts (C) and (D) on the left
bearing, while rotating the differential (Fig. 28):
. If the bearings lock, add additional shims.
. If an axial clearance on the level of the differential
remains, remove shims.
– Using a dynamometer, measure the force (F). C1-027 Fig. 27
F must be included between 0.12 and 0.28 daN.m.
C1-028 Fig. 28
C1-029 Fig. 29
C1.16 MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
Checking the clearance of the crown

wheel teeth
– Check the clearance using a dial gauge (Fig. 30).
The clearance must be between 0.15 and 0.3 mm.
If the clearance is not correct, transfer shims from one bearing
to another.
Changing the crown wheel

When changing the crown wheel, always change the pinion
(refer to the « Gearbox « chapter).
Check that the two parts feature a common identification.
C1-030 Fig. 30
Changing the rear axle casing
When changing the rear axle casing, and reusing the bevel
gear, apply the following instructions :
– If the values marked on the embossing (RH rear) of the
new casing are different, change the shimming of the pinion
(refer to the « Gearbox ” chapter).
– Before removal, note the set of gear teeth. Upon instal-
lation, use the same set.
MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN C1.17
Axle tubes and shafts
Exploded view
C1-031 Fig. 31
Description
1 Rear axle casing 20 Rivet 26 Crown wheel
15 Seal 21 Screw 27 Left shaft nut
16 Tapered bearing 22 Tapered bearing 28 Right shaft nut
17 Seal 23 Wheel shaft 29 Nut locking screw
18 Axle tube 24 Wheel stud 30 Sliding dog
19 Protector 25 Nut 31 Fixed dog
C1.18 60MR 334684

05 029 – 02.2003 – -EN
- 10.2003 EN
Removal/installation of the axle

tubes and shafts
Removal
– Remove the brakes.
– Remove the differential lock internal control mechanism.
– Position jack stands under the axle casing and the axle
tubes (18). Remove the two wheels (Fig. 32).
– Unlock the nut (27) or (28) on the axle tube to be removed,
by loosening the locking bolt (29) (Fig. 31).
– Remove the attachment bolts (21) (Fig. 31 and 33).
– Unscrew the nut (27) or (28) (Fig. 31 ) while extracting
in order to pull out the axle tube (18) and wheel shaft (23)
assembly while using the jack stands (Fig. 34).
– At the end of the extraction process, recover the diff lock
dog (30) or (31) with the nut (27) or (28) (Fig. 31).
C1-032 Fig. 32
– Using a hoist and shackles fitted onto the axle tube plate,
extract the half shaft (23) from the axle tube (18) (Fig. 35).
C1-033 Fig. 33
C1-035 Fig. 35 C1-034 Fig. 34
60MR 334684
05 029 – 02.2003 – -EN
- 10.2003 EN C1.19
– Using an extractor, remove the bearing (16) from the wheel

axle (23) (Fig. 31).
– Using the extractor and an appropriate support, remove
the bearing (22) from the axle tube on the rear axle casing
side (Fig. 31 and 36) and the bearing (16) on the wheel
end of the axle tube (Fig. 31 et 37).
– Remove the seals (15) and (17) (Fig. 31).
– To extract a crown wheel (26), turn the differential bearing
(Fig. 38).
C1-036 Fig. 36
C1-037 Fig. 37 C1-038 Fig. 38
C1-039 Fig. 39 C1-040 Fig. 40
C1.20 60MR 334684

05 029 – 02.2003 – -EN
- 10.2003 EN
– Using the tongues 8641, extract the crown wheel (26) while
turning it backwards and pulling it upwards (Fig. 39).
– Extract the taper bearing (22) from the crown wheel (26)
using an extractor (Fig. 40).
Installation
• Apply the reverse removal sequence.
• Immerse the bearings in oil before installation.
• Smear the new seal and bearing (15) and (17) with grease,
and fit them on the axle tube (18) (Fig. 31) using the sup-
port 8640 and the appropriate socket (Fig. 41 and 42):
– bearing (16) – tool No.8654;
– seal (17) – tool No.8654
• Install the shaft and axle tube assembly, using the
appropriate guide rods (Fig. 43) and while inserting the crown
wheel (26) onto the shaft, then the nut (27) or (28) then
the diff lock dog (30) or (31) (Fig. 31).
• Screw the axle tube attachment bolts (21) on the casing,
C1-041 Fig. 41
by torque-tightening them to 27.5 daN.m ± 2.5 (Fig. 44).
C1-042 Fig. 42
C1-044 Fig. 44 C1-043 Fig. 43
60MR 334684
05 029 – 02.2003 – -EN
- 10.2003 EN C1.21
Adjustment of the half shaft end 8626

float
Note: for 30 daN.m, set the torque wrench to 25 daN.m.
For 12 daN.m, set the torque wrench to 10 daN.m.
Important: approach the M8 screw (29) to avoid

the nut threads overlapping with the shaft threads
and the nut opening.
– Using wrench P/N 8626, torque-tighten the nut (27) or
(28) to 12 daN.m (Fig. 31).
– Perform 10 shaft rotations of the shaft (on the wheel).
– Torque-tighten the nut to 12 daN.m then loosen by one-
twelfth of a turn.
– Torque tighten the nut’s lock bolt (29) to 3.5 daN.m ± 27
0.5. C1-045 Fig. 45
– Using a dial gauge, make sure the clearance is between
0 and 0.5mm (Fig. 47).
Always check for proper tightening of the nuts
(27) and (28) by applying an untightening torque
of 30 daN.m (Fig. 47). The nuts should not loosen.
– Check the clearance again.
Important: do not forget to fold the nut tab (27) (left shaft)
in the fixed diff lock dog groove (31) (see photo 45).
Final operations 27
– Install the wheels and torque-tighten the attachments to
34 daN.m ± 4.
29
C1-046 Fig. 46
Clearance = 0 to 0.05mm
C1-047 Fig. 47
C1.22 60MR 334684

05 029 – 02.2003 – -EN
- 10.2003 EN
Differential lock/release controls
20
19
9
21
17
14
18
11
15
10
16
C1-048 Fig. 48
4
5
6
3
1
15
7
12
9
13
C1-049 Fig. 49
Description 11 Spring
1 Fork 12 Sliding dog
2 Locking bolt 13 Fixed dog
3 Spacer 14 Locking lever
4 Spacer 15 Control lever
5 Spring 16 Cable clamp
6 Fork pin 17 Cable sheath stop (differential locking)
7 O-ring 18 Spring stop
8 Threaded rod 19 Dead slow range control cable sheath stop
9 Locknut 20 Spring stop
10 Drive finger 21 Cable sheath stop (differential release)
60 MR 334684
05 029 – 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN C1.23
Removal/installation of the differential

locking mechanism
Removal
– Immobilise the tractor.
– Lift the cabin.
– Remove the lift cover.
– Drain the rear axle.
– Remove the brakes.
– Disconnect the outside control of the transmission lever (15)

(Fig. 49).
– Remove the internal parts of the lock control.
Note: to remove the diff lock dogs, it is necessary to
remove the wheel shafts.
C1-050 Fig. 50
Installation
– Proceed in the reverse removal sequence.
C1.24 60 MR 334684
05 029 – 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
Adjustment of the differential lock

inside mechanism
8 6
Diff lock dog clearance
(Fig. 48 and 49)
– Act on the threaded rod (8) and the drive finger (10) in
order to bring the sliding dog (12) to 2 mm (Fig. 52)
(engaged position) from the fixed dog (13) at the bottom of
the teeth. Tighten the locknut (9).
7
Diff lock release
The adjustment is made by using the nuts (7) and (9)
(Fig. 51).
– Adjust the control in order to achieve a 5 mm clearance 9
between the diff lock dogs (Fig. 52).
C1-051 Fig. 51
Adjustment of the differential lock

control 5 mm (disengaged)
2 mm (engaged, at the bottom of the teeth)
– Switch the differential lock to «disengaged» position.
– Tension and connect the differential lock cable.
– Lift the lock (A) by 5mm (Fig. 53) and connect the brake
pedals cable to the lock held in this position.
Checking the operation

– Engage the locking lever and then use the brake pedals
to check for the proper operation of the engagement /
disengagement.
C1-052
C1-053 Fig.
Fig. 52
52
C1-052 Fig. 53
60 MR 334684
05 029 – 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN C1.25
Personal notes:
C1.26 60 MR 334684
05 029 – 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
C2 – OIL-BATH DISC
BRAKES
Presentation
Rear axle model P11 P11H
Type Oil immersed disk brakes
Number of discs per wheel 4 5
Disc outside diameter (friction) 204 mm
Type of service brake control Mechanical
Type of emergency brake control Mechanical
Lubrication Oil ELF GA 12
C2.2 MR029
60 05 334684
- 02.2003 - EN
- 10.2003 - EN
Presentation
Adjustment and tightening torque values
12 daN.m Loctite No. 518

Loctite No. 638 9.5 daN.m
Backplates minimum dimension = 2.3

Loctite No. 518 Friction discs minimum dimension = 4.15
6.5 daN.m
2 daN.m
C2-001 Fig. 1
MR029
60 05 334684
- 02.2003 - EN
- 10.2003 - EN C2.3
Presentation
Exploded view
Description 8b Pin 16 Support

1 Brake actuator 8c Seal bellows 17 Brakes lubrication (banjo screw)
2 Cover 8e Washer 18 Washer
3 Screw 9 Brake disk 19 Pin
4 Screw 10 Backplates 20 Circlip
Note: the illustration shows the P11 rear
5 Oil change plug 11 Casing 21 Spacer
axle (4 brake discs)
6 Connecting rod 12 Slave cylinder 27 Washer
7 Connecting rod 13 U-bolt 28 Nut
C2-002
8 Actuating rod assembly 14 Spring 29 Locknut
8a Axis 15 Seal 30 Screw Fig. 2
C2.4 MR029
60 05 334684
- 02.2003 - EN
- 10.2003 - EN
Presentation
Brake removal/installation
Installation
– Clean and remove the grease on the differential bearing
supporting face (P) (Fig. 3).
– Apply a constant layer of Loctite 518 on the differential
bearing supporting face (P) (Fig. 3).
– Fit the casing on the rear axle by screwing the bolts
smeared with Loctite 638. Torque tighten them to 12 ±
1 daNm.
– Clean and remove the grease on the casing supporting
faces.
– Apply a constant layer of Loctite 518 as shown on Fig. 4.
– Fit the cover and torque tighten the bolts to 6.5 ±
0.5 daNm.
Mandatory operations after installing the brakes C2-003 Fig. 3

– Check the pedal clearance and adjust if required.
– Check the brake controls and adjust if required.
– Test braking after running the engine for 1 minute to
enable the brake casings to fill with oil (for lubrication).
C2-004
Fig. 4
Lubrication
Lubrication is ensured by the fitting (17) mounted on the
casing. Oil flow is ensured inside the casing with return to
the rear axle through the bearing and grooves machined in 17
the bearing. The type of brakes installed on the tractors
involve using specific transmission and brake oil. Use the
GA 12 oil.
C2-005 Fig. 5
60MR 334684
05 029 – 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN C2.5
Presentation
Service brakes and handbrake

adjustments
– Release the handbrake.
– Loosen and remove the locknut (A).
– Torque tighten the nut (B) to 0.5 daN.m.
– Loosen the nut (B) by a turn and a half.
– Tighten and lock the locknut (A).
Brakes controls adjustment

– Adjust the controls in the following order:
1) Brake pedals (see page C2.38).
2) Brake valve (see the «Hydraulic» chapter).
3) Handbrake (see page C2.37).
A B
C2-005 Fig. 6
C2.6 60 MR 334684
05 029 – 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
Presentation
25
Hand brake control adjustment
24
23 22 21 20 19 Important: adjust the brake valve before the handbrake
– Position the handbrake on its first notch.
18 17 16 – Make sure the tie bar dimension (7) is 300 mm.
Note: the tie bar (7) should be positioned approximately 35 mm from the differential lock control lever (engaged position) (see photo).
15
3
14
13
Description 12
1 Handle 4
11
2 Handbrake switch
3 Tie bar 5 9 10
4 Circlip
5 Circlip
6 Circlip 6
7 Load tie bar
8 Base plate
9 Tie bar axle 7 6
10 Circlip 1
11 Circlip
12 Load transmission connecting rod
13 Circlip
14 Rack connecting rod
15 Base plate pin 14
35 mm
16 Circlip
17 Circlip
12
18 Base plate pin
19 Circlip
20 Rack pin
8
21 Circlip
22 Ratchet pin
23 Ratchet
24 Tie bar
25 Spring
m
26 Pin
300 m
27 Tie bar
27
26 3 27
C2-006 Fig. 7
MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN C2.7
Presentation
Service brake controls adjustment

– The tie bars underneath the cab shall be adjusted after connecting the linkage of the gearbox
assembly (1). Adjust to dimension 375 mm behind the pedals.
6 3 8
– Adjust according to the floor mat as per dimension X =98 mm.
– The stirrup (3) should be in contact with the brake disc casing (adjust the inside nut).
– The tie bars should be mounted at the bottom of the stirrup’s opening (3).
– The swivel joint (6) should be mounted resting without any clearance at the bottom of the stirrups’
spacers (3).
– Make sure the protection spacer (7) is fitted into the swivel joint.
– Tighten the 2 locknuts behind the swivel joint (8).
7 Important: The brake valve shall be adjusted after adjusting the brake pedals (see the
«Hydraulic» chapter).
1
375 mm
X = 98 mm
2
6
300 m
m
3
C2-007
4 5
Fig. 8
C2.8 MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
TOOLS
Rear axle and brake tools
77 01 388 626 8626 77 01 388 008 8008
– P11 wheel shaft wrench – Dynamometer 0 to 40 daN
77 01 388 058 8058 77 01 388 324 8324
– Extractor – Hinged wrench
77 01 388 338 8338 77 01 388 345 8345
– Adaptation socket – Adaptation socket
C2.10 60 MR 334684
05 029 – 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
77 01 388 640 8640 77 01 388 641 8641
– Socket support – Tongues
77 01 388 651 8651 77 01 388 654 8654
– Tool for fitting axle tube bearing – Tool for fitting axle tube seal
77 01 388 669 8669
– Guide
60MR 334684
05 029 – 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN C2.11
Personal notes:
C2.12 60 MR 334684
05 029 – 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
D1
FRONT AXLE
20.11
20.14-1
20.19-6
D2
M21 POWER TAKE-OFF HOUSING
D3
FRONT AXLE
A06-02
02 – 2003 Chapter D
60 05 029 684 - 10.2003 - EN
CONTENTS
D1 - FRONT AXLE
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS ............................................................................................................................. D1.2
KINEMATICS ....................................................................................................................................................... D1.4
WHEEL ALIGNMENT ADJUSTMENT.................................................................................................................. D1.5
PRELIMINARY OPERATIONS ............................................................................................................................ D1.5
REDUCERS AND WHEEL HUBS........................................................................................................................ D1.6
20.11 AND 20.14 FRONT AXLE TIGHTENING TORQUES AND TOOLS .......................................................... D1.7
20.19 FRONT AXLE TIGHTENING TORQUES AND TOOLS ............................................................................ D1.8
PLANET GEAR REDUCER ................................................................................................................................. D1.9
DIFFERENTIAL ................................................................................................................................................. D1.10
WHEEL PIVOTS - UNIVERSAL JOINT SHAFTS .............................................................................................. D1.11
DIFFERENTIAL - CROWN WHEEL .................................................................................................................. D1.12
20.11 AND 20.19 FRONT AXLE DIFFERENTIAL ............................................................................................. D1.12
20.14 FRONT AXLE DIFFERENTIAL ............................................................................................................... D1.12
ADJUSTMENT OF THE BEVEL GEAR PRELOAD........................................................................................... D1.13
APEX DISTANCE ADJUSTMENT ..................................................................................................................... D1.14
BACKLASH ADJUSTMENT............................................................................................................................... D1.15
DIFFERENTIAL BEARING PRELOAD .............................................................................................................. D1.15
FINAL INSTALLATION....................................................................................................................................... D1.15
60 05 029 684 - 10.2003 - EN

D2 - M21 POWER TAKE-OFF HOUSING
SAFETY............................................................................................................................................................... D2.2
TIGHTENING TORQUES AND ADJUSTMENTS ................................................................................................ D2.3
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ................................................................................................................................. D2.4
HOUSING REMOVAL.......................................................................................................................................... D2.5
BELVILLE SPRING ASSEMBLY SHIMMING ..................................................................................................... D2.6
PISTON STROKE SHIMMING ............................................................................................................................ D2.7
HOUSING INSTALLATION .................................................................................................................................. D2.8
BEARING CLEARANCE ADJUSTMENT............................................................................................................. D2.9
OPERATION CHECK ........................................................................................................................................ D2.10
FINAL OPERATIONS ........................................................................................................................................ D2.10
CLUTCH RELEASE CONTROL FOR THE 4 WD HOUSING ........................................................................... D2.11
D3 – FRONT AXLE
SPECIFICATIONS ............................................................................................................................................... D3.2
AXLE ASSEMBLY................................................................................................................................................ D3.3
STEERING CYLINDER ....................................................................................................................................... D3.4
WHEEL ALIGNMENT ADJUSTMENT.................................................................................................................. D3.4
TOOLS
TOOLS FOR FRONT AXLE & POWER TAKE-OFF HOUSING.......................................................................... D3.5
60 05 029 684 - 10.2003 - EN

D1 - FRONT AXLE
Axle type 20.11 20.14 20.19
Overall w idth 1 836 mm 1 860 mm 2 045 mm
Width betw een plates 1 700 mm 1 700 mm 1 900 mm
Maximum steering lock

55° 55° 55°
angle
Tilt angle 10° 10° 10°
Dynamic load capacity < 7

3 100 d aN 3 100 d aN 4 000 d aN
km/h
Static load capacity 7 750 d aN 7 750 d aN 10 000 d aN
Reducer oil capacity 0.6 l 0.6 l 0.6 l
Differential housing oil

5.5 l 5.5 l 6l
capacity
Tranself Tranself Tranself

Oil type
BLS 90 oil BLS 90 oil BLS 90 oil
Differential lock type Self-locking Self-locking Self-locking
Number of teeth of the

12/29 teeth 12/29 teeth 12/30 teeth
b evel g ear
Number of teeth of the

12/23/60 teeth 12/23/60 teeth 12/23/60 teeth
planet gear reducer
Bevel gear reduction ratio 2.42 2.42 2.42
Planet gear reduction ratio 6/1 6/1 6/1
Total reduction ratio 14.5/1 14.5/1 17.45/1
Synchronisation ratio See the maintenance manual corresponding to the tractor.
Maximum toe-in of 4 Maximum toe-in of 4 Maximum toe-in of 4

Wheel alignment
mm mm mm
D1.2 60 05 029 684 - 10.2003 - EN

Presentation
10°
Tilt angle Identification plate

Width between plates
Overall width
334D1001 Fig. 1
5.5 l
0.6 l
55°
Steering lock angle
334D1002 Fig. 2
Caster angle
2 ELF MULTI greasers
334D1003 Fig. 3 334D1004 Fig. 4
MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN D1.3
Presentation
Kinematics
12 60
23
Front axles
Reduction ratio:
– 14.50 (20.11 and 20.14 axles);
– 17.45 (20.19 axle).
12
29
(30)
(20.19)
23
12 60
Power take off

Reduction ratio: 1.7576
33
22
58
334D1-005 Fig. 5
D1.4 MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
Wheel alignment adjustment
Maximum toe-in: 4 mm (front axle declutched) and measure the dimension A2 (between
The adjustment is performed with the wheels fitted on the tractor the same X points).
and on the ground. The measurements between the wheel rims are – Adjust the rods (M) on the steering joints in order to obtain A1 =
made at the height of the wheel horizontal axis, on the edge of the A2.
rims, between the two X points. or A2 – 4 mm (angle closing forward).
– Apply a marking on these points.
Note: the M dimensions must be equal.
– Measure the dimension A1 between the X points.
– Push the tractor forward to turn the wheels by one half-revolution - Tighten the locknuts on the rod to the recommended torque.
X = Measurement points between rims

X
X
A2 X Tractor front
Rim
1/2
revolution
M M
A1
334D1006 Fig. 6
Preliminary operations – Remove the four attachment bolts on the two bearings.
– Disconnect the unions from the hydraulic hoses.
Park the tractor on flat and stable ground. – Extract the front axle and remove the two wheels.
– Apply the hand brake. – Support the tractor at the front, on the chassis.
– Chock the rear wheels.
– Remove the front ballast weights, the casing and trans-
mission shaft. Safety
– Drain the oil from the front axle casing and the hubs. It is imperative to support the front axle on jack
– Support the tractor under the crankcase using jack stands. stands as well as the rear axle if the operation to
– Loosen, without removing them, the front wheel nuts be performed requires the engine to be run, the front
(remove the wheels only when the axle will be removed from axle remains engaged at rest. The tractor may move forward.
the tractor).
– Lift the tractor to provide access to the front axle.
MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN D1.5
Reducers and wheel hubs
1
2
3 4
5 16
2 17
18
6 14
7 15
9 19 13
10
11
12
334D1007 Fig. 7
Description 7 Crown wheel carrier hub 14 Needle bearing

1 Sealing bush 8 Ring gear 15 Stop washer
2 Bearing 9 Centring socket 16 Circlip
3 Wheel hub 10 M10 x 45 screw 17 Stop washer
4 Stud 11 M30 x 2 plug 18 Planet gear
5 Seal 12 M8 x 20 screw 19 Planet carrier cover
6 Circlip 13 Planet axis
Removal
– Drain the wheel hub, plug (11)
– Tighten the two screws (12)
– Remove the cover (19)
– Unscrew the screws (10) to extract the crown wheel (7), use
the screws (10) as extractor.
Dimensions to be checked before

installing 20.11 and 20.11 axles
A = 12 ± 0.05
B = 52.5 + 0.08
C = 20 + 0.1
Dimensions to be checked before installing

20.19 axle :
A = 8.4 + 0.1
B = 55 ± 0.25
C = 23 + 0.1
334D1008 Fig. 8 Installation

- Use the tool P/N 6527 (20.11 and 20.14) to install the seal (1).
- Use the tool P/N 6535 (20.19) to install the seal (1).
D1.6 MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
20.11 and 20.14 front axle tightening torques and tools 30 daN.m When disassembling the
cylinder, always change all seals.
12 daN.m
Thickness 1.5 mm
Loctite Frenbloc (270) 1/10th of maximum wear stroke
12 daN.m 9.5 daN.m
1 daN.m 26 daN.m
Loctite Thickness 2.8 mm
Frenbloc (270) 16.5 daN.m 1/10th of maximum wear stroke
1.3 daN.m
7 daN.m Tool P/N 6525
Tool P/N 6534
Loctite
Frenbloc (270)
Thickness 1.6 mm
15/100th of maximum wear stroke
9 daN.m
Gasket face: Loctite Formajoint (510)
Tool P/N 6530 7 daN.m
Tool P/N 6529 Loctite (401)

8 daN.m 17 daN.m
12 daN.m Loctite
12 daN.m
2.5 daN.m Formajoint (510) Clearance 0.18 to 0.23 mm
Scelbloc (648) Progressive tightening until a preload is
Loctite achieved between 10.5 & 15.7 daN
Loctite Frenbloc (270) Scelbloc (648)
Tool P/N 6525
Loctite (542)
Tool P/N 6527 Tool P/N 6531
Tool P/N 6528
Gasket face: Loctite Formajoint (510)
20 daN.m
20 daN.m 15 daN.m
7 daN.m Loctite
Frenbloc
17 daN.m (270) Fig. 9
334D1009
60 MR334 – 02.2003
05 029 684 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN D1.7
30 daN.m When disassembling the cylinder,

20.19 front axle tightening torques and tools 25 daN.m
always change all seals.
Loctite Frenbloc (270)

Thickness 1.5 mm
1.3 daN.m 9.5 daN.m
Loctite 1/10th of maximum wear stroke
Frenbloc (270)
22 daN.m
7 daN.m 1 daN.m 26 daN.m Thickness 2.8 mm
19 daN.m 1/10th of maximum wear stroke
Tool P/N 6539
Tool P/N 6534
Loctite
Frenbloc (270)
Thickness 1.6 mm
15/100th of maximum wear stroke
9 daN.m
Gasket face: Loctite
Formajoint (510)
Tool P/N 6538

Loctite (401) Loctite (401)
Tool P/N 6529
8 daN.m
Loctite 12 daN.m Clearance 0.18 to 0.23 mm
Formajoint (510) Scelbloc (648)
19 daN.m Progressive tightening until a
2.5 daN.m Loctite preload is achieved between 9.2
Loctite Frenbloc (270) Scelbloc (648) & 13.7 daN
Tool P/N 6538
Tool P/N 6535 Tool P/N 6536
Gasket face:
Loctite (542) Tool P/N 6537
Loctite Formajoint (510)
20 daN.m
20 daN.m 15 daN.m
7 daN.m Loctite
Frenbloc
17 daN.m (270)
334D1010 Fig. 10
D1.8 60 MR 334 684

05 029 – 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
Planet gear reducer
334D1011 Fig. 11
MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN D1.9
Differential
334D1012 Fig. 12
D1.10 MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
Wheel pivots - Universal joint shafts

10
7 9
8
20
13 31
12
30
11
32
33
8
7 9
10 5
29
14
18 34
Description
1 15
17
1 M6 x 1 greaser 2
2 M12 x 30 screw
16
3 Pivot pin
3
4 LH pivot
4
5 M18 x 1.5 screw

6 Pivot pin 30
7 Steering rod
8 Ball joint
22
9 Nut
10 Tie-rod
11 Steering cylinder
35
12 M12 x 45 screw
13 RH pivot
14 M16 nut
15 Bush
16 M16 x 100 screw 5 24
17 Bush
23
29
18 Combined seal
6 24
25
19 Rod 1
20 Cylinder body
26
21 Set of seals
2 27
28
22 Plug
23 Central body 334D1013 Fig. 13
24 Spider
25 Fork on the wheel side
26 Stop washer
27 Washer
28 Circlips
29 Ball joint Removing the wheel pivot Installing the wheel pivot – Slightly oil them before installing them.
30 Bush – Use the tool P/N 6539 (20.19) and P/N 6529 (20.11, 20.14) to – Install the ball joint (29) under the press for the part fitted – Use the tool P/N 6529 (20.11, 20.14) and P/N 6539 (20.19) to
31 Belleville washer remove the seal (18) and the bush (17). on the pin, and cool it in a nitrogen bath for the part fitted install the seal (33).
32 Bush in the axle housing. – Use the tool P/N 6530 (20.11, 20.14) and P/N 6538 (20.19) to
33 Seal – Cool the bush (30) in a nitrogen bath before installation. install the bronze bush (32).
34 Belleville washer – Imperatively replace all the seals. – Grease.
35 Fork on the frame side – Torque tighten the screws (2) to 12 daN.m.
60 MR 334 684
05 029 – 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN D1.11
Differential - Bevel gear 20.11 and 20.19 front axle differential

20.11 and 20.14 axle seal extractor 19
Removal 2 M8 x 80 screws 18
Note: for the 20.11 and 20.14 axles use the opposite locally- 12
manufactured tool to remove the gasket seal from the bevel
10
20
gear.
- Remove the cover.
- Remove the differential housing.
16
- Mark the housings before removal.
17
60
- Check the thickness of the discs and friction back-plates. If
required, change them as sets. Ø 115
Installation
- When changing them, always change the complete bevel gear
3
(pinion/crownwheel).
10
- When installing the differential housing on the crown wheel , lock

21
the bolts (12) with Frenetanch locking compound, and torque

tighten them to 9.5 daN.m.
11
19
Ø 121
13
Ø 35
18
63
14
15
16
17
Description Tapped holes
1 Bevel gear
2 Lockwasher 20.14 front axle differential
19
3 M35 x 1.5 nut

18
4 Washer
5 Resilient spacer
6 20.19 axle combined seal
20
7
7 20.11 and 20.14 axle cover 12
8 Thickness 2.50 mm
8 Thickness 2.60 mm
16
21 17
8 Thickness 2.70 mm
2
8 Thickness 2.80 mm
3
8 Thickness 2.90 mm
8 Thickness 3.00 mm
8 Thickness 3.10 mm
6
8 Thickness 3.20 mm
4 10
1
8 Thickness 3.30 mm
5
8 Thickness 3.40 mm
4
9 Bearing
12
10 Pin
11
19 13
11 Stop washer
18 14
12 Differential housing 15
13 Disc
14 Counter-disc
16
15 Disc
17
16 Bearing
17 Lateral tip
8
9
18 Screw locking
19 M6 x 10 screw
20 M10 x 75 screw
21 20.11 and 20.14 axle combined seal 334D1014 Fig. 14
D1.12 60 MR 334 684

05 029 – 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
Adjustment of the bevel gear

preload
Note: the tightening torque of the nut is specified by the preload
measure on the bearings.
Note: the measure is performed without the gasket seal.

– Slightly tighten the nut using the tool P/N 6531 (20.11 and
20.14) or P/N 6536 (20.19).
Note: insert the bearings before measuring the preload.
– Then, using a piece of string and the dynamometer P/
N 8008 (see fig. 15), measure the force P required to drive the
pinion into rotation.
– This preload value should range between 10.5 daN and 15.7
daN (20.11 and 20.14) or 9.2 and 13.7 daN (20.19).
– Tighten until achieving this preload value.
– Fold the nut flange to lock it.
334D1015 Fig. 15
MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN D1.13
Adjustment of the apex distance

- Keep the inside cages pressurized using a M12 x 110 screw and
a M12 nut (Fig. 18).
- The bearings must turn when actuated manually.
- Fit a bearing half-flange and measure the diameter «D».
- Fit the locally-manufactured tool (opposite) on the bottom of
the bearings, and measure the «Y» dimension, using the
electronic depth gauge P/N 6065711573 as the tip of the depth
gauge is supported on the inside cage of the bearing.
- Deduce the dimension «B» : B = Y – 50 + (D/2) ø of the tool
e.g. = 50 mm.
- On the bevel gear shaft, fit the thickness of shims «C» (Fig.
16): C = V – B
Note: V is the value marked on the bevel gear.
334D1016 Fig. 16
m
0m
25
mm
90
Ø = 15 mm
Ø = 25 mm
Ø = 50 mm
334D1017 Fig. 17
1573
Value «V» of the apex distance
Locally-
manufactured
tool
No. of the crown wheel and pinion set

M12 x 110
334D1018 Fig. 18
D1.14 MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
Backlash adjustment
– Place the dial gauge sensor at 90° with respect to the surface of
a pinion tooth.
– Adjust the bearing nuts (31) to move the crown wheel towards or
away from the bevel gear.
– Using a plastic hammer, gently tap the bearings to ensure proper 31
fitting.
– Check the gear backlash, which should range between 0.18 and
0.23 mm.
- Successively repeat this check on several teeth.
- Adjust the bearing nuts (31) on the differential with the same
torque.
Preload of differential
bearings 334D1019 Fig. 19
Note: the preload measure is performed without the gasket
seal of the bevel gear (14).
– Adjust gear backlash beforehand.
– Wind a piece of string around the splines of the bevel gear shaft.
– Measure the rotation force «F» for the crown wheel and pinion
assembly.
– According to the initial preload «P» (measured when adjusting
the bevel gear preload), apply the formula:
20.11 and 20.14 axles: F = P + 4 to 6 daN.
20.19 axle: F = P +3.2 to 4.7 daN.
– Example: if P = 11 daN, F = 15 to 17 daN.
– Adjust the bearing nuts (31) while ensuring you maintain the
previously adjusted gear backlash.
Final installation
– Smear the supporting faces of the casings with sealing
compound.
– Fit the lip seal (14) on the cover (13) using the tool P/N 6528
(20.11 and 20.14 axles) or P/N 6537 (20.19 axle)
– Install the cover (13).
– Torque tighten the bolts to:
Bolt (11) on the half-flanges: 26 daN.m.
Bolt (30) on the nut locking tab: 1.3 daN.m. Clearance = 0.18
Bolt (7) on the cylinder support: 17 daN.m. to 0.23 mm
Plug (4): 7 daN.m.
F = P +4 to
6 daN.
334D1020 Fig. 20
MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN D1.15
Personal notes
D1.16 MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
D2 – M21 POWER TAKE-OFF
HOUSING
Safety
When the engine is stopped, the multiple disc clutch Note: If a gear is engaged, the front axle is driven:
is in the engaged position. When starting the engine, – permanently, when the control is actuated,
check that the gearbox lever is in neutral, and that – for a short time, when the control is not actuated (pressuri-
the electrical control of the front axle is in the declutched sing time).
position, button released, indicator off.
Clutch release
Tractors are equipped with an electric switch inhibiting engine start The clutch is released using a solenoid valve.
when a gear is engaged. However, in case it fails or in the event Refer to the chapters B2 «Low pressure hydraulic circuits» and
of an electric failure, the engine can start. F « Electricity before any intervention on the solenoid valve».
D2.2 MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
Tightening torques and adjustments
8.5daN.m
+0
B = X – 4,3 – 0,20
Loctite Rectijoint
(518)
F = 1 600 daN.m
ELFMULTI F = 250 daNm

Y
X +0
A= Y – 3 – 0,20
Piston stroke shimming Shimming the belleville washer set assembly

See method on page D2.7 See method on page D2.6
Loctite Frenetanch Loctite Frenetanch

(242) (242)
7.5 daN.m 7.5 daN.m

Loctite Rectijoint Loctite Rectijoint
(518) (518)
334D2001 Fig. 1 334D2002 Fig. 2
MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN D2.3
Exploded view Overall view
Description
1 Casing
2 Return shaft
3 Rotating seals
4 Rotating seals
5 Washers
6 Tapered bearing
7 Tapered bearing
8 Cover
9 Union
10 O-ring
11 Screw 42
12 Cover
13 Seal
14 Adjustment shim
15 Screw
16 Clutch housing
17 Belleville washer set
18 Adjustment shims
19 Plug
20 1 mm-thick back-plate
21 3.3 mm-thick back-plate
22 Friction discs
23 Stop ring
24 Splined hub
25 Piston
26 O-ring
27 Adjustment shims
28 Piston cover
29 O-ring
30 Stop ring
31 Extension shaft
32 Bearing
33 Greaser
34 Coupling sleeve
35 Spherical roller bearing
36 Rear guard
37 Front guard
43 38 Sockets
39 Screw
40 Screw
41 Drain plug
42 Intermediate shaft
334D2003 Fig. 3 43 Bellows 334D2004 Fig. 4
D2.4 MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
Housing removal
– Remove the front and rear guards.
– Disconnect the drive shaft from the front axle.
– Drain the casing.
– Disconnect the hydraulic fitting.
– Remove the housing.
Shaft removal (Fig. 3 and 4)

– Remove the covers (8) and (12).
– Extract the shaft completely.
– Extract the housing/clutch assembly through the top of the
casing
– Extract the bearings.
Note: match the bearing cones and cups.
334D2005 Fig. 5
Clutch removal
– Fit the tool P/N 8377 supported on the clutch discs (Fig. 5).
– Extract the circlip (23) (Fig. 5).
– Remove the backplates and friction discs (Fig. 3 and 4).
– Install the tool P/N 8377 supported on the piston cover (28) to
extract the circlip (30) (Fig. 6).
– Using the tools P/N 8095 and P/N 8378, extract the piston
assembly (Fig. 7).
334D2006 Fig. 6
334D2007 Fig. 7
MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN D2.5
Belleville spring assembly shimming

The shimming thickness (A) must be equivalent to a force of 1,600
daN applied to the clutch pack.
The belleville spring assembly (17) comprises a marking
specifying the dimension (C) under a load of 1,600 daN (e.g. 10.8
mm).
– Measure the thickness (D) of the piston (25) (Fig. 10) :
example 22 mm.
– Using the tool P/N 8377, pressurise the clutch pack by applying 8377
a 250 daN load. Measure the dimension (E): example 30.5 mm
(Fig. 8).
– Fit the shim P/N 8379 by inserting it in the groove under the
housing and measure (gauge P/N 1573) the dimension (F) read
between the upper face of the shim and the bottom of the housing
bore (Fig. 9): example F = 80.25 mm.
– Subtract the shim shouldering value, i.e. 10 mm.
– The dimension (F) becomes 70.25 mm. Fig. 8
334D2008
Calculation of the shim thickness (A)
(Fig. 10)
– Calculate G = C + D + E.
– Calculate Y = F – G.
– Calculate A = Y – 3
Note: 3 mm correspond to a fixed clearance value specified
by the manufacturer.
Example:
10.8 + 22 + 30.5 = 63.3
70.25 – 63.3 = 6.95
6.95 – 3 = 3.95
In our example, the shim thickness to be used is 3.95 mm.
334D2009 Fig. 9
G=C+D+E
Y = F – G. + 0
A = Y – 3 – 0,20
334D2010 Fig. 10
D2.6 MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
Piston stroke shimming Shim thickness calculation (B)

– Calculate K = H + E.
The shimming (B) restricts the piston stroke (25) in order to reduce – Calculate X = L – K.
to the minimum the compression of the belleville spring assembly – Calculate B = Y – 4.3
(17) in the declutched position.
– Measure the thickness (H) of the piston (25): Note: 4.3 mm correspond to a fixed clearance value specified
example 32 mm. by the manufacturer.
– Using the tool P/N 8377, pressurise the clutch pack by applying Example:
a 250 daN load. Measure the dimension (E): example 30.5 mm 32 + 30.5 = 62.5
(Fig. 8). 68.72 – 62.5 = 6.22
– Install the tool P/N 8379 by inserting it in the housing groove. 6.22 – 4.3 = 1.92
– Using the depth gauge P/N 1573, measure the dimension (L) In our example, the shim thickness to be used is 1.92 mm.
between the upper face of the shim and the bottom of the housing
bore (Fig. 11):
example L = 78.72 mm. Subtract the shim shouldering value, i.e.
10 mm. The dimension (L) becomes 68.72 mm.
K=H+E
X = L – K.
+0
B = X – 4.3 – 0.20
334D2011 Fig. 11
MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN D2.7
Housing installation
Clutch reassembly
– Apply the reverse removal sequence of operations.
– Fit new slightly oiled O-rings. Seal (26) on the piston (25)
and seal (29) on the cover (28) (Fig. 12).
– Comply with the friction disc and back-plate stacking.
– Compress the assemblies to easily install the circlips.
Shaft reassembly
– Apply the reverse removal sequence of operations.
– Use the tool P/N 8382 to install the bearing on the shaft.
– Always fit new rotating seals (3) and (4) on the shaft, while
oiling them slightly.
– Install the second washer (5) (Fig. 13).
– Install the bearing cup (7) with Loctite (518). 334D2012 Fig. 12
– Install the cover (8) using Loctite (518) with four bolts (11)
locked with Frenetanch. Torque tighten the bolts to 7.5
daN.m.
– Use the tool P/N 8381 to install the second bearing on the
casing.
– Using the tools P/N 8640 and P/N 8380, install, while
oiling it slightly, a new seal (13) inside the cover (12) (Fig.
14).
Beware the springs: fit them properly.
334D2013 Fig. 13
334D2014 Fig. 14
D2.8 MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
Bearing clearance adjustment

– Fit a shim thickness (14) against the bearing (6) (Fig. 17).
– Fit the cover temporarily (12). Insert the socket P/N 8643 at the
end of the torque wrench, and apply a slight preload on the bolts
(Fig. 15).
– Remove the cover (12).
Calculation of the shimming (Fig. 17)

The shimming thickness must ensure a clearance of 0.02 to 0.10
mm on tapered bearings.
Formula to use: X = B – A – 0.05
0.05 is an average shimming fixed value.
– Measure the dimension (A).
– Measure the depth (B) (bearing depth in relation to the casing
edge).
Examples: A = 6.3, B = 8.1 334D2015 Fig. 15
X = 8.1 – 6.3 – 0.05 = 1.75
In this example, the thickness of the shims (14) to be used is 1.75
mm.
Final assembly
– Install with Loctite Rectijoint (518) the bearing housing (6)
(Fig. 17).
– On the shaft (2) insert thickness shims (14) required to apply the
shimming calculated beforehand.
– Install the cover (12) using Loctite Rectijoint (519). Screw the four
attachment bolts (15) while locking with Freinetanch.
– Torque tighten the bolts to 7.5 daN.m.
– Hit the back of the housing (16) to pressurise the shims (14).
– Using a dial gauge, check and adjust the clearance from 0.02
to 0.10 mm (Fig. 16).
334D2016 Fig. 16
1573 1573
334D2017 Fig. 17
MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN D2.9
Housing installation
– Apply a layer of Loctite Rectijoint (518) on the supporting
face of the casing, while complying with the pattern specified
in Fig. 18.
– Reinstall the housing under the gearbox casing and torque
tighten the attachments bolts to 8.5 daNm.
Operation check
Engine stopped
– Install the torque multiplier tool P/N 8096 on the torque wrench
(Fig. 19).
– Apply a torque of 100 daNm.
– The shaft must not rotate.
Engine running 334D2018 Fig. 18

Declutch the housing.
The 4WD control button must be released, the
indicator off.
– Apply a torque of 5 daNm (Fig. 20): the shaft should rotate.
Final operations
– Reconnect the hydraulic fitting (8) on the cover.
– Reinstall the bellows (33), the sleeve (31) and the pin (32).
– Recouple the front axle drive shaft.
– Fill and bleed the hydraulic system.
– Check for any leaks.
– Test the housing clutching/declutching.
334D2019 Fig. 19
334D2020 Fig. 20
D2.10 MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
Clutch release control for the 4 WD housing

The electro-hydraulic control is ensured through a solenoid In case of malfunction, check the hydraulic pressure, the 4 WD
valve. The electric control button is located on the instrument solenoid valve and its electric circuit (refer to the chapters B2
panel. The solenoid valve is located on the low pressure - «Low pressure hydraulic circuits» and F - «Electricity»).
hydraulic block.
Reminder: when idle, when the tractor engine is not running, the Removal/installation
housing clutch maintains the transmission in the four wheel – Always change all seals when removing/installing the piping.
drive mode. – Change the solenoid valve seal, if removing.
When the hydraulic pressure arrives (engine running) – After any intervention on the hydraulic circuit, top up the
declutching is performed automatically, except when the levels and bleed the systems. Check the pressure: control
engaging button is enabled. pressure = 23 bar (see chapter B2 «Low pressure hydraulic
circuits»).
Note: the handbrake switch and brake pedal switch act on
the circuit.
MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN D2.11
Personal notes:
D2.12 MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
D3 – FRONT AXLE
Specifications
Make Renault
Reference A 06-2
Type Tubular, sliding and sw ivelling
Track w idths, w heel discs outside (mm) 1.300 to 1.870
Track w idths, w heel discs inside (mm) until 1.916
Turning angle 52°
Turning radius (m) 3.9
Caster angle 4°
Tilt angle 14°
Steering
Type Hydrostatic
Housing make Danfoss
Description
1 Axle body 22 Tapered bearing
2 LH axle head 23 Washer
3 RH axle head 24 Nut
4 Adjustment shims 25 Nut
5 Pin 26 Plug
6 Pin 27 Stud
7 Screw 28 Nut
8 Greaser 29 Steering rod
9 Nut + washer 30 LH extension
10 Lever 31 RH extension
11 Lever attachment 32 Rod ends
12 Seal 33 Nut
13 Bush 34 Nut
14 Washer 35 Bolt + nut
15 LH spindle 36 Steering cylinder
16 RH spindle 37 Cylinder rod
17 Wheel hub 38 Pin
18 Tapered bearing 39 Greaser
19 Seal 40 Greaser
20 Deflector 41 Nut
21 Protector 42 Nut
60 05 029 684 - 10.2003 - EN

Axle assembly
Exploded view
D3-01
334D3001 Fig. 1
MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN D3.3
Installation Wheel alignment adjustment

– Grease the taper of the bearings (18) and (22) upon instal-
lation under the roller supporting cage. – Push the cylinder onto the stop (maximum closing).
– Fill the hubs (17) with grease, as well as the cylindrical body – Set the angle to 52° by acting on the RH rod end.
of the axle heads (2) and (3) . – Then adjust the wheel in alignment by acting on the LH rod
– Torque tighten the hub nut (24) or (25) to 5 daN.m while end.
applying an alternate rotation of the hub. Loosen the nut by The maximum toe-in is 3 mm (measure taken on the edge of
90°. 18-inch rim).
Steering cylinder
When removing the cylinder, always change all the seals.
Torque tighten the nut (41) to 31 daN.m.
D3.4 MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
TOOLS
Front axle & power take-off housing tools
Front axle tools
60 05 006 530 6530 60 05 006 527 6527
– Tool for fitting bushes in 20.11 and 20.14 front axle body – Tool for installing seal on 20.11 and 20.14 front axle
60 05 006 528 6528 60 05 006 529 6529
– Tool for installing lip seal on 20.11 and 20.14 front axle – Tool for installing seal on 20.11 and 20.14 front axle body
bevel gear
60 05 006 537 6537 60 05 006 538 6538
– Tool for fitting seal on 20.19 front axle bevel gear – Tool for fitting bushes into axle body and 20.19 front axle
steering pivot
D3.6 MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
Front axle tools
60 05 006 539 6539 60 05 006 525 6525
– Tool for fitting seal into axle body and 20.19 front axle – Tool for fitting seal on 20.11 and 20.14 front axle box
steering pivot
60 05 006 531 6531 60 05 006 536 6536
– Nut wrench for 20.11 and 20.14 front axle bevel gear – Nut wrench for 20.11 and 20.19 front axle bevel gear
60 05 711 573 1573 77 01 388 008 8008
– Slide caliper/digital depth gauge – Dynamometer 0 to 40 daN
MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN D3.7
Front axle and power take-off housing tools
60 05 006 534 6534 60 05 006 535 6535
– Nut wrench for 20.11, 20.16 and 20.19 front axle – Tool for fitting seal on 20.19 front axle wheel hub
differential
77 01 388 382 8382 77 01 388 383 8383
– Bearing fitting socket – Checking tip
77 01 388 640 8640 77 01 388 643 8643
– Mandrel – Hexagonal head socket
D3.8 MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
Power take-off housing tools
77 01 388 096 8096 77 01 388 377 8377
– Torque multiplier – Compression tool
77 01 388 378 8378 77 01 388 379 8379
– Support plate – Ruler
77 01 388 380 8380 77 01 388 381 8381
– Fitting bush – Bearing fitting socket
MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN D3.9
Personal notes:
D3.10 MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
E1
HYDRAULICS
E2
LIFT - HITCH
E3
STEERING
10 - 2003 Chapter E
60 05 029 684 - 10.2003 - EN
CONTENTS
E1 – HYDRAULICS
HYDRAULIC CONTROLS ....................................................................................................................................... E1.3
SPECIFICATIONS (CIRCUIT 48 L/MIN) ................................................................................................................. E1.4
SPECIFICATIONS (CIRCUIT 60 L/MIN) ................................................................................................................. E1.5
HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT – TRACTORS WITHOUT REVERSHIFT TRANSMISSION .................................................... E1.6
HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT – TRACTORS WITH REVERSHIFT TRANSMISSION ........................................................... E1.8
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM – TRACTORS WITHOUT REVERSHIFT TRANSMISSION ............................................... E1.10
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM – TRACTORS WITH REVERSHIFT TRANSMISSION ...................................................... E1.11
HYDRAULIC COMPONENTS AND FITTINGS TIGHTENING TORQUES ............................................................... E1.12
AUXILIARY DISTRIBUTORS IN-LINE CONTROLS ............................................................................................... E1.13
AUXILIARY DISTRIBUTORS CROSS CONTROLS ............................................................................................... E1.14
DISTRIBUTORS 1, 2, 3 CONTROL AND CROSS CONTROL ADJUSTMENT ........................................................ E1.15
BRAKE VALVE .................................................................................................................................................... E1.17
BRAKE VALVE ADJUSTMENT ............................................................................................................................. E1.18
BRAKE PRESSURE ADJUSTMENT ..................................................................................................................... E1.19
AUXILIARY DISTRIBUTORS SUPPLY PLATE ..................................................................................................... E1.21
VARIOUS AUXILIARY DISTRIBUTORS UNITS .................................................................................................... E1.22
SUPPLY PLATE .................................................................................................................................................. E1.24
AUXILIARY DISTRIBUTOR .................................................................................................................................. E1.24
CLOSURE PLATE ............................................................................................................................................... E1.25
FLOW DIVIDER ................................................................................................................................................... E1.26
CHANGING THE FILTER CARTRIDGE ................................................................................................................. E1.27
CHANGING THE SUCTION STRAINER (HP A FILTER) ........................................................................................ E1.27
CHANGING THE BREATHER ............................................................................................................................... E1.28
BLEEDING THE AIR ........................................................................................................................................... E1.28
CHANGING THE PUMP ....................................................................................................................................... E1.28
TRACTORS WITHOUT REVERSHIFT TRANSMISSION ....................................................................................... E1.29
“CHECK VALUES READING” SHEET TRACTORS WITHOUT REVERSHIFT TRANSMISSION ............................... E1.29
TRACTORS WITH REVERSHIFT TRANSMISSION .............................................................................................. E1.30
“CHECK VALUES READING” SHEET TRACTORS WITH REVERSHIFT TRANSMISSION ...................................... E1.30
E2 – LIFT– HITCH
HYDRAULIC FITTINGS TIGHTENING TORQUES .................................................................................................. E2.3
ELECTRONIC CONTROLS .................................................................................................................................... E2.4
HYDRAULIC CONTROLS ....................................................................................................................................... E2.4
MAIN DISTRIBUTOR ............................................................................................................................................. E2.5
MECHANICAL LIFT - SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS OF THE DISTRIBUTOR ................................................................ E2.6
ELECTRONIC LIFT - DISTRIBUTOR ..................................................................................................................... E2.7
60 05 029 684 - 10.2003 - EN

ADDITIONAL CYLINDERS ..................................................................................................................................... E2.8
LIFT CASING ........................................................................................................................................................ E2.9
LIFT ARM AND PISTON ..................................................................................................................................... E2.10
INTERNAL CONTROLS ....................................................................................................................................... E2.12
MECHANICAL LIFT - CONTROL LEVERS ........................................................................................................... E2.15
MECHANICAL LIFT - HYDRAULIC DISTRIBUTOR ............................................................................................... E2.16
MECHANICAL LIFT ............................................................................................................................................. E2.18
ELECTRONIC LIFT ............................................................................................................................................. E2.21
EXPLODED VIEW ............................................................................................................................................... E2.23
SHEET NO. 1: NO LOWER – LINKAGE LOADED ............................................................................................... E2.25
SHEET NO. 2: NO LIFT OR SLOW LIFT ............................................................................................................ E2.26
SHEET NO. 3: LACK OF STABILITY (JERKING) ................................................................................................. E2.28
E3 – STEERING
GENERAL PRESENTATION .................................................................................................................................. E3.3
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS ....................................................................................................................................... E3.3
OSPF LS «LOAD SENSING» UNIT (REVERSHIFTGEARBOXES) ........................................................................... E3.4
PRIORITY VALVE (REVERSHIFT) ......................................................................................................................... E3.5
STEERING UNIT ................................................................................................................................................... E3.6
REVERSHIFT PRIORITY VALVE ........................................................................................................................... E3.8
STEERING UNIT REMOVAL .................................................................................................................................. E3.9
PRESSURE RESTRICTER AND SURGE-DAMPING VALVES ADJUSTMENT ........................................................ E3.11
PRESSURE RESTRICTER ................................................................................................................................... E3.12
SURGE-DAMPING VALVES ................................................................................................................................. E3.13
STEERING CYLINDER ........................................................................................................................................ E3.14
PUMP FLOW CHECK (NON REVERSHIFT TRACTORS) ...................................................................................... E3.15
PRIORITY VALVE LS SIGNAL CHECK, REVERSHIFT TRACTORS ...................................................................... E3.16
PUMP FLOW CHECK, TRACTORS WITH REVERSHIFT ...................................................................................... E3.16
WHEEL DIFFICULT TO STEER ........................................................................................................................... E3.17
SHEET NO.1 - WHEEL DIFFICULT TO STEER ................................................................................................... E3.18
ABNORMAL VIBRATION IN THE STEERING WHEEL – OSCILLATIONS IN THE STEERING
– INACCURATE STEERING - PATH CORRECTIONS ........................................................................................... E3.19
SHEET NO.2 – ABNORMAL VIBRATION IN THE WHEEL – OSCILLATIONS IN THE STEERING
– INACCURATE STEERING – PATH CORRECTION ............................................................................................ E3.20
TOOLS
HYDRAULIC TOOLS ........................................................................................................................................... E3.21
60 05 029 684 - 10.2003 - EN

E1 – HYDRAULICS
Personal notes:
E1.2 60 t05 029 684 - 10.2003 - EN

Presentation
Hydraulic controls
Lift distributors
The lift hydraulic control can be mechanical or electronic
(Electronic tracto-control TCE 9). See «Lift» chapter.
Auxiliary distributors and sockets

A Simple acting pressure socket
B Double acting pressure socket
C Double acting pressure socket
D Hydraulic socket for trailer braking
E Oil return socket
F Auxiliary distributors supply
G Flowrate regulator on 1st distributor
H Pressure restricter valve
J Outlet towards lift distributor
H C G F
Fig. 1
E1-001
J A F
60MR 334684
05 029 – 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN E1.3
Presentation
Specifications (circuit 48l/min)
WITHOUT REVERSHIFT WITH REVERSHIFT
Type of circuit Open centre

Pumps
Number 2 2
Type Gear
Location On engine
Circuit 1 Lift Steering + lift
Capacity (cm3) 22.5 22.5
Flow rate at nominal speed (l/min) 48 48
Flow rate at max. speed (l/min) 55 55
Flow rate at idle speed (l/min) 19 19
Calibration pressure (bar) 180 145 or 175*/180
Circuit 2 Steering Actuation
Capacity (cm ) 3
11 22.5
Calibration pressure (bar) 145 or 175* 20.5
Filters
Strainer – filtration threshold 160 microns
High pressure filters – filtration threshold 15 microns
Additional filter – filtration threshold — 60 microns
Clogging indicator No
Cooler Yes
Quantity of oil exportable statically in l 10 litres
Note: the low pressure circuit (utility actuation) is described in the “Gearbox” chapter.
* See § steering Variation of the pressure depending on the power.
E1.4 60 MR 334684
05 029 – 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
Presentation
Specifications (circuit 60 l/min)
WITHOUT REVERSHIFT WITH REVERSHIFT
Type of circuit Open centre

Pumps
Number 2 2
Type Gear
Location On engine
Circuit 1 Lift Steering + lift
Capacity (cm ) 3
28 28
Flow rate at idle speed (l/min) 23.5 23.5
Calibration pressure (bar) 180 145 or 175*/180
Circuit 2 Steering Actuation
Capacity (cm3) 11 22.5
Calibration pressure (bar) 145 or 175* 180
Filters
Strainer – filtration threshold 160 microns
High pressure filters – filtration threshold 15 microns
Additional filter – filtration threshold — 60 microns
Clogging indicator No
Cooler Yes
Quantity of oil exportable statically in l 10 litres
Note: the low pressure circuit (utility actuation) is described in the “Gearbox” chapter.
* See § steering Variation of the pressure depending on the power.
60MR 334684
05 029 – 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN E1.5
Presentation
Hydraulic circuit – Tractors without Revershift transmission
E1-002
Description
1 Gearbox reservoir
2 Suction filter
3 Steering circuit pump
4 Lift circuit pump
5 Steering unit and cylinder
6 High pressure filter
7 Flow divider
8 Cooler
9 Brake valve
10 Supply plate
11 Auxiliary distributor 1
13 Closing plate
14 Pressure socket (trailer brakes)
15 Pressure socket (auxiliary)
16 Main distributor (lift)
17 Lift cylinder Fig. 2
E1.6 60 MR 334684
05 029 – 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
Presentation
Hydraulic circuit – Tractors without Revershift transmission

11
12
3
1
4
7
6
9
2
10
8 4
15
9 12
6
E1-003
3
10 11
2 10
Description
1 Steering cylinder
2 Hydraulilc pumps
3 Brake valve
4 Supply plate
5 Auxiliary distributor
E1-004 13
6 Closing plate
7 Auxiliary distributor pressure socket
8 Brake valve pressure socket 14
9 TCP or TCE9 lift distributor
10 Cylinder Important: connecting a loader or other tools using the tractor’s
11 High pressure filter hydraulic system should be performed after the supply plate in order
12 Steering unit to ensure safety at all times through its pressure relief valve.
13 Flow divider
14 Pressure pickup T
15 Suction strainer Fig. 3
60 05MR
029334
684– -02.2003
10.2003– -EN
EN E1.7
Presentation
Hydraulic circuit – Tractors with Revershift transmission
12
3 1
7 9
16
6
15
11
8
14
12
10
E1-005
11
5
10
2
Description
1 Steering cylinder 3
2 Hydraulic pumps
3 Brake valve
4 Supply plate
5 Auxiliary distributor
6 Closing plate
7 Auxiliary distributor pressure socket
E1-006 13
8 Brake valve pressure socket
9 TCP or TCE9 lift distributor
10 Cylinder Important: connecting a loader or other tools using the tractor’s
11 High pressure filter hydraulic system should be performed after the supply plate in order
12 Steering unit to ensure safety at all times through its pressure relief valve.
13 Revershift unit 15
14 Priority valve
15 Suction strainer
16 Power take-off clutch control Fig. 4
E1.8 60 05MR
029334
684– -02.2003
10.2003– -EN
EN
Presentation
Hydraulic circuit – Tractors with Revershift transmission
To gearbox actuation
See «Gearbox» chapter
E1-007
Description
1 Gearbox reservoir
2 Suction filter
3 Control circuit pump
4 Steering + lift circuit pump
5 Steering unit
6 High pressure filter
7 Priority valve
8 Steering cylinder
9 Brake valve
10 Supply plate
14 Closing plate
15 Pressure socket (trailer brakes)
16 Pressure socket (auxiliary) Fig. 5
17 Main distributor (lift)
18 Lift cylinder
60MR 334684
05 029 – 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN E1.9
Presentation
Schematic diagram – Tractors without Revershift transmission
To lift
2
3
E1-008 Fig. 6
Description 5 Auxiliary distributors

1 Hydraulic pump 6 Simple/double acting knob
2 Brake valve 7 Pressure relief valve
3 Pressure socket (trailer brakes) A Auxiliary distributors outlet
4 Supply plate B Auxiliary distributors outlet
E1.10 60 MR 334684
05 029 – 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
Presentation
Schematic diagram – Tractors with Revershift transmission
To lift
Towards steering unit

See «Steering» chapter
2 3
8
LS (load detection)
E1-009 Fig. 7
Description 6 Simple/double acting knob

1 Hydraulic pump 7 Pressure restricter
2 Brake valve 8 Priority valve
3 Pressure socket (trailer brake) A Auxiliary distributors outlet
4 Supply plate B Auxiliary distributors outlet
5 Auxiliary distributors
60MR 334684
05 029 – 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN E1.11
Presentation
Hydraulic components and fittings tightening torques
To identify a fitting, proceed as follows:

Determine the inside or outside diameter in mm of the fitting to identify.
Example: outside diameter measured 14.30 mm; the equivalent fitting is 14.29, i.e. 9/16 -18
9/16 = 9/16th inch (14.29 mm) -18 = number of threads per inch.
Refer to the following table:
Outside diameter Inside diameter Type of fitting Tightening torque in daN.m

mm mm JIC Minimum Maximum
9.53 8.4 3/8 – 24 2.5 3.5

11.11 9.71 7/16 – 20 4 5
12.7 11.12 1/2 – 20 4 5
14.29 12.7 9/16 – 18 5.5 6.5
19.05 17.33 3/4 – 16 6 8
22.23 20.26 7/8 – 14 6 8
26.99 24.7 1” 1/16 – 12 8 10
30.16 27.87 1” 3/16 – 12 12 15
Measurement method
E1-010 Fig. 8
E1.12 60 MR 334684
05 029 – 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
Presentation
Auxiliary distributors in-line controls

Distributor 1 and 2 assembly
4
4
2
Description
1 Distributor 1 cable sheath stop
2 Distributor 2 cable sheath stop
3 Distributor 3 cable sheath stop 1
4 Washer and clip
5 Bracket welded onto cab RH wing
E1-011 Fig. 9
Distributor 3 assembly
E1-012 Fig. 10
60MR 334684
05 029 – 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN E1.13
Presentation
Auxiliary distributors cross controls

Auxiliary distributor
Cross control box and its

attachment bracket
E1-013 Fig. 11
Cable adjustment
Description
1 Tube retaining plate
2 Adjustment tube
3 Locknut
4 Sheath stop
5 Yoke
Or
1 2 4
Distributor side Lever side
5 3
E1-014 Fig. 12
E1.14 60 MR 334684
05 029 – 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
Presentation
Distributors 1, 2, 3 control and cross control adjustment

1 Connect the cable on the control side in the cab and
tighten sheath stop 4 for in-line control distributors.
2 Connect yoke 5 on the distributor (distributor in the
«Neutral» position).
Value at neutral
(spool in the «Neutral» position)
≅ 29 mm
E1-015 Fig. 13
3 Screw the two screws of holding plate 1 without tightening them on the auxiliary distributor.
4 Turn tube 2 to adjust the position of the lever in the cab («Neutral» position).
5 Tighten the 2 screws securing plate 1.
6 Lock nut 3.
7 Make sure all the distributor positions can be reached:
Floating – Lower – Neutral – Lift. 1 2 3
Screw
E1-037
E1-016
Fig. 14
60MR 334684
05 029 – 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN E1.15
Personal notes:
E1.16 60 MR 334684
05 029 – 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
Removal/installation of the elements
Brake valve
12 13 14 1 1a
1b 1c
11 10 9 8 6 5
E1-017 Fig. 15
Description 3 Adjustment screw 9 Ring

1 Valve body 4 Locknut 10 Guide
1a Spool 5 Seal 11 Adjustment shim
1b Seal 6 Spring 12 Spring
1c Piston 7 O-rings 13 O-ring
2 Plug 8 Sealing bush 14 Push-rod
60MR 334684
05 029 – 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN E1.17
Brake valve adjustment

(Adjust service brakes before adjusting the valve)
– Bring the piston (18) to contact the push-rod (14) by acting on the lever (21) and tightening the yoke (22).
– Give the yoke (22) an additional turn in order to apply a force on the push-rod (14).
– Lock the yoke locknut.
E1-018 Fig. 16
E1.18 60 MR 334684
05 029 – 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
Brake pressure adjustment – According to the pressure read during the checking, insert
or remove adjustment shims.
Checking
– Connect the hydraulic tester inlet to the trailer brake Note: the pressure varies from 1 bar by 1/10th shim
socket. thickness.
– Connect the tester outlet in the rear axle casing filling – Install the push-rod with appropriate shims on the valve
orifice. body.
– Open the tester valve. – Unlock the locknut (4) and untighten the bolt (3) by one
– Start the engine and run it at 1,000 rpm. revolution.
– The 2ndoperator should depress and maintain pressure – Lock the locknut.
on the brake pedals. – Check the pressure and adjust the reaction piston.
– Close the tester valve until achieving a min flow rate of
10 l/min under a pressure of 135 ± 15 bars. Adjusting the reaction piston
– Release the pressure on the brake pedals. To prevent valve vibration noise, adjust the reaction piston.
– Disconnect the tester inlet from the socket and – Check the brake pressure.
check for the absence of valve vibrations when the – Act on the bolt (3) by screwing it to achieve a slight
brakes are used. reduction in pressure.
Pressure adjustment procedure Note: do not set below 120 bar.

– Remove the push-rod to adjust the braking pressure. – Block the locknut after adjustment.
Connect the tester on the trailer pressure socket

and on the filling cap.
Fittings No. 60
05 005 739 No.60
05 001 948
E1-019 Fig. 17
60MR 334684
05 029 – 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN E1.19
Refer to the overall and exploded views to remove /install
the valve parts.
Always change all the seals when installing.
Slightly oil the seals and the sliding parts before installing
them.
Push-rod removal
– Remove the valve head and the piston.
– Extract the push-rod assembly from the valve body.
– Using a CHC 8 x 20 bolt, compress the spring (12).
– Turn the retaining ring (9) in order to bring one of its ends
opposite the radial hole of the push-rod.
– Insert a drift punch Ø 2 (slightly bevelled tip) into the push-
rod hole to remove the ring from its groove.
– Extract the guide (10), the spring (12) and the shims (11).
Push-rod Installation E1-020 Fig. 18

– Fit the shims (11) at the bottom of the push-rod, then the
spring (12) and the guide (10).
– Using a CHC 10 x 25 bolt, compress the stacking to insert
the ring (9) into the push-rod bore (14).
– Remove the tools and install the valve body assembly.
E1-021 Fig. 19
E1.20 60 MR 334684
05 029 – 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
AUXILIARY DISTRIBUTORS SUPPLY PLATE

TIGHTENING TORQUES
+2 +2
40 N.m. -2 18 N.m. -2
+1
8 N.m. -1
+1 +5
8 N.m. -1 60 N.m. -5
+10 +10
+2 110 N.m - 1 0
120 N.m. - 1 0 18 N.m. -2 +1
14 N.m -1
+5
60 N.m -5
+2
40 N.m -2
+2
40 N.m -2
+10
120 N.m. - 1 0
CAUTION:
DO NOT SWAP INTERMEDIATE DISTRIBUTORS OR
E1-022
PLATES IN THE STACKING. Fig. 20
60MR 334684
05 029 – 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN E1.21
Various auxiliary distributors units
3-position DA*
distributors
3-position SA*
distributors
4-position SA/DA
distributors
3-position SA
distributors
4-position SA/DA
distributors
4-position SA/DA
distributors
* SA = Simple Acting DA = Double Acting

E1-023 Fig. 21
E1.22 60 MR 334684
05 029 – 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
3-position SA
distributors
4-position SA/DA
distributors
4-position SA/DA
distributors
3-position SA
distributors
4-position SA/DA
distributors
4-position SA/DA
distributors
CAUTION:
DO NOT SWAP INTERMEDIATE DISTRIBUTORS OR
PLATES IN THE STACKING.
E1-024 Fig. 22
60MR 334684
05 029 – 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN E1.23
Supply plate
Description
1 1 Flow adjustment knob (0 to 45 l/mn) on
the 1st distributor
2 Pressure restricter valve (180 bar)*
A Auxiliary distributors unit supply
* Do not change the adjustments of the valve

A
E1-025
Fig. 23
Auxiliary distributor
4-position double acting Description

2 1 SA/DA knob
2 Spool locking and return to neutral
by spring
E1-026
Fig. 24
3-position double acting
2 (1 position locked)
2 (no locking)
Or
E1-027 Fig. 25
E1.24 60 MR 334684
05 029 – 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
Simple acting
2
E1-028 Fig. 26
Closing plate
E1-029 Fig. 27
2 3 2 3 2 4
Description
1 Closing plate
2 Auxiliary distributors
3 Intermediate plates
4 Supply plate (with pressure
5
5 relief)
5 Nuts
6 Washers
6 7 Tie bar
E1-030
7 6 Fig. 28
CAUTION:
WHEN DISASSEMBLING THE PARTS, MARK THEIR LOCATION IN
ORDER TO INSTALL THEM BACK IN THEIR INITIAL LOCATION
60MR 334684
05 029 – 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN E1.25
Flow divider
Tractors equipped with mechanical and Twinshift gearboxes only
Description
1 Body 4 Spring
2 Plug 5 Circlip
3 Sealing joint 6 Spool
Supply inlet Regulated flow 13.5 l/min

outlet to actuation and
lubrication
Excess output flow

Marking
Date + flow
E1-031 Fig. 29
E1.26 60 MR 334684
05 029 – 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
Changing the suction filter

Refer to the maintenance manual for change intervals.
Comply with the installation direction, arrow facing the front.
A Description
A HP filter (high pressure)
B Suction strainer
Fig. 30
E1-032
Changing the suction strainer (HP A filter)

Caution: during installation, position the seal (1) and the anti-extrusion bush (2) properly. Always bleed the air from
the circuit after changing.
E1-033 Fig. 31
60MR 334684
05 029 – 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN E1.27
Changing the breather

E1-034 Fig. 32
Bleeding the air from the system

– Do not move the steering wheel, start the engine and let
it run for one minute.
– Turn the steering wheel in one direction against its stop,
then in the other direction to the stop.
– Repeat this operation twice.
– Turn the steering wheel in one direction against its stop.
– For 30 seconds, apply an effort on the same rotation di-
rection in order to trigger the oil flow.
– Check for any leaks.
E1-035 Fig. 33
Changing the pump A

Slightly oil the seal before installation.
Bleed the hydraulic circuit after installation.
Screw A = Tightening torque 50 ± 2.5 N.m.
E1-036 Fig. 34
E1.28 60 MR 334684
05 029 – 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
Measurement points and checks
Tractors without Revershift transmission “Check values reading” sheet tractor without Revershift transmission
This sheet can be copied and filled in during each intervention on a tractor. To send it to the Renault Agriculture
Checking conditions: Aftersales Service, you must imperatively specify:
- Engine running at nominal speed
-Oil temperature at 40°C - the type of tractor: .............................................................................................
- the serial No.: .............................................................................................
- the number of hours of use: .............................................................................................
- the date of intervention: .............................................................................................
Lift pump outlet / brake valve inlet

Nominal values Values read
Flow* Pressure Flow Pressure
48 or 60 l 180 bar
Tester 60 05 005 736.
Auxiliary distributors inlet

48 or 60 l 180 bar
Tester 60 05 005 736. Steering cylinder

Nominal value Value read
Pressure Pressure
Auxiliary distributors outlet
145 bar / 175 bar*
Flow* Pressure Flow Pressure Tester 60 05 705 076 + union 60 05 005 718
(see chapter E3 for the operating pressure checking
48 or 60 l 180 bar procedure).
Tester 60 05 005 736. * 175 bar for tractor with front axle P/N 2019, 145 bar
for others
Brake valve outlet TCM or TCE lift distributor

Nominal values Values read Nominal values Values read
Flow* Pressure Flow Pressure Flow* Pressure Flow Pressure

E1-003
48 or 60 l 135 bar ± 15 48 or 60 l 180 bar
Tester 60 05 005 736 + unions 60 05 005 739 Tester 60 05 005 736.

and 60 05 001 948
* Note: the minimum flow must correspond to 80 % of the nominal flow.
60 05MR
029334
684- -02.2003
10.2003- EN
- EN E1.29
Measurement points and checks
Tractors with Revershift transmission “Check values reading” sheet tractor with Revershift transmission
This sheet can be copied and filled in during each intervention on a tractor. To send it to the Renault Agriculture
Aftersales Service, you must imperatively specify:
Checking conditions:
- Engine running at nominal speed - the type of tractor: .............................................................................................
-Oil temperature at 40°C - the serial No.: .............................................................................................
- the number of hours of operation: .............................................................................................
- the date of intervention: .............................................................................................
Auxiliary distributors inlet E1-005

Steering cylinder
48 or 60 l 180 bar
Pressure Pressure
Tester 60 05 005 736.
145 bar / 175 bar*
Tester 60 05 705 076 + union 60 05 005 718

(see chapter E3 for the operating pressure checking
procedure).
Auxiliary distributors outlet
* 175 bar for tractor with front axle P/N 2019, 145 bar
for others
Lift/steering pump outlet
48 or 60 l 180 bar
Tester 60 05 005 736.
48 or 60 l 180 bar
Tester 60 05 005 736.
"Load Sensing" signal

Brake valve outlet
Pressure Pressure
(1) 145 bar/175 bar (2)
48 or 60 l 135 bar ± 15
Tester 60 05 705 076 (see chapter E3 for the signal
Tester 60 05 005 736 + unions 60 05 005 739 TCM or TCE lift distributor Steering unit/priority valve pressure checking procedure).
and 60 05 001 948 Nominal values Values read Nominal values Values read
Flow* Pressure Flow Pressure Flow* Pressure Flow Pressure

* Note : the minimum flow must correspond to
80 % of the nominal flow. 48 or 60 l 180 bar 48 or 60 l 180 bar
Tester 60 05 005 736. Tester 60 05 005 736.
E1.30 60 05MR
029334
684- -02.2003
10.2003- EN
- EN
E2 – LIFT– HITCH
Personal notes:
E2.2 60 MR 334 684

05 029 – 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
Presentation
Hydraulic fittings tightening torques

To identify a fitting, proceed as follows:
Determine the inside or outside diameter in mm of the fitting to identify.
Example: outside diameter measured 14.30 mm; the equivalent fitting is 14.29, i.e. 9/16 -18
9/16 = 9/16th inch (14.29 mm) -18 = number of threads per inch.
Refer to the following table:
Outside diameter Inside diameter Type of fitting Tightening torque in daN.m
mm mm JIC Minimum Maximum
9.53 8.4 3/8 - 24 2.5 3.5

11.11 9.71 7/16 - 20 4 5
12.7 11.12 1/2 - 20 4 5
14.29 12.7 9/16 - 18 5.5 6.5
19.05 17.33 3/4 - 16 6 8
22.23 20.26 7/8 - 14 6 8
26.99 24.7 1" 1/16 - 12 8 10
30.16 27.87 1" 3/16 - 12 12 15
Note: for the other torque values, see “ Removal/installation”.
Measurement method
E2-001
Fig. 1
MR029
60 05 334684
- 02.2003 - EN
- 10.2003 - EN E2.3
Presentation
Hydraulic controls
The hydraulic lift control can be mechanical or electronic
(TCE9 electronic Tracto-control).
Mechanical controls
1 Position display lever
2 Draft control lever
Fig. 2
E2-002
Electronic controls
Control and checking unit (Fig. 3)
1 Memory button 4 positions

2 Position adjustment button
3 Effort check adjustment button
4 Upper stop adjustment button
5 Lower speed adjustment button
6 Transport damper enabling switch + light indicator
7 Lift movement indicator: lift or lower
8 Lift safety stop or alarm indicator
Fig. 3
E2-003
E2.4 MR029
60 05 334684
- 02.2003 - EN
- 10.2003 - EN
Presentation
Main distributor
Location
Mechanical lift (1) (Fig. 4)

1
It is located on the lift casing.
Fig. 4
E2-004
Electronic lift (2) (Fig. 5)
It is located on the lift casing.
2
Fig. 5
E2-005
MR029
60 05 334684
- 02.2003 - EN
- 10.2003 - EN E2.5
Presentation
Mechanical lift - Schematic diagrams of the distributor

Cylinder outlet
Gate valve
Surge HP supply
Reservoir
damping
return
valve
Lift valve
Mini slide
Spool
Reservoir return
Pilot Fig. 5
Flow regulator
valve
Reservoir returns Fig. 6
E2-006
Reservoir return HP supply
Cylinder outlet
Spools control
A Spool
B Pilot valve
C Flow regulator
D Lift valve
E Lowering valve
F Mini slide
Reservoir return Reservoir return Fig. 7
E2-007
E2.6 MR029
60 05 334684
- 02.2003 - EN
- 10.2003 - EN
Presentation
Electronic lift - Distributor

The hydraulic lift distributor is controlled by two proportional
solenoid valves with reactions controlled by the TCE 9 electronic
unit. The position and draft checks are performed through two
sensors.
See chapter G2 «TCE 9 electronic lift».
Captions
S = Cylinder outlet
A = Supply
R1/R2 = Reservoir returns
CA = Check valve
EV.M = Rise solenoid valve
EV.D = Lower solenoid valve
TB = Pressure balance spool
Fig. 8
E2-008
Fig. 9
E2-009
MR029
60 05 334684
- 02.2003 - EN
- 10.2003 - EN E2.7
Additional cylinders
Note: according to the type of lift, the tractors may be equipped with one or two additional cylinders.
During installation, always change the cylinder seals (no specific tools are required).
The cylinder rod is not stopped at the end of its stroke. Beware dismantling.
Description
1 LH cylinder
2 RH cylinder
3 Pin
4 External circlips
5 LH support bracket
6 LH support bracket
7 External circlips
8 Screw
9 Washers
10 Elbows
11 Left piping
12 Right piping
13 Lip seal
14 Seal
Fig. 10
E2-010
E2.8 MR029
60 05 334684
- 02.2003 - EN
- 10.2003 - EN
Lift casing
Preliminaryoperations
- Chock the rear axle.
- Remove the cab.
- Disconnect the lift rods and the top link.
- If required, disconnect the auxiliary cylinders.
- Disconnect the hydraulic piping.
- If required, disconnect the electric connections.
Removal
- Remove the casing attachment bolts.
- Fit the tool (1) No.77 01 388 781 (Fig. 13),
- Remove the casing using a hoist.
Installation
- Apply the reverse removal procedure.
- Thoroughly clean the supporting faces of the axle and lift casings. Fig. 11
- Apply a layer of Loctite 518 on the upper face of the rear axle E2-011
(Fig. 12) and assemble the lift casing while oiling the bolts, and
torque tightening them to 16 daN.m (screw dia. 12).
Some tractors (depending on their power), may be equipped
with some 16 dia. screws, these screws must be torque
tightened to 35 daN.m.
Fig. 12
E2-012
Fig. 13
E2-013
MR029
60 05 334684
- 02.2003 - EN
- 10.2003 - EN E2.9
Lift arm and piston

Changing the arm seals
- Fit the tool 77 01 388 753 to apply an effort on the arms to remove
the two circlips (78) (Fig. 14).
- Extract the arms (76) and (77), then remove the seals (72) and (75)
(Fig. 17).
- Upon installation, slightly oil the seals while ensuring you do not
swapthem.
Lift shaft and bush

- Disconnect the rod assembly (19) and the push rod (14) on the
central lift lever (56) (Fig. 15).
- Remove the pin (71) from the inside of the casing.
- Extract the shaft through the LH side.
- Extract the bushes (73) and (74) (Fig. 17).
Installation Fig. 14
- Apply the reverse removal procedure. E2-014
The position of the arms in respect to the shaft is

marked by two punches, which must be complied with.
Do not swap the bushes.
Changing the piston seal (Fig. 17)

- Remove the lift arms.
- Remove the central lever (56).
- Remove the connecting rod (60).
- Extract the piston (62).
Do not damage the piston chamber.

- Extract the bushes (63) and the seal (64).
Installation
- Grease the seal (64) and fit it on the cap 77 01 388 788 (Fig. 16). Fig. 15
- Use the cylinder liner (65) as a guide and hit until the seal (64) E2-015
reaches the Ø 91 level of the tool.
- Fit the cap 8788 on the piston (62) and slide the seal (64) to push
it into the piston groove.
- Fit the guiding bushes (63).
Always change the O-rings (61) and (66) after any removal.
Fig. 16
E2-016
E2.10 MR029
60 05 334684
- 02.2003 - EN
- 10.2003 - EN
Lift arms and piston
Tractor front
Tractor front
E2-044
Description
1 Lift casing 71 Split pin
56 Central lever 72 Left seal
57 Pin 73 Left bush
58 External circlip 74 Right bush
59 Pin 75 Right seal
60 Connecting rod 76 LH lift arm
61 O-ring 77 RH lift arm
62 Piston 78 External circlip
63 Bushes 79 Axles
64 Seal 80 Pins
65 Liner 81 Sealing bushes
66 O-ring 82 Bushes
67 Cover 83 Axles
68 Screw 84 Filling plug
E2-017
69 Washer 85 Filling tube
70 Lift shaft 86 Breather
Fig. 17
60 05MR
029334
684- -02.2003
10.2003- EN
- EN E2.11
Internal controls
Tractor front
Tractor front
Tractor front
Description
1 Lift casing 20 Washers 38 O-rings
2 Control shaft 21 Washer 39 Sealing bushes
3 O-ring 22 Pin 40 O-rings
4 External circlip 23 External circlip 41 Bearings
5 Lever 24 Cam lever 42 Spacers
6 External circlip 25 Spring 43 Nuts
7 Sealing bush 26 Roller 44 Pins
8 Control lever 27 External circlip 45 Thrust bearing
9 Pin 28 External circlip 46 Pin
10 External circlip 29 Bush 47 Needle bearings
11 Spring 29a Washer 48 External circlip
12 Bracket 30 Screw 49 Supporting plate
13 Fork 31 Lever 50 Screw
14 Connecting rod 32 Lever 51 Washer
Drain plug: 15 External circlip 33 Pin 52 Lower link
tightening torque = 3 daN.m 16 Tilt lever 34 External circlip 53 Rear axle casing
Tractor front 17 External circlip 35 Threaded rod 54 Drain plug
18 Rod 36 Nut 55 Seal
E1-018
19 Spring 37 Flexi bar 56 Central lever
Fig. 18
E2.12 60 05MR
029334
684- -02.2003
10.2003- -EN
EN
Internal controls
Removal
Refer to figure 18.
Imperatively change all seals after any removal operation.
Installation
- Apply the reverse removal sequence.
- After full installation of the parts comprised in the internal
controls, perform adjustments, refer to the chapter « Mechanical
adjustments».
Changing the flexi bar bearing seals
Removal (Fig. 18)
- Remove the pins (44) and loosen the nuts (43).
- Remove the spacers (42).
- Remove the lower links (52).
- Extract the flexi bar (37) using the extractor 77 01 388 015 Fig. 20
equipped with its slide-hammer (Fig. 19). E2-020
- Remove the bearings (41) using the extractors.
- Extract the seals (38) and (39) and (40).
Installation
- Apply the reverse removal sequence.
- Secure the bearings using a loctite 648.
- Slightly grease the seals before installation.
- After installing the parts, center the flexi bar (37) and the 1st
bearing (41) (Fig. 18) using the 3rd coupling point connecting rod
(Fig. 21), then engage the 2nd bearing.
Note: Fitting the seals between the flexi bar and the bearings
requires no specific tools. The flexi bar features a cone (A) in
order to prevent damaging the seals upon installation.
Fig. 21
E2-021
Loctite 648
Fig. 19
E2-019
MR029
60 05 334684
- 02.2003 - EN
- 10.2003 - EN E2.13
Personal notes:
E2.14 60 MR 334 684

05 029 – 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
Mechanical lift - Control levers

3
Description
1 1 Draft control
Tractor front 8 2 Position display
8 3 Handle
9 4 Position display cable
8 5 Draft control cable
3 15 5 6 Nut
6 7 Washer
8 Washer
7 9 Spring
2 10 Shoulder washer
11 Position display cable sheath stop
10 12 Draft control cable sheath stop
13 Position display lever (transmission outlet)
4 14 Draft control lever (transmission outlet)
15 Support
8
10
14
8 8 13
9 11
8
8 12 14
7
6
Tractor front
13 5
E2-022 Fig. 22
60 05MR
029334
684- -02.2003
10.2003- EN
- EN E2.15
B-B section
Mechanical lift - Hydraulic distributor
A-A section
E2-046
C-C section
E2-045
Tighteningtorques
Cover bolt (16): 8.5daN.m Spool plug (34): 3 to 4 daN.m
Lowering valve plug (20): 2.6 to 3.6 daN.m Plug (48): 2 to 3 daN.m
E2-023
Regulator plug (25): 3 to 4 daN.m Supporting plate bolt (50): 2 to 3 daN.m
Valve plug (28): 3 to 4 daN.m Lowering valve seat: 1.7daN.m
Fig. 23
E2.16 60 05MR
029334
684- -02.2003
10.2003- EN
- EN
Mechanical lift - Hydraulic distributor

Description (Fig. 23)
1 Distributor 26 Seal
2 Cover 27 Control valve
3 Adjustment screw 28 Plug
4 Nut 29 Seal
5 Adjustment screw 30 Spool
6 Nut 31 Spool spring
7 Union 32 Mini slide
8 Gate valve 33 Mini slide spring
9 O-ring 34 Plug
10 Circlip 35 Seal
11 Lift valve 36 Supporting plate
12 Spring 37 O-ring
13 O-ring 38 O-ring
14 Lowering valve assembly 39 O-ring
15 O-rings 40 Push rod
16 Cover attachment bolt 41 Mini slide needle
17 Spring 42 Spring clip
18 Spacer 43 Force control balancer
19 Seal 44 Position control balancer
20 Plug 45 Pin
21 O-ring 46 External circlip
22 O-ring 47 Washers
23 Flow regulator 48 Plug
24 Spring 49 Seal
25 Plug 50 Support plate attachments
Removal
Beware the ejection of the springs when removing the
cover and the plugs. 3
Refer to figures 22.
Installation 5
Beware to properly install the mini slide (32) in the right
direction, in order to prevent distributor malfunction.
16
Always change all seals removed.
- After full installation of the parts comprised in the
distributor, perform the adjustments, refer to chapter «
Mechanical adjustments «.
- Torque tighten the bolts (16) to 8.5 daN.m (Fig. 24).
Fig. 24
E2-024
MR029
60 05 334684
- 02.2003 - EN
- 10.2003 - EN E2.17
Mechanical lift
Position display lever adjustment
- Position the position display lever in the cab in the middle of the
sector.
- Position lever A vertically.
- Secure the cable in B position.
- Make sure the control does not restrict the lift stroke.
Fig. 25
E2-025
Force control lever adjustment

- Position the force control lever in the cab in the middle of the
sector
- Position lever C vertically.
- Secure the cable in B position.
- Make sure the stroke of lever C is not restricted by the force control
lever in the cab.
Fig. 26
E2-026
Adjustment of the exterior lift control

- Fit the exterior lift control D with the cable wound to the maximum.
- Set the position display lever to the low position.
- Secure the cable on the position display control.
- Make sure the exterior control does not restrict the lift stroke.
Fig. 27
E2-027
E2.18 MR029
60 05 334684
- 02.2003 - EN
- 10.2003 - EN
Mechanical lift
Force sensor lever adjustment
- Adjust the screw (45) in order to achieve the dimension
X = 90 mm ± 0.5 (Fig. 30).
- Adjust the screw (35) in order to achieve the dimension
Y = 53 mm ± 0.5 (Fig. 29 and 21).
Mechanical or electronic lift

Forces on the flexi bar
Figure 31:
- The effort must be between:
– 1,500 and + 3,500 daN.
Lower link bearing clearance Fig. 29

Figure 28: E2-029
- The clearance on the level of the bearings must be 1mm.
Fig. 30
E2-030
Fig. 28 Fig. 31
E2-028 E2-
031
MR029
60 05 334684
- 02.2003 - EN
- 10.2003 - EN E2.19
Mechanical lift
3
Force control and position display adjustments
Figure 32:
Mark 5 = force control adjustment bolt.
Mark 3 = position control adjustment bolt. 5
Forcecontroladjustment
The engine must be stopped. 16
- Remove the distributor.
- Loosen the nut (6) (Fig. 33).
- Adjust the bolt (5) in order to achieve the dimension 12 mm ± 0.2
(Fig. 33).
- Install the distributor on the lift casing.
Positioncontroladjustment
Run the engine at nominal speed. Fig. 32
- Wait 1/4 hour to let the oil warm up. E2-024
- Actuate the force control lever in order to achieve lowering of the
lift arms.
- Lock the force control lever in this position.
- Actuate the position control lever in order to bring the lift arms
in the lowest position.
- Unscrew the nut on bolt (3) to bring it flush with the bolt head
(Fig. 32).
- Tighten the bolt (3) to the maximum.
- Loosen the bolt (3) while actuating the position control lever in
the lift direction.
- Stop the movements when the dimension X = 250 mm (Fig. 34).
- Then perform several lift/lower cycles with the position control
lever, while maintaining the force control lever locked.
The gap between the two measurements of dimension X must not
exceed10mm.
- Lock the nut on the bolt (3) upon completion of the adjustment.
Fig. 33
E2-033
Fig. 34
E2-034
E2.20 MR029
60 05 334684
- 02.2003 - EN
- 10.2003 - EN
Electronic lift
mechanical adjustment of the sensors
Draftsensor
- Adjust the levers (19) and (20) (Fig. 36).
- Adjust the bolt (36) in order to achieve the dimension
X = 90 mm ± 0.5 (Fig. 37).
- Adjust the bolt (23) in order to achieve the dimension
Y = 49.2 mm ± 0.1.
Positionsensor
- Actuate the cam (8) (Fig. 38).
Cam installation and adjustment procedure (Fig. 35)

- Fit the cam axis in the sensor axis.
- Bring the flat face of the cam under the shaft mark, and offset it Fig. 36
by one tooth under the mark.
E2-036
- Torque tighten the bolt (A) to 2.6 daN.m ± 0.5.
Refer to the chapter G2 “ Electronic lift ” for electric checks.
Adjustment Sensor contact

Position
mark point
sensor
on the shaft
Cam flat face
Fig. 37
E2-037
Align the
cam axis on
the sensor
axis. Fig. 35 Fig. 38
E2-035 E2-038
MR029
60 05 334684
- 02.2003 - EN
- 10.2003 - EN E2.21
Electronic lift
Removal
Refer to figure 40.
Change all seals after any removal operation.
Installation 6 4
– Apply the reverse removal sequence.
– After full installation, perform the adjustments.
Location of the sensors (Fig. 39)

Mark (4): position sensor
Mark (6): effort sensor
Fig. 39
E2-039
Description
1 Lift casing 23 Threaded rod
2 Hydraulic distributor 24 Nut
3 Bolt + washers 25 Flexi bar
4 Position sensor 26 Bearings
5 Nut 27 O-rings
6 Force sensor 28 Sealing bushes
7 Nut 29 O-rings
8 Cam 30 Spacers
9 Breather hose 31 Nuts
10 Filling plug 32 Pins
11 Tubing 33 Pin
12 Lift shaft 34 Outside circlips
13 Split pin 35 Needle bearings
14 Left seal 36 Stop
15 Left bush 37 Supporting plate
16 Right bush 38 Screw
17 Right seal 39 Washer
18 Spring 40 Lower link
19 Lever 41 Rear axle casing
20 Lever 42 Drain plug
21 Pin 43 Seal
22 External circlip CA Check valve
E2.22 MR029
60 05 334684
- 02.2003 - EN
- 10.2003 - EN
Exploded view
Tractor front
Tighteningtorques:
Check valve (CA):

2.5 ± 0.5 daN.m.
Distributor solenoid valves (2) :
on block = 1.5 ± 0.3 daN.m;
on coil = 0.35 ± 0.1 daN.m;
Bolts (3): 2.5 ± 0.5 daN.m.
Tractor front Oil change plug:

tightening torque = 3 daN.m
Fig. 40
E2-040
MR029
60 05 334684
- 02.2003 - EN
- 10.2003 - EN E2.23
Diagnostic - Mechanical lift
Introduction
The following sheets concern only mechanical lift. For the TCE9 lift, refer to the chapter G2 «TCE 9 ELECTRONIC LIFT»
to use « METADIAG».
Sheet No. 1: no lower – hitch loaded

- Bleed the hydraulic circuit.
As a safety precaution, perform all checks with the engine stopped.
- Clean and inspect all mechanical joints.

- Clean the lift rods and the top link and check that the complete lift linkage is free from blockage.
- Check that no part of the implement blocks the hitch.
Beware the risk of sudden descent of the load during the intervention.
Removing the load

- The tractor must be choked and the engine stopped.
- Take any measures required (load support, slinging).
- Block the load using hydraulic jacks.
Note: the supporting surface must be stable, on solid ground (field), fit blocks under the jack.
Caution: the oil in the cylinders may spray under the load effort.
- Lower the load and remove it before commencing the repair.
E2.24 MR029
60 05 334684
- 02.2003 - EN
- 10.2003 - EN
Sheet No. 1: no lowering – hitch loaded
E2-041
MR029
60 05 334684
- 02.2003 - EN
- 10.2003 - EN E2.25
Sheet No.2: no lift or slow lift

Important: before removing the lift casing, check the flow and the pressure (see chapter E1).
As a safety precaution, perform all checks with the engine stopped.

Caution: beware of high pressure oil when disconnecting pipes.
- Clean and inspect all mechanical joints.

- Clean the lift rods and the top link and check that the complete lift linkage is free from blockage.
- Check that no part of the implement blocks the hitch.
Beware the risk of untimely lifting of the load during the repair operation.
As a safety precaution, remove the load from the hitch before performing any repairs.
- Check the level and quality of the fluid, the general sealing of the circuit.
- Bleed the hydraulic circuit.
E2.26 MR029
60 05 334684
- 02.2003 - EN
- 10.2003 - EN
Sheet No.2: no lift or slow lift
E2-042
MR029
60 05 334684
- 02.2003 - EN
- 10.2003 - EN E2.27
Personal notes:
Sheet No. 3: Lack of stability (jerking)

Note: Before any repair operation, check that the load on the hitch does not exceed the maximum lifting capacity, and drain the
hydraulic circuit.
E2-043
E2.28 60 MR 334 684

05 029 – 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
E3 – STEERING
Personal notes:
E3.2 60 MR 334 684

05 029 – 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
Presentation
General presentation
Tractors equipped with a mechanical gearbox transmission are fitted with the OSPC 100 or 125 ON steering unit - (Center circuit open
(O) with non-reaction (N)). The oil flows freely from the pump to the reservoir return when the steering is not used.
Tractors with a Revershift transmission are equipped with the OSPF 100 LS «Load Sensing» steering unit (load detection). The pump
oil does not flow through the unit when the steering is not used.
Tractor
horsepow er With Without Pressure relief Surge-damping
(in hp) Revershift Revershift Housing type* setting setting
(ECE R24)
72 X OSPF 100 LS 145 bars 225 to 245 bars
72 X OSPC 100 ON 145 bars 200 to 220 bars
100 X OSPC 125 LS 175 bars 225 to 245 bars
* Figure below unit
Principle diagrams
“OSPC ON” unit (mechanical and TWINSHIFT gearboxes)
E3-001
Description
1 Gearbox reservoir 4 High pressure filter 7 Flow divider
2 Suction filter 5 Steering unit 8 Cooler
3 Pump 6 Steering cylinder 9 Hydraulic unit
Fig. 1
MR029
60 05 334684
- 02.2003 - EN
- 10.2003 - EN E3.3
Presentation
OSPF LS «Load Sensing» unit (REVERSHIFTgearboxes)
Note: the unit is represented in the steering

supply position, LS signal pressurised.
LS signal between the

steering unit and the
priority valve
Towards brake valve

Auxiliary distributors
Lift distributors
E3-002
Description
Fig. 2
1 Gearbox reservoir 4 High pressure filter
2 Suction filter 5 Priority valve
3 Pump 6 Steering unit and cylinder
E3.4 MR029
60 05 334684
- 02.2003 - EN
- 10.2003 - EN
Presentation
Priority valve (REVERSHIFT)

It is located on the right hand side of the gearbox, behind the tank.
It provides the maximum flow required for power assisted steering
when the driver uses it. When steering is idle, the oil flows to the
trailer brake valve, the auxiliary distributor and the main lift
distributor.
E3-004b
4
Description
1 LS signal
2 2 Supply (P)
3 Brake valve (EF)
1 4 Steering unit (CF)
2 1
Steering
CF EF
Signal
LS
PP
P
E3-004 E3-004a
3 4 Supply
Fig. 4
MR029
60 05 334684
- 02.2003 - EN
- 10.2003 - EN E3.5
Steering unit
Unit
restricter
E3-005 Fig. 5
E3.6 MR029
60 05 334684
- 02.2003 - EN
- 10.2003 - EN
E3-006
Markonhousing:
P = pressure inlet
T = container return
R = on the RH side
L = on the LH side
LS = load detector
Note: to fit the column seal (6),

use tool No.5726.
Fig. 6
Description 14. Pin 26. Spring

1. Unit body 15. Distribution plate 27. Pressure restricter piston
2. Distributor sleeve 16. Splined bush 27a. Seal
3. Rotating spool 17. Splined pinion 28. Needle bolt
4. Drive shaft 17a. Splined pinion 29. Cover fitting bolt
5. Springs 18. Spacer 30. Washers
6. Dust seal 19. Cover 30a. Seals
7. Seal + ring 20. O-rings 31. Push-rod bearing
8. Needle thrust bearing 20a. O-ring 32. Ball
9. Valve plugs 21. Threaded socket 33. Push-rods
9a. Seals 22. Ball 34. Springs
10. Adjustment screw 23. Valve 35. Balls
11. Springs 24. Plug 36. O-ring
12. Valve seat 24a. Seal 37. Clip
13. Balls 25. Adjustment screw
MR029
60 05 334684
- 02.2003 - EN
- 10.2003 - EN E3.7
Revershift priority valve

Check the proper operation of the drawer, the spool and the sealing.
E3-007
Description
1. Valve body
2. Spool
3. Seal
4. Plug Tightening torque for the plugs (4) and (7):
5. Spring 5 ± 1 daN.m
6. Seal
7. LS plug
Fig. 7
E3.8 MR029
60 05 334684
- 02.2003 - EN
- 10.2003 - EN
Steering housing removal/installation
Steering housing removal

- Removal of lining under the instrument panel.
Caution: 2 screws under the air nozzles A (on the RH and LH sides).
Fig. 8
E3-008
- Remove the 4 attachment screws from the steering housing B.
- Lower the steering unit.
Fig. 9
E3-009
- Remove the filter support C with the filter and the piping D after
disconnecting it from the pump, as shown on the photo.
– After identifying them, disconnect the pipes from the steering

housing. D
Fig. 10
E3-010
MR029
60 05 334684
- 02.2003 - EN
- 10.2003 - EN E3.9
- Remove the 4 attachment screws from the steering column E in

order to lift it to remove the steering housing
It is peferable to remove the steering wheel and the control unit
under the steering wheel for easier access to the 4 screws E.
Fig. 11
E3-011
- Remove the steering housing with its support F.
Fig. 12
E3-012
E3.10 MR029
60 05 334684
- 02.2003 - EN
- 10.2003 - EN
Pressure restricter and surge-damping

valves adjustment G
– Remove the support guard from the housing (F).

– Reconnect the pipes on the steering housing.
– Re-install and reconnect the HP filter support (G).
- Pressure restricter (H),
- Surge-damping (J).
- To install the steering housing, it is recommended to install the

unit approaching the 4 attachment screws (B) without tightening E
them and to fit the steering column and then to tighten the screws
H
(B). J
Fig. 13
E3-013
MR029
60 05 334684
- 02.2003 - EN
- 10.2003 - EN E3.11
Steering housing (adjutsment)
Tester to be connected on the steering housing supply piping. 2 1

Fig. 14
E3-014
Tractor Pressure relief

horsepow er With Without setting Surge-damping
(in hp) Revershift Revershift Housing type* setting
(ECE R24) 1 2

100 X OSPC 125 LS 175 bars 225 to 245 bars
Pressure relief
(unit removed on the cab but reconnected to the system)
• Connection of the tester 60 05 005 736 to the housing supply.
• Open the tester choke valve.
• Start the engine at nominal speed.
• Increase the load loss pressure when the oil temperature reaches at least 40°.
• Actuate the unit’s rotating drawer, in one or the other direction, using a 16 hex 6-point wrench.
• While maintaining the torque, act on the adjustment screw 1 and set to achieve the pressure indicated in the above table
adding the load losses: E.g. 145 bars + load losses for a 72-cv with revershift.
• Check for the absence of leaks on the seal, and that maintaining the torque does not result in too sensitive a rotation of
the drawer (potential major leak).
E3.12 MR029
60 05 334684
- 02.2003 - EN
- 10.2003 - EN
Shock valves
- Use the injector setting pump.
- Connect the hose 60 05 006 508 onto the «L» or «R» outlet of the unit using the coupling 77 006 692 and the seal 77 00 535 249.
- Fill the pump reservoir with transmission oil.
- Actuate the pump arm and increase the valve opening pressure (pump several times rapidly, pressure rises and drops quickly when
the valve opens).
- While pumping, adjust the valve bolt to obtain: P maximum = 200 to 220 bars or 225 to 245 bars*.
- If the pressure cannot be achieved, check the condition of the spring, the ball and valve seat.
- Change the full unit if the problem persists.
* See table
Valves adjustment
Coupling 77 00 006 962

+ seal 77 00 535 249
+ hose kit 60 05 006 508
E3-015
Fig. 15
MR029
60 05 334684
- 02.2003 - EN
- 10.2003 - EN E3.13
Steering cylinder
Operating pressure = 145 bars or 175 bars.
- Use and fit the tools shown in Fig. 3.
- Increase the pressure by supplying the cylinder in A then in B.
- The operating pressure corresponds to the difference between these two pressures. It should correspond to 145 bars or 175 bars (see
table at the beginning of this chapter).
60 05 005 718 (x 2)
60 05 705 076
E3-016
Fig. 3
E3.14 MR029
60 05 334684
- 02.2003 - EN
- 10.2003 - EN
Pump flow check (non REVERSHIFT tractors)

- Connect the tester No.60 05 005 736 as shown in Fig. 17.
- Check the flow, which must be 24 l/min at nominal speed, at a pressure of 145 bars or 175 bars.
60 05 005 736
E3-017
Fig. 17
MR029
60 05 334684
- 02.2003 - EN
- 10.2003 - EN E3.15
Pump flow check, tractors with Revershift
- Connect the tester No.60 05 005 736.
- Check the flow, which must be 48 or 60 l/min at nominal speed and at operating pressure.
60 05 005 736
E3-018
Fig. 18
Priority valve LS signal check, Revershift tractors

- Connect the tester No.60 05 705 076 + the union 60 05 005 718
- Pressure should be zero when the steering is not used.
- Pressure must be equivalent to the operating pressure upon any action on the steering wheel (145 or 175 bars).
60 05 705 076
60 05 005 718
E3-019
Fig. 19
E3.16 MR029
60 05 334684
- 02.2003 - EN
- 10.2003 - EN
Diagnostic
Wheel difficult to steer

Preliminary checks
A - Mechanical checking
- Check the mechanical condition of the steering joints, spindles, cylinders.
B - Hydraulic checks
- Before any checking, bleed the hydraulic circuit.
- Beforehand, check the level and quality of the oil, the overall sealing of the circuit.
- Connect the pressure gauge to the P inlet on the steering unit.
- Set the engine rotation speed to nominal speed.
- Increase the pressure. This value corresponds to the load loss on the container return circuit.
- Connect the pressure gauge 60 05 705 076 to the supply on the two cylinder chambers.
- Turn the wheel against the stop, and measure the pressure in the supplied chamber, and also the pressure in the return chamber. The
difference of the two pressure measurements is the setting of the restricter valve.
- Perform the same operation while supplying the other chamber.
Pressure restricter valve setting: 145 bars or 175 bars.
C - Priority valve - Tractors fitted with the REVERSHIFT gearbox - OSPC LS units
- Check the sealing.
- Check the pump flow rate at the «P»inlet and at the «CF» outlet of the valve.
- Check the pressure at the valve «LS» outlet: no pressure when the steering is idle; 145 bars or 175 bars upon any action on
the steering.
- Check the proper mechanical operation of the spool (seizing or leaf spring damage), in case of defect change the valve.
MR029
60 05 334684
- 02.2003 - EN
- 10.2003 - EN E3.17
Diagnostic
Sheet No.1 - Wheel difficult to steer
Note: on tractors equipped with the REVERSHIFT gearbox, first check the priority valve and the LS signal.
E3-020
E3.18 MR029
60 05 334684
- 02.2003 - EN
- 10.2003 - EN
Diagnostic
Abnormal vibration in the steering wheel – Oscillations in the steering –

Inaccurate steering - Path corrections
Reminder: Steering units are equipped with two shock-proof valves restricting pressure when the cylinder rods kick back
suddenly.
Preliminary checks
A - Mechanical checking
- Check the mechanical condition of the steering joints, spindles, cylinders.
- Lift the front of the tractor and jack the front axle. Turn the wheels in order to sense too high play.
B - Hydraulic checks
- Before any checking, bleed the hydraulic circuit.
- Beforehand, check the level and quality of the oil, the overall sealing of the circuit.
- Check the flow rate and pressure on the steering circuit.
- Check the outside condition of the steering cylinder, and the sealing on the level of the rods.
MR029
60 05 334684
- 02.2003 - EN
- 10.2003 - EN E3.19
Diagnostic
Sheet No.2 – Abnormal vibration in the wheel – Oscillations in the steering–

Inaccurate steering – Path correction
E3-021
E3.20 MR029
60 05 334684
- 02.2003 - EN
- 10.2003 - EN
TOOLS
Hydraulic tools
Hydraulic tools
60 05 005 718 5718 60 05 005 726 5726
- Hydraulic union - Tool for installing the column seal
60 05 006 508 6508

60 05 005 736 5736 77 00 006 962 6962
77 00 535 249 5249
- Hydraulic tester - Hose
60 05 001 948 1948

60 05 705 076 5076 60 05 005 739 5739
- MANO ∆P checking kit - Pressure pick-up adapter at the brake valve outlet
E3.22 60 MR 334 684

05 029 – 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
Hydraulic tools
77 01 388 788 8788

77 01 388 015 8015
- Slide hammer - Cap
77 01 388 753 8753
- Compression clamp
60 MR 334 684
05 029 – 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN E3.23
Personal notes:
E3.24 60 MR 334 684

05 029 – 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
ELECTRICITY
Chapter F
Celtis Edition 03.2004

60 05 030 163 - 03.2004 - EN
60 05 030 163 - 03.2004 - EN
GENERAL CONTENTS
ITEM LIST ......................................................................................................................................... F0.2

WIRING AND GENERAL LISTS ........................................................................................................ F0.3
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS ACCORDING TO FUNCTIONS .................................................................. F0.5
HARNESS ROUTING AND CONNECTORS .................................................................................... F0.77
TOOLS
ELECTRICITY TOOLS ................................................................................................................... F0.175
60 05 029 684 - 10.2003 - EN

Guidance notes on using the MR - Electricity Chapter
Find the schematic diagram of the function you require.

Opposite the diagrams there is information to help you understand the circuit.
Search from a wire number.

Example: 941
Refer to the «Wiring and general lists» pages, look in the figures in brackets: the
example corresponds to the harness 9/1.
Once the connector is identified, refer to «harness routing and connectors»
chapter to identify the wire.
With the designation of the wire, refer to the corresponding function diagram or
use then the description of the connector.
Search from a connector identified through the cable run.

With the designation of the wire, refer to the corresponding function diagram or
use then the description of the connector.
Important: some schematic diagrams according to function represent the

versions with a maximum of options.
The wire marks from an option to the other or from a variant to the other
may be different.
Refer to «Harness tracking and connectors» chapter to check the
accurate validity of the wire marks depending on the options.
60 05 029 684 - 10.2003 - EN

ITEM LIST
WIRING AND GENERAL LISTS
60MR
05 334
029 -684 - 10.2003
02.2003 - EN - EN F.1
Item list
1 Rotating beacon 70 Ventilation/air conditioning switch 205 Starter safety gear engaged contact (Gearbox)
2a RH dipped light 72 Twinshift relay 206 Air filter clogging valve
2b RH headlight 79 Car radio 210 Air conditioning circuit Hp and LP pressure switch
3a LH dipped light 81 Trailer signalling socket 213 PTO oil pressure switch
3b LH headlight 82 25A power socket 220 Ranges +/- switch
4 RH side light 83 LH loudspeaker 226 Preheating coil relay
5 LH side light 84 RH loudspeaker 234 Front axle solenoid valve switch
6 Outside RH front flood light 85 Windscreen wiper timer 236 Right force sensor (TCE)
7 Outside LH front flood light 86 Cigar lighter 237 Position sensor (TCE)
8 Outside RH rear flood light 90 Motor fan 250- Recycling motor
9 Outside LH rear flood light 91 Refrigeration fan 262 Diagnostic socket
10 RH rear side light 92 Front windscreen wiper 270 Air brake solenoid valve
11 LH rear side light 94 Front PTO clutch solenoid valve 405 Air temperature sensor
12a RH plate light 95 Air conditioning compressor 406 Fuel temperature sensor
12b LH plate light 96 Front windscreen washer pump
13 Cab light - contact + light 96a Rear windscreen washer pump
21 Rear windscreen wiper 99 Lift solenoid valve (TCE)
24 Engine calculator 100 Lower solenoid valve (TCE)
25 Injection stop solenoid valve 101 Front axle solenoid valve
27 Reverser module speed sensor 102 Transmission oil pressure switch
28 Outside temperature probe 110 Relay plate and fuses
30 Battery 117 Preheating fuse (70 A)
31 Alternator 119 Air conditioning electronic thermostat
32 Starter 123 Pneumatic seat compressor motor
34 Preheating sparking plugs 125 Hydraulic twinshift solenoid valve
37 Tractor advance speed sensor 139 clutch outlet
(transmission) 140 Events counter
40 Front PTO switch 173 Horn
43 Front windscreen wiper switch 175 Relay
45 Front work light switch 182 Lift central unit (TCE)
46 Rear work light switch 184 Transmission electronic central unit (ECU).
47 Windscreen washer switch 185 Instrument Panel
49 Warning lights 186 On-board computer
52 Rotating beacon switch 187 Clutch potentiometer (ISC)
53 Rear PTO clutch switch 188 ISC reverser control (ISC)
54 540 rpm PTO selection contact 189a ISC clutch contact declutched position.
55 1000 rpm PTO selection contact 189b ISC clutch contact clutched position.
56a Lift RH external switch 191 Lift electronic unit (TCE calculator)
56b Lift LH external switch 192 Forward drive solenoid valve
57a Lift lower RH external switch 193 Reverse drive solenoid valve
57a Lift lower LH external switch 196 Power take-off safety shunt switch
60 Ignition switch 197 Accelerator control potentiometer
61 Ventilation switch 200 Engine oil pressure switch
63 Ranges +/- ISC declutching control 201 Engine water temperature thermistor
64 Rear windscreen wiper switch 202 Fuel gauge
65 Lighting switch 203 L and R brake pedal switch
66 Windscreen wiper/washer control / function selector 204 Handbrake switch
F.2 60 05 MR
029334
684- -02.2003
10.2003- -EN
EN
Wiring and general lists
34 31
3/3 3/1 J68 30 3/2
405
J16 P16 J39 Optional components
3A 117
P90 J90
2A 32 J40
226 Shunts
95
173 206 J34 31 J200 J38 P38 J225 Follow the arrow to resume the corresponding interconnection
J67 96
139
270 3/4 LED
J22
J66
3B 2B 201 J60 94
210
7a J60
94 7b 9/1
P69 J69 102
J74
9 J73
J31
1 E3E 125 J58 P69 E9A
406 200 J69
J75 J72 102
28 7 101 J57 J59
J65 J106
27
193 J56 125 J58 102
J76
83 24
J71 J64 192 J55 101 J57
202 J104
J77 P02 J01
J33 213 59
21 202 J103
J02 P01
J32 90 70 43 47 205
J12 J13 J14 J10 J15 66
J54 J54 J102 J105 J109 J110
J26 P28 J28 205
92 37 37 191 56A 57A
J35 P17 J20
110 E08
5 185 J20 52
E0A J36
J80 61 P50 P50
13 EOA J03 J21 J50 J50
60 J70 J70 P70
J79 J81 EOA 110 65 P70
J04 J07 J21 49 J107 J108
46 J79 45 P06 56B 57B
J81 J11 184 J1 J45 J45
85 J05 189a 187 J06 234
234
J63 J62 J37 203 J101
J85
J40 J08 189b J46 J46
79 J86 J09 J51 J52 J53 53 P101
JB JA 40 40
J41 175 72 237
D4 J113
188 63 63
J42 P29 J29
J78 J82 J49 J29 J85 J49
84 186 J43
J112
204 P30 J30 P29 J51
J44 100
140 82
J114
4 262 262 236
5 196 E0A J47 E0A J47
J27
E5A 86 J48 J48 J111
J84 J83 11 J61 J25 J23 54 55 J24 10
8 6 12 81 123 1 110 8a 110 8b 99 9/2
334F001a
1: Cab bottom harness / windscreen wiper / windscreen washer / instrument panel display 8a: Transmission control harness with reverser under torque «REVERSHIFT»
selection and electro-hydraulic lift (001 136 / M0A M1C) (800 864 / M8A M8I)
3/1: Front harness (engine) (300 343 / M3A M3L) 8b: Transmission control harness with mechanical reverser / hydraulic doubler
3/2: Preheating control harness (colour) and electro-hydraulic lift (800 842 / M8A M8I)
3/3: Grille harness (colour) 9/1: Control harness TCE 9 (900 941 / M9A M9D)
3/4: Air brake harness (colour) 9/2: TCE 9 harness (960 969)
5: Cab top - on-board computer harness (500 535 / M5A M5R)
7a: Transmission harness with reverser under torque «REVERSHIFT»
(701 721/M7A M7H)
7b: Transmission harness with mechanical reverser and hydraulic doubler Note: the figures indicated in brackets correspond to the marks of the wires
(701 715/M7A M7H) used according to the harness type.
60 05 MR
029334
684- -02.2003
10.2003- -EN
EN F.3
F.4 60 05 MR
029334
684- -02.2003
10.2003- -EN
EN
CONTENTS
FUSE AND RELAY PLATE.................................................................................................................................................................F.7

STARTING / CHARGING / PREHEATING CIRCUIT - MECHANICAL REVERSER........................................................................F.10
START-UP CIRCUIT (SEE MECHANICAL REVERSER) - REVERSHIFT ......................................................................................F.12
START-UP CIRCUIT (SEE MECHANICAL REVERSER) -
REVERSHIFT WITH REVERSER CONTROL TYPE ARES .............................................................................................................F14
SIDE LIGHTS - DIPPED HEADLIGHTS - HEADLIGHTS -
INSTRUMENT PANEL LIGHT - HORN ............................................................................................................................................F.16
ROTATING BEACONS.....................................................................................................................................................................F.18
FRONT WORKING LIGHTS/REAR WORKING LIGHTS .................................................................................................................F.20
STOP LIGHTS - ENGAGEMENT/ FRONT AXLE CONTROLS -
AIR BRAKE SYSTEM SOLENOID VALVE CONTROL - HAND BRAKE - THEORETICAL SPEED ................................................F.22
FLASHING LIGHTS AND WARNING LIGHTS .................................................................................................................................F.24
CIGAR LIGHTER - RADIO - CAB LIGHT AND SPOT......................................................................................................................F.26
PNEUMATIC SEAT - FR POWER TAKE OFF CONTROL...............................................................................................................F.28
FRONT WINDSCREEN WIPER/WASHER WITH FIXED STEERING COLUMN.............................................................................F.30
FRONT AND REAR WINDSCREEN WIPER/WASHER WITH ADJUSTABLE STEERING COLUMN ............................................F.32
INSTRUMENT PANEL VENTILATION .............................................................................................................................................F.34
INSTRUMENT PANEL VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING..................................................................................................F.36
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS ACCORDING INFOTRAC ON-BOARD COMPUTER..............................................................................................................................................F.38

FUEL/AIR FILTER CLOGGING/TEMPERATURE/ENGINE OIL PRESSURE INDICATOR.............................................................F.40
TO FUNCTIONS ENGINE SPEED ...............................................................................................................................................................................F.42

CONTROL PANEL DISPLAY/DIAGNOSTIC SOCKET SELECTION...............................................................................................F.44
25 A POWER SOCKET ....................................................................................................................................................................F.46
TRANSMISSION HYDRAULIC PRESSURE ....................................................................................................................................F.48
REAR PTO CONTROLS...................................................................................................................................................................F.50
TCE 9 LIFT .......................................................................................................................................................................................F.52
REVERSHIFT/DOUBLER CLUTCH AND DRIVE CONTROLS........................................................................................................F.54
REVERSHIFT CLUTCH AND DRIVE CONTROLS WITH TYPE ARES/DOUBLER CONTROLS ...................................................F.56
ENGINE MANAGEMENT .................................................................................................................................................................F.58
HYDRAULIC DOUBLER...................................................................................................................................................................F.60
60 05 030 163 - 03.2004 - EN F.5

Fuse and relay box
+AVC +AVC +AVC
+APC +APC +APC
MASSE MASSE MASSE
FM19
FM26
FM21
FM22
FM10
FM11
FM14
FM27
FM24
FM4
FM5
FM6
FM7
FM8
FM9
FA2
FM15
FM16
FM17
FM18
FM13
FM12
FM12
FA3
FM23
FM20
FM25
FM28
R6 R7 R11 R8 R10 R9 R3 R1 R2 R4 R12 R13 R14 R15
49 C 49
C3 C2 31
221
D3
D2
3 2 1
6 5 4
FA1
FM2
FM3
D1
FM 1
DIAG REH
9 11 12 2 1 4 3 10 7 5 8 6 9 12 10 6 4 1 7 5 11 8 2 3 3 6 12 1 11 9 7 5 10 8 2 4 8 10 9 7 6 5 4 3 2 11 1 12 2 1 10 12 6 4 7 3 11 5 9 8 6 10 9 12 11 2 8 1 3 5 9 4 6 2 10 12 7 5 11 8 3 1
P26 P08 P03 P04 P05 P48 P33
F.6 60 05 030 163 - 03.2004 - EN

Fuse box and relay basic version Conductor allocations
Top view Bottom view The new fuse and relay box is standardised on the basic and comfort versions.
Standard Comfort Standar

Comfort Connectors Ref
Fuses Ratin d
MINI ATO MINI ATO Ref
25 25 5 10 15 10 10
g x x Brown P48
2 4 6 8 10 12
+ APC + AVC Flashing indicators / Hazard warning x x Black P26
x x 15 FM1
FAR2
FAR1
FMR3
FMR2
FMR1
FM3
FM2
P03 lights x x Blue P04
x x Right-hand lights 10 FM2 x x Grey P05
FA2 25 R3 R7 R1 25 FA3 x x Left-hand lights 10 FM3 x x Green P03
x x Start-up 25 FA1 x Red P08
FM8 10 10 FM17 P26
x x ISO / implement electrical socket 5 FM4 x x White (spare connector) P33
FM9 10 5 FM15
R13 R6 R12 x x Rear windscreen wiper 10 FM5
FM5 10 10 FM16 x x Transmission 10 FM6
FM4 5 P33 x x Cigar lighter/Radio 10 FM7 Standar
FM25
Comfort Diodes Ref
x x Ventilation 25 FA2 d
R14 R15 FM28
FM7 10 x x Front windscreen wiper, self-parking 10 FM8 x x Start-up D1
FM26 x x Front screen wiper 10 FM9 x Recirculating (+) D2
FM27
x x Front power take-off/Seat 10 FM10 x Recirculating (-) D3
2 4 6 8 10 12 x x Dashboard 5 FM11
x x Brakelights 15 FM12
FM11 5 D1 15 FM18 P04 x x Revolving beacon 10 FM13 Standard Comfort Relays Ref
R2 x x Engine calculator 10 FM14
x x Mudguard lights R1
FM6 10 10 FM20 x x Implement electrical socket 25 FA3
x x Start-up R2
FM12 15 5 FM19 P48 x x Roof light/Radio 5 FM15
x x Ventilation R3
FM14 10 x x Front working lights 10 FM16
R4 R5 Brakelights R4
FM10 10 25 FA1 x x Rear working lights 10 FM17
x x Dipped/ road lights 15 FM18 x x Front working lights R6
FM13 10 P05
x x Dashboard 5 FM19 x x Rear working lights R7
K221 x x Engine calculator 10 FM20 x Air conditioning R8
FM1 15 F diag.
1 3 5 7 9 11
x On board computer 5 FM21 x Recirculating (+) R9
x Air conditioning/Recirculating 10 FM22 x Recirculating (-) R10
606bsm95 x Transmission calculator 10 FM23 x Shuttle reverser R11
x Lift calculator 10 FM24 x Flashing unit 221
x Diagnostic REH 5 DIAG
New fuse and relay box comfort version Standard Comfort Spare relays Ref
Standard Comfort x x Spare relays 1 R12
Top view Bottom view Spare fuses
MINI ATO MINI ATO Rating Ref x x Spare relays 2 R13
x x Spare fuses 10 FM25 x x Spare relays 3 R14
x x Spare relays 4 R15
x x Spare fuses 10 FM26
25 25
x x Spare fuses 10 FM27
5 10 15 10 10
2 4 6 8 10 12 x x Spare fuses 10 FM28
+ APC + AVC
FAR2
FAR1
FMR3
FMR2
FMR1
FM3
FM2
P03
Standard Comfort
FA2 25 R3 R7 R1 25 FA3 Spare fuses
MINI ATO MINI ATO Rating Ref
FM8 10 10 FM17 P26 x x Spare fuse 15 FMR1
10 5 FM15
FM9
R13 R6 R12 x x Spare fuse 10 FMR2
10 10
FM5 FM16
x x Spare fuse 5 FMR3
FM4 5 FM25 P33 x x Spare fuse 25 FAR1
FM21 5
R14 R10 R15 FM28 x x Spare fuse 25 FAR2
FM7 10
FM26 P08
D3 D2
FM27
R8 R9
FM22 10
FM11 5 D1 15 FM18 P04

FM24 10 10 FM23
R11 R2
FM6 10 10 FM20
FM12 15 5 FM19 P48

FM14 10 R4 R5
FM10 10 25 FA1
FM13 10 P05
K221
1 3 5 7 9 11
FM1 15 5 F diag.
606bsm93
60 05 030 163 - 03.2004 - EN F.7

Conductor allocations (cont)
Green Black Blue Brown
1 Ventilation 3rd speed relay control 1 + AVC radio/roof light 1 + AVC Signalling control 1 + AVC engine calculator
2 Right hand lights 2 + AVC electric tool socket 2 Starter control 2 + AVC transmission calculator
3 + APC cigar lighter 3 + APC radio 3 Start-up 3 Electro-hydraulic lifting diagnosis
4 Left hand lights 4 + AVC electric tool socket 4 Rear PTO shunt safety 4 —
5 + APC control EV/LV 5 + AVC front working lights 5 D+ on-board computer 5 Electro-hydraulic lifting diagnosis
6 Panel earth 6 + AVC Rear work lights 6 D+ alternator TDB 6 D+ electro-hydraulic lifting
7 + APC timer EV front 7 Front working lights controls 7 D+ alternator 7 —
8 + APC seat 8 Rear work lights controls 8 Lights relay controls 8 + APC electro-hydraulic lifting
9 + APC engine fixed stop EV front 9 + APC on-board computer/backlight 9 BDV 9 + APC front PTO controls
10 + APC accelerator potentiometer 10 Mudguard lights 10 Reverser/BDV engaged 10 + APC brake light controls
11 Ventilation 3rd speed controls 11 + APC electric tool socket 11 + APC control panel 11 + APC engine calculator
12 + APC ventilation 12 Rear screen wiper controls 12 + APC brake light 12 + APC transmission controls
Red Grey White
1 Air conditioning relay controls 1 + AVC warning controls 1 Relay contact 15

2 Recirculating controls 2 + AVC control panel 2 Relay contact 12
3 + Recirculating 3 Trailer 2 steering 3 15 relay control
4 + APC declutch contact 4 4 RM brake light controls 4 + AVC
5 Air conditioning compressor 5 Tractor steering 5 14 relay control
6 EV - non neutral controls 6 Brake light controls 6 12 relay control
7 Pressure switch 7 Trailer 1 steering 7 Relay coil 14
8 - Recirculating 8 + APC brake light controls 8 Relay coil 15
9 + APC clutch contact ISC 9 Flashing unit 9 + APC
10 + APC potentiometer ISC 10 + APC rotating beacon controls 10 13 relay control
11 + APC recirculation controls 11 Power supply to indicator unit 11 Relay contact 14
12 + APC reverser controls 12 + APC warning controls 12 Relay contact 13
F.8 60 05 030 163 - 03.2004 - EN

60 05
MR029
334684 - 10.2003
- 02.2003 - EN- EN F.9
Starting / loading / preheating circuit / mechanical reverser
324 E3D
54 55
30
302
32
RG
MOM
MON
025
024
31 B+ W D+
M
J40 B2
117
+ 1 B3
J39 70 A
A1
2
25
226 G3 337 A
NO 316 K2
K3
205 A3 338 B
BC J64
OR 34 712 P69 A 323 K1
J64
B2 335
713 D 321 A2
J69 24 336
M7D
D2
MOW
322
300
301
304
303
341
E7A HYDRAULIC MECHANICAL

B A
705
M7C
DOUBLER DOUBLER
J51 J51 J67
P02 J01 P50 A1 J2
A5 M8A
J02 P01 J50
M3J
C V R S U V 5 23 12 13 A2 A6 139
E0A
M8B
821
822
E3E
011
115
805 6 P29 010

J29
J48
003 110
1 11
111
001 002 FM20
006 FM14
007
R11
185
004 R2
D1
5
58 15 19 50
60
6
FA1 B2
1P2 1P2 1P2 1P2
B3 113 23
J41
30
B1 196 33 J35
2 7 6 3 4 10 9
Blue
059 10
J04
010
009 1
013 11
008
012
334F001
F.10 60 05
MR029
334684 - 10.2003
- 02.2003 - EN
- EN
Starting / loading / preheating circuit / mechanical reverser
Mark Item Wire 2 J64 Leading to

J41
mark
25 Injection stop solenoid valve A2 321 1 + APC engine calculator P69 D 110 J35
30 Battery A3 338 1 Injection pump J31 B 185
31 Alternator B2 335 1 Engine speed J67 A
D2 336 1 Engine speed J67 B E0A
32 Starter J04 J36
G3 341 1 Engine calculator failure P02 V
34 Preheating sparking plugs J2 M3J 1 Engine calculator ground E3E E0A 110
54 Rear PTO 540 rpm contact K1 323 1 + AVC engine calculator P69 A
55 Rear PTO 1,000 rpm contact K2 337 1 Injection pump J31 A P29
60 Ignition switch K3 316 1 Heating control 226
110 Relay plate and fuses
60
117 Preheating fuse
H G F
196
139 Engine speed sensor K J E D C B A
185 Instrument panel 55
316 341 326 333 331 338 3
196 Power take-off safety shunt switch 54
205 Gear engaged switch 337 M3J 308 336 335 321 2
226 Preheating relay 323 307 340 339 334 342 332 1
334F100M
Wire 2 J35 Leading to
K
mark
J
H
G
F
E0B
5 024 0.6 1,000 rpm PTO 55
E
6 025 0.6 540 rpm PTO 55
D
C
B
10 059 0.6 PTO 540-1,000 rpm 196
A
11 012 0.6 D+instrument panel alternator J04 6 P01
23 113 0.6 Info starting J41 B3 J01
1 2 3
J02
33 115 1 Engine calculator failure J02 V
P02
1 5 9 13 17 21 25 29 33 334F102M
009 024 106 060 104 114 115
E3E
M0T 025 059 100 116 135
J67 J64
067 066 012 057 113 120 24
136 071 027 055 054 058

4 8 12 16 20 24 28 32 36
Brown 334F310M
E0A
J48 P69
110 J69
J29
31
J51
30
226
J50 117
J39
30 J39
117
P50
226 32
334F311M
205
334F701M 334F320M
334F801M
60 05
MR029
334684 - 10.2003
- 02.2003 - EN- EN F.11
Starting circuit - Revershift
54 55
324 E3D
30
MOM
302
MON
025
024
32
31 B+ W D+
M J40 B2
B3
+
63 205
A1
MOW
184 25
M7D
337
712 P69 A 323 K1 K2
A
J1 713 321
J64
D A2
8 26 5
E7A J69 A3 338 B
J64
823
833
M7C
J49 24 335
705
B2
A5 B3
846 D2 336
322
300
301
824
304
J2
P50 B2 J42
B A
M3J
J50 A5 M8A MOZB4
J51 J67
J01 J30 5 23 12 13
B1 A6 B7
188
MOE
P01 P30 E3E
805 E0A
M8B
851
852
845
R S U V 6 9 MOY B5 139
133 B1
122 B2
137 B4
J09
J48 189a
110 Brown 130 1
003
1 11 12
002 FM20
129 2
001 FM14 J63
006 FM8
007 FM6
185
111
004
R2 D1 R11
5
58 15 19 50
60
6
FA1 B2
1P2 1P2 1P2 1P2
B3 113 23
J41
30
B1 196 J35
2 7 6 3 4 10 9 6 4 6 12
Blue Green Red
059 10
J04 J03 J08
133
137
129 1
MOE
009
013
008
334F002
F.12 60 05
MR029
334684 - 10.2003
- 02.2003 - EN
- EN
Starting circuit - Revershift
Mark Item 2 J35

Wire J64 Leading to Wire 2 J35 Leading to
mark mark 185
25 Injection stop solenoid valve A2 321 1 + APC engine calculator P69 D 1 009 0.6 Reverser engaged J04 10 J36
30 Battery A3 338 1 Injection pump J31 B 5 024 0.6 1,000 rpm PTO 55
31 Alternator B2 335 1 Engine speed J67 A 6 025 0.6 540 rpm PTO 55
D2 336 1 Engine speed J67 B 10 059 0.6 PTO 540-1,000 rpm 196
32 Starter
J2 M3J 1 Engine calculator ground E3E 23 113 0.6 Info starting J41 B3
55 Rear PTO 1,000 rpm contact K2 337 1 Injection pump J31 A 60
60 Ignition switch 1 5 9 13 17 21 25 29 33
63 Ranges +/- ISC clutch release control 009 024 106 060 104 114 115
M0T 025 059 100 116 135
K
139 Engine speed sensor
J
H
G
184 Transmission UCE 067 066 012 057 113 120
F
185 Instrument panel
E
136 071 027 055 054 058
D
188 ISC reverser control
C
B
4 8 12 16 20 24 28 32 36
A
189a ISC clutch contact disengaged
1 2 3
196 Power take-off safety shunt switch
205 Gear engaged switch K J H G F E D C B A
Brown
226 Preheating relay 316 341 326 333 331 338 3
337 M3J 308 336 335 321 2
323 307 340 339 334 342 332 1

E0B
mark P01
5 805 0.75 Gearbox engaged J50 5 J02
8 823 0.75 Neutral control J30 6 E0A
26 833 0.75 + APC SV supply J30 9 334F101M
J48 110
Black
J29
J51 J30
J01
J1 P02
184
J50
E3E
P50
25 36 J67 J64
334F800M 24 205
838 833 811 810 813 812 809 822 825 821 841 334F700M
24 837 832 836 835 815 814 840 13
M8F 830 805 826 827 823 865 820 819 839
1 12 J41
334F310M
110
mark
E0A
B1 133 0.6 + APC reverser control J08 12 J04 P69
B2 122 0.6 Neutral control P30 6 J69
110
B4 137 0.6 Not neutral control J08 6 E0A 31
B5 M0Y 0.6 Reverser control ground J42 B7 334F100M P29
White P30
1 2 3 4 5
196 30
123 121
1
A
A 55
2
B 133 122 138 137 M0Y 54

4
B
5
32
226 334F311M
60 05
MR029
334684 - 10.2003
- 02.2003 - EN- EN F.13
Starting circuit - Revershift with ARES type reverser
54 55
324 E3D
30
MOM
302
MON
025
024
32
63
31 B+ W D+
M J40 B2
B3
+ 205
A1
MOW
184 25
M7D
712 P69 A 323 K1 K2
337 A
J1 713 321
J64
D A2
8 26 5 338 B
J49 E7A J69 A3
A5 B3 A1 B5 J64
823
833
M7C
335
24
705
B2
M8D
846 D2 336
322
300
301
304
824
J2
P50 B2 A7 J42
B A
M3J
J50 A5 M8A MOZB4
J51 J67
J01 J30 5 23 12 13
188
B1 A6 B7 B3
MOE
P01 P30 E3E
805 E0A
M8B
851
852
845
MOY
R S U V 6 9 10
AV 139
138
D2
AR
D1
122 B2 N
Brown R
B5
J48 137 B4
110 B1
003 133
FM20
1 11 12 J09
002
001 FM14 189a
130 1
006 FM8
007 FM6 129 2

J63 185
111
004
R2 D1 R11 5
58 15 19 50
60
6
FA1 B2
1P2 1P2 1P2 1P2 Blue Green Red
B3 113 23
J41
30
B1 196 J35
2 7 6 3 4 10 9 6 4 6 12
059 10
J04 J03 J08
133
137
334F002ISCARES 1
F.14 60 05
MR029
334684 - 10.2003
- 02.2003 - EN
- EN
Starting circuit - Revershift with ARES type reverser
Mark Item Wire 2 2 J35

J64 Leading to Wire J35 Leading to
mark mark 185
25 Injection stop solenoid valve A2 321 1 + APC engine calculator P69 D 1 009 0.6 Reverser engaged J04 10
A3 338 1 Injection pump J31 B 5 024 0.6 1,000 rpm PTO 55 188 J09
30 Battery
31 Alternator B2 335 1 Engine speed J67 A 6 025 0.6 540 rpm PTO 55
D2 336 1 Engine speed J67 B 10 059 0.6 PTO 540-1,000 rpm 196
32 Starter
J2 M3J 1 Engine calculator ground E3E 23 113 0.6 Info starting J41 B3
55 Rear PTO 1,000 rpm contact K2 337 1 Injection pump J31 A 60
60 Ignition switch 1 5 9 13 17 21 25 29 33
63 Ranges +/- ISC clutch release control 009 024 106 060 104 114 115
M0T 025 059 100 116 135
K
139 Engine speed sensor
J
H
G
184 Transmission UCE 067 066 012 057 113 120
F
E
136 071 027 055 054 058
D
C
B
4 8 12 16 20 24 28 32 36
A
189a ISC clutch contact disengaged
1 2 3
196 Power take-off safety shunt switch
205 Gear engaged switch K J H G F E D C B A
Brown
226 Preheating relay 316 341 326 333 331 338 3
189a
337 M3J 308 336 335 321 2
J63
323 307 340 339 334 342 332 1
E0B
mark P01
5 805 0.75 Gearbox engaged J50 5 J02
8 823 0.75 Neutral control J30 6 E0A
26 833 0.75 + APC SV supply J30 9 334F101M
J48 110
Black
J29
J51 J30
J01
J1 P02
184
J50
E3E
P50
25 36 J67 J64
838 833 811 810 813 812 809 822 825 821 841 334F800M 24 205
334F700M
24 837 832 836 835 815 814 840 13
M8F 830 805 826 827 823 865 820 819 839
1 12
J41
334F310M
110
mark
E0A
B1 133 0.6 + APC reverser control J08 12 J04 P69 J69
B2 122 0.6 Neutral control P30 6 110
E0A
B3 138 0.6 + APC ISC control P30 10 31
B4 137 0.6 Not neutral control J08 6 334F100M P29
B5 M0Y 0.6 Reverser control ground J42 B7
P30
White
1 2 3 4 5 196 30
123 121 55
1
A
A
2
B 133 122 138 137 M0Y 54

4
B 32
5
226 334F311M
60 05
MR029
334684 - 10.2003
- 02.2003 - EN- EN F.15
Side lights - dipped lights - headlights - instrument panel lighting - horn
NO5 NO4 2b
3b Mark Item Wire 2 J35 Leading to
3a NO3 NO2 2a mark
2a RH dipped light
RG3
BU3 BU2 2b RH headlight 24 027 0.6 Instrument panel lighting J43 B7

RG2 3a LH dipped lights
MOQ 4 087 3b LH headlight 1 5 9 13 17 21 25 29 33
5 4 RH side lights 009 024 106 060 104 114 115

MOG 092
5 LH side lights
+AVC 10 RH rear side lights M0T 025 059 100 116 135
173 110
11 LH rear side lights 067 066 012 057 113 120
31 B+ W D+ R1 R6/R7 12a RH plate light
12b LH plate light 136 071 027 055 054 058
31 Alternator 4 8 12 16 20 24 28 32 36
BU1
RG1
NO1
NO6
BC
65 Lighting switch
+ 185 81 Trailer signalling socket
FM18
Brown
FM3 FM2
86 Cigar lighter
P90 110 Relay plate and fuses
J90 173 Horn
4 1 2 3 6 J36 J35 1 8 4 2 6 185 Instrument panel
M3B 17 20 24
M3C J04 J03
J42
MOE
091
086
092
311 Wire 2 J36 Leading to
023
027
310 mark
B5 B4
MOZ
306
17 023 0.6 D+ on-board computer J04 12
F 20 M0B 0.6 Instrument panel ground J42 B5
W X
P02 J01 MOB
J02 P01 A5 J43 Brown J90
A6 1 5 9 13 17 P90
020
021
022
019 070 064 063 062 023

E0A B7 A7 B5 B6
019
026 015 045 068

026
027 173
B3 A1 A5 A4 A2 093 031 065 056 069
086
087
J07 094
053 016 M0S M0B
095
86 4 8 12 16 20
MOO 1
J27
2A 2B
119
MOW
30 49 58 56b 56a 54s 3B

B7 A5
65
A6
J44 3A
A1 B5 B6 A7
334F330M
089
090
088
MOG A2 B4
MOQ B6
093
J40
11 10
MOH A3 B5 MOP J90
MOI A5 A6 MOJ 31 P90
MOR B7 J01
P02
094
2 1 J23
1 2
J61 J25
5 73 81
12b 12a
334F311M
334F310M2
334F003
F.16 60 05
MR029
334684 - 10.2003
- 02.2003 - EN
- EN
Side-lights - Dipped lights - Headlamps
Instrument panel lighting - Horn
J44
J43
5
J42
110
J40
J03
J04
4
P29
11
12b
J61 86
P27
J25
12a
J23
81
10
334F100M
J35
185
J36
60
J07
65
P01
J02
334F101M
60 05MR
029334
684- 02-2003
- 10.2003- EN
- EN F.17
Rotating beacons
J73
2 1
M5K
+APC
110
FM13
E5A
500
10
Grey
P28
J05
J28
2
044
52
7 5
1
J20
117
10 9
J21
49
MOV 9
MOC
E0A
334F004
F.18 60 05MR
029334
684- 02-2003
- 10.2003- EN
- EN
Rotating beacons
Mark Item
49 Warning lights switch
52 Rotating beacon switch
P73
E0A P28
110 J28
334F500M2
E0A P28 J28

49 J20
J05
110 J21
334F100M2 334F101M2
60 05MR
029334
684- 02-2003
- 10.2003- EN
- EN F.19
Front flood lights
Rear flood lights
7 6
J72 J83
2 1 2 1
M5B
M5C
503 502
J71 A7 A6
B6 B5 E5A
B3 B2 B1 A5 B4
J32
A1
A7
A6 A5 A2 A3
512
501
507
515
504
7 5 10 8 6
+AVC
J26
Black
R6 R7
506
510
509
514
513
511
505
FM17 FM16
110
Green
J03
2 086/J44
J33
B3 M5F
B5 B4
46 J79
7 5 M5G
1 E0A 45 J81
7 5
1
9 10
510 10 9 508
506 M5E
505 M5D
2 1 2 1
J74 J84
9 8
334F005
F.20 60 05MR
029334
684- 02-2003
- 10.2003- EN
- EN
Ref Item
6 Outside RH front work light
7 Outside LH front work light
8 Outside RH rear work light
9 Outside LH rear work light
45 Front work light switch
46 Rear work light switch
E5A
J81 J79
185
J03 EOA P28 J28
J04J08
J05
110 P29 P01

J02 4
196
11 8 P30
204 J72 7
86
J61 55 J27 J83
54 6
J24
J23 81 J25 9 J74
J74
J33 8
10 J32
606bsm98
J28 P28
J28
110
606bsm99
60 05 030 163 - 03.2004 - EN F.21

Brake lights - Engagement/front axle controls - Air brake system solenoid valve control - Hand brake - Theoretical speed
029
185 185
J35 J35 J36
18 18 17 31 2 19 1 +APC 12 7
MOT
069
070
104
120
100
031
12 8 17 4 5
029
234 234 P29
J29
7 5 817 203 7 5 817
1 1
J45 J45
A2
030
J42
J1
A1 819 REVERSHIFT 11
808
M8H
803
804
A1
B2 B3
184
A3 B1
028
M8B
A3 B2 B1 B3
101
103
102
118
816
816
101
103
102
118
100
124
028
030
016
A 8 23 25 3 4
J02 J50
P02 P50
343
M3L
M7C
204 J51*
A B A2
J38
708
E7A
M7A
703
704
P38 M7F A1
MA
BU
E3E
J51**
MOK
A6
1 2 1 2 3 1 2
J225 J57 J54 A5
12 10 4 6 8 12 11 10
M8A
J04 J48 J05 J04 J48

P05 P04 P48
270 101
FM12 FM10
37
J23 10 A7 J40
110 R4 B5
MOP
+APC FM10 6 3 MOR B7 A1 MOW
FM12 81
11
MOH A3
EOA
110
+AVC +APC
605bsm19
= Old fuse and relay panel J51* = Hydraulic doubler J51** = REVERSHIFT/Mechanical doubler
F.22 60 05 030 163 - 03.2004 - EN

Brake lights - Front axle engagement / control - Air brake system solenoid valve control - Handbrake - Theoretical speed

mark
10 RH rear side lights
11 LH rear side lights 2 M0T 0.6 Tractor speed ground P29 17
37 Tractor speed sensor 17 104 0.6 FR axle control P29 12 J48 E0A
18 100 0,6 FR axle stop control J42 A2
31 120 1 FR axle solenoid valve P29 8
101 Front axle solenoid valve 234
110 Relay plate and fuses J29 J45
184 Transmission UCE 1 5 9 13 17 21 25 29 33
009 024 106 060 104 114 115
203 L and R brake pedal switch J51
204 Handbrake switch M0T 025 059 100 116 135 J1 184
234 Front axle solenoid valve switch
270 Air brake solenoid valve 067 066 012 057 113 120
J50
136 071 027 055 054 058
4 8 12 16 20 24 28 32 36 P50 334F800M

mark Brown
1 070 0.6 Tractor speed. P29 5
7 031 0.6 Handbrake indicator 204 10
19 069 0.6 Tractor speed supply P29 4
J42
Brown
1 5 9 13 17
110 J40
070 064 063 062 023
015 045 068 E0A

J04
031 065 056 069
110
E0A
053 016 M0S M0B
P29
4 8 12 16 20 334F100M
11
204
J50
81 J23
P50
J35
185
10
J36
J54
J38
37 P38
203
270
J225
J57 E3E
101
334F101M2 334F700M2
334F310M2 334F340M
60 05
MR029
334684 - 10.2003
- 02.2003 - EN- EN F.23
Indicators and warning lights
+ AVC
+ APC
Mark Item
110 mark
4 4 RH side lights
Green 5 LH side lights 1 039 1.4 Left indicators control / warning J43 A2
6 MOE
MOV 10/52
10 RH rear side lights 2 042 0.6 + AVC warning control J05 1
C3 C2 C 221 49a 11 LH rear side lights 3 033 1.7 Indicators / warning supply J41 A6
J03
5 49 Warning lights switch 5 036 1.4 Right indicators / warning control J44 A2
t 65 Lighting switch 6 041 1.4 Unit supply J05 1
8 043 1.4 + APC warning ctrl J05 12
86 Cigar lighter 9 M0C 0.6 Warning light ground E0A
110 Relay plate and fuses 9 M0V 0.6 Rotatingbeaconindicatorground J20 10
31 49 2 8 5 49 9 J21
FM1
2 4 6 8
Wire 2
2
J05 Leading to 042 041 043
4
5 7 3 11 9 1 12
mark
6
Grey 039 033 036
8
6 3 1 7
1 042 0.6 + AVC warning control J21 2 1 3 5 7
J05 3 064 0.6 REM.2 steering J36 5
185
033
039
037
043 5 062 0.6 Tractor steering J36 13
T 13 062 042 7 063 0.6 REM.1 steering J36 9
034
R1 11 041 1.4 Flashing unit supply J21 6
9 063
041 12 043 1.4 + APC warning control J21 8 9 10
J36 M0C
9
R2 5 064
1
J41 M0V
0
A6 A7
J42 11 9 7 5 3 1
20 MOB B5 B4 MOZ
041 034 063 062 064 042
036
A5 043 044 100 031 104 065
J44 A2 12 10 8 6 4 2
A3 Grey
11
A1 B2 B1
9
035
097
096
7
5
032 J43
3
1
040 A3 A2
038 A1 B1 098
B4 B1 B2 099 B2
J07
65
MOQ
30 49 58 56b 56a 54s 54d L
J40 B6
MOR B7
A1 A2 A3 B5
MOW
MOC
81
3 1 EOA
4
J23
MOG
10
11
334F007
F.24 60 05
MR029
334684 - 10.2003
- 02.2003 - EN
- EN
Indicators and warning lights
185
J07
J36 J21
49
334F101M2
J44
J43
J42 5
J41
110 J40
E0A
J04
E0A
J03
4
11
86
J27
81 J23
10
334F100M
60 05MR
029334
684- 02-2003
- 10.2003- EN
- EN F.25
Cigar lighter - radio - cab light and spot
79
83 84
JA 7 4 8 6 5 4 3 JB
J76 J78
2 1 523 2 1
520
522
521
M5H
516
518
+ AVC + APC
110
Black J33
FA3 FM7 A3 B4 M5M
3
1 517
J26
3
Green
J03 A1 A2
J71
86 A3
105
J27
519
3 1
MOO
13 2
J80
E0A
1 3
M5O
M5N
E5A
334F008
F.26 60 05MR
029334
684- 02-2003
- 10.2003- EN
- EN
Cigar lighter - radio - cab light and spot
Mark Item
13 Cab light - contact + light
79 Car-radio
83 LH loudspeaker
84 RH loudspeaker
86 Cigar lighter
J76
83
J78
JA
JB 79
84
E5A
J80
13
J76 J78
J71
J33
E0A
J26
P28
110
334F500M
P28
J03
110
334F100M2
60 05MR
029334
684- 02-2003
- 10.2003- EN
- EN F.27
Pneumatic seat - Front power take off control
+ APC
94 110
FM10
J60
9 8
A B
Brown Green
185 J48 J03
M7H
711
J36
10 20
E7A
MOB
M7C
P50 J42
J50 B5 B4
11 23
045
MOZ
MOW
M8B
A2
A6 REVERSHIFT A1 J40
849 REVERSHIFT
J51
107
814
A1 B1
A5 REVERSHIFT M8A
11
MOL
P29
J29 E0A
850 REVERSHIFT
40
815
J46 2 1
7 5
1
813 J24
848 REVERSHIFT 123
334F009
F.28 60 05MR
029334
684- 02-2003
- 10.2003- EN
- EN
Pneumatic seat - Front power take off control
Mark Item
40 PTO switch
94 Front PTO clutch solenoid valve
110 Relay plate and fuses 185
123 Pneumatic seat compressor motor
185 Instrument panel J36
334F102M
J42
110 J40
E0A
J03
P29
J24
123
334F100M
E0A
110
J29
J46
40
J51
J50
P50
334F800M
60 05MR
029334
684- 02-2003
- 10.2003- EN
- EN F.29
Front windscreen wiper/washer with fixed steering column
92
1 047
4 109
M J17
3 110 96
2 MOD
M
+ APC J22
110 E0A 3 1
M3K
FM9 FM8
320
E3E
9
J03
7 108
5 046
Green
P02
J02
H
J41 B7
B6 B5
051
049
050
B3 B4 A2 B2 B1 A1
J06
P06
BU
VE
JA
GR
OR
MA
RG
BC
5 8 1 6 8 2 1 4 3
J10 J15
43 47
334F010
F.30 60 05MR
029334
684- 02-2003
- 10.2003- EN
- EN
Front windscreen wiper/washer with fixed steering column
Mark Item
43 Front windscreen wiper switch
47 Front windscreen washer switch
92 92 Front windscreen wiper
J17 96 Front windscreen washer pump
43
J10
47 P06
J15 J06
J22
96
P01
J02
334F311M
334F102M
J41
110
E0A
J03
110
334F100M
60 05MR
029334
684- 02-2003
- 10.2003- EN
- EN F.31
Front/rear windscreen wiper/washer with adjustable steering column
92 21
1 047
+ -
4 109 M
M J17 110 C1
3
L1
2 MOD
+ APC
110
J26 J77
FM9 FM8 FM5
2 3 1
12
524
Black
M5L
9
525
J03
7 108 J33
A5
5 046
Green
MOF M5M B4
B4
85
5 E0A 1
1 P28
4 J28
J11
6
2
050
049
048
052
M 96
P02
S
J22
1 3
H 051
M3K
320
J02 B4 B3 B2 B1 A1
J06
P06
E3E
LAV A 1 AF 2 66
96a
2 1 0
M
J200
1 3
B +
M3G 325
334F011
F.32 60 05MR
029334
684- 02-2003
- 10.2003- EN
- EN
Front/rear windscreen wiper/washer with adjustable steering column
Mark Item Wire 2

mark
J11 Leading to
21 Rear windscreen wiper

66 Windscreen wiper/washer control / selector 1 M0F 0.6 Timer ground J40 A2
85 Windscreen wiper timer 2 050 1 Front windscreen washer control J06 B4
3 049 1 Intermittent control J06 B3
92 Front windscreen wiper
4 109 1 Wiper motor parking position J 17 4
96 Front windscreen washer pump 5 108 1 + APC front wiper timer J03 7
96a Rear windscreen washer pump 6 048 1 FR wiper ctrl parking position J06 B2
1 2 3 4 5 6
M0F 050 049 109 108 048
J77
21
J33 1
2
3
4
5
6
J26
110
110
E0A
85
J11 J03
92
J17
334F100M 110
J06
66
334F101M
J22 J200
96
96a
P01
J02
334F311M
60 05MR
029334
684- 02-2003
- 10.2003- EN
- EN F.33
Instrument panel ventilation
M
90
J12
MOA 1 2 4 3
+ APC
110
E0B
R3
FA2
073
076
074
6 12 11 1
Green
J03
MOE
E0A
072
075
L B H M
3
2
61 1
334F012
F.34 60 05MR
029334
684- 02-2003
- 10.2003- EN
- EN
Instrument panel ventilation
K J H G F E D C B A Ref Item
316 341 326 333 331 338 3 61 Ventilation switch

90 Electric fan
337 M3J 308 344 336 335 321 2 110 Relay and fuse panel
323 307 340 339 334 342 332 1

K
J
H
G
F
E
D
C
B
A
1 2 3
604bsm28
J03 EOA
110
606bsm97
60 05 030 163 - 03.2004 - EN F.35

Instrument panel ventilation/Air conditioning
+ APC
90 110
M FM22
FA2
R3 R9 R10 R8
J12
1 2 4 3
D2 D3
MOA
6 12 11 1 2 3 8 1 11 5 7 210 31 B+ W D+
J03 J08
P P
+
E0B HP BP
M3H
073
074
083
084
085
119
250
080 N J02 317
95
076 081 X 318 A J34
082
M
MOE P02
072
J13
075
3 4 2 1
077
078
079
J42
A6 M1C
A5 REVERSHIFT
A7 M1B
A6 REVERSHIFT
1 4 5 3 6 2
B4
J14
MOZ
70
L B H M C 61
3
2 E0A
0 1
605bsm18
F.36 60 05 030 163 - 03.2004 - EN

Instrument panel ventilation / air conditioning
Mark Item Wire 2

mark
J14 Leading to
31 Alternator
61 Ventilation switch 1 M1B 0.6 Recycling indicator ground J42 A7
70 Ventilation/air conditioning switch 1 M1B 0.6 Recycling indicator ground J42 A6
2 083 0.6 Recycling control J08 2
90 Motor fan
3 082 0.6 + APC recycling control J08 11
95 Air conditioning compressor 4 M1C 0.6 Air conditioning indicator ground J42 A6
110 Relay plate and fuses 4 M1C 0.6 Air conditioning indicator ground J42 A5
119 Air conditioning electronic thermostat 5 078 0.6 Air conditioning control J13 2
210 Air conditioning circuit HP and LP pressure switch 6 077 0.6 + APC air conditioning ctrl 61 L
250 Recycling motor
Brown
250 1 M1B M1C 7

119 J14 70
J13 J12 2 083 078 8
61 3 082 077 9
90
P01
J02
334F101M2
J42
110
95
J34
J08
J03
31
334F311M 334F100M
60 05MR
029334
684- 02-2003
- 10.2003- EN
- EN F.37
INFOTRAC on-board computer
31 B+ W D+
185
+ –
J35
303
29
P02
011
J02
C
011
+ APC
110
114
J04
7
FM21
5 017
Blue
9
Black J28
J26 P28
3 4
529
B1 J32
186 B2 B3
8 530
11 531
4 535
J82 9 534
28
5 532 A
10 M5P T°
J75
2 533 M5R B
140 J33 A1
M5Q A2 B7
M5M
EOA
334F014
F.38 60 05MR
029334
684- 02-2003
- 10.2003- EN
- EN
INFOTRAC on-board computer
Mark Item
28 Outside temperature probe
E5A
31 Alternator
140 Events counter
186
186 On-board computer
J82 140
J35
28
J75 185
J33
J26 J32
P28
110 J28
334F101M
334F500M
E0A
J04 P28
J28
31
110
334F311M 334F100M2
60 05MR
029334
684- 02-2003
- 10.2003- EN
- EN F.39
Fuel gauge - air filter clogging
Temperature / engine oil pressure
202
201
24
J66 B1 D3 J1 J64 G2
B A
328
332
326
E3F
31
M7B
307
308
702
710
200 +APC
+ 110
FM11
11 2 10 24
Blue P50
305
M3I
J04 J50
206
M8C
016
802
800
319
M L K T 3 1 16
P02 J29
J02 P29
MOS
058
057
055
054
053
056
36 15 28 32 12 8 15 16
J35 J36
185
334F015
F.40 60 05MR
029334
684- 02-2003
- 10.2003- EN
- EN
Fuel gauge - air filter clogging - temperature / engine oil pressure
Mark Item
31 Alternator J35
200 Oil pressure switch
J36
201 Engine temperature thermistor
202 Fuel gauge
J04
206 Air filter clogging
110 P29
Wire 2 J36 Leading to 334F101M2

mark
8 053 0.6 Fuel level P29 3
12 016 0.6 + APC Instrument panel J04 11
15 056 0.6 Min. fuel warning P29 1
16 M0S 0.6 Fuel level ground P29 16
Brown
1 5 9 13 17
070 064 063 062 023

E0A
015 045 068
110
031 065 056 069
J29
053 016 M0S M0B
334F100M2
4 8 12 16 20

mark J50
15 057 1 Engine oil pressure J02 L
28 055 1 Engine water temperature J02 K P50
32 054 1.4 Engine water temperature warning J02 T
36 058 1 Air filter clogging J02 M
1 5 9 13 17 21 25 29 33
009 024 106 060 104 114 115 J01

334F800M
M0T 025 059 100 116 135
J66 P02
067 066 012 057 113 120
200
136 071 027 055 054 058
206
4 8 12 16 20 24 28 32 36
E3E
Brown
J64
24
202
334F310M
334F700M
60 05
MR029
334684 - 10.2003
- 02.2003 - EN- EN F.41
Engine speed
J40
A1 A7 31 B+ W D+
MOW
MOK
+
EOA
309
184
10 J1
204
820
J 1
P02 J30
J02 P30
031
014
134
J41 A1
A3 REVERSHIFT
A2
015
2
J36
185
334F016
F.42 60 05
MR029
334684 - 10.2003
- 02.2003 - EN
- EN
Engine speed
Mark Item
184 Transmission UCE
204 Handbrake switch 185
J36
mark
10 820 0.75 Engine speed J30 1
25 36
838 833 811 810 813 812 809 822 825 821 841
24 837 832 836 835 815 814 840 13
M8F 830 805 826 827 823 865 820 819 839
1 12
Black
334F101M
E0B
P01
J02
E0A
J41
110 J40
110
E0A
J30 110
J1
184
P30
204
334F800M 334F100M
60 05MR
029334
684- 02-2003
- 10.2003- EN
- EN F.43
Instrument panel display selection - diagnostic socket
ADJUSTABLE COLUMN
66
LAV A 1 AF 2
2 1 0
262
J47
9 8 5 6 4 7 3 2 1
B
M8G
854
853
861
860
842
841
839
840
FIXED COLUMN
66 A3 B5
36 12 13
J51 J1
B1 A5
184
NO
VI
M8A
15 14
P06 P06 J50
P50
J06 J06
A5 A4 A5 A4 EOA
J85 A2 B7
715
714
MOX
MOX
A3
060
060
B6
859 REVERSHIFT
862 REVERSHIFT
E0A B4 A1 B5
863
864
857
C B
J69
829
P69 832
339
340
G1 F1
J64 J29 J70
858 REVERSHIFT
24 P29 P70
9 10 3 4 5
828
845
921
920
922
+ APC
110
J48
067
066
DIAG
FM8 REH
5
13 3 7 12
Brown
J35
185 J106 3 J105 11 7
182 191
334F017
F.44 60 05MR
029334
684- 02-2003
- 10.2003- EN
- EN
Instrument panel display selection - diagnostic socket

mark
66 Fixed or adjustable column 3 921 0.75 Transport mode indicator P70 3 J35
182 Lift central unit (TCE)
1
185 Instrument panel 12 2
184 Transmission UCE 923
191 Lift electronic unit (TCE calculator) 933 906
11 3
14
262 Diagnostic socket 936 921
908 919
13 66
16 15 4
10 907 905 J06
M9C
Wire 2 J35 Leading to 918 17
mark 9 5
903
3 067 0.6 Diag. K P29 9 909
7 066 0.6 Diag. L P29 10 8 6
13 060 0.6 Instrumentpaneldisplayselector J06 A4 7
334F101M
1 5 9 13 17 21 25 29 33
009 024 106 060 104 114 115

J01
M0T 025 059 100 116 135
P02
067 066 012 057 113 120
136 071 027 055 054 058

4 8 12 16 20 24 28 32 36 E3E
J64
Brown
24
334F310M
E0A
182
J48
J47 110
Wire 2 J105 Leading to 262 J106
J85
mark P70
J70
7 922 0.75 L line P70 5
11 920 0.75 K line P70 4
14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 J1
184
935 928 909 931 924 901 923 908 907 941
M9B 932 903 906 902 938 922 918 919 900 920 904 925
J50
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
P50
P70
14
15
J70
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
J105
25
191
334F800M
334F910M
60 05
MR029
334684 - 10.2003
- 02.2003 - EN- EN F.45
25A power socket
+AVC +APC
110
FA3 FM15 FM4
2 4 11
Brown
J26
526
527
528
82 M5I
15/30 31
M5J
82
E5A
334F018
F.46 60 05
MR029
334684 - 10.2003
- 02.2003 - EN
- EN
25A power socket
Mark Item
82 25A power socket
E5A
82
J26
110
334F500M
60 05MR
029334
684- 02-2003
- 10.2003- EN
- EN F.47
Transmission hydraulic pressure
102
P
M7E
701
E7A
M7C
1 23
P50
J50
M8B
M8B
801
REVERSHIFT / HYDRAULIC
MECHANICAL DOUBLER
DOUBLER
A6 A2
J51 J51
A5 A1
M8A
M8A
REVERSHIFT EOA
D4
865 800
2
J1 9 J29
184 P29
068
18
J36
185
334F019
F.48 60 05MR
029334
684- 02-2003
- 10.2003- EN
- EN
Transmission hydraulic pressure
Mark Item
102 Transmission oil pressure switch
184 Transmission UCE
D4 LED
185
J36
334F101M
J50
P50
110
J29
J51
J1
184
J50
P50
102
334F700M2
334F800M
60 05
MR029
334684 - 10.2003
- 02.2003 - EN- EN F.49
RR PTO control
Mechanical clutch control Assisted clutch control
+APC 213 +APC

110 54 55 110 54 55
P
FM8 FM8
MOM
MOM
MON
MON
025
024
025
024
12 12
Brown Brown
706
707
J48 J48
J40 B3 J40 B3
B2 B2
REVERSHIFT
A1 6 7 A1
J50
HYDRAULIC MECHANICAL P50
HYDRAULIC 6 7
MOW
MOW
DOUBLER DOUBLER
J50 DOUBLER 12 J48
812
812
812
845
806
807
J51 A7 J51 A3 J51 A7 J51 B1
807
B4 B1 819 A5 A1
E0A E0A
806
819
7
820
J29
7 53 7
J29 J29
P29 P29
Pages 334F8 / 334F10
Pages 334F8 / 334F10

071
071
20 10 6 5 20 10 6 5
J35 J35
185 185
334F020
F.50 60 05
MR029
334684 - 10.2003
- 02.2003 - EN
- EN
RR PTO control
Mark Item
53 Rear PTO clutch switch
54 540 rpm rear PTO selection contact
55 1,000 rpm rear PTO selection contact J35
185 Instrument panel J48 110
213 PTO oil pressure switch
J29
J51
mark
5 024 0.6 1,000 rpm PTO 55 J1
6 025 0.6 540 rpm PTO 55 53
10 059 0.6 PTO 540-1,000 rpm 196 J50
20 071 0.6 Power take off engaged P29 7
P50
1 5 9 13 17 21 25 29 33 334F102M2
009 024 106 060 104 114 115
M0T 025 059 100 116 135
067 066 012 057 113 120
136 071 027 055 054 058

4 8 12 16 20 24 28 32 36 334F801M
Brown
110 J40
110
334F100M P29
55
213 54
213
334F700M2 334F701M2
60 05
MR029
334684 - 10.2003
- 02.2003 - EN- EN F.51
TCE 9 lift
57b 56b 57a 56a
99 100 236 237
J111 J112 J114 J113

2 1 2 1 1 3 2 1 3 2
J108 J107 J110 J109
966
965
964
963
962
960
961
969
967
968
B A B A B A B A
31 B+ W D+
P101
J101
917
913
916
911
914
912
915
910
10 9 6 5 3 1 2 14 12 13
+ – 924
939
934
940
937
930
927
931
929
926
17 19
J105
303
900
10
C 901
20
P02 B3 B7 A7 A3 J104 A6 A2
A7 A3 A6 A2 A1 A5 B2
011
J02 A1 925 13
J102 B2 A3 B3 A5 901 15
B1 936 B6
B3
M9D
A2 A1 J103 B4 B7 B6 B5 B1 B2 B5 B1 932 2
011
935 14
938
E9A
M9C
6
M9B
1
+ APC
905
110 904
12
933
7
Blue 11
4 J106 15
12 J105
FM24
J04 14
919
9
918
9 8
8 6
906
Brown 2 4
191
J51 J106
J48 182
B4 903
6 3
907
10 24
M8A
A5 908
13 22
923
1 21
EOA
P70 J106 7
909
16
3
M8I 9 M9A
Refer to Revershift 858 diagnostic plug / 828 3 921
Refer to Revershift 859 diagnostic plug / 829 4 920 11
Refer to Revershift 862 diagnostic plug / 832 5 922 7
855 Revershift / 825 1 902 5
856 Revershift / 826 2 941 25

J70
334F021
F.52 60 05
MR029
334684 - 10.2003
- 02.2003 - EN
- EN
TCE 9 lift
Mark Item Wire 2 J106 Leading to 182

mark
31 Alternator
56a Lift RH external switch 1 923 0.75 Transport mode control J105 21
56b Lift LH external switch 2 906 0.75 Mixed J105 4
J106
57a Lift lower RH external switch 3 921 0.75 Transport mode indicator P70 3 P70
57b Lift lower LH external switch 4 905 0.75 + VREF (9.5 V) J102 A2 J107 J70
J102 J104
6 903 0.75 + VREF (1.6 V) J105 3
99 Lift solenoid valve (TCE) J103
7 909 0.75 Depth setting J105 16
100 Lower solenoid valve (TCE) 56b J108
9 918 0.75 Selector J105 8
110 Relay plate and fuses 10 907 0.75 Lower speed J105 24
182 Lift central unit (TCE) 11 936 0.75 Lower leds control J104 B6
57b
191 Lift electronic unit (TCE calculator) 12 933 0.75 Lift leds control J104 B2
13 908 0.75 Upper stop J105 22 J101
236 Right force sensor (TCE)
237 Position sensor (TCE) 14 919 0.75 Diagnostic indicator J105 9
P101
15 M9C 0.75 EHL ctrl box ground J103 B6
P70
1 J70
12 2
Wire 2 923
J105 Leading to 11
933 906
3 J110 J105
mark 936
14
908 919 921 J109
13 191
1 M9B 0.75 EHL calculator ground J103 B5 57a
16 15 4
2 932 0.75 Rise valve control J104 B1 10 907 905 56a
3 903 0.75 + VREF (1.6 V) J106 6 M9C
334F910M
4 906 0.75 Mixed J106 2 918 17
5 902 0.75 D+ alternator P70 1 9 5
6 938 0.75 Valves return J103 B1 903
7 922 0.75 L line P70 5 909
8 6
8 918 0.75 Selector J106 9 7
9 919 0.75 Diagnostic indicator J106 14 J101
10 900 0.75 Lift control J103 A1
11 920 0.75 K line P70 4 P101
12 904 0.75 + VREF (9,5 V) J102 A1
13 925 0.75 + VREF sensors J104 A1
14 935 0.75 Lower valve control J104 B5 237
15 928 0.75 – VREF sensors J104 A5 J113
16 909 0.75 Depth setting J106 7
17 931 0.75 Draft signal J101 2
19 924 0.75 Position signal J101 13 J114
20 901 0.75 Lower control J103 A5 236
21 923 0.75 Transport mode control J106 1 J111
99
22 908 0.75 Upper stop J106 13 J112
24 907 0.75 Lower speed J106 10 100
25 941 0.75 + APC electro-hydraulic lift P70 2
334F920M
14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
935 928 909 931 924 901 923 908 907 941
M9B 932 903 906 902 938 922 918 919 900 920 904 925
J04
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 J48
110 110
31
14
15
16
17
18
19
J51
20
21
22
23
24
25
334F311M 334F100M 334F801M
60 05
MR029
334684 - 10.2003
- 02.2003 - EN- EN F.53
Revershift/doubler clutch and drive control
+APC +AVC
110
185
Pages
334F10 / 334F12 FM8 FM23
J35
4 6 9 12 10 12 2
16 34 30
Red Brown
189a J08 J48
2 129
837
1 130
136
135
116
J63
J51 B1
189b P29
A5 B6 M8F
J29
A2 838
2 128 13
M8A
3 127
J86 B2 A6
822
J42
B4 MOZ
25 1 24 J1 32
P50
A7 B7 192
137
28 810 16 716 A
EOA
133 811 17 717 B
J55
27
132
MOY
M1A
135 193
J1 J1 812 18 718 A
30
2 821 184
J30 34
19 719 J56
29 813 B
136 3 825 33
130 9 833
26
187
127 8 832
1 J62 A 18 27
125 814 20 720 1
3 C 7 830 4 14
815 2 J59
2 B 123 826 15 21 721
4
6
121 5 827 7
8 10 17 16 J1 31
125
809 9 709 1
M8B
M8B 23 M7C M7G 2
J58
846
E7A
823 J50
836
835
6
63 309
122 824 A5
J49
A2 31 B+ W D+
1 820 A4
B5 B4 B1 A2 A4 B2 P30
J09
B3 + –
J41
P02
134 A3 A1 014 J
J02
015
A2
Page 334F42
188
334F022
F.54 60 05
MR029
334684 - 10.2003
- 02.2003 - EN
- EN
Revershift/doubler clutch and drive control

mark
J35
31 Alternator A M1A 0,6 ISC potententiometer ground J42 A7 27
63 Ranges +/- ISC clutch release control B 132 0,6 + APC ISC potententiometer J08 10 185 J59
110 Relay plate and fuses C 125 0,6 Potentiometer cursor P30 7
184 Lift central unit (TCE) J09
185 Instrument panel 188
187 ISC clutch potentiometer C B A
125 132 M1A C
189a ISC clutch contact disengaged B
A
189b ISC clutch contact engaged
192 Forward drive solenoid valve
193 Reverse drive solenoid valve
Wire 2 J1 Leading to Wire 2 J09 Leading to

mark mark
1 M8F 1.5 Drivetronic ground J51 B6 A2 123 0.6 Forward drive control P30 4
4 830 0.75 Clutch poten. cursor J30 7 A4 121 0.6 Reverse drive control P30 5
6 826 0.75 Forward drive control J30 4 B1 133 0.6 + APC reverter control J08 12
B2 122 0.6 Neutral control P30 6 187
7 827 0.75 Reverse drive control J30 5 J62
8 823 0.75 Neutral control J30 6 B4 137 0.6 Not neutral control J08 6
10 820 0.75 Engine speed J30 1 B5 M0Y 0.6 Reverser control ground J42 B7
J63
14 814 0.75 ISC module speed J50 20
J55
15 815 0.75 ISC module speed J50 21 1 2 3 4 5 189a 189b 192
16 835 0.75 + ranges control J49 A2
A 123 121
17 836 0.75 – ranges control J49 A4 J56
18 832 0.75 Clutched position J30 8 P01 193
B 133 122 138 137 M0Y
24 837 1.5 + AVC Drivetronic J48 2 J02 J58
25 838 1.5 + AVC Drivetronic J51 A2 J86 125
26 833 0.75 + APC SV supply J30 9 White
27 811 0.75 Forward drive SV return J50 17
334F101M
28 810 0.75 Forward solenoid valve J50 16
1
29 813 0.75 Reverse drive SV return J50 19 A

2
334F700M
30 812 0.75 Reverse solenoid valve J50 18
4
31 809 0.75 Hydraulic doubler SV J50 9 B

5
32 822 0.75 Hydraulic doubler indicator J29 13

33 825 0.75 Buzzer control J30 3
34 821 0.75 Drivetronic failure J30 2
63
25 36
838 833 811 810 813 812 809 822 825 821 841
24 837 832 836 835 815 814 840 13
J49
M8F 830 805 826 827 823 865 820 819 839
J42 J48 110
1 12
110 J41 J29
Black
J08
J30
J51
J1
184
P29
J50
P30
P50
334F800M
334F100M
60 05
MR029
334684 - 10.2003
- 02.2003 - EN- EN F.55
Revershift/doubler clutch and drive control with ARES type control
+APC +AVC
110
185
Pages
334F10 / 334F12 FM8 FM23
J35
4 6 9 12 10 12 2
16 34 30
189a J48
J08
2 129
837
1 130
136
135
116
J63
J51 B1
189b P29
A5 B6 M8F
J29
A2 838
2 128 13
M8A
3 127
J86 B2 A6 A7
822
J42
B4 MOZ
B7 MOY
25 1 24 J1 32
A7
P50
137 192
28 810 16 716 A
EOA
133 811 17 717 B
J55
27
132
M1A
135 193
J1 J1 812 18 718 A
30
2 821 184
J30 34
19 719 J56
29 813 B
136 3 825 33
130 9 833
26
187
127 8 832
1 J62 A 18 27
125 814 20 720 1
3 C 7 830 4 14
815 2 J59
2 B 123 4 826 15 21 721
6
121 5 827 7
10 8 17 16 J1 31
125
809 9 709 1
M8B
M8B 23 M7C M7G 2
J58
846
835
836
A2 E7A
1 820 J49
188 - + J50
B3 138 10 828 A4 309
A2 B3 63 31 B+ W D+
AV
A4 823 A1
D2 6
Page 334F42
AR B2 122 824 A5
015
D1 P30 + –
N
M8D B5
R J41 A2
P02
B5 134 A3 A1 014 J
B4 J02
B1
J09
334F022ICSares
F.56 60 05
MR029
334684 - 10.2003
- 02.2003 - EN
- EN
ARES type revershift/doubler clutch and drive control

mark
J35
31 Alternator A M1A 0.6 ISC potententiometer ground J42 A7 27
63 Ranges +/- ISC clutch release control B 132 0.6 + APC ISC potententiometer J08 10 185 J59
110 Relay plate and fuses C 125 0.6 Potentiometer cursor P30 7
184 Lift central unit (TCE) J09
188
187 ISC clutch potentiometer C B A
188 ISC reverter control
125 132 M1A C
189a ISC clutch contact disengaged B
A
189b ISC clutch contact engaged
193 Reverse drive solenoid valve
Wire 2 J1 Leading to Wire 2 J09 Leading to

mark mark
1 M8F 1.5 Drivetronic ground J51 B6 A2 123 0.6 Forward drive control P30 4
4 830 0.75 Clutch poten. cursor J30 7 A4 121 0.6 Reverse drive control P30 5
6 826 0.75 Forward drive control J30 4 B1 133 0.6 + APC reverter control J08 12
187
7 827 0.75 Reverse drive control J30 5 B2 122 0.6 Neutral control P30 6 J62
8 823 0.75 Neutral control J30 6 B3 138 0.6 + APC ISC control P30 10
10 820 0.75 Engine speed J30 1 B4 137 0.6 Not neutral control J08 6
J63
14 814 0.75 ISC module speed J50 20 B5 M0Y 0.6 Reverser control ground J42 B7
J55
15 815 0.75 ISC module speed J50 21 189a 192
16 835 0.75 + ranges control J49 A2 1 2 3 4 5 189b
17 836 0.75 – ranges control J49 A4 J56
A 123 121 P01 193
18 832 0.75 Clutched position J30 8
24 837 1.5 + AVC Drivetronic J48 2 B 133 122 138 137 M0Y J02 J58
25 838 1.5 + AVC Drivetronic J51 A2 J86 125
26 833 0.75 + APC SV supply J30 9
27 811 0.75 Forward drive SV return J50 17 White
334F101M
28 810 0.75 Forward solenoid valve J50 16
29 813 0.75 Reverse drive SV return J50 19 334F700M
1
A
2
30 812 0.75 Reverse solenoid valve J50 18

31 809 0.75 Hydraulic doubler SV J50 9
4
B
5

63
25 36
838 833 811 810 813 812 809 822 825 821 841
24 837 832 836 835 815 814 840 13
J49
M8F 830 805 826 827 823 865 820 819 839
J42 J48 110
1 12
110 J41 J29
Black
J08 J30
J51
J1
184
P29
J50
P30 P50
334F800M
334F100M
60 05
MR029
334684 - 10.2003
- 02.2003 - EN- EN F.57
Engine management
185
+AVC +APC 197
110
FM20 FM14 1 3 2
J37
A C B J35 J36
1 11 10
Brown Green 9 33 2 2 19 1
J48
015
J03
061
018
005
MOT
069
070
115
106
J41 A2
851 REVERSHIFT
852 REVERSHIFT
A3
REVERSHIFT
A1
014
17 4 5
821
822
J02 P29
P02 J29
819 REVERSHIFT
W U R V J
405
327
342
341
331
B 330
12 13 J68
A 334
J50
M8H
803
804
P50 E3F
309
406
B 329
328
J65 25 3 4
A 333 J50
31 B+ W D+ P50
Page
334F40
M7A
703
704
+ –
332
308
307
326
3 1 2
J54
D1 C3 B1 G2 J1 D3 B3 C1 G3
J64
316
Page K3
334F10
25
337 A
K2 37
J64 A3 338 B
P69
713 D 321 A2 24 J64
139
712 A 323
K1 B2 335 A
339 F1 J67
336 B
D2
Page 340 G1
J69 334F44
M3J
J2 E3E
334F023
F.58 60 05
MR029
334684 - 10.2003
- 02.2003 - EN
- EN
Engine management

mark
24 Engine calculator J35
25 Injection stop solenoid valve A2 321 1 + APC engine calculator P69 D
185
31 Alternator A3 338 1 Injection pump J31 B
B1 332 1 Engine water temperature J66 A J48 110
37 Tractor drive speed sensor
110 Relay plate and fuses J36
B3 331 1 Accelerator potent. cursor P02 U
139 Engine speed sensor C1 342 1 Engine change curve P02 R
185 Instrument panel C3 333 1 Fuel temperature (Ref-) J65 A
197 Accelerator control potentiometer D1 334 1 Air temperature J68 A
405 Air temperature sensor D2 336 1 Engine speed J67 B
406 Fuel temperature sensor D3 326 1 Probes (Ref-) E3F
F1 339 1 CAN L P69 B
G1 340 1 CAN H P69 C
G2 308 Engine water temp. warning P02 T
Wire 2 G3 341 1 Engine calculator failure P02 V J50
J35 Leading to
mark J1 307 1 Engine water temperature P02 K P50
J2 M3J 1 Engine calculator ground E3E
2 M0T 0.6 Tractor speed ground P29 17 K1 323 1 + AVC engine calculator P69 A 334F101M2
9 106 1 Engine curve change J02 R K2 337 1 Injection pump J31 A
33 115 1 Engine calculator failure J02 V K3 316 1 Heating control 226 334F800M
J50
1 5 9 13 17 21 25 29 33 K J H G F E D C B A
P50
009 024 106 060 104 114 115 316 341 326 333 331 338 3
M0T 025 059 100 116 135 337 M3J 308 336 335 321 2 J03
067 066 012 057 113 120 323 307 340 339 334 342 332 1
110
136 071 027 055 054 058 P29
4 8 12 16 20 24 28 32 36
K
J54
J
Brown
H
G
37
F
E
D
C
B
A
P69
1 2 3
334F100M
334F700M2

mark
2 015 0.6 Instrument panel speed alternator J42 A2
J01
Brown P02
1 5 9 13 17
31
070 064 063 062 023 J31
25
015 045 068 J65
405
031 065 056 069
J64
053 016 M0S M0B 405
J68
4 8 12 16 20
J67
24
334F311M 139
334F310M2
60 05
MR029
334684 - 10.2003
- 02.2003 - EN- EN F.59
Hydraulic doubler Hydraulic doubler
220
P49
836 A2 4 Mark Item Wire 2 J53 Leading to
mark
72 Twinshift relay
837 A4 3 2 838 0.6 Hydraulic doubler indicator J29 13
185 3 842 0.6 Relay J52 3
175 835 B3 5 175 Relay
185 Instrument panel 6 M8H 0.6 Relay ground J51 B3
J49
1 2 M8G 220 Ranges +/- switch 7 841 0.75 + APC relay J51 B7
J52
J36 J35 842 3
4 840 2 838 1
20 30 J42
MOB
116
2
4 839 842 3
MOB B5 4
6 M8H 836 5 6 1
3
J51 B6 B2 B5 7 841
B4 7 5
MOZ
A1 807
P29 A2 B7 B3 A7
J29 E0A
13
812
72
838 2
839 4
J53
M8H 6
220
5
E0A
841 7 P49
J49
J48 110
M8B
839
J29
J50 +APC J52

J51
P50 110 J53
23 9
72
M7C
FM8
J50
709
E7A
12 P50
Brown
M7G
J48
2 1
J58
125
334F801M
334F024
F.60 60 05
MR029
334684 - 10.2003
- 02.2003 - EN
- EN
Hydraulic doubler
J42
110
J03
P29
110
J50
P50
125
J58
334F701M2
MR05
60 334 - 02.2003
029 - EN - EN
684 - 10.2003 F.61
F.62 60MR
05334
029- 684 - 10.2003
02.2003 - EN - EN
HARNESS ROUTING AND CONNECTORS
MR05
60 334 - -684
029 EN - 10.2003 - EN F.63
F.64 60MR
05334
029- 684 - 10.2003
02.2003 - EN - EN
Harness routing and connectors
CONTENTS
0, 1 - CAB BOTTOM HARNESS .................................................................................................... F-68

WIPER-WASHER HARNESS / INSTRUMENT PANEL DISPLAY SELECTION ..................... F-80
3/1 - (ENGINE) FRONT HARNESS ............................................................................................... F-84
3/2 - PREHEATING CONTROL HARNESS ................................................................................... F-90
3/3 - GRILLE HARNESS ............................................................................................................... F-92
3/4 - AIR BRAKE HARNESS ........................................................................................................ F-94
5 - CAB TOP HARNESS ............................................................................................................ F-96
7A - REVERSER UNDER TORQUE TRANSMISSION HARNESS .............................................. F-102
7B - MECHANICAL REVERSER TRANSMISSION HARNESS /
MECHANICAL OR HYDRAULIC DOUBLER ....................................................................... F-106
8A - REVERSER UNDER TORQUE TRANSMISSION CONTROL HARNESS ............................. F-110
8B - MECHANICAL REVERSER TRANSMISSION CONTROL HARNESS /
DOUBLER / MECHANICAL OR ELECTRO-HYDRAULIC LIFT .............................................. F-116
9/1 - ELECTRO-HYDRAULIC LIFT CONTROL HARNESS (TCE) ................................................. F-124
9/2 - ELECTRO-HYDRAULIC LIFT HARNESS (TCE) .................................................................. F-130
MR 334
60 05 - 02.2003
029 - EN - EN
684 - 10.2003 F.65
F.66 60MR
05334
029- 684 - 10.2003
02.2003 - EN - EN
Harness routing and connectors
Connectors Pages Connectors Pages Connectors Pages Connectors Pages Connectors Pages Connectors Pages
JA ........................ F.96 J23 ........................ F.75 J46 ...................... F.112 J61 ........................ F.80 J85 ...................... F.115 P29 ........................ F.81
JA ........................ F.97 J24 ........................ F.68 J46 ...................... F.116 J62 ........................ F.68 J85 ...................... F.116 P30 ........................ F.68
JB ........................ F.96 J24 ........................ F.76 J46 ...................... F.118 J62 ........................ F.80 J85 ...................... F.122 P30 ........................ F.81
JB ........................ F.97 J25 ........................ F.68 J47 ...................... F.110 J63 ........................ F.68 J86 ........................ F.68 P38 ........................ F.84
J01 ........................ F.84 J25 ........................ F.76 J47 ...................... F.113 J63 ........................ F.80 J86 ........................ F.80 P38 ........................ F.94
J01 ........................ F.86 J26 ........................ F.96 J47 ...................... F.116 J64 ........................ F.84 J90 ........................ F.84 P38 ........................ F.95
J02 ........................ F.68 J26 ........................ F.97 J47 ...................... F.118 J64 ........................ F.87 J90 ........................ F.88 P50 ...................... F.102
J02 ........................ F.70 J27 ........................ F.68 J48 ...................... F.110 J65 ........................ F.84 J90 ........................ F.92 P50 ...................... F.104
J02 ........................ F.71 J27 ........................ F.76 J48 ...................... F.113 J65 ........................ F.87 J101 ...................... F.124 P50 ...................... F.106
J03 ........................ F.68 J28 ........................ F.68 J48 ...................... F.116 J66 ........................ F.84 J101 ...................... F.125 P50 ...................... F.108
J03 ........................ F.71 J28 ........................ F.76 J48 ...................... F.119 J66 ........................ F.88 J101 ...................... F.130 P50 ...................... F.116
J04 ........................ F.68 J28 ........................ F.96 J49 ...................... F.110 J67 ........................ F.84 J102 ...................... F.124 P69 ........................ F.84
J04 ........................ F.72 J29 ...................... F.110 J49 ...................... F.113 J67 ........................ F.88 J102 ...................... F.125 P69 ........................ F.89
J05 ........................ F.68 J29 ....................... F.111 J49 ...................... F.116 J68 ........................ F.84 J103 ...................... F.124 P70 ...................... F.110
J05 ........................ F.72 J29 ...................... F.116 J49 ...................... F.119 J68 ........................ F.88 J103 ...................... F.125 P70 ...................... F.116
J06 ........................ F.68 J29 ...................... F.117 J50 ...................... F.102 J69 ........................ F.84 J104 ...................... F.124 P70 ...................... F.124
J06 ........................ F.70 J30 ...................... F.110 J50 ...................... F.104 J69 ...................... F.102 J104 ...................... F.126 P70 ...................... F.128
J06 ........................ F.72 J30 ...................... F.112 J50 ...................... F.106 J69 ...................... F.104 J105 ...................... F.124 P90 ........................ F.84
J07 ........................ F.68 J31 ........................ F.84 J50 ...................... F.110 J69 ...................... F.106 J105 ...................... F.126 P90 ........................ F.92
J07 ........................ F.70 J31 ........................ F.86 J50 ...................... F.114 J69 ...................... F.107 J106 ...................... F.124 P90 ........................ F.93
J07 ........................ F.73 J32 ........................ F.96 J50 ...................... F.116 J70 ...................... F.110 J106 ...................... F.127 P101 ...................... F.124
J08 ........................ F.68 J32 ........................ F.97 J50 ...................... F.120 J70 ...................... F.115 J107 ...................... F.124 P101 ...................... F.130
J08 ........................ F.71 J33 ........................ F.96 J51 ...................... F.110 J70 ...................... F.116 J107 ...................... F.127 P101 ...................... F.131
J09 ........................ F.68 J33 ........................ F.98 J51 ...................... F.114 J70 ...................... F.122 J108 ...................... F.124
J09 ........................ F.70 J34 ........................ F.84 J51 ...................... F.116 J70 ...................... F.124 J108 ...................... F.127
J09 ........................ F.73 J34 ........................ F.86 J51 ...................... F.121 J71 ........................ F.96 J109 ...................... F.124
J1 ...................... F.110 J35 ........................ F.68 J52 ...................... F.116 J71 ........................ F.98 J109 ...................... F.127
J1 ...................... F.115 J35 ........................ F.70 J52 ...................... F.121 J72 ........................ F.96 J110 ...................... F.124
J10 ........................ F.70 J35 ........................ F.77 J53 ...................... F.116 J72 ........................ F.98 J110 ...................... F.127
J10 ........................ F.83 J36 ........................ F.68 J53 ...................... F.122 J73 ........................ F.96 J111 ...................... F.130
J11 ........................ F.68 J36 ........................ F.70 J54 ...................... F.102 J73 ........................ F.98 J111 ...................... F.131
J11 ........................ F.74 J36 ........................ F.77 J54 ...................... F.103 J74 ........................ F.96 J112 ...................... F.130
J12 ........................ F.68 J37 ........................ F.68 J54 ...................... F.106 J74 ........................ F.98 J112 ...................... F.131
J12 ........................ F.70 J37 ........................ F.78 J54 ...................... F.107 J75 ........................ F.96 J113 ...................... F.130
J12 ........................ F.74 J38 ........................ F.84 J55 ...................... F.102 J75 ........................ F.99 J113 ...................... F.131
J13 ........................ F.68 J38 ........................ F.87 J55 ...................... F.103 J76 ........................ F.96 J114 ...................... F.130
J13 ........................ F.74 J38 ........................ F.94 J55 ...................... F.107 J76 ........................ F.99 J114 ...................... F.131
J14 ........................ F.68 J39 ........................ F.90 J56 ...................... F.102 J77 ........................ F.96 J200 ........................ F.84
J14 ........................ F.74 J39 ........................ F.91 J56 ...................... F.103 J77 ........................ F.99 J200 ........................ F.88
J15 ........................ F.69 J40 ........................ F.68 J57 ...................... F.102 J78 ........................ F.96 J225 ........................ F.94
J15 ........................ F.83 J40 ........................ F.78 J57 ...................... F.102 J78 ........................ F.99 J225 ........................ F.95
J17 ........................ F.68 J41 ........................ F.68 J57 ...................... F.103 J79 ........................ F.96 P01 ........................ F.68
J17 ........................ F.70 J41 ........................ F.78 J57 ...................... F.106 J79 ........................ F.99 P01 ........................ F.81
J17 ........................ F.75 J42 ........................ F.68 J57 ...................... F.107 J80 ........................ F.96 P01 ........................ F.81
J18 ........................ F.96 J42 ........................ F.79 J58 ...................... F.102 J80 ........................ F.99 P02 ........................ F.84
J20 ........................ F.68 J43 ........................ F.68 J58 ...................... F.103 J81 ........................ F.96 P02 ........................ F.89
J20 ........................ F.70 J43 ........................ F.79 J58 ...................... F.106 J81 ...................... F.100 P06 ........................ F.70
J20 ........................ F.75 J44 ........................ F.68 J58 ...................... F.107 J82 ........................ F.96 P06 ........................ F.83
J21 ........................ F.68 J44 ........................ F.80 J59 ...................... F.102 J82 ...................... F.100 P16 ........................ F.90
J21 ........................ F.70 J45 ...................... F.110 J59 ...................... F.103 J83 ........................ F.96 P16 ........................ F.91
J21 ........................ F.75 J45 ...................... F.112 J60 ...................... F.102 J83 ...................... F.101 P28 ........................ F.68
J22 ........................ F.84 J45 ...................... F.116 J60 ...................... F.104 J84 ........................ F.96 P28 ........................ F.96
J22 ........................ F.86 J45 ...................... F.117 J60 ...................... F.106 J84 ...................... F.101 P28 ...................... F.101
J23 ........................ F.68 J46 ...................... F.110 J61 ........................ F.68 J85 ...................... F.110 P29 ........................ F.68
60 05
MR029
334684 - 10.2003
- 02-2003 - EN
- EN F.67
0, 1 - Cab bottom harness 0, 1 - Cab bottom harness (inverser under torque)
J17
J35
J36
J62
J07
188
J09 J20
J21
J06
203
60
J37
110
J14
J13
J62 J12
187 61
J07
J63
189a 189b
60
J86
E0B
P01
J02
110
334F100 334F101
F.68 60 05
MR029
334684 - 10.2003
- 02-2003 - EN
- EN
60 05
MR029
334684 - 10.2003
- 02-2003 - EN
- EN F.69
0, 1 - Cab bottom harness (mechanical reverser) 0, 1 - Cab bottom harness
J03 Interconnections plate
J17 J05 Interconnections plate
J35
J06 Front windscreen wiper / washer comodo
J36 J07 Signalisations comodo
J07 J09 ** ISC control
J10 J20 J11 Front windscreen wiper timer
J21
66 J12 Fan
J15
J13 * Fan
P06
J06 J14 * Air conditioning / recycling control
J17 Windscreen wiper motor
203
60 J20 Rotating beacons switch
J21 Warning lights switch
J37 J23 Trailer plug
J24 Seat
J25 RH plate light
110
J27 Cigar lighter
J28 Connection to cab top harness
J35 Instrument panel
J36 Instrument panel
J37 Accelerator potentiometer
J40 Shunt base (brown)
61 J42 Shunt base (black)
J12 J43 Shunt base (black)
J07
E0B J44 Shunt base (black)
60 J61 LH plate light
J62 ** ISC potentiometer
J63 ** ISC declutching switch
P01
J86 ** ISC clutch contact
J02
P01 Engine front harness connection
P30 ** Transmission control harness connection
110
* Air conditioned version only.
334F102
** Version with ISC only
F.70 MR
60 05 334
029 - 02-2003
684 - EN
- 10.2003 - EN
0/1 - Cab bottom harness
Wire 2 J04 Ending
11 9 7 5 3 1
markers 016 010 011 017 008 019
1 019 3 + AVC signalling control J07 A1 028 009 026 012 013 004
Wire 2 J02 Ending X
H
J 2 004 5 Starter control J04 2
12 10 8 6 4 2
markers 051 3 008 3 Start-up J41 B1
014 K 4 013 0,6 Rear PTO shunt safety 196
A 118 1 EV pneumatic braking J42 B3 G B 5 017 0,6 D+ on-board computer J28 12
W 061 055
B — — — 6 012 0,6 D+ alternator TDB J36
11
C 011 1 D+ alternator J04 7 V 115 F A C 057 L 7 011 1 D+ alternator J02 C
9
D — — — 8 026 0,6 Lights relay controls J07 A5
7
020 118 011
E — — — 9 010* 0,6 BDV P29 6
5
F 020 1 Horn J07 B3 U 018 058 M Reverser engaged
3
10 009 0,6 J35 1
1
G — — — 11 016 0,6 + APC control panel J36 12
H 051 1 Front windscreen washer pump J06 A1 054 12 028 2 + APC brake lights 203
E D
J 014 1 Alternator speed J41 A1
K 055 1 Engine water temperature J35 28 T 052
106
N * Version with mechanical reverser only
L 057 1 Engine oil pressure J35 15 S P
R
M 058 1 Air filter clogging J35 36
604bsm88
N 080* 1 Pressure switch J08 7
P — — —
R 106 1 Engine curve change J35 9
S 052 1 Rear windscreen washer pump J28 1 H
J
2
X
T 054 1 Engine water temperature alert J35 32 Wire 11 9 7 5 3 1
U 018 1 Accelerator potent. cursor J37 C 081

051
014 K markers
J05 Ending
041 034 063 062 064 042
V 115 1 Engine calculator defect J35 33 G B
W 061 055 043 044 100 031 104 065
W 061 1 Power supply to indicator unit J37 A 1 042 0,6 + AVC warning controls J21 2
X 081* 1 Compressor J08 5 2 065 0,6 + AVC control panel J36 11 12 10 8 6 4 2
V 115 F A C 057 L
* Version with air conditioning only 3 064 0,6 REM2 steering J36 5
020 118 011
4 100 0,6 4 RM brake light controls J35 18 11 9 7 5 3 1
U 018 058 M 5 062 0,6 Tractor steering J36 13 041 034 063 062 064 042
6 124 1 Brake light controls 203
054
E D
080 7 063 0,6 REM1 steering J36 9 043 044 028 124 100 065
T N 8 028 1 + APC brake light controls 203 12 10 8 6 4 2
052
106 9 034 1,4 Flashing unit J41 A7
S
R
P 10 044 1,4 + APC rotating beacon controls J20 1
11 041 1,4 Power supply to indicator unit J21 6
11
9
7
5
3
1
604bsm89
604bsm86
Wire 2 J06 Ending

1 2 3 4 5
Wire 2 J03 Ending markers A 051* 108* 060 M0X
markers 11 9 7 5 3 1
076 110 108 046 105 075 A1 046 1,4 + APC control EV/LV J21 2 B 047 109* 049* 050*
1 075 0,6 3rd gear relay controls 61 H A1 051* 1 Front windscreen washer pump J02 H
2 086 1,4 Right hand lights J44 A5 A2 108* 1 + APC control EV front J03 7
072 005 107 M0E 091 086
3 105 1 + APC cigar lighter J27 3 A3 — — —
4 091 1,4 Left hand lights J43 A5 12 10 8 6 4 2 A4 060 0,6 IP display selector J35 13
5 046 1,4 + APC control EV/LV front J06 A1 1 2 3 4 5
Instrument panel display selector
5 046 1,4 +_APC commande EV/LV avant J41 B5 A5 M0X 0,6 J42 B6
earth A 046 060 M0X
6 M0E 1 Panel earth E0A
B1 047 1 1st speed screen wiper control J17 1
7 108 1 + APC timer EV front J11 5 B 047 048 049 050
11
Front screen wiper park pos. 051

8 107 1 + APC seat J24 1 B2 048 1 J11 6
9
+ APC engine EV control

7
9 110 1 J17 3
B2 109* 1 Windscr. wiper eng. park. pos. J17 4
5
10 005 1 + APC accelerator potentiometer J37 B

Intermittent wiper action control
3
11 076 3 Ventilation 3rd speed controls J12 11 B3 049 1 J11 3

1
12 072 1 + APC fan 61 B B3 049* 1 Intermittent wiper action control J41 B6
1
B4 050 1 Front screen washer control J11 2 A
2
* Switch EV/LV front version (control panel selector) B4 050* 1 Front screen washer control J11 2
4
B5 — — — B
5
* Switch EV/LV front version/ Without timer
604bsm87
604bsm90
60 05 030 163 - 03.2004 - EN F.71

0, 1 - Cab bottom harness
11 9 7 5 3 1
Wire 2
mark
J04 Leading to 016 010 011 017 008 019
028 009 026 012 013 004

1 019 3 + AVC signalling comodo J07 A1
2 004 5 Starter control J04 2 12 10 8 6 4 2
3 008 3 Starting J41 B1
4 013 0.6 Rear PTO safety shunt 196 Blue
11
6 012 0.6 D+ instrument panel alternator J36
9
7 011 1 D+ alternator J02 C
7
5
8 026 0.6 Side lights relay control J07 A5
3
9 010* 0.6 Gearbox P29 6
1
12 028 2 + APC stop 203
* Version with mechanical reverser only
11 9 7 5 3 1
Wire 2
mark
J05 Leading to
041 034 063 062 064 042
1 042 0.6 + AVC warning control J21 2 043 044 100 031 104 065
2 065 0.6 + AVC Instrument panel J36 11 12 10 8 6 4 2
3 064 0.6 REM.2 steering J36 5
4 104* 0.6 Front axle control P29 12
5 062 0.6 Tractor steering J36 13 Grey
11
6 031* 0.6 Handbrake indicator 204

9

7
8 100* 0.6 Front axle stop control J42 A2

5

3
1
10 044 1.4 + APC rotating beacon ctrl J20 1
11 041 1.4 Flashing unit supply J21 6
12 043 1.4 + APC warning control J21 8
* Version with ISC
With wiper - washer switch / without timer

Wire 2
mark
J06 Leading to 1 2 3 4 5
A 051 108 060 M0X
A1 046 1.4 + APC wiper / washer comodo J21 2
B 047 109 049 050
A1 051* 1 Front windscreen washer pump J02 H
A2 108* 1 + APC front washer control J03 7
A3 — — ——
A4 060 0.6 Instrument panel display selector J35 13 With wiper - washer control / timer
A5 M0X 0.6 Instr. panel display selec. ground J42 B6 1 2 3 4 5
A 046 060 M0X
B1 047 1 Windscreen wiper 1st speed ctrl J17 1
B2 048 1 FR wiper ctrl parking position J11 6 B 047 048 049 050
B2 109* 1 Wiper motor parking position J17 4 051
B3 049 1 Intermittent control J11 3
B3 049* 1 Intermittent control J41 B6
B4 050 1 Front washer control J11 2
B4 050* 1 Front washer control J11 2
1
B4 051 1 Front washer pump J02 H A

2
B5 — — ——
4
B
5
* Version with front wiper - washer switch / without timer
F.72 60 05MR
029334
684- 02-2003
- 10.2003- EN
- EN
1 2 3 4 5
Wire 2 A 019 022
mark
J07 Leading to
023 021 026
B 035 032 020 038
A1 019 3 + AVC signalling comodo J04 1
A2 022 2 Headlamps P01 X
A2 023 0.6 Road indicator J36 17
A3 — — ——
Grey
A4 021 2 Dipped lights P01 W
1
A5 026 0.6 Side light relay control J04 8 A
4
B1 035 1.4 RH indicators control J44 A1
B
5
B2 032 1.4 Warning light supply J41 A5
B3 020 1 Horn J02 F
B4 038 1.4 LH indicators control J43 A1
B5 — — ——-
Mechanical reverser + air conditioning

Wire 2
mark
J08 Leading to
11 9 7 5 3 1
082 080 081 084 079

1 079 0.6 Air conditioning relay ctrl J13 1
2 083 0.6 Recycling ctrl J14 2 085 083
3 084 0.6 + Recycling J13 3
12 10 8 6 4 2
4 129* 0.6 +APC clutch release contact J63 2
5 081 1 Compressor J02 X Reverser under torque + air conditioning
6 137* 0.6 Not neutral control J09 B4
11 9 7 5 3 1
7 080 1 Pressure switch J02 N
8 085 0.6 – Recycling J07 A5 082 128 080 081 084 079
9 128* 0.6 +APC clutching contact J86 2
10 132* 0.6 +APC ISC potentiometer J62 8 133 132 085 137 129 083
11 082 0.6 + APC recycling control J14 3 12 10 8 6 4 2
12 133* 0.6 + APC reverser control J09 B1
Reverser under torque
* Version with ISC only 11 9 7 5 3 1
Red
128
11
133 132 137 129

9
7
12 10 8 6 4 2
5
3
1
1 2 3 4 5
Wire 2
mark
J09 Leading to A 123 121
B 133 122 138 137 M0Y
A1 — — ——
A2 123 0.6 Forward drive control P30 4
A3 — — —— White
A4 121 0.6 Reverse drive control P30 5
A5 — — ——
1
A
2
B1 133 0.6 + APC reverser control J08 12

4
B2 122 0.6 Neutral control P30 6 B

5
B3 138* 0.6 + APC ISC control P30 10

B4 137 0.6 Not neutral control J08 6
B5 M0Y 0.6 Reverser control ground J42 B7
* Reverser under torque version (ISC) ARES type
60 05MR
029334
684- 02-2003
- 10.2003- EN
- EN F.73
1 2 3 4 5 6
M0F 050 049 109 108 048
Wire 2
mark
J11 Leading to
1 M0F 0.6 Timer ground J40 A2

2 050 1 Front washer control J06 B4
3 049 1 Intermittent control J06 B3
4 109 1 Wiper motor parking position J 17 4
5 108 1 + APC front wiper timer J03 7
1
6 048 1 Front wiper ctrl parking position J06 B2 2
3
4
5
6
Wire 2
mark
J12 Leading to
4 076 074 3
1 M0A 0.6 Trailer socket ground J40 A2 2 073 M0A 1

2 073 1 Fan 1st speed control 61 L
3 074 2 Fan 2nd speed control 61 M
4 076 3 Fan 3rd speed control J03 12 White
Wire 2
mark
J13 Leading to
1 079 085 3
1 079 0.6 Air conditioning relay control J08 1
2 078 0.6 Air conditioning control J14 6 2 078 084 4
3 085 0.6 – Recycling J13 3
4 084 0.6 + Recycling J08 8
Brown
Wire 2
mark
J14 Leading to
1 M1B* 0.6 Recycling indicator ground J42 A7

1 M1B** 0.6 Recycling indicator ground J42 A6
2 083 0.6 Recycling control J08 2
3 082 0.6 + APC recycling control J08 11 1 M1B M1C 7
4 M1C* 0.6 Air condition. indicator ground J42 A6
4 M1C** 0.6 Air condition. indicator ground J42 A5 2 083 078 8
5 077 0.6 + APC air conditioning control J13 L
6 078 0.6 Air conditioning control 61 2 3 082 077 9
7 — — ——
8 — — ——
9 — — ——-
Brown
* Version with mechanical reverser
** Reverser under torque
F.74 60 05MR
029334
684- 02-2003
- 10.2003- EN
- EN

mark
1 047 1 Wiper 1st speed control J06 B1 1 2 3 4
1
2 M0D 1 Front windscreen wiper ground E0A
2
047 M0D 110 109
3
3 110 1 + APC wiper motor J03 9
4
parking position
4 109 1 Wiper motor parking position J11 4
4 109* 1 Wiper motor parking position J06 B2 White
* Version with fixed steering column, windscreen wiper/washer
instrument panel display
Wire 2
mark
J20 Leading to
2 4 6 8
2
1 044 1.4 + APC rotating beacon control J05 10
4
6
2 — — —— 044 112
8
117
3 — — ——
1 3 5 7
4 — — ——
5 112 1.4 Rotating beacon control J28 2
5 117 0.6 Rotating beacon indicator J20 9
6 — — ——
7 — — ——
8 — — ——-
9 10
9
9 117 0.6 Rotating beacon indicator J20 5 117 M0V
1
0
10 M0V 0.6 Rotating beacon indicator ground J21 9
Wire 2
mark
J21 Leading to 2 4 6 8
2
042 041 043

4
1 039 1.4 Left indicators control / warning J43 A2

6
039 033 036

8
2 042 0.6 + AVC warning control J05 1

3 033 1.7 Indicators / warning supply J41 A6 1 3 5 7
4 — — ——
5 036 1.4 Right indicators control / warning J44 A2
6 041 1.4 Unit supply J05 11
7 — — ——
8 043 1.4 + APC Warning ctrl J05 12
9 10
9
9 M0C 0.6 Warning light ground E0A M0C
1
M0V
0
9 M0V 0.6 Rotating beacon indicator ground J20 10

10 — — ——-
Black
Wire 2
mark
J23 Leading to
097 4
1 099 1 Trailer LH indicator J43 B2 5 090 M0R 3 3

2 — — —— 7 4
3 M0R 2 Trailer socket ground J40 B7 2 5
095
6 103 2 7
4 097 1 Trailer RH indicator J44 B2 1 6
5 090 1 Trailer RH side-light J44 B6
099
6 103 1.4 Trailer brake light J42 B2 1
7 095 1 Trailer LH side-light J43 B6
60 05MR
029334
684- 02-2003
- 10.2003- EN
- EN F.75

mark
1
1 107 M0L 2
2
1 107 0.6 + APC seat J03 B
2 M0L 1 Seat ground J40 B1

mark 2 1
2
1 M0J 0.6 RH plate light ground J40 A6 089 M0J
1
2 089 1 RH plate light J44 B5
White

1 2 3
mark
1 M0D 2 Ground E0A M0D 105
1
2 — — —— 2
3
3 105 2 + APC cigar lighter P62 A5
Wire 2
mark
J28 Leading to
1 052 1 Rear windscreen washer pump J02 S

2 112 1.4 Rotating beacon control J20 5
3 017 0.6 D+ on-board computer J04 5 1 052 114 7
4 114 0.6 OBC tractor speed J35 29
2 112 8
5 — — —— 7
6 — — —— 3 017 9 8
7 — — —— 9
8 — — ——
9 — — ——- Grey
F.76 60 05MR
029334
684- 02-2003
- 10.2003- EN
- EN

mark
2 M0T 0.6 Tractor speed ground P29 17
3 067 0.6 Diag. K P29 9
4 — — ——-
5 024 0.6 1,000 rpm PTO 55
6 025 0.6 540 rpm PTO 55
7 066 0.6 Diag. L P29 10
8 — — ——-
9 106 1 Engine curve change J02 R
10 059 0.6 PTO 540-1,000 rpm 196 1 5 9 13 17 21 25 29 33
11 012 0.6 D+ instrument panel alternator J04 6 009 024 106 060 104 114 115
12 — — ——-
13 060 0.6 Instrument panel display selector J06 A4 M0T 025 059 100 116 135
14 — — ——
15 057 1 Engine oil pressure J02 L 067 066 012 057 113 120
16 136* 0.6 Buzzer control P30 3
136 071 027 055 054 058
17 104 0.6 FR axle control P29 12
18 100 0.6 FR axle stop control J42 A2 4 8 12 16 20 24 28 32 36
19 —
20 071 0.6 Power take off engaged P29 7
21 — — ——
Brown
22 — — ——
23 113 0.6 Info starting J41 B3
24 027 0.6 Instrument panel lighting J43 B7
25 — — ——
26 — — ——
27 — — ——
28 055 1 Engine water temperature J02 K
29 114 0.6 OBC tractor speed J28 4
30 116 0.6 Doubler indicator P29 13
31 120 1 FR axle solenoid valve P29 8
32 054 1.4 Engine water temp. warning J02 T
33 115 1 Engine calculator failure J02 V
34 135* 0.6 Drivetronic failure P30 2
35 — — ——
36 058 1 Air filter clogging J02 M
* Version with reverser under torque

mark
1 5 9 13 17
2 015 0.6 Instrument panel alternator speed J42 A2 070 064 063 062 023
3 — — —— 015 045 068
4 — — ——-
5 064 0.6 REM.2 steering J05 3 031 065 056 069
6 — — ——
7 031 0.6 Handbrake indicator 204 10 053 016 M0S M0B
8 053 0.6 Fuel level P29 3 4 8 12 16 20
10 045 0.6 FR PTO indicator P29 11 Brown
11 065 0.6 + AVC Instrument panel J05 2
13 062 0.6 Tractor steering J05 5
14 — — ——-
15 056 0.6 Min. fuel warning P29 1
16 M0S 0.6 Fuel level ground P29 16
18 068 0.6 Front axle stop control J42 5
20 M0B 0.6 Instrument panel ground J42 B5
60 05MR
029334
684- 02-2003
- 10.2003- EN
- EN F.77

C B A
mark
018 005 061
A 061 1 Ref– accelerator potent. J02 W C
B
B 005 1 + APC accelerator potent. J03 10 A
C 018 1 Accelerator potent. cursor J02 U
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Wire 2 J40 Leading to A

mark
B
A1 M0W 3 Rear ground E0A
A2 M0G 0.6 LH front light ground 5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
A3 M0H 1 LH rear light ground 11
A4 — — ——- A M0W M0G M0H M0I M0J M0K
A5 M0I 0.6 LH plate light ground J61 1
B M0L M0M M0N M0O M0P M0Q M0R
A6 M0J 0.6 RH plate light ground J25 1
A7 M0K 0.6 Handbrake ground 204
B1 M0L 1 Seat ground J24 2

B2 M0M 0.6 PTO 540 rpm ground 55
1
2
B3 M0N 0.6 PTO 1000 rpm ground 55 A 3
B4 M0O 1 Cigar-lighter ground J27 1
B
5
B5 M0P 1 RH rear light ground 10
6
B6 M0Q 0.6 RH front light ground 4
7
B7 M0R 2 Fan ground J23 3
Brown
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
mark
B
A1 014 1 Alternator Speed J02 J
A2 015 0.6 Instrument panel alternator speed J42 A2
A3 134* 0.6 Engine speed P30 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
A4 — — ——- A 014 015 134 032 033 034
A5 032 1.4 Indicator supply J07 B2
A6 033 1.4 Indicator/speed supply J21 3 B 008 111 113
A7 034 1.4 Flashing unit J05 9
B1 008 3 Starting J04 3

B2 111 3 Starting solenoid P01 V
1
B3 113 0.6 Info starting J35 23

2
A
3
B4 — — ——
B5 050** 1 Front washer control J06 B4 B
5
6
B6 049** 1 Intermittent control J06 B3

7
B7 046** 1.4 + APC front wiper control J03 5
* On-board computer version

** Front wiper / washer switch version (instrument panel selector) Grey
F.78 60 05MR
029334
684- 02-2003
- 10.2003- EN
- EN
Version with mechanical reverser 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

A
mark B
A1 030 2 Stop 203
A2 100 0.6 Front axle stop control J35 18 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
A3 101 0.6 LH rear brake light 11 A 030 100 101 M1C M1B
A4 — — ——-
A5 — — ——- B 102 103 118 M0Z M0B M0X
A6 M1C* 0.6 Air conditioning indicator ground J14 4
A7 M1B* 0.6 Recycling indicator ground J14 1
B1 102 0.6 RH rear stop light 10 Black
1
B2 103 1.4 Trailer brake light J23 6
2
A
3
B3 118 1 Air brake SV J02 A
B4 M0Z** 1 Cab bottom ground E0A B
5
6
B5 M0B** 0.6 Instrument panel ground J36 20
7
B6 M0X** 0.6 Instrum. panel display selection J06 A5
B7 — — ——-
* Version with air conditioning

** Version with comodo / timer
Version with reverser under torque 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
A
mark B
A1 030 2 Stop 203

1 2 3 4 5 6 7
A2 100 0.6 Front axle stop control J35 18
A3 101 0.6 LH rear brake light 11 A 030 100 101 M1C M1B M1A
A4 — — ——-
B 102 103 118 M0Z M0B M0X M0Y
A5 M1C* 0.6 Air conditioning indicator ground J14 4
A6 M1B* 0.6 Recycling indicator ground J14 1
A7 M1A 0.6 Potent ground ISC J62 A
B1 102 0.6 RH rear brake light 10 Black

1
B2 103 1.4 Trailer brake light J23 6

2
A
3
B3 118 1 Air brake SV J02 A

B4 M0Z** 1 Cab bottom ground E0A B
5
6
B5 M0B** 0.6 Instrument panel ground J36 20

7
B6 M0X** 0.6 Instrum. panel display selection J06 A5

B7 M0Y 0.6 Reverser control J09 B5
* Version with air conditioning

** Version with comodo / timer
1 2 3 4 5 6 7

mark
B
A1 038 1.4 LH indicators control J07 B4
A2 039 1.4 Left indicators control / speed J21 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
A3 040 1.4 LH front indicator 5
A4 — — ——- A 038 039 040 091 092 093
A5 091 1.4 LH side lights J03 4
A6 092 0.6 Front LH side-light 5 B 098 099 094 095 027
A7 093 0.6 LH rear side-light 11
B1 098 0.6 LH rear indicator 11 Black

B2 099 1 Trailer LH indicator J23 1
1
B3 — — ——
2
A
3
B4 — — ——
B5 094 0.6 LH plate light J61 2 B
5
6
B6 095 0.6 Trailer LH side-light J23 7

7
B7 027 0.6 Instrument panel lighting J35 24
60 05MR
029334
684- 02-2003
- 10.2003- EN
- EN F.79
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
mark A
A1 035 1.4 RH indicators control J07 B1 B

A2 036 1.4 Right indicators control / speed J21 5
A3 037 0.6 RH front indicator 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
A4 — — ——-
A5 086 0.6 RH side-lights J03 2 A 035 036 037 086 087 088
A6 087 0.6 Front RH side-light 4
B 096 097 089 090 119
A7 088 0.6 RH rear side-light 10
B1 096 0.6 RH rear indicator J25 2

B2 097 1 Trailer RH indicator J23 4 Black
B3 — — ——
1
2
B4 — — —— A
3
B5 089 0.6 RH plate light J25 2
B
5
B6 090 1 Trailer RH side-light J23 5
6
B7 119 2 Cigar-lighter light 86
7
2 1
2
mark 094 M0I
1
1 M0I 0.6 LH plate light ground J40 A5
2 094 0.6 LH plate light J43 B5 White

mark C B A
A M1A 0.6 ISC potentiometer ground J42 A7 125 132 M1A C

B
B 132 0.6 + APC ISC potentiometer J08 10 A
C 125 0.6 Cursor potentiometer P30 7
Wire 2 J63 Leading to 1 2 3

mark
130 129
1 130 0.6 Disengaged position P30 9 1
2 129 0.6 + APC clutch release contact J08 4 2
3
3 — — ——-
Wire 2 J86 Leading to 1 2 3

mark
128 127
1 — — ——- 1
2
2 128 0.6 + APC clutch contact J86 2 3
3 127 0.6 Engaged position P30 8
F.80 60 05MR
029334
684- 02-2003
- 10.2003- EN
- EN
Wire 2 P01 Leading to S T U

mark
002 003
R 001 10 + AVC general 60 30 R
S 002 7 + AVC general 109
Z 001 111 V
T — — ——
U 003 7 + AVC general 119
V 111 3 Starter solenoid J41 B2 022 021
W 021 2 Dipped lights J07 A4
Y X W
X 022 2 Headlamps J07 A2
Y — — ——
Z — — ——
16 13 10 7 4 1
Wire 2 P29 Leading to
mark M0S 116 066 071 069 056
1 056 0.6 Min. fuel warning J36 15 M0T 045 120 070 068
2 068 0.6 Transmission hydraulic pressure J36 18
3 053 0.6 Fuel level J36 8 104 067 010 053
4 069 0.6 Tractor speed supply J36 19 18 15 12 9 6 3
5 070 0.6 Tractor speed J36 1
6 010 * 0.6 Gearbox J04 9 Brown
7 071 0.6 Power take off engaged J35 20
8 120 1 FR axle solenoid valve J35 31 16
13
9 067 0.6 Trailer 1 steering J05 7 10
10 066 0.6 Diag. K J35 3 7
4
11 045 0.6 Diag. L J35 7 1
12 104 0.6 Front axle control J35 17
13 116 0.6 Doubler indicator J35 30
14 — — ——
15 — — ——
16 M0S 0.6 Fuel level ground J40 B7
17 M0T 0.6 D+ on-board computer J35 2
18 — — ——-
* Version with ISC only
10 7 4 1
138 125 123 134

Wire 2 P30 Leading to 127 121 135
mark
130 122 136
1 134 0.6 Engine speed J41 A3
12 9 6 3
3 136 0.6 Buzzer control J35 16 Green
4 123 0.6 Forward drive control J09 A2
5 121 0.6 Reverse drive control J09 A4
6 122 0.6 Neutral control J09 B2 10
7
7 125 0.6 Cursor potentiometer J62 C 4
1
8 127 0.6 Engaged position J86 3
9 130 0.6 Engaged position J63 1
10 138* 0.6 + APC ISC control J09 B3
11 — — ——
12 — — ——
60 05MR
029334
684- 02-2003
- 10.2003- EN
- EN F.81
Wiper - washer harness / instrument panel display selection
J10 Windscreen wiper control
J15 Windscreen washer control
P06 Connection with connector J06 front windscreen wiper / washer
F.82 60 05MR
029334
684- 02-2003
- 10.2003- EN
- EN
Wiper - washer harness / instrument panel display selection

mark
1 RG 1 1 wiper speed indicator P06 B1 2 4 6 8
1 GR 1 Washer control - Wiper motor J15 4
2
BC MA
2 — — —— P62 A3
4
6
3 — — ——- GR OR
8
RG
4 — — ——
1 3 5 7
5 OR 1 + APC 1 wiper speed control P06 B3
6 BC 1 Wiper motor parking position ctrl J15 8
7 — —
8 MA 1 Wiper motor parking position P06 B2

mark
2 4 6 8
1 BU 1 FR windscreen washer control P06 A1
2
2 VE 1 + APC wiper motor parking P06 A2 VE GR BC
4
position ctrl
6
BU JA
8
3 JA 1 + APC front washer ctrl P06 B4
4 GR 1 Washer control - wiper motor J10 1 1 3 5 7
5 — — ——
6 — — ——
7 — — ——
8 BC 1 Wiper motor parking position ctrl J10 6
1 2 3 4 5
Wire 2 P06 Leading to A BU VE VI NO
mark
B RG MA OR JA
A1 BU 1 FR windscreen washer control P06 A1
A2 VE 1 + APC wiper motor parking P06 A2
position ctrl
A3 — — ——
A4 VI 0,6 Instr. panel display selection 66
A
1
A5 NO 0,6 Instr. panel display selection 66

2
3
B
4
B1 RG 1 1 wiper speed indicator J10 1

5
B2 MA 1 Wiper motor parking position J10 8

B3 OR 1 + APC 1 wiper speed ctrl J10 6
B4 JA 1 + APC front washer ctrl J15 3
B5 — — ——
MR
60 05 334
029 - 02-2003
684 - EN
- 10.2003 - EN F.83
3/1 - (Engine) front harness 3/1 - (Engine) front harness
Version with air conditioning Version with air conditioning

compressor on the side compressor at the top
P02 J90
32
J90 J34
P90 J34
E3D
J01
3/3
P02
J66
200
P69
206 31
J31 J38 31
E3E
E3F J68
J65
210 J64 J200

24
J67
32
P01
P01
Battery with Battery without 7
air brake version air brake version J69
7 P69
J69
P69
3/2
3/4
P38 226
J38
30
J22
J200
30
J22
J200
3/2
226
334F310 334F311
F.84 MR
60 05 334
029 - 02-2003
684 - EN
- 10.2003 - EN
3/1 - (Engine) front harness
J01 Connection to cab bottom harness
J22 Front windscreen washer pump
J31 Injection pump
J34* Compressor
J38** Air brake harness connection
J64 Engine calculator
J65 Fuel temperature
J66 Engine water temperature
J67 Engine speed
J68 Air temperature
J90 Grille harness connection
J200 Rear windscreen washer pump
P02 Connection to cab bottom harness
P69 Transmission harness connection
* Air conditioned version

** Air brake version
60 05MR
029334
684- 02-2003
- 10.2003- EN
- EN F.85
S T U
300 301
Z R 322 V 304
mark
R 322 10 + AVC general E3D
311 310
S 300 7 + AVC general E3D
T — — ——- Y X W
U 301 7 + AVC general E3D
V 304 3 Starter solenoid 32
W 310 2 Dipped lights J90 1
X 311 2 Headlamps J90 2
Y — — ——-
Z — — ——-

mark 3 2 1
1 M3K 1 FR winds. wash. pump ground E3E 320 M3K

2 — — ——- 3
3 320 1 FR windscreen washer pump P02 H 2
1
A B
337 338
2
A
Wire J31 Leading to B
mark
A 337 1 Injection pump J64 K2
B 338 1 Injection pump J64 A3

mark 318 A
A 318 1 Air conditioning compressor P02 X
Air conditioned version
F.86 60 05MR
029334
684- 02-2003
- 10.2003- EN
- EN

mark C B A
A 343 1 Air brake SV P02 A M3L 343 C
B M3L 1 Air brake SV ground E3E B
A
C — — ——-
Air brake version

mark
A1 — — ——
A2 321 1 + APC engine calculator P69 D

B2 335 1 Engine speed J67 A K J H G F E D C B A
B3 331 1 Accelerator potent. cursor P02 U
316 341 326 333 331 338 3
C1 342 1 Engine change curve P02 R 337 M3J 308 336 335 321 2
C2 — — ——-
C3 333 1 Fuel temperature (Ref-) J65 A 323 307 340 339 334 342 332 1
D1 334 1 Air temperature J68 A

D3 326 1 Probes (Ref-) E3F
E1 — — ——-
E2 — — ——-
E3 — — ——-
K
J
H
F1 339 1 CAN L P69 B

G
F
F2 — — ——-
F3 — — ——-
E
D
C
G1 340 1 CAN H P69 C

B
A
G2 308 Engine water temp. warning P02 T

G3 341 1 Engine calculator failure P02 V
1 2 3
H1 — — ——-
H2 — — ——-
H3 — — ——-
J1 307 1 Engine water temperature P02 K

J2 M3J 1 Engine calculator ground E3E
J3 — — ——-
K1 323 1 + AVC engine calculator P69 A

K3 316 1 Heating control 226
Wire 2 J65 Leading to A B

mark
333 329
A 333 1 Fuel temperature (Ref-) J64 C3
A
B 329 1 Fuel temperature (Ref-) E3F

B
60 05MR
029334
684- 02-2003
- 10.2003- EN
- EN F.87

A B
mark
332 328
A 332 1 Engine water temperature J64 B1
A
B 328 1 Engine water temp. (Ref-) E3F
B
mark
335 336
A 335 1 Engine speed J64 B2
A
B 336 1 Engine speed J64 D2
B
mark
334 330
A 334 1 Air temperature J64 D1
B 330 1 Air temperature (Ref-) E3F A
B

mark 1 2 3
1
1 310 2 Dipped lights J01 W 310 311 M3C 2
3
2 311 2 Headlamps J01 X
3 M3C 2 Front headlights ground 31 306 M3B
4 306 1 Horn P02 F 4 5 6
5 — — ——
6 M3B 1 Horn ground 31

mark 3 2 1
1 M3G 1 RR winds. wash. pump ground E3E 325 M3G

2 — — ——- 3
2
3 325 1 Rear windscreen washer pump P02 S 1
F.88 60 05MR
029334
684- 02-2003
- 10.2003- EN
- EN
H
Wire 2 P02 Leading to X J
320
mark 318 309 K
G B
A 343* 1 Air brake SV J38 A W 327 307
B — — ——-
C 303 1 D+ alternator 31 V 341 F A C 305 L
D — — ——- 306 343 303
E — — ——- U 331 319 M
F 306 1 Horn J90 4
G — — ——-
308 317
H 320 1 FR windscreen washer pump J22 3 E D
J 309 1 Alternator 31 T 325 N
342
K 307 1 Engine water temperature J64 J1 S P
L 305 1 Oil pressure 200 R
M 319 1 Air filter 206
N 317** 1 Pressure switch 210
P — — ——-
R 342 1 Engine curve change J64 C1
S 325 1 RR windscreen washer pump J200 3
T 308 1 Engine water temp. warning J64 G2
U 331 1 Accel. potentiometer cursor J64 B3
V 341 1 Engine calculator failure J64 G3
W 327 1 Accelerator potent. (ref-) E3F
X 318** 1 Air conditioning compressor J34 A
* Air brake version

** Air conditioned version
D C B A
321 340 339 323

mark
A 323 1 + AVC engine calculator J64 K1
B 339 1 CAN L J64 F1
C 340 1 CAN H J64 G1
D
D 321 1 + APC engine calculator J64 A2 C
B
A
60 05MR
029334
684- 02-2003
- 10.2003- EN
- EN F.89
3/2 - Preheating control harness
Battery without
air brake version
3/1
226
P16
31 J39
Battery with
air brake version
P16
31
3/1
J39
226
F.90 60 05MR
029334
684- 02-2003
- 10.2003- EN
- EN
3/2 - Preheating control harness
J39 Preheating fuse
P16 (Disconnected) front harness connection
1
mark RG OR
2
1 RG 10 + Battery 31
2 OR 10 Preheating relay 226
Wire 2 P16 Leading to A

mark VE
A VE 1 Preheating control 226
60 05MR
029334
684- 02-2003
- 10.2003- EN
- EN F.91
3/3 - Grille harness
3/1
J90
P90
173
2A
2B
3B
3A
F.92 60 05MR
029334
684- 02-2003
- 10.2003- EN
- EN
3/3 - Grille harness

mark
4 5 6
1 RG1 2 Dipped lights E3A 4
5
2 BU1 2 Headlamps E3B BC NO6
6
3 NO1 2 Grille ground E3C
4 BC 1 Horn 173 RG1 BU1 NO1
5 — — —— 1 2 3
6 NO6 1 Horn 173
60 05MR
029334
684- 02-2003
- 10.2003- EN
- EN F.93
3/4 - Air brake harness
3/1
J38
P38
J225
F.94 60 05MR
029334
684- 02-2003
- 10.2003- EN
- EN
3/4 - Air brake harness
J225 Air brake solenoid valve

1 2
mark
1
MA BU
1 MA 1 Air brake SV P38 A 2
2 BU 1 Air brake SV P38 B

C B A
mark
BU MA C
A MA 1 Air brake SV J225 1 B
A
B BU 1 Air brake SV J225 2
C — — ——-
MR
60 05 334
029 - 02-2003
684 - EN
- 10.2003 - EN F.95
5 - Cab top harness 5 - Cab top harness
JA Car-radio
JB Car-radio
J26 Interconnections plate connection
J76
J32 Shunt base
J33 Shunt base
J83 JA J78
P28 J71 Shunt base
JB
J72 LH front floodlights
J77 J73 Rotating beacon
J74 LH rear floodlights
82
J82 140 J75* Outside air temperature probe
E5A
J81 J79 J76 LH Loudspeaker
J77 Rear windscreen wiper / washer
J80
J78 RH loudspeaker
J79 Rear floodlights control
J80 Cab light
J81 FR floodlights control
J82* On-board computer
J83 RH front floodlights
J72
J73 J84 RH rear floodlights
J75 J83
P28 Connection to cab bottom harness
J74 * On-board computer version

J76 J78
J71 J77
J84
J33
J32
J82
E0A
J26 P28
J28
110
0,1
334F500
F.96 MR
60 05 334
029 - 02-2003
684 - EN
- 10.2003 - EN
5 - Cab top harness
Wire 2 JA Leading to
White
mark
1 3 5 7
1 — — ——-
2 — — ——- 516
1
3 — — ——-
3
5
4 518 0.6 + AVC car-radio J71 A2 518 M5H
7
5 — — ——- 2 4 6 8
6 — — ——-
7 516 0.6 + APC car-radio J26 3
8 M5H 0.6 Car-radio ground J33 A3
Wire 2 JB Leading to Black

mark 1 3 5 7
1 — — ——- 520 522
1
2 — — ——-
3
5
3 520 0.6 + RH loudspeaker J78 2 521 523
7
4 521 0.6 – RH loudspeaker P78 1 2 4 6 8
5 522 0.6 + LH loudspeaker P76 2
6 523 0.6 – LH loudspeaker P76 1
7 — — ——-
8 — — ——-
11 9 7 5 3 1
Wire 2 J26 Leading to 528 529 512 501 516 517
mark
524 507 515 504 527 526
1 517 0.6 + AVC car-radio/cab light J71 A1
2 526 3 + AVC electric implement socket 82 12 10 8 6 4 2
3 516 0.6 + APC car-radio JA 7
4 527 3 + AVC electric implement socket 82 Black
5 501 3 + AVC front floodlights J71 A5
11
6 504 3 + AVC rear floodlights J71 B1

9
7 512 0.6 FR floodlights control J32 A3

7
5
8 515 0.6 RR floodlights control J32 A7

3
9 529* 0.6 + APC OBC / backlight J32 B1

1
10 507 0.6 Mudguard lights J71 B4

11 528 1 + APC electric implement socket 82
12 524 1 Rear windscreen wiper control J77 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
A
mark B
A1 510 0.6 Front indicator J81 10

A2 511 0.6 FR floodlights control J81 1 Grey
A3 512 0.6 FR floodlights control J26 7
A4 — — ——
1
2
A5 513 0.6 Rear indicator J79 10 A

3
A6 514 0.6 RR floodlights control J79 1

B
5
A7 515 0.6 RR floodlights control J26 8

6
7
B1 529* 0.6 + APC ODB / backlight J26 1

B2 530* 0.6 + APC on-board computer J82 8
B3 531* 0.6 + APC OBC backlight J82 11
B4 — — ——-
B5 — — ——- 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
B6 — — ——-
A 510 511 512 513 514 515
B7 — — ——-
B 529 530 531
60 05MR
029334
684- 02-2003
- 10.2003- EN
- EN F.97
5 - Cab top harness
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
A
mark B
A1 M5P* 0.6 On-board computer ground J82 10

A2 M5Q* 0.6 Events counter ground 140
A3 M5H 0.6 Car-radio ground JA 7 Brown
A4 — ——-
1
2
A5 M5L 1 RR windsc. wip./wash. ground J77 1 A
3
A6 — — ——-
B
5
A7 — — ——-
6
7
B1 M5R* 0.6 Outside temp. probe ground J75 B
B2 — — ——-
B3 M5F 0.6 Front floodlights ctrl ground J81 5
B4 M5M 1.4 Cab roof ground E0A
B5 M5G 0.6 Rear floodlights ctrl ground J79 5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
B6 — — ——-
A M5P M5Q M5H M5L
B7 — — ——-
B M5R M5F M5M M5G
* On-board computer version only
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
A
B
mark
A1 517 0.6 + AVC car-radio/cab light J26 4
A2 518 0.6 + AVC car-radio JA 4
A3 519 0.6 + AVC cab light J80 2 Grey
1
A4 — — ——
2
A
3
A5 501 3 + APC front floodlights J26 5

A6 502 1 RH front floodlight J83 2 B
5
6
A7 503 1 LH front floodlight J72 2

7
B1 504 3 + AVC rear floodlights J26 6

B2 505 1 RH rear floodlight J84 2
B3 506 1 LH rear floodlight J74 2
B4 507 0.6 Mudguard lights J26 10
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
B5 508 0.6 Front floodlights ctrl indicator J81 9
B6 509 0.6 Rear floodlights ctrl indicator J79 9 A 517 518 519 501 502 503
B7 — — ——-
B 504 505 506 507 508 509
Wire 2 J72 Leading to 1 M5C

mark
1
1 M5C 1 LH front floodlight ground E5A 503

2 503 1 LH front floodlilght J71 A7
2 2 Black

mark 2
500 M5K
1
1 M5K 1.4 Rotating beacon ground E5A

2 500 1.4 Rotating beacon control P28 2 Black
F.98 60 05MR
029334
684- 02-2003
- 10.2003- EN
- EN
5 - Cab top harness
Wire 2 J74 Leading to 1 M5E

mark
1
1 M5E 1 LH rear floodlight ground E5A 506
2 506 1 Rear LH floodlight J71 B3 2
2 Black

mark B A
M5R 532 B
A 532 0.6 + APC OBC backlight J82 5 A
B M5R 0.6 Outside air temp. probe J33 B1
On-board computer version

mark 1
523 522
1 523 0.6 – LH loudspeaker JB 6 2
2 522 0.6 + LH loudspeaker JB 5 Black
2 1
524 M5L 2
mark
1
1 M5L 1 RR windsc. wip./wash. ground J33 A5 525

2 524 1 Rear windscreen wiper control J26 12
Black
3
3 525 0.6 Rear windscreen washer ctrl P28 1 3

mark
1
521 520
2
1 521 0.6 – RH loudspeaker JB 4

2 520 0.6 + RH loudspeaker JB 3 Black
60 05MR
029334
684- 02-2003
- 10.2003- EN
- EN F.99
5 - Cab top harness

mark 2 4 6 8
2
1 514 0.6 RR floodlights control J32 A6
4
6
2 — — ——- 514 M5G
8
3 — — ——-
1 3 5 7
4 — — ——-
5 M5G 0.6 Rear floodlights ctrl ground J33 B5
6 — — ——-
7 — — ——-
8 — — ——-
9 10 9
10
9 509 0.6 Rear floodlights ctrl indicator J71 B6 509 513
10 513 0.6 Rear indicator J32 A5

mark
1 2 3
1 M5N 0.6 Cab light ground E5A 1
M5N 519 M5O
2
2 519 0.6 + AVC cab light J71 A3
3
3 M5O 0.6 Cab light ground E5A
White

mark 2 4 6 8
2
1 511 0.6 FR floodlights control J32 A2

4
6
2 — — ——- 511 M5F

8
3 — — ——-
1 3 5 7
4 — — ——-
5 M5F 0.6 Front floodlights ctrl ground J33 B3
6 — — ——-
7 — — ——-
8 — — ——-
9 10 9
10
9 508 0.6 Front floodlights ctrl indicator J71 B5 508 510

10 510 0.6 Front indicator J32 A1
Wire 2 J82 Leading to 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

mark 531 M5P 534 530 532 535 533
1 — — ——-
2 533 0.6 Events counter 140
3 — — ——-
4 535 0.6 D+ on-board computer P28 3
14
13
5 532 0.6 Outside air temp. probe J75 A

12
11
6 — — ——-
10
7 — — ——-
9
8
8 530 0.6 + APC on-board computer J32 B2

7
9 534 0.6 TA speed P28 4

6
5
10 M5P 0.6 On-board computer ground

4
3
11 531 0.6 + APC OBC backlight J32 B3

2
1
12 — — ——-
13 — — ——-
14 — — ——-
On-board computer version
F.100 60 05MR
029334
684- 02-2003
- 10.2003- EN
- EN
5 - Cab top harness
Black
mark 1 M5B
1
1 M5B 1 RH front floodlight ground E5A
2 502 1 Front RH floodlight J71 A6 502
2 2
Black
1 M5D
mark
1
1 M5D 1 RH rear floodlight ground E5A 505
2 505 1 Rear RH floodlight J71 B2 2
2
Wire 2 P28 Leading to Grey

mark
1 525 0.6 Rear windscreen washer ctrl J77 3
2 500 1.4 Rotating beacon control J73 2 7 534 525 1
3 535* 0.6 D+ on-board computer J82 4
4 534* 0.6 TA speed J82 9 8 500 2
5 — — ——-
6 — — ——- 9 535 3
1
7 — — ——-
8 — — ——- 2
9 — — ——- 3
MR
60 05 334
029 - 02-2003
684 - EN
- 10.2003 - EN F.101
7a - Transmission harness with 7a - Transmission harness with
reverser under torque (revershift) reverser under torque (revershift)
J54 TA speed sensor
J55 Forward drive solenoid valve
J56 Reverse drive solenoid valve
P50 202 J58 Hydraulic doubler solenoid valve
J59 J59 ISC module speed sensor (revershift)
205 P50 Transmission control harness connection
8a
J50
P50
205 E7A
J54
J57
J58
213
J55
J69 J56
102
3/1
J60
94
334F700
F.102 MR
60 05 334
029 - 02-2003
684 - EN
- 10.2003 - EN
7a - Transmission harness with
reverser under torque (revershift)

1 2 3
mark
703 704 M7A 1
1 703 0.75 TA speed power supply P50 3 2
2 704 0.75 TA speed signal P50 4 3
3 M7A 0.75 TA speed ground P50 25

mark A
716 717
B
A 716 0.75 Forward drive solenoid valve P50 16
B 717 0.75 Forward drive SV return P50 17

mark 718 719 A
B
A 718 0.75 Reverse drive solenoid valve P50 18
B 719 0.75 Reverse drive SV return P50 19

mark 708 M7F
1 708 0.75 Front axle solenoid valve P50 8
2 M7F 0.75 Front axle SV ground E7A
1
2

mark
709 M7G
1 709 0.75 Hydraulic doubler SV P50 9
2 M7G 0.75 Hydr. doubler SV ground E7A
1
2

2
mark 721 2 1
1 720 0.75 ISC module speed P50 20 720 1

2 721 0.75 ISC module speed P50 21
60 05
MR029
334684 - 10.2003
- 02-2003 - EN
- EN F.103
7a - Transmission harness with
B A
mark M7H 711
B
A
A 711 0.75 Front power take off control P50 11
B M7H 0.75 Front PTO ground E7A

mark
A B C D
A 712 1.4 + AVC engine calculator P50 12 A
712 714 715 713 B
B 714 0.75 CAN L engine calculator P50 14 C
D
C 715 0.75 CAN H engine calculator P50 15
D 713 1.4 + APC engine calculator P50 13

mark
1 701 0.75 Hydraulic pressure 102
2 702 0.75 Fuel level 202
3 703 0.75 TA speed power supply J54 1
4 704 0.75 TA speed signal J54 2
5 705 0.75 Gearbox engaged 205
6 706 0.75 Rear PTO clutched 59 4 704 703 702 701 1
7 707 0.75 + APC Rear PTO clutch 59
9 709 708 707 706 705 5
8 708 0.75 Front axle drive solenoid valve J57 1
9 709 0.75 Hydraulic doubler SV J58 1 15 715 714 713 712 711 710 10
10 710 0.75 Min. fuel 202 22 721 720 719 718 717 716 16
11 711 0.75 Front power take off control J60 A
28 M7A M7B M7C 23
12 712 1.4 + AVC engine calculator J69 A
13 713 1.4 + APC engine calculator J69 D 33 29
14 714 0.75 CAN L engine calculator J69 B 37 34
15 715 0.75 CAN H engine calculator J69 C
16 716 0.75 Forward solenoid valve J55 A
17 717 0.75 Forward drive SV return J55 B
18 718 0.75 Reverse solenoid valve J56 A
19 719 0.75 Reverse drive SV return J56 B
22 — — ——-
23 M7C 1.4 Transmission ground E7A
24 M7B 0.75 Fuel level ground 202
25 M7A 0.75 TA speed ground J54 3
26 — — ——-
27 — — ——-
28 — — ——-
29 — — ——-
30 — — ——-
31 — — ——-
32 — — ——-
33 — — ——-
34 — — ——-
35 — — ——-
36 — — ——-
37 — — ——-
F.104 60 05
MR029
334684 - 10.2003
- 02-2003 - EN
- EN
60 05MR
029334
684- 02-2003
- 10.2003- EN
- EN F.105
7b - Transmission harness mec hanical re
mechanical ver
rever ser
verser 7b - Transmission harness mec hanical re
mechanical ver
rever ser
verser
with mechanical or hydraulic doubler with mechanical or hydraulic doubler
J54 TA speed sensor
J58* Hydraulic doubler solenoid valve
P50 213
202 J69 Engine front harness connection
205 * Version with hydraulic doubler
8b
J50
P50
205 E7A
J54
J58 125
101
J69 J57
102
3/1
J60
94
334F701
F.106 60 05MR
029334
684- 02-2003
- 10.2003- EN
- EN
7b - Transmission harness mechanical reverser
with mechanical or hydraulic doubler

mark 1 2 3
1 703 0.75 TA speed power supply P50 3 703 704 M7A 1
2 704 0.75 TA speed signal P50 4 2
3 M7A 0.75 TA speed ground P50 25 3

mark
708 M7F
1 708 0.75 Front axle solenoid valve P50 8
2 M7F 0.75 Front axle SV ground E7A
1
2
mark
709 M7G
1 709 0.75 Hydraulic doubler SV P50 9
2 M7G 0.75 Hydr. doubler SV ground E7A
1
2
Hydraulic doubler version
Wire 2 J60 Leading to B A

mark
M7H 711
A 711 0.75 Front power take off control P50 11 B
A
B M7H 0.75 Front PTO ground E7A

mark A B C D
A
A 712 1.4 + AVC engine calculator P50 12 712 714 715 713 B
C
B 714 0.75 CAN L engine calculator P50 14 D
C 715 0.75 CAN H engine calculator P50 15
D 713 1.4 + APC engine calculator P50 13
60 05
MR029 684
334 - 10.2003
- 02-2003 - EN
- EN F.107
7b - Transmission harness mechanical reverser
with mechanical or hydraulic doubler

mark
1 701 0.75 Hydraulic pressure 102
2 702 0.75 Fuel level 202
4 704 0.75 TA speed signal J54 2
5 705 0.75 Gearbox engaged 205
6 706 0.75 Rear PTO clutched 59
7 707 0.75 + APC Rear PTO clutch 59
4 704 703 702 701 1
9 709* 0.75 Hydraulic doubler SV J58 1
10 710 0.75 Min. fuel 202 9 709 708 707 706 705 5
11 711 0.75 Front power take off control J60 A 15 715 714 713 712 711 710 10
12 712 1.4 + AVC engine calculator J69 A
22 16
13 713 1.4 + APC engine calculator J69 D
14 714 0.75 CAN L engine calculator J69 B 28 M7A M7B M7C 23
15 715 0.75 CAN H engine calculator J69 C 33 29
16 — — ——-
17 — — ——- 37 34
18 — — ——-
19 — — ——-
20 — — ——-
21 — — ——-
22 — — ——-
23 M7C 1.4 Transmission ground E7A
24 M7B 0.75 Fuel level ground 202
25 M7A 0.75 TA speed ground J54 3
26 — — ——-
27 — — ——-
28 — — ——-
29 — — ——-
30 — — ——-
31 — — ——-
32 — — ——-
33 — — ——-
34 — — ——-
35 — — ——-
36 — — ——-
37 — — ——-
* Hydraulic doubler version
F.108 60 05
MR029 684
334 - 10.2003
- 02-2003 - EN
- EN
60 05MR
029334
684- 02-2003
- 10.2003- EN
- EN F.109
8a - Transmission control harness with
control 8a - Transmission control harness with
control
reverser under torque (revershift) reverser under torque (revershift)
9/2
J1 Transmission electronic unit
P70
J70
J46
J45
J45 Front axle control
J46 Front PTO control
220

J49

J49 Ranges and ISC clutch release controls (revershift)
J50
J51 Shunt base
J70 Electro-hydraulic lift control harness connection
J85 Shunt base
J49
0,1
184
J30
J29
7a
J1
110
E0A
J85
J51
P50
J50
J48
J47
334F800
F.110 60 05MR
029334
684- 02-2003
- 10.2003- EN
- EN
mark
1 M8F 1.5 Drivetronic ground J51 B6
2 — — ——-
3 — — ——-
4 830 0.75 Clutch poten. cursor J30 7
5 805 0.75 Gearbox engaged J50 5 25 36
6 826 0.75 Forward drive control J30 4
7 827 0.75 Reverse drive control J30 5 838 833 811 810 813 812 809 822 825 821 841
8 823 0.75 Neutral control J30 6 24 837 832 836 835 815 814 840 13
9 865 0.75 Hydraulic pressure D4
10 820 0.75 Engine speed J30 1 M8F 830 805 826 827 823 865 820 819 839
11 819 0.75 TA speed J29 5 1 12
12 839 0.75 CAN H J47 2
13 840 0.75 CAN L J47 1
14 814 0.75 ISC module speed (revershift) J50 20
15 815 0.75 ISC module speed (revershift) J50 21
Black
17 836 0.75 – ranges control J49 A4
19 — — ——-
20 — — ——-
21 — — ——-
22 — — ——-
23 — — ——-
24 837 1.5 + AVC Drivetronic J48 2
25 838 1.5 + AVC Drivetronic J51 A2
26 833 0,75 + APC SV supply J30 9
27 811 0.75 Forward drive SV return J50 17
28 810 0.75 Forward drive solenoid valve J50 16
29 813 0.75 Reverse drive SV return J50 19
30 812 0.75 Reverse drive solenoid valve J50 18
35 — — ——-
36 841 0.75 CAN – J47 3

mark
1 847 803 806 864 822 M8C 16
1 847 1.5 + APC transmission control J50 10
2 800 0.75 Hydraulic pressure D4 2 800 804 808 850 M8H 17
801 819
2 801 0.6 Hydraulic pressure J50 1
3 802 863 817 18
3 802 0.6 Fuel level J50 2
5 804 0.6 TA speed J50 4
5 819 0.75 TA speed J1 11 Brown
6 — — ——-
7 806 0.6 Rear PTO clutch lever J50 6
8 808 0.75 Front axle solenoid valve J50 8
9 863 0.6 K line J85 B4
10 864 0.6 L line J85 A1
11 850 0.6 Front PTO indicator J46 1
16
13 822 0.75 Hydraulic doubler indicator J1 32 17
14 — — ——- 18
15 — — ——-
16 M8C 0.6 Fuel level ground J50 24
17 M8H 0.6 TA speed ground J50 25
18 — — ——-
60 05
MR029
334684 - 10.2003
- 02-2003 - EN- EN F.111

mark
1 820 826 830 10
1 820 0.75 Engine speed J1 10
2 821 0.75 Drivetronic failure J1 34 2 821 827 832 11
3 825 823 833 12
4 826 0.75 Forward drive control J1 6 824
5 827 0.75 Reverse drive control J1 7
Green
6 823 0.75 Neutral control J1 8
6 824 0.6 ISC clutch release control J49 A5
7 830 0.75 Clutch poten. cursor J1 4
9 833 0.75 + APC SV supply J1 26
10 828* 0.6 ISC clutch release control J49 A1
11 — — ——- 10
12 — — ——- 11
12

mark
1 816 0.6 + APC front axle control J48 10
2 4 6 8
2 — — ——-
2
3 — — ——-
4
6
4 — — ——-
8
5 817 0.6 Front axle control J29 12 816 817

6 — — ——- 1 3 5 7
7 — — ——-
8 — — ——-

mark
1 849 0.6 Front PTO SV control J50 11
2 4 6 8
2
2 — — ——-
4
6
3 — — ——-
8
849
4 — — ——- 850 848
5 848 0.6 + APC rear PTO control J48 9 1 3 5 7
6 — — ——-
7 — — ——-
8 — — ——-
F.112 60 05
MR029
334684 - 10.2003
- 02-2003 - EN- EN

mark 1 840 839 841 3
4 842 861 860 M8G 7

1 840 0.75 CAN L J1 13
2 839 0.75 CAN H J1 12 8 853 854 11
3 841 0.75 CAN – J1 36
4 842 1 Diagnostic socket power supply J51 A3 12 14
5 861 0.6 L line J85 A2
6 860 0.6 K line J85 B7
7 M8G 1 Diagnostic socket J51 B5
8 853 0.6 CAN L engine calculator J50 14
9 854 0.6 CAN H engine calculator J50 15 Black
10 — — ——-
11 — — ——-
12 — — ——-
13 — — ——-
14 — — ——-
11 9 7 5 3 1
Wire 2 J48 Leading to 852 848 858 857 851
mark
845 816 856 855 837
2 837 1.5 + AVC Drivetronic J1 24 12 10 8 6 4 2
3 857 0.6 K line transport mode J85 B5
4 — — ——-
5 858 0.6 Transport mode indicator J70 3 Brown
11
6 855 0.6 D+ electro-hydraulic lift J70 1

9
7 — — ——-
7
8 856 1 + APC electro-hydraulic lift J70 2

5
3
9 848 0.6 + APC front PTO control J46 5

1

11 852 1.5 + APC engine calculator J50 13
12 845 1.5 + APC transmission control J51 B1
Wire 2 J49 Leading to 1 2 3 4 5

mark A 835 836 824
A1 828* 0.6 ISC clutch release control J30 10 B 846
A2 835 0.75 + ranges control J1 16
A3 — — ——-
A4 836 0.75 – ranges control J1 17 Grey
A5 824 0.6 ISC clutch release control J30 6
1
A
2
B1 — — ——-
4
B2 — — ——- B
5
B3 846 0.6 + APC ranges control J51 B2

B4 — — ——
B5 M8D* 0.6 +/– clutch release control J51 A7
60 05
MR029
334684 - 10.2003
- 02-2003 - EN- EN F.113

mark
2 802 0.6 Fuel level J29 3
4 804 0.6 TA speed J29 5
5 805 0.75 Gearbox engaged J1 5
6 806 0.6 Rear PTO clutch switch J29 7
7 807 0.6 + APC Rear PTO clutch switch J51 A1
10 847 0.6 Min. fuel warning J29 1
11 849 0.6 Front EV PDF control J46 1
15 854 0.6 CAN H engine calculator J47 9
16 810 0.75 Forward drive solenoid valve J1 28 1 801 802 803 804 4
17 811 0.75 Forward drive SV return J1 27 5 805 806 807 808 809 9
18 812 0.75 Reverse drive solenoid valve J1 30
10 847 849 851 852 853 854 15
19 813 0.75 Reverse drive SV return J1 29
20 814 0.75 ISC module speed (revershift) J1 14 16 810 811 812 813 814 815 22
21 815 0.75 ISC module speed (revershift) J1 15 23 M8B M8C M8H 28
22 — — ——-
29 33
23 M8B 1.5 Transmission ground J51 A6
24 M8C 0.6 Fuel level ground J29 16 34 37
25 M8H 0.6 TA speed ground J29 17
26 — — ——-
27 — — ——-
28 — — ——-
29 — — ——-
30 — — ——-
31 — — ——-
32 — — ——-
33 — — ——-
34 — — ——-
35 — — ——-
36 — — ——-
37 — — ——-
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
A
mark B
A1 807 0.6 + APC Rear PTO clutch switch J50 7
A2 838 1.5 + AVC Drivetronic J1 25
A3 842 1 Diagnostic socket power supply J47 4 Black
A4 — — ——-
1
2
A5 M8A 1.5 Transmission ctrl ground E0A A

3
A6 M8B 1.5 Transmission ground J50 23

B
5
A7 M8D* 0.6 +/– clutch release control J49 B5

6
7
B1 845 1.5 + APC transmission control J48 12

B3 — — ——
B4 M8I 1 Electro-hydraulic lift ground J70 9
B5 M8G 1 Diagnostic socket ground J47 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
B6 M8F 1.5 Drivetronic ground J1 1
A 807 838 842 M8A M8B
B7 — — ——-
B 845 846 M8I M8G M8F
F.114 60 05
MR029
334684 - 10.2003
- 02-2003 - EN- EN
control
Wire 2 Grey
J70 Leading to
mark
2 856 1 + APC electro-hydraulic lift J48 8
3 858 0.6 Transport mode indicator J48 5 1 855 859 7
4 859 0.6 K line J85 B6
5 862 0.6 L line J85 A3 2 856 862 8
6 — — ——- 7
7 — — ——- 3 858 M8I 9 8
8 — — ——- 9
9 M8I 1 Electro-hydraulic lift ground J51 B4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7

mark
B
A1 864 0.6 L line J29 10
A2 861 0.6 L line J47 5
A3 862 0.6 L line J70 5
A4 — — ——-
Grey
1
A5 — — ——-
2
A6 — — ——- A
3
A7 — — ——-
B
5
6
7
B1 — — ——-
B2 — — ——-
B3 — — ——
B4 863 0.6 K line J29 9
B5 857 0.6 K line transport mode J48 3
B6 859 0.6 K line J70 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
B7 860 0.6 K line J47 6 A 864 861 862
B 863 857 859 860
60 05MR
029334
684- 02-2003
- 10.2003- EN
- EN F.115
8b - Transmission control harness (mec
control hanical re
(mechanical ver
reverser)
verser) 8b - Transmission control harness (mec
control hanical re
(mechanical ver
reverser)
verser)
mechanical or hydraulic doubler / mechanical or hydraulic doubler /
mechanical or electro-hydraulic lift mechanical or electro-hydraulic lift
9/2
P70
J45 Front axle control
J70
J46
J45
J46 Front PTO control
220
J49
J49* Ranges control

J51 Shunt base
J50
J52* Doubler relay
J53* Doubler relay
J70** Electro-hydraulic lift harness connection
J85** Shunt base
* Version with hydraulic doubler

** Version with electro-hydraulic lift
J49
0,1
J52
53
J29
7b
J53
110
E0A
J85
J51
P50
J50
J48
J47
334F801
F.116 60 05MR
029334
684- 02-2003
- 10.2003- EN
- EN
8b - Transmission control harness (mechanical reverser)
mechanical or hydraulic doubler /
mechanical or electro-hydraulic lift
Version with mechanical lift
mark
1 800 803 806 811 838 M8C 16
820
2 801 0.6 Hydraulic pressure J50 1 2 801 804 808 815 M8D 17
3 802 0.6 Fuel level J50 2
3 802 805 810 817 18
5 804 0.6 TA speed J50 4
6 805 0.6 Gearbox engaged J50 5 Brown
7 806 0.6 Rear PTO clutched J50 6
9 810 0.6 K line J47 6
10 811 0.6 L line J47 5
12 817 0.6 Front axle control J45 5 16
13 838* 0.6 Hydraulic doubler indicator J53 2
17
14 — — ——
15 — — ——- 18
17 M8D 0.6 TA speed ground J50 25
18 — — ——-
Wire 2 Version with electro-hydraulic lift

J29 Leading to
mark
1 800 803 806 834 838 M8C 16
1 800 0.6 Min. fuel warning J50 10 820
2 801 0.6 Hydraulic pressure J50 1 2 801 804 808 815 M8D 17
3 802 0.6 Fuel level J50 2
4 803 0.6 TA speed power supply J50 3 3 802 805 833 817 18
5 804 0.6 TA speed J50 4
7 806 0.6 Rear PTO clutched J50 6 Brown
9 833 0.6 K line J85 B4
10 834 0.6 L line J85 A1
13 838* 0.6 Hydraulic doubler indicator J53 2 16
14 — — —— 17
15 — — ——- 18
17 M8D 0.6 TA speed ground J50 25
18 — — ——-

mark
2 4 6 8
2
4
2 — — ——-
6
3 — — ——-
8
4 — — ——- 816 817

5 817 0.6 Front axle control J29 12 1 3 5 7
6 — — ——-
7 — — ——-
8 — — ——-
MR029
60 05 334684
- 02-2003 - EN
- 10.2003 - EN F.117

mark
1 814 0.6 Front SV PTO control J50 11
1 815 0.6 Front PTO indicator J29 11 2 4 6 8
2
2 — — ——-
4
3 — — ——-
6
4 — — ——-
8
814
815 813
5 813 0.6 + APC rear PTO control J48 9
6 — — ——- 1 3 5 7
7 — — ——-
8 — — ——-
Version with mechanical lift

mark
4 809 811 810 M8F 7
1 — — ——-
2 — — ——- 8 823 824 11
3 — — ——-
4 809 1 Diagnostic socket power supply J51 A6 12 14
5 811 0.6 L line J29 9
6 810 0.6 K line J29 10
7 M8F 1 Diagnostic socket earth J51 B1
9 824 0.6 CAN H engine calculator J50 15 Black
10 — — ——-
11 — — ——-
12 — — ——-
13 — — ——-
14 — — ——-
Version with electro-hydraulic lift

1 3
mark 4 809 831 830 M8F 7
1 — — ——- 8 823 824 11

2 — — ——-
3 — — ——- 12 14
4 809 1 Diagnostic socket power supply J51 A6
5 831 0.6 L line J85 A2
6 830 0.6 K line J85 B7
7 M8F 1 Diagnostic socket ground J51 B1
8 823 0.6 CAN L engine calculator J50 14 Black
10 — — ——-
11 — — ——-
12 — — ——-
13 — — ——-
14 — — ——-
F.118 MR029
60 05 334684
- 02-2003 - EN
- 10.2003 - EN
11 9 7 5 3 1
Wire 2 J48 Leading to 822 813 828 827 821
mark
812 816 826 825
12 10 8 6 4 2
2 — — ——-
3 827** 0.6 Transport mode K line J85 B5
4 — — ——- Brown
5 828** 0.6 Transport mode indicator J70 3
11
6 825** 0.6 D+ electro-hydraulic lift J70 1
9
7
7 — — ——-
5
8 826** 1 + APC electro-hydraulic lift J70 2
3
9 813 0.6 + APC front PTO control J46 5
1
12 812 1 + APC transmission control J51 A7
** Electro-hydraulic lift version
1 2 3 4 5
Wire 2 J49 Leading to A 836 837
mark
B 835
A1 — — ——-
A2 836 0.6 + ranges control J53 5
A3 — — ——-
Grey
A4 837 0.6 – ranges control J52 1
1
A5 — — ——- A
2
B1 — — ——- B
5
B2 — — ——-
B4 — — ——
B5 — — ——-
MR029
60 05 334684
- 02-2003 - EN
- 10.2003 - EN F.119

mark
2 802 0.6 Fuel level J29 3
4 804 0.6 TA speed J29 5
6 806 0.6 Rear PTO clutch switch J29 7
7 807 0.6 + APC Rear PTO clutch switch J51 A5
9 839* 0.75 EV hydraulic doubler J53 4
11 814 0.6 Front EV PDF control J46 1
16 — — ——-
17 — — ——-
18 — — ——-
19 — — ——-
20 — — ——-
21 — — ——-
22 — — ——- 1 801 802 803 804 4
23 M8B 1 Transmission ground J51 A2
24 M8C 0.6 Fuel level ground J29 16 5 805 806 807 808 839 9
25 M8D 0.6 TA speed ground J29 17 10 800 814 821 822 823 824 15
26 — — ——- 22
16
27 — — ——-
28 — — ——- 23 M8B M8C M8D 28
29 — — ——- 29 33
30 — — ——-
34 37
31 — — ——-
32 — — ——-
33 — — ——-
34 — — ——-
35 — — ——-
36 — — ——-
37 — — ——-
F.120 MR029
60 05 334684
- 02-2003 - EN
- 10.2003 - EN
Version with mechanical doubler 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
A
Wire 2 J51 Leading to B
mark
A2 809 1 Diagnostic socket power supply J47 4 Black
A3 812 1 + APC transmission control J48 12
1
A4 — — ——-
2
A
3
A5 M8A 1 Transmission ctrl ground E0A
A6 M8B 1 Transmission ground J50 23 B
5
6
A7 — — ——-
7
B1 819 0.6 + APC Rear PTO clutch switch 59
B2 — — ——-
B3 — — ——-
B4 M8I** 1 Electro-hydraulic lift ground J70 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
B5 — — ——-
B6 — — ——- A 807 809 812 M8A M8B
B7 M8F 1 Diagnostic socket ground J47 7
B 819 M8I M8F
Version with hydraulic doubler 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
A
B
mark
A1 M8A 1 Transmission ctrl ground E0A
A2 M8B 1 Transmission ground J50 23 Black
A3 M8I** 1 Electro-hydraulic lift ground J70 9
1
A4 — — ——-
2
A
3

A6 809 1 Diagnostic socket power supply J47 4 B
5
6
A7 812 1 + APC transmission control J48 12

7
B1 M8F 1 Diagnostic socket ground J47 7

B2 M8G 0.6 Relay 100 ground J52 2
B3 M8H 0.6 Relay 101 ground J53 6
B4 819 0.6 + APC Rear PTO clutch switch 59
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
B6 840 0.6 + APC relay 100 J52 4 A M8A M8B M8I 807 809 812
B7 841 0.75 + APC relay 101 J53 7
B M8F M8G M8H 819 835 840 841

mark 5
5
1 837 0.6 – ranges control J49 A4 2 M8G 840 837 1

2 M8G 0.6 Relay ground J51 B2
4 4
3 842 0.6 Relay J53 3
1
4 840 0.6 + APC relay J51 B6 842
5 — — ——- 3
3
MR029
60 05 334684
- 02-2003 - EN
- 10.2003 - EN F.121

mark 2 838 1
1 — — ——- 2
4 839 842 3
2 838 0.6 Hydraulic doubler indicator J29 13 4
3 842 0.6 Relay J52 3 6 M8H 836 5 1
6
3
5 836 0.6 + ranges control J49 A2 7 841
7 5
6 M8H 0.6 Relay ground J51 B3
7 841 0.75 + APC relay J51 B7

Grey
mark
2 826 1 + APC electro-hydraulic lift J48 8 1 825 829 7
3 828 0.6 Transport mode indicator J48 5
4 829 0.6 K line J85 B6 2 826 832 8
5 832 0.6 L line J85 A3 7
6 — — ——- 3 828 M8I 9 8
7 — — ——- 9
8 — — ——-
9 M8I 1 Electro-hydraulic lift ground J51 A3
Electro-hydraulic lift version only
1 2 3 4 5 6 7

A
mark B
A1 834 0.6 L line J29 10
A2 831 0.6 L line J47 5
A3 832 0.6 L line J70 5 Grey
A4 — — ——-
1
A5 — — ——-
2
A
3
A6 — — ——-
A7 — — ——- B
5
6
7
B1 — — ——-
B2 — — ——-
B3 — — ——
B4 833 0.6 K line J29 9
B5 827 0.6 Kline / Transport mode Indicator J48 3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
B6 829 0.6 K line J70 4
B7 830 0.6 K line J47 6 A 834 831 832
Electro-hydraulic lift version only B 833 827 829 830
F.122 MR029
60 05 334684
- 02-2003 - EN
- 10.2003 - EN
MR
60 05 334
029 - 02-2003
684 - EN
- 10.2003 - EN F.123
9/1 - Electro-hydraulic lift (EHL) control harness 9/1 - Electro-hydraulic lift (EHL) control harness
J106
J101 Electro-hydraulic lift harness connection
J102 Shunt base
P70
J70
8
J103 Shunt base
J101
J104 Shunt base
P70
J70
J105
J105 Electro-hydraulic lift calculator
J106 Electro-hydraulic lift control box
J107 Lift LH control
J108 Lower LH control
191
J104
J109 Lift RH control

J110 Lower RH control
J103
182
J109
J102
J106
J110
9/2
J101
P101
J108
J107
334F910
F.124 MR
60 05 334
029 - 02-2003
684 - EN
- 10.2003 - EN
9/1 - Electro-hydraulic lift (EHL) control harness
Wire 2 J101 Leading to 1 927 931 930 3

mark
4 937 940 7
1 927 0.75 + VREF draft J104 A3
2 931 0.75 Draft signal J105 17 8 934 939 11
3 930 0.75 – VREF draft J104 7
4 — — ——- 12 926 924 929 14
5 937 0.75 Lower valve control J104 B7
6 940 0.75 Lower valve return J103 B3
7 — — ——-
8 — — ——-
9 934 0.75 Rise valve control J104 B3 Black
10 939 0.75 Lift valve return J103 B2
11 — — ——-
12 926 0.75 + VREF position J104 A2
13 924 0.75 Position signal J105 19
14 929 0.75 + VREF position J104 6
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Wire 2 J102 Leading to B

mark
A1 904 0.75 + VREF (9.5 V) J105 12 Black
A2 905 0.75 + VREF (9.5 V) J106 4
A3 914 0.75 + VREF (9.5 V) J110 B
1
2
A4 — — ——- A
3
A5 — — ——
A6 — — —— B 5
6
A7 — — —— 7
B1 915 0.75 + VREF (9.5 V) J109 B

B2 916 0.75 + VREF (9.5 V) J107 B
B3 917 0.75 + VREF (9.5 V) J108 B
B4 — — —— 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
B5 — — —— A 904 905 914
B6 — — ——
B7 — — —— B 915 916 917
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
A
B
mark
A1 900 0.75 Lift control J105 10
A2 910 0.75 Lift control J109 A
A3 911 0.75 Lift control J107 A
Grey
1
A4 — — ——-
2
A
3
A5 901 0.75 Lower control J105 20

A6 912 0.75 Lower control J110 A
B
5
6
A7 913 0.75 Lower control J108 A

7
B1 938 0.75 Valves return J105 6

B2 939 0.75 Lift valve return J101 10
B3 940 0.75 Lower valve return J101 6
B4 M9A 0.75 EHL control ground P70 9
B5 M9B 075 EHL calculator ground J105 1
B6 M9C 0.75 EHL control box J106 15 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
B7 M9D 0.75 Chassis ground 182 A 900 910 911 901 912 913
B 938 939 940 M9A M9B M9C M9D
60 05
MR029
334684 - 10.2003
- 02-2003 - EN
- EN F.125
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
mark
B
A1 925 0.75 + VREF sensors J105 13
A2 926 0.75 + VREF position J101 12
A3 927 0.75 + VREF draft J101 1
A4 — — ——- Grey
A5 928 0.75 – VREF sensors J105 15
1
2
A6 929 0.75 + VREF position J101 14 A
3
A7 930 0.75 + VREF draft J101 3
B
5
6
7
B1 932 0.75 Rise valve control J105 2
B2 933 0.75 Lift leds control J106 12
B3 934 0.75 Rise valve control J101 9
B4 — — ——-
B5 935 0.75 Lower valve control J105 14
B6 936 0.75 Lower leds control J106 11 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
B7 937 0.75 Lower valve control J101 5
A 925 926 927 928 929 930
B 932 933 934 935 936 937

mark
1 M9B 0.75 EHL calculator ground J103 B5
2 932 0.75 Rise valve control J104 B1
3 903 0.75 + VREF (1.6 V) J106 6
4 906 0.75 Mixed J106 2
14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
5 902 0.75 D+ alternator P70 1
6 938 0.75 Valves return J103 B1 935 928 909 931 924 901 923 908 907 941
7 922 0.75 L line P70 5 M9B 932 903 906 902 938 922 918 919 900 920 904 925
8 918 0.75 Selector J106 9
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
9 919 0.75 Diagnostic indicator J106 14
10 900 0.75 Lift control J103 A1
11 920 0.75 K line P70 4
12 904 0.75 + VREF (9.5 V) J102 A1
13 925 0.75 + VREF sensors J104 A1 14
14 935 0.75 Lower valve control J104 B5 15

16
17
18
15 928 0.75 – VREF sensors J104 A5 19
20
21
16 909 0.75 Depth setting J106 7 22
23
24
25
17 931 0.75 Draft signal J101 2
18 — — ——-
20 901 0.75 Lower control J103 A5
21 923 0.75 Transport mode control J106 1
22 908 0.75 Upper stop J106 13
23 — — ——-
24 907 0.75 Lower speed J106 10
25 941 0.75 + APC electro-hydraulic lift P70 2
F.126 60 05
MR029
334684 - 10.2003
- 02-2003 - EN
- EN
1
12 2
Wire 2 J106 Leading to 923
mark 933 906
11 3
14
936 908 919 921
1 923 0.75 Transport mode control J105 21
13
2 906 0.75 Mixed J105 4 16 15
10 907 905 4
3 921 0.75 Transport mode indicator P70 3
4 905 0.75 + VREF (9.5 V) J102 A2 M9C
5 — — ——- 918 17
6 903 0.75 + VREF (1.6 V) J105 3 9 5
7 909 0.75 Depth setting J105 16 903
909
8 — — ——- 8 6
9 918 0.75 Selector J105 8 7
10 907 0.75 Lower speed J105 24
11 936 0.75 Lower leds control J104 B6
12 933 0.75 Lift leds control J104 B2
13 908 0.75 Upper stop J105 22
14 919 0.75 Diagnostic indicator J105 9
15 M9C 0.75 EHL control box ground J103 B6
16 — — ——-
17 — — ——-
18 — — ——-

mark C B A
A 911 0.75 Lift control J103 A3 916 911 C
B 916 0.75 + VREF (9.5 V) J102 B2 B
A
C — — ——-

mark C B A
A 913 0.75 Lower control J103 A7 917 913 C

B 917 0.75 + VREF (9.5 V) J102 B3 B
A
C — — ——-

mark C B A
A 910 0.75 Lift control J103 A2 915 910 C
B 915 0.75 + VREF (9.5 V) J102 B1 B
A
C — — ——-

mark C B A
A 912 0.75 Lower control J103 A6 914 912 C

B
B 914 0.75 + VREF (9.5 V) J102 A3 A
C — — ——-
60 05
MR029
334684 - 10.2003
- 02-2003 - EN
- EN F.127
Wire 2 Grey
P70 Leading to
mark
1 902 0.75 D+ alternator J105 5
2 941 0.75 + APC electro-hydraulic lift J105 25 7 920 902 1
3 921 0.75 Transport mode indicator J106 3
4 920 0.75 K line J105 11 8 922 941 2
5 922 0.75 L line J105 7
6 — — ——- 9 M9A 921 3
1
7 — — ——-
8 — — ——- 2
9 M9A 0.75 EHL control ground J103 B4 3
F.128 60 05
MR029
334684 - 10.2003
- 02-2003 - EN
- EN
MR
60 05 334684
029 - 02-2003 - EN
- 10.2003 - EN F.129
9/2 - Electro-hydraulic lift (EHL) harness 9/2 - Electro-hydraulic lift (EHL) harness
J111 Lift valve
J112 Lower valve
J113 Position sensor
J114 Effort sensor
P101 EHL control harness connection
J111
J112
J113
J114
9/1
P101
J101
334F920
F.130 MR
60 05 334684
029 - 02-2003 - EN
- 10.2003 - EN
9/2 - Electro-hydraulic lift (EHL) harness
Grey

1 2
mark
965 966
1 965 0.75 Rise valve control P101 9
1
2 966 0.75 Lift valve return P101 10
2
Black
1 2
mark
963 964
1 963 0.75 Lower valve control P101 5
2 964 0.75 Lower valve return P101 6
1
2
Black
mark 1 2 3
1 969 0.75 – VREF position P101 14 969 968 967

2 968 0.75 Position signal P101 13 1
2
3 967 0.75 + VREF position P101 12 3
Grey
mark
1 2 3
1 962 0,75 – VREF draft P101 3 962 961 960
2 961 0,75 Draft signal P101 2 1
3 960 0,75 + VREF draft P101 1 2
3
Wire 2 P101 Leading to 1 960 961 962 3

mark
4 963 964 7
1 960 0.75 + VREF draft J114 3
8 965 966 11
2 961 0.75 Draft signal J114 2
3 962 0.75 – VREF draft J114 1 12 967 968 969 14
4
5 963 0.75 Lower valve control J112 1 Black
6 964 0.75 Lower valve return J112 2
7
8 — — ——-
9 965 0.75 Rise valve control J111 1
10 966 0.75 Lift valve return J111 2
11
12 967 0.75 + VREF position J113 3
14 969 0.75 – VREF position J113 1
MR
60 05 334
029 - 02-2003
684 - EN
- 10.2003 - EN F.131
F.132 60 05
MR029
334684 - 10.2003
- 02-2003 - EN
- EN
TOOLS
MR
60 05334
029- 684
02.2003 - EN - EN
- 10.2003 F.133
Electricity tools
60 05 006 703 6703 60 05 006 704 6704
- Crimping pliers - Pin extractor
60 05 006 707 6707 60 05 006 744 6744
- Ammeter pliers
(a.c. and d.c.) - Multifunction multimeter
0 2A - 0 200 A (except temperature)
60 05 006 758 6758 77 00 054 361 4361
- Extractor for releasing MIC type clips and - Extractor for releasing pins on instrument
tags panel connectors
F.134 MR05
60 334 - 02.2003
029 - EN - EN
684 - 10.2003
Electricity tools
77 00 065 236 5236
- Pin extractor
relay plate and interconnections
MR
60 05334
029- 684
02.2003 - EN - EN
- 10.2003 F.135
Personal notes:
F.136 MR05
60 334 - 02.2003
029 - EN - EN
684 - 10.2003
F
CABINE
ARCEAU
10 - 2003 Chapter F
G1
ENGINE MANAGEMENT
G2
TRANSMISSION MANAGEMENT
G3
TCE 9 ELECTRONIC LIFT
G4
COMBINED INSTRUMENT PANEL
G5
INFOTRAC
G6
METADIAG DIAGNOSTIC APPLICATION
10 - 2003 Chapter G
60 05 029 684 - 10.2003 - EN
CONTENTS
ENGINE MANAGEMENT
Location of the components and sensors .................................................................................................... G1.2
Specifications of the components and connections ..................................................................................... G1.3
Engine cooling fluid temperature sensor ...................................................................................................... G1.4
Fuel temperature sensor ............................................................................................................................. G1.5
Position sensor of crankshaft ...................................................................................................................... G1.6
Pump control solenoid valve ........................................................................................................................ G1.7
Calculator .................................................................................................................................................... G1.8
Accelerator potententiometer ...................................................................................................................... G1.9
Schematic diagram of the calculator ......................................................................................................... G1.10
TRANSMISSION MANAGEMENT
Location of the components and sensors .................................................................................................... G2.3
Location of the components and sensors (cont’d) ........................................................................................ G2.4
Specifications of the components and operating principles .......................................................................... G2.5
Adjustment of the switches on the clutch pedal ......................................................................................... G2.12
TCE 9 ELECTRONIC LIFT

Schematic diagram ..................................................................................................................................... G3.2
Control unit and checks .............................................................................................................................. G3.2
Location of the sensors and solenoid valves ................................................................................................ G3.2
Mechanical adjustment of the draft and position sensors ............................................................................. G3.4
Access to sensors ...................................................................................................................................... G3.5
Mechanical adjustment of the sensors ........................................................................................................ G3.5
Electrical adjustment of the sensors ........................................................................................................... G3.6
Checking the solenoid valves supply voltage (3) ........................................................................................... G3.7
COMBINED INSTRUMENT PANEL

Functions of the instrument panel ............................................................................................................... G4.2
Digital display (D) ........................................................................................................................................ G4.3
Digital display (E) ........................................................................................................................................ G4.3
Removal/installation of the instrument panel ................................................................................................ G4.3
Schematic diagram – Specifications of the various components .................................................................. G4.4
60 05 029 684 - 10.2003 - EN

INFOTRAC
Functions of the on-board computer ............................................................................................................ G5.2
Description of the front face ......................................................................................................................... G5.2
Box removal - Bulbs replacement ................................................................................................................ G5.4
Schematic diagram ..................................................................................................................................... G5.6
Functions of the connector wires ................................................................................................................. G5.7
Outside air temperature probe ..................................................................................................................... G5.8
Forward speed calibration ........................................................................................................................... G5.9
Maintenance function ................................................................................................................................ G5.10
TOOLS
Tools chapter G ......................................................................................................................................... G5.11
60 05 029 684 - 10.2003 - EN

G1
ENGINE MANAGEMENT
Engine management
Location of the components and sensors
7
Accelerator
potententiometer
G1-002
Manifold air
temperature sensor
1
Engine cooling fluid
temperature sensor
Fuel temperature
sensor
3
4
Position sensor of
crankshaft
6
Calculator
5
Pump control
solenoid valve
G1-001 Fig. 1
G1.2 MR 334
60 05 – 02.2003
029 – EN - EN
684 - 10.2003
Engine management
Specifications of the components and connections

Manifold air temperature sensor
Tightening torque = 10 Nm
CTN type sensor (the resistance decreases proportionaly in relation to the temperature increase).
Role = Informs the air temperature calculator to obtain the appropriate amount of fuel in normal mode and at the end of cold-start.
Note: on turbo engine, it is only used to manage cold-start.
F probe voltage measurement (t°) on Metadiag
t° C V +/- 0.4%
-20 4.914
-10 4.850
0 4.748 UCE
10 4.595
20 4.378
30 4.089
40 3.730 5V
50 3.313
60 2.867
70 2.422
80 2.004
90 1.632
100 1.315 G1-004
110 1.053
120 0.841
Manifold air temperature

sensor
Sensor feedback
t B B
A A Temperature
input
D1 D3
A3 B3 C3 D3 E3 F3 G3 H3 J3 K3
A2 B2 C2 D2 E2 F2 G2 H2 J2 K2
A1 B1 C1 D1 E1 F1 G1 H1 J1 K1
UCE unit connector
G1-003 Fig. 2
MR05334
60 029– 684
02.2003 – EN - EN
- 10.2003 G1.3
Engine management
Engine cooling fluid temperature sensor
CTNtypesensor
Role = informs the calculator of the amount of fuel to be supplied at startup.

Determines the tick-over speed.
Protection of the engine.
F probe voltage measurement (t°)

16°C → 4.2 Ω
KΩ ± 10%
60°C → 134 Ω ± 10%
90°C → 51.2 Ω ± 10%
100°C 38.5 Ω ± 10%
Engine cooling fluid

temperature sensor
Sensor feedback
t B B
A Temperature input
A
B1 D3
A3 B3 C3 D3 E3 F3 G3 H3 J3 K3
A2 B2 C2 D2 E2 F2 G2 H2 J2 K2
G1-005
A1 B1 C1 D1 E1 F1 G1 H1 J1 K1
UCE unit connector
Fig. 3
G1.4 MR 334
60 05 – 02.2003
029 – EN - EN
684 - 10.2003
Engine management
Fuel temperature sensor

Tightening torque = 13 to 18 Nm
CTNtypesensor
Role = informs the calculator of the appropriate amount of fuel to provide.
Measurement of the f probe voltage (t°) on Metadiag.

Same values as manifold air temperature probe.
Fuel temperature sensor
Sensor feedback
t B B
A A Temperature
input
C3 D3
A3 B3 C3 D3 E3 F3 G3 H3 J3 K3
A2 B2 C2 D2 E2 F2 G2 H2 J2 K2
A1 B1 C1 D1 E1 F1 G1 H1 J1 K1
UCE unit connector
G1-006
Fig. 4
MR 334
60 05 – 02.2003
029 – EN - EN
684 - 10.2003 G1.5
Engine management
Position sensor of crankshaft

Inductive sensor
Role = informs the calculator of the engine speed.
Resistor voltage measurement.

Resistance: 3 kΩ ± 10 %.
Position sensor of
crankshaft
Sensor feedback
B B
A A Crankshaft position
input
B2 D2
A3 B3 C3 D3 E3 F3 G3 H3 J3 K3
A2 B2 C2 D2 E2 F2 G2 H2 J2 K2
A1 B1 C1 D1 E1 F1 G1 H1 J1 K1
UCE unit connector
G1-007
Fig. 5
The adjustement wheel comprises 46 teeths equally spaced and two missing teeths, these determine the top neutral.
G1.6 MR 334
60 05 – 02.2003
029 – EN - EN
684 - 10.2003
Engine management
Pump control solenoid valve
Role = depending on the calculator controls allows or not the fuel to reach the injection pressure.
Measurement of the resistor.

Resistance: 0.3 → 0.4 Ω to 18 °C.
A1 A2 A3
Pump solenoid
B1 B2 B3
valve
C1 C2 C3
D1 D2 D3
Solenoid valve return A3 E1 E2 E3
B B
A Solenoid valve supply K2
A
F1 F2 F3
G1 G2 G3
H1 H2 H3
J1 J2 J3
K1 K2 K3
UCE unit connector
G1-008
Fig. 6
Note: in case of solenoid valve failure, the pump should be returned to Stanadyne for replacement.
MR 334
60 05 – 02.2003
029 – EN - EN
684 - 10.2003 G1.7
Engine management
Calculator
Role = the calculator compiles the various information items necessary to manage the amount of fuel to be injected and the time
of injection.
To meet the requirements of the new noise and consumption standards, the calculator manages two engine curves.
Beyond 30 kph, the engine switches to the 2,350 rpm curve (curve 2), it is necessary to go below 25 kph to resume curve 1. This
information is given by the instrument panel.
The calculator controls the preheating from – 5 °C.
Operating conditions for the intake air heating system

Intake air heating system operating
Fuel temperature Preheating time Indicator light on for
– 5 °C to – 15 °C 15 seconds
– 15 °C to – 25 °C 20 seconds 30 seconds
– 30 °C… 20 seconds
It checks the diagnostic system and informs Metadiag of the various anomaly codes (refer to Metafiag Diagnostic).
It protects the engine by decreasing power when receiving the following information:
– GO temperature.
– Cooling fluid temperature.
– GO temperature: when GO temperature exceeds 120°C, the calculator reduces the engine power by 2% per minute
untill it reaches 80% of its maximum power.
– Cooling fluid temperature: when cooling fluid temperature is
> 113 °C, power decrease of 40% per minute to 60% of its maximum power.
> 118 °C, power decrease of 60% per minute to 40% of its maximum power.
A1 A2 A3
B1 B2 B3
C1 C2 C3
D1 D2 D3
E1 E2 E3
Engine control unit
connector
F1 F2 F3
G1 G2 G3
H1 H2 H3
J1 J2 J3
K1 K2 K3
G1-009 Fig. 7
G1.8 MR 334
60 05 – 02.2003
029 – EN - EN
684 - 10.2003
Engine management
Accelerator potentiometer
- Hall effect detector.
Adjustment:
Output voltage measurement: (ignition on).
Using the 6005005577 cable measure the «cursor» voltage.
Example of
measurement on tractor
V 0.5 V < U < 0.9 V
3.1 V < U < 4.5 V

0.85 V
3.47 V
+APC
Ref. No. 60 05 005 577
2
B B B B
3
C C C C
1 A A
A A
D3 B3
A3 B3 C3 D3 E3 F3 G3 H3 J3 K3
A2 B2 C2 D2 E2 F2 G2 H2 J2 K2
G1-010 A1 B1 C1 D1 E1 F1 G1 H1 J1 K1
Calculator connector
+ APC
2
B B
3
C C
1 A
A
D3 B3
A3 B3 C3 D3 E3 F3 G3 H3 J3 K3
A2 B2 C2 D2 E2 F2 G2 H2 J2 K2
A1 B1 C1 D1 E1 F1 G1 H1 J1 K1
G1-011
Calculator connector
Fig. 8
MR
60 05 334
029 - 02.2003
684 - EN
- 10.2003 - EN G1.9
Engine management
Calculator schematic diagram
+ 12 V APC
+12 V AVC
Sensorfeedback
197
1 3 2
A C B
A
25
B 406 B 201 B 405
t t A
139
A A A B
B
C3 B1 D3 D1 D2 B2 K2 A3 B3 A2 K1
24
CAN L CAN H
K3 J1 G2 G3 C1 J2 F1 G1
226
34
28/J35 32/J35 33/J35 9/J35
185
7 8 9 262
Description
25 Pump control solenoid valve Ground
34 Preheating sparking plug
201 Cooling fluid temperature sensor
139 Crankshaft position sensor
226 Preheating coil relay
262 Diagnostic socket
197 Accelerator potentiometer
405 Engine air temperature sensor
406 Fuel temperature sensor
G1-012 Fig. 9
G1.10 MR
60 05 334
029 - 02.2003
684 - EN
- 10.2003 - EN
G2 – TRANSMISSION MANAGEMENT
Personal notes:
G2.2 60MR 334684

05 029 – 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
Transmission management
Location of the components and sensors
ISC module speed sensor
Gear change and clutch release handle
Diagnostic socket
Forward drive speed sensor

Forward drive solenoid valve
Drivetronic
Reverse drive solenoid valve

Pressure switch Doubler solenoid valve
G2-002
G2-001
Fig. 1
60 05MR 334
029 - 02.2003
684 - EN
- 10.2003 - EN G2.3
Gestion transmission
Location of the components and sensors (Cont’d)
TOC
Reverser control switch

BOC
G2-004
Angular detector
Alternator (engine speed)
G2-003
G2-005
Fig. 2
G2.4 60 05MR 334

029 - 02.2003
684 - EN
- 10.2003 - EN
Specifications of the components and operating principle

1 - Reverser lever
Arès type wiring diagram
Forward drive Neutral

FR N FR N
RR RR
R R
D2 D1 D2 D1
B3 A2 A4 B2 B5 B4 B1 B3 A2 A4 B2 B5 B4 B1
(+12 V) FRONT REAR NEUTRAL (ground) +PSV (+12 V) (+12 V) FRONT REAR NEUTRAL (ground) +PSV (+12 V)
Press A2 (front) A4 (rear) B2 (neutral) B4 (+APC PSV) Press A2 (front) A4 (rear) B2 (neutral) B4 (+APC PSV)
REAR 0 +12 V 0 +12 V NEUTRAL 0 0 +12 V 0
G2-006 G2-007
Reverse drive Declutched

FR N FR N
RR RR
R R
D2 D1 D2 D1
B3 A2 A4 B2 B5 B4 B1 B3 A2 A4 B2 B5 B4 B1
(+12 V) FRONT REAR NEUTRAL (ground) +PSV (+12 V) (+12 V) FRONT REAR NEUTRAL (ground) +PSV (+12 V)
Press A2 (front) A4 (rear) B2 (neutral) B4 (+APC PSV) Press A2 (front) A4 (rear) B2 (neutral) B4 (+APC PSV)
REAR 0 +12 V 0 +12 V DECLUTCHED 0 0 +12 V +12 V
G2-008 G2-009
Fig. 3
2 - Reverser lever (Cobo)
A2 A4 B1 B2 B4 B5
G2-019 Fig. 4
A2 A4 B1 B2 B4 B5
NEUTRAL FR D R VD + APC NEUTRAL NOT NEUTRAL GROUND
60 MR 334684
05 029 – 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN G2.5
3 - Clutch release control and Twinshift - ARES type
Clutch
release
+
A2 A4 B3 A1 A5 B5
A2 A4 B3 A1 A5 B5
faster slower + APC Cont+ro1l2sVwitch Neutral input Ground
G2-010 Fig. 5
4 - Clutch release control and Twinshift - cobo type
Clutch
release
A5 A2 A4 B3
A5 A2 A4 B3
Neutral input faster slower + APC
G2-011 Fig. 6
G2.6 60 MR 334684
05 029 – 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
5 - Twinshift solenoid valve

Tightening torque: 25 + 5 N.m. (body)
Tightening torque: 5 N.m. maximum (screw)
«On-off» solenoid valve
U solenoid valve = 12 V = hare
resistance = 8Ω
6 - Proportional solenoid valves

Resistance = 10 Ω
Tightening torque = 18 ± 3 Nm
Solenoid valves electric control cycle
Voltage setting
Description
4
1 5 (1) Pre-filling of the chamber
(32 m/sec.)
(2) End of the filling of the
3 chamber (272 m/sec.)
2 (3) Licking phase (as long as
clutched gear = 0)
(4) Clutch engaging phase
(5) Clutch engaged phase
Time (1,2 A)
G2-012 Fig. 7
60 MR 334684
05 029 – 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN G2.7
7- Pressure switch
Pressure
20,5
20,5
16 ± 0,5
14 ± 0,5
Fig. 8
8 - Hall effect forward drive speed sensor

Static check
Ohmmeter terminals + - + - + - + - + - + -
Sensor terminals 1 2 2 1 1 3 3 1 2 3 3 2
Values in MÙ 11 ∞ 8 ∞ 4
G2-014 Fig. 9
G2.8 60 MR 334684
05 029 – 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
9 - ISC module speed sensor

Coil resistance: 450 Ω ± 20 Ω
Mounting distance adjustment: bring the probe into contact and unscrew it by 1,5 rev. maximum.
G2-015 Fig. 10
10 - Angular detector
Output voltage 0,5 → 4,5 V
2
3 1
2 Supply
3 Output voltage
1 0V
G2-016 Fig. 11
60 MR 334684
05 029 – 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN G2.9
Personal notes:
G2.10 60 MR 334684
05 029 – 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
11 - Calculator
Description
110 110 Interconnections plate
Starting disabled if ground R2 1 + 189a Brake pedal contact at bottom BOC
+APC
37 2 189b Brake pedal contact at the top TOC
R11 3
- 187 Clutch pedal angular detector
188 Reverser control
118 63 +/- handle and clutch release control
+APC +AVC P 37 Forward drive speed sensor
118 Gearbox oil pressure switch
16 34 30 18
6 green 6 red 193 Reverse drive solenoid valve
189a 125 Hydraulic doubler solenoid valve
184 Transmission electronic central unit
2 184
25 24 11 33 34 32 9
1
26
192
28 A
* Calculator wake-up
→ + APC * Reverser locked if: pedal 27 B
→ engine speed or pressure 17 b bottom contact activated

* Sleep or lever to neutral not
189b → hydraulic pressure failure during 4 sec. and activated. 193
A
engine speed < 200 rpm during 6 sec. 30
2 B
+APC 29
3
18
* Twinshift
can H 12 - If U bat > 16 V: twinshift and indicator temporarily off. 27
1
can L 13 - If U bat < 9 V: operation is not guaranteed. 14
can - 36
- If pressure failure: indicator light goes on 2 sec. afterwards and twinshift goes into safety mode 15
2
2 sec.after
187
1 A
→ System locked (crawler speed).
125
In case of engine speed failure: → crawler speed. 31
1
3 C 4
Order - quickly denied if: engine speed > 2420 rpm.
2
2 B
+APC The order is stored and is performed when the engine speed is correct.
6 7 8 1 17 16 10
2
63
1 A2 31 B+ W D+
2
188 - +
B3 A4
B5
A2 +APC
B3
AV + Ð
B4
A4 A1
D2
B1 AR B2 A5
D1
N
B5
A2 R
B5 1 COBO type wiring diagram 63
A4 A5
B4
A2
B1
2 ARES type wiring diagram A4 1
B2 +APC
B3
G2-017 Fig. 12
60 05MR
029334
684- -02.2003
10.2003- -EN
EN G2.11
Contacts adjustment on clutch pedal
AL
TIC
EO 36
LOCTITE242
RE
LOCKINGCOMPOUNDONSET
TH
Pedal lower stop TOC SCREW “CROUZET”DETECTOR
adjustment Pedal engaged (TOC)
“ELOBEAU”ANGULAR
DETECTOR
BOC
AL
EO 32
TIC
RE
“CROUZET”DETECTOR
TH
Pedal disengaged (BOC)
2,5
1,5
Pedal upper stop
adjustment
PEDALENGAGED
G2-020
ADJUSTMENTPROCEDURE:
1 Pedal high position adjustment
Approach the THEORETICAL 32 dimension
Insert a 2.5-mm shim between the TOC and the
stop
Check the detector’s switching and tighten it
Tighten the pedal upper stop
2 Pedal down position adjustment

Approach the THEORETICAL 36 dimension
Insert a 1.5 -mm shim between the BOC and
PEDALDISENGAGED 168 the stop
troke =
al s Check the detector’s switching and tighten it
Ped Tighten the lower pedal stop
G2-018
Fig. 13
G2.12 60 05MR
029334
684- -02.2003
10.2003- -EN
EN
G3 – TCE 9 ELECTRONIC LIFT
Presentation
Schematic diagram
8
6
i 4
1
2 5
STOP
3
7 RENAULT
Console
J 107
1 2
12
3
11
13 14
10 4
+ 12 V 17 15
9
5
Metadiag connector 8
6
Alternator
D+ P.104
w
Position
J 105 sensor
+
U.C.E.
J.113
13 J.114
25
12
11
24
Draft
23 sensor
10
22
9
21
LH rear buttons 8
20
Lift 7
19
J.109
6
18
5
17
J.110
4
16
Lower
3
15 Rise
2 solenoid valve
14
RH rear buttons 1
Lift J.115
J.111
distributor
Lift
J.112
J.116
Lower
Lowering
solenoid valve
334G3001 Fig. 1
G3.2 MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
Presentation
Control unit and checks

(Fig. 2)
1 Memory button 4 positions
2 Position adjustment button
3 Draft control adjustment button
4 Upper stop adjustment button
5 Descent speed adjustment button
6 Transport function switch + light indicator
7 Lift movement indicator: lift or lower
8 Lift safety stop or alarm indicator
Upon start-up, when the safety indicator (8) is on, perform several
actions in order to reset lifting: 334G3002 Fig. 2
– Cancel the effort check by turning the knob (3) anti clockwise.
– Set the memory button (1) to the stop position, then to the work
position.
– Search for the actual position of the arms with the position setting
knob (2) until the safety indicator is off (8).
The permanent lighting or flashing of the indicator (8) indicates
the safety stop or alarm of the TCE 9 unit.
Two types of lighting can occur:
– permanent lighting = unit safety stop. To reset it, apply the lift
application procedure.
– flashing lighting = operating fault. The flashing frequency
defines the nature of the defect. According to the nature of the
defect, the use of lifting remains partially possible or impossible.
Using Metadiag to troubleshoot the problem.
A
Location of the sensors and solenoid
valves B
(right side underfloor, photo 3)
A Position sensor
C
B Draft sensor
D
C Lower solenoid valve
D Rise solenoid valve
334G3003 Photo 3
MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN G3.3
Presentation
Mechanical adjustements of draft

and position sensors
Sensors
1 Position sensor
2 Draft sensor
3 Position sensor cam
334G3004 Photo 4
Draft sensor
1 Contact zone of draft sensor
2 Sensing lever
334G3005 Photo 5
Hydraulic supplies
1 TCE 9 distributor supply
2 Rise cylinder supply
334G3006 Photo 6
G3.4 MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
Adjustment
Access to sensors
Access is ensured through the right side opening of the cab.
1 Draft sensor
2 Position sensor
1 2
334G3007 Photo 7
Mechanical adjustment of the sensors

Refer to the chapter «LIFT - HITCH» for the adjustment of the cam.
Adjust the overlap of the sensors to 58 mm and 55 mm (Fig. 8) in respect of the casing.
334G3008 Fig. 8
MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN G3.5
Adjustment
Electrical adjustment of the sensors

Connect the test harness No. 60 05 005 734 as shown in Fig. 9.
Measure the voltage delivered by the unit between the red connector and the black connector (ground). Measure the voltage rendered
by the sensor between the yellow connector and the black connector.
Draft sensor adjustment value

Without applying any effort to sensing, the output signal voltage must be equal to 50 % of the input voltage.
Example: apply no effort to the sensing, value read: 9.46 volt between the red and black connectors; adjust the sensor in order to
achieve approx. 4.73 volt between the yellow and black connectors, i.e. 50 % of 9.46 volt.
Position sensor adjustment value

When the rise arms are against the casing stop, the output signal voltage must be equal to 75 % of the input voltage.
Example: arm against casing stop, value measured: 9.46 volt between the red and black connectors; adjust the sensor in order
to achieve approx. 7.1 volt between the yellow and black connectors, i.e. 75% of 9.46 volt.
Output signal Us
Tractor harness
3-channel connectors
Sensor Black
Connect the + (red connector) to

check the voltage delivered by the
unit.
Yellow Red Connect the signal (yellow connector)
to check the voltage rendered by the
Beep sensor.
Harness No. 60 05 005 734
2-channel connectors (non used)

334G3009 Fig. 9
G3.6 MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
Adjustment
Position sensor adjustment (1)

Fit a 36 size flat wrench to release the locknut before adjusting the 1
position sensor.
Use the test harness No. 60 05 005 734, between the harness
and the sensor. Connect the electric tester.
Example of value read: 9.46 volt between the red and black
connectors; adjust the sensor in order to achieve approx. 7.1 volt
between the yellow and black connectors, i.e. 75% of 9.46 volt.
334G3010 Photo 10
Draft sensor adjustment (2)

Fit the 36 size wrench to release the locknut before adjusting
the draft sensor. Connect the test harness No. 60 05 005 734,
between the harness and the sensor. Connect the electric
tester. 2
Example: apply no effort to the sensing, value read: 9.46 volt
between the red and black connectors; adjust the sensor in order
to achieve approx. 4.73 volt between the yellow and black
connectors, i.e. 50% of 9.46 volt.
Note: once the sensor adjustments have been
performed, rising is operational. No calibration is
requried.
334G3011 Photo 11
Checking the solenoid valves supply

voltage (3)
To check the supply of the rise and lower solenoid valves, use
harness No. 60 05 005 734.
Use the 2-channel connectors of the harness by connecting the red
(+) and black (ground) connectors to the tester.
Example: actuate a rise of the lift arms, the indicator (7) (Fig.
2) page G3.3 shows the command. The multimedter shows a 3
voltage varying constantly.
Note: this check enables ensuring that the electric supply
actually arrives at the solenoid valves.
334G3012 Photo 12
MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN G3.7
Personal notes:
G3.8 MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
G4 – COMBINED INSTRUMENT PANEL
Description
Functions of the instrument panel
6 7 8 9 10 11 B 11 12 13 14 15 16
5 17
4 18
3
19
2
20
1 21
A E D C
334G4001 Fig. 1
Description 20 Front axle activation indicator

1 Fuel tank indicator 21 Engine cooling fluid temperature warning light
2 Headlamps indicator A Fuel level indicator
3 Trailer 2 indicators light B Engine speed indicator in rpm
4 Trailer 1 indicators light C Engine cooling fluid temperature indicator
5 Tractor indicators light D Theoretical forward speedindicator in km/h or mph
6 Rear PTO indicator E Display:
7 Front PTO indicator – partial hourmeter,
8 Not used – total hourmeter,
9 Handbrake indicator – rear PTO speed,
10 Battery charge indicator – engine speed in rpm,
11 Brake indicator (emergency stop) – digial clock.
12 Engine oil pressure warning light
13 «Hydraulic doubler» oil pressure warning light
14 Transmission oil temperature warning light
15 Dry air filter clogging indicator
16 Engine calculator failure/automatic preheating indicator
17 Not used
18 Transmission calculator failure indicator
19 Hydraulic doubler indicator (reduced speed)
G4.2 MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
Description Removal/installation
Digital display (D) instrument panel
When ignition is switched on, the display (D) goes on and Using a suction cup recommended in the chapter H1 for the
indicates the theoretical forward speed in km/h or mph. windscreen (P/N. of the assembly 60 05 020 187), remove the
instrument panel. Using an adjustable column, tilt the flywheel
Digital display (E) backwards.
When the contact is on, the display (E) lights and
indicates the number of hours of operation ensured.
Press the key (1) several times in order to loop through
the following information items:
– Partial hourmeter
– Total hourmeter,
334G4010 Fig. 10 334G4013 Photo 13
– Rear PTO speed, To replace the bulbs. Unscrew the bolts at the rear of the
instrument panel.
– Digial clock
Reset of the partial hourmeter

– Select the partial hourmeter mode;
– Press the key (1) for 4 seconds.
Digital clock adjustment

– Select the display of the digital clock;
– press the key (1) for 2 seconds (the hour display
flashes);
– adjust the hours by short presses on the key (1): 334G4011 Fig. 11 334G4014 Photo 14
– validate the hours by pressing the key (1) for 2 seconds
(the minute display flashes);
– adjust the minutes by short presses on the key (1);
– validate the minute adjustement by pressing the key
(1) for 2 seconds.
334G4012 Photo 12
MR
60 05 334
029 – 02.2003
684 – -EN
- 10.2003 EN G4.3
G4.4
+
334G4004
speed input
Driver engine
36 V connector
Gearbox engaged
Forward drive speed ground
K line
1,000 rpm PTO
k l
540 rpm PTO
L line
Ppower take-off speed
Speed 5 indicator outlet
Relay output
Battery charge
kl (communication)
Push button
Engine oil pressure

Warning horn
4 wheel drive switch
Brake light contact
+ + +
Power take off engaged
+
Starter
Lights
+ +
60 05
MR029
Microprocessor
334
Engine water temperature
684
Forward drive speed outlet
«slow» doubler
– 02.2003
4 wheel drive solenoid valve outlet
- 10.2003
Engine water temperature warning
– -EN
EN
Engine calculator failure
PWM
Driver
Transmission calculator failure
+
Transmission oil filter clogging
Air filter clogging
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
PWM
–
DRIVER
Alternator
Schematic diagram - specifications of the various components
20 V connector
Advance speed
s
Engine speed input

Transmission oil temperature
Advance speed
+
Trailer 2 steering
brake fluid
Parking brake
Fuel level
s
Trailer 1 steering
Front PTO
+ +
Fuel level
+12 V AVC
–
+
+ 12 V APC
Tractor steering
+
Red reserve indicator

Min. fuel warning
Fuel level ground
Headlight
+
Hydraulic pressure
Forward drive speed supply
Ground
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
+
Fig. 4
+
Operation schematic diagram – Specifications of the various components
185 : instrument panel 185

202 : fuel gauge
J64 : engine calculator
201 : cooling fluid temperature probe
J35 J36
28 32 12 8 15 16
+ APC
White
Red
201 24 J1 G2
B A B1
D3
J64 202
334G4005 Fig. 5
Dimensions (mm)
ø3
0
51
Potentio-
Level 1/1 Position 5 Position meter Ohms
108
135 L angle
5 100° 7±7
184
Level 3/4 Position 4

114 L 4 75.7° 46 ± 11
266
298
3 50.4° 92.5 ± 14
327
Level 1/2 Position 3 182.3 ±

2 23.5°
82.5 L 19
9 266.3 ±
1 12.1°
20
50
12
,1°
Level 1/4 Position 2 50
23
,5° 0 0 320
,4°
43 L 75
,7°
Level 0 Position 1 10
0°
27 L
Absolute zero level Position 0
16.5 L
334G4006 Fig. 6
MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN G4.5
Operation schematic diagram – Specifications of the various components
When the engine is running. The buzzer is triggered and two indicators start blinking if:
– engine oil pressure failure,
– hydraulic pressure failure,
– hand brake and gear box switch engaged,
– engine water temperature warning,
– transmission oil temperature warning (not used),
– brake fluid level too low (not used),
– overshoot of maximum forward speed with speed display blinking (if speed = 45 km/h).
– Warning stops (if speed = 42 km/h).
Engine speed
At the output of the alternator, the signal from the W or R terminal (according to the type of alternator) is of the form specified
in the figure here. The frequency is 0.38 Hz per rpm.
f = 760 Hz for 2,000 rpm.
f = 380 Hz for 1,000 rpm.
Measure frequency at terminal 2 on connector J36 with tool No. 6744 (frequency meter position).
U
(v)
f (Hz)
334G4007 Fig. 7
G4.6 MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
G5 – INFOTRAC
Presentation
Functions of the on-board computer

It informs the user on the following functions:
• Eventscounter • Operating time
• Distance covered • Area covered per hour
• Area covered • Outside temperature
Description of the front face
13
3 12
4
11
6 7 8 9 10
334G5001 Fig. 1
Description 7 Hour counter

1 Total Icon 8 On/off switch and increment
2 Partial Icon 9 Area covered per hour
3 Events counter 10 Temperature
4 Distance covered 11 Function scrolling key
5 Reset key and decrement 12 Implement width
6 Area covered 13 Calibration
G5.2 MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
Presentation
Summary of the functions and measuring ranges
Area
Events Distance Area H our Outside Implement
covered per
counter covered covered counter temperature w idth
hour
0.1 hour
Unit without unit m and km hectare hectare/hour °C metre
and 1 hour
0 to 999 m
Measure 0 to 99.9
0 to 9999 1 to 99.99 km 0 to 99.9 0 to 50 – 40 to + 60 0 to 99.9
range 100 to 999
100 to 999 km
Stop
— — — — — — —
conditions
MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN G5.3
Removal/installation – Electrical checks
Box removal - Bulbs replacement

– Extract the housing clipped in the lining.
334G5002 Photo 2
Removing the bulbs

– Remove the bulbs (A).
334G5003 Photo 3
G5.4 MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
Events counter Temperature

socket probe.
Infotrac plug
334G5004 Fig. 4
MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN G5.5
Schematic diagram
28: outside temperature probe

31 : alternator
110 : fuse box
140 : events counter socket
185 : instrument panel
186 : on-board computer
31 B+ W D+
185
+ –
29
+ APC
110
7
FM21
5
186
11
9
28
5 A
10 T°
2 B
140
334G5005 Fig. 5
G5.6 MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
Functions of the connector wires

14-channel connector - On-board computer (J82)
Channel number Wire mark Function Nature of the signal
1 — Not used —
2 533 Events counter —
3 — Not used —
4 535 D+ On-board computer —
5 532 Outside air temperature probe —
6 — Not used —
7 — Not used —
8 530 + APC +
9 534 Tractor speed
10 M5P On-board computer ground –
11 531 + APC +
12 — Not used —
13 — Not used —
14 — Not used —
MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN G5.7
Outside air temperature probe

It is made of a material whose resistance varies according to the temperature.
Measuring capacity – 40 °C to + 70 °C.
Resistor tolerance: ± 1%.
334G5006 Fig. 6
G5.8 MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
Advance speed calibration
Calibration over 100 metres
334G5007 Fig. 7
This operation is required when changing the dimension of the rear tyres.
– Press the key in order to align the cursor on the implement working width graphic.
– Then press the key for 3 seconds to have access to the speed calibration.
– Select the appropriate forward speed to reach the average speed of 5 km/h.
– Position two marks separated by 100 m.
– When passing the 1st mark, press the on/off switch, which triggers the initialization of the calibration parameters (the displayed parameter
blinks and is half of the number of pulses counted from the theoretical speed sensor).
– When passing the second mark, (100 m) press the on/off switch, which stops the counting. The displayed calibration parameter of
theoretical speed stops blinking.
– A short press on the select button enables the return to the events function in partial mode, a long press of at least 3 seconds enables
the return to the implement width setting.
Note: to determine the sensor channels used, it is necessary to cover a minimum distance of two metres before the start mark,
so before starting the calibration. During calibration, the other functions are in standby but are not stopped or reset.
MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN G5.9
Maintenance function
The computer should allow the technician to change the speed calibration parameters without unwinding the calibration procedure
or to display the version of the installed software.
The procedure to be carried out is the following one:
The user switches on the unit, when starting the engine, while keeping the function select button depressed for at least 4 seconds after
this switching on.
– When the button is depressed, all the rings are lit.
– When releasing the function scrolling key, all the rings of the display are lit for 3 seconds, then the designation “P1” appears for 3
seconds and the calibration parameter of the “Theoretical Speed” is displayed and becomes accessible.
– The calibration parameter of the theoretical speed starts blinking when its value is modified by pressing the +/- keys, the parameter
is validated after a short press on the function select button.
– A second short press on the function select button makes it possible to switch to the calibration parameter of the “Effective Speed”
after displaying the designation “P2” for 3 seconds, the effective speed parameter is then displayed.
– When a long press is operated on the function scrolling key for 4 seconds then the display returns to the “Implement width” function.
– The calibration parameter of the effective speed starts blinking when its value is modified by pressing the +/- keys, the parameter is
validated after a short press on the function button.
– A second short press on the function scrolling key makes it possible to switch to the display of the “Software Version”.
– When a long press is held on the function scrolling key for 4 seconds, then the on-board computer returns to the implement width function.
G5.10 MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
TOOLS
Tools chapter G
Tools
60 05 005 577 5577 60 05 005 734 5734
– Accelerator potentiometer wiring – Test harness
60 05 006 744 6744 77 00 054 361 4361
– Extractor for releasing pins on instrument panel

– Multifunction multimeter (except temperature) connectors
G5.12 MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
CELTIS MÉT
CELTIS ADIA
MÉTADIA
ADIAGG MANUAL
MANUAL
10 - 2003 P/N 60 05 029 684

60 05 029 684 - 10.2003 - EN
60 05 029 684 - 10.2003 - EN
MÉTADIAG
DIAGNOSIS APPLICATION
60 05 029 684 - 10.2003 - EN

Métadiag connection
Métadiag connection
The diagnosis plug (1) is located in the fuse box (2).
When performing the TCE 9 diagnosis, remove the fuse

(3). Do not forget to reconnect it when the diagnosis is
completed.
334G6001 1 2 3 Fig. 1
For TCE and instrument panel

(Fig. 2)
1 2
– Connect harnesses P/N 60 05 006 765 (1) and 60 05 006 730
(2) between the diagnosis plug (1) and interface box
P/N 60 05 006 721 (4).
– Connect harness P/N 60 05 006 739 (3) between the inter-
face box P/N 60 05 006 721 and the micro-computer.
– Set interface box P/N 60 05 006 721 to the “Cerès” position.
CERES
4
ARES
334G6002 Fig. 2
For Revershift and engine

(Fig. 3)
2
– Connect harnesses P/N 60 05 006 765 (2), 60 05 006 760
(1) and 60 05 006 748 (4). 1
– Place interface P/N 60 05 006 747 (3) at the back of the
micro-computer. 4
When performing a diagnosis on the engine, remove the

resistor (grey box) from cable P/N 60 05 006 765 in the
case of a tractor with Revershift.
3
334G6003 Fig. 3
G6.6 MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
Engine management
SPN/FMI codes
The SPN/FMI codes are codes in two parts as per standard SAE J1939.
The first part is the suspect parameter number (SPN). It generally contains 2 to 4 figures.
The SPN identifies the system or component involved.
For example:
SPN 110 indicates a failure in the temperature circuit for the engine cooling fluid.
The second part of the code is the failure mode identificator (FMI).
The FMI contains two figures.
The FMI identifies the type of failure that occurred.
For example:
FMI 3 indicates a value higher than the standard. For the failure to be accurately identified, both the SPN and the FMI are required.
The combination of SPN 110 and FMI 3 indicates a high input voltage for the engine cooling fluid temperature.
The engine control unit (UCE) transmits the SPN/FMI codes on the CAN network.
This enables Métadiag to display the active and stored anomaly diagnosis codes.
The SPN/FMI codes below are classed in increasing order.
List of anomaly codes lighting the engine temperature indicator lamp

SPN 110 FMI 0
List of anomaly codes making the engine temperature indicator lamp to flash
SPN 110 FMI 15
SPN 110 FMI 16
List of anomaly codes lighting the indicator lamp
SPN 1076 FMI 5
SPN 1076 FMI 6
SPN 1076 FMI 10
SPN 2,000 FMI 6
List of anomaly codes making the indicator lamp to flash
SPN 91 FMI 3
SPN 91 FMI 4
SPN 105 FMI 3
SPN 105 FMI 4
SPN 105 FMI 16
SPN 110 FMI 3
SPN 110 FMI 4
SPN 174 FMI 3
SPN 174 FMI 4
SPN 174 FMI 16
SPN 190 FMI 0
SPN 190 FMI 16
SPN 620 FMI 3
SPN 620 FMI 4
SPN 629 FMI 13
SPN 637 FMI 2
SPN 637 FMI 10
SPN 1076 FMI 0
SPN 1076 FMI 1
SPN 1076 FMI 7
SPN 1568 FMI 4
MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN G6.7
Engine management
– Start the Métadiag program and choose the Celtis application (2).
– A grey connector connected to a resistor is located on Métadiag cable P/N 60 05 006 765. In the case of a tractor with
Revershift, disconnect this resistor.
334G6004 3 4 5 6 Fig. 4
Description
1 Choosing your language. 3 Keyboard shortcut. 5 Version.
2 Choosing the type of tractor. 4 Help. 6 Quit.
334G6005 3 4 5 6 7 Fig. 5
Description 4 Help.
1 Synoptic. 5 Version.
2 Fault history. 6 Return to the previous mask.
3 Keyboard shortcut. 7 Quit.
G6.8 MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
Engine management
3
334G6006 Fig. 6
Description
1 Engine load percentage at a given speed. 3 Error code related to the point (2). By double clicking on
2 Indicates an error on the cooling fluid temperature it, one accesses its sheet.
function.
334G6007 Fig. 7
Description
1 Double click on the error code to access the sheet. 3 Deletion of passive errors.
2 Case of intermittent failures for example. 4 Return to the previous mask.
MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN G6.9
Engine management
SPN 91 FMI 3 anomaly code

High input voltage (C) for accelerator position
+ APC
2
B B
3
C C
1 A
A
D3 B3
A3 B3 C3 D3 E3 F3 G3 H3 J3 K3
A2 B2 C2 D2 E2 F2 G2 H2 J2 K2
A1 B1 C1 D1 E1 F1 G1 H1 J1 K1
Computerconnector
334G6008 Fig. 8
This code is initiated if

– The analog accelerator input voltage (C) exceeds the maximum sensor threshold. The voltage exceeds the upper limit of the
throttle capacity.
– The maximum threshold of the analog accelerator input voltage (C) is 4.7 volts.
This is what happens if that code is applicable
The control unit uses a default accelerator value, called “return to the workshop”, that only allows engine operation at idle speed.
1. Checking the connection Nodefectiveconnection

Perform a preliminary inspection of the UCE unit connector, Go to 2.
the analog accelerator connector and all the connectors
connecting them. Look for dirty, damaged or incorrectly Defectiveconnection(s)
positioned terminals. Repair the defective connection(s).
2. Possibles causes
– Defective sensor connector.
– Voltage short-circuit on the accelerator input.
– Defective accelerator sensor.
– Defective control unit connector.
– Defective control unit.
G6.10 MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
Engine management

Low input voltage (C) for accelerator position
+ APC
2
B B
3
C C
1 A
A
D3 B3
A3 B3 C3 D3 E3 F3 G3 H3 J3 K3
A2 B2 C2 D2 E2 F2 G2 H2 J2 K2
A1 B1 C1 D1 E1 F1 G1 H1 J1 K1
Computerconnector
334G6008 Fig. 9
This code is initiated if

– The analog accelerator input voltage (C) is lower than the minimum sensor threshold. The voltage does not reach the lower
limit of the throttle capacity.
– The minimum threshold of the analog accelerator input voltage (C) is 0.3 volts.
This is what happens if that code is applicable

The control unit uses a default accelerator value, called “return to the workshop”, that only allows engine operation at idle speed.
1. Checking the connection No defective connection

the analog accelerator connector and all the connectors
connecting them. Look for dirty, damaged or incorrectly Defective connection(s)
2. Possibles causes
– Accelerator out of adjustment.
– Open circuit on sensor supply or return.
– The input circuit has a ground short-circuit or is open.
– Defective sensor.
– Defective engine control unit.
MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN G6.11
Engine management

High input voltage for the manifold air temperature
Manifold air Manifold air temperature probe connector

temperature probe
Sensorground
t B B
A A Manifold
airtemperature
input
D1 D3
A3 B3 C3 D3 E3 F3 G3 H3 J3 K3
A2 B2 C2 D2 E2 F2 G2 H2 J2 K2
A1 B1 C1 D1 E1 F1 G1 H1 J1 K1
UCE unit harness connector

334G6009 Fig. 10
The SPN 105 FMI 3 code is initiated if

– The input voltage for the manifold air temperature exceeds the maximum sensor threshold. The voltage is higher than what is
physically possible for the manifold air.
– The maximum threshold for the temperature probe input voltage is 4.9 volts.
This is what happens if the SPN 105 FMI 3 code is applicable
The engine control unit uses a default value for the manifold air temperature of 60°C (104°F).

the manifold air temperature probe connector and all the
connectors connecting them. Look for dirty, damaged or Defective connection(s)
incorrectly positioned terminals. Repair the defective connection(s).
2. Possibles causes
– The sensor ground circuit is open.
– The input circuit is open or short-circuited at 12V.
– Defective air sensor.
G6.12 MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
Engine management

Low input voltage for the manifold air temperature

temperature probe
Sensorground
t B B
A A Manifold air
temperatureinput
D1 D3
A3 B3 C3 D3 E3 F3 G3 H3 J3 K3
A2 B2 C2 D2 E2 F2 G2 H2 J2 K2
A1 B1 C1 D1 E1 F1 G1 H1 J1 K1

334G6009 Fig. 11

– The input voltage for the manifold air temperature is lower than the minimum sensor threshold. The voltage is lower than what
is physically possible for the manifold air temperature.
– The minimum input voltage threshold for the manifold air temperature probe is 0.1 volt.
The engine control unit uses a default value for the manifold air temperature of 60°C (104°F) to run the engine.

2. Possibles causes
– The input circuit has a ground short-circuit.
MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN G6.13
Engine management

Moderately high input voltage for the manifold air temperature

temperature probe
Sensorground
t B B
A A Manifold air
temperatureinput
D1 D3
A3 B3 C3 D3 E3 F3 G3 H3 J3 K3
A2 B2 C2 D2 E2 F2 G2 H2 J2 K2
A1 B1 C1 D1 E1 F1 G1 H1 J1 K1

334G6009 Fig. 12

– The engine control unit detects a manifold air temperature above 120°C.

The engine control unit uses a default value for the manifold air temperature of 60°C (104°F) to run the engine.

2. Possibles causes
G6.14 MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
Engine management

Extreme overheating of the engine cooling fluid
Engine cooling fluid temperature

probe Connector for the engine cooling fluid
temperatureprobe
t B Enginecoolingfluid
B Enginecoolingfluid
A A temperatureinput temperature ground
B1 D3
A3 B3 C3 D3 E3 F3 G3 H3 J3 K3
A2 B2 C2 D2 E2 F2 G2 H2 J2 K2
A1 B1 C1 D1 E1 F1 G1 H1 J1 K1

334G6010 Fig. 13

– The engine control unit detects a cooling fluid temperature above 118 °C (244 °F).
The engine protection function is activated.
The engine reduces its power by 60% a minute until reaching 40% of its maximum power.

the cooling fluid temperature connector and all the connectors
2. Possibles causes
– Engine overheating (see chapter A1).
– Integrity of the input and ground circuits (open or short-
circuited).
– Defective temperature probe.
MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN G6.15
Engine management

High input voltage for the engine cooling fluid temperature

temperatureprobe
B1 D3
A3 B3 C3 D3 E3 F3 G3 H3 J3 K3
A2 B2 C2 D2 E2 F2 G2 H2 J2 K2
A1 B1 C1 D1 E1 F1 G1 H1 J1 K1

334G6010 Fig. 14

– The input voltage for the cooling fluid temperature exceeds the maximum sensor threshold. This voltage corresponds to a
temperature lower than what is physically possible for the engine cooling fluid.
– The maximum input voltage threshold for the cooling fluid temperature is 4.9 volts.
– In start mode, the engine control unit defines the engine cooling fluid temperature to the default value of –30°C (–22°F),
– In operation mode, the engine control unit defines the engine cooling fluid temperature to the default value of 90°C (194 °F),
The engine protection function offered by the engine control unit against high engine cooling fluid temperature is inhibited.

the cooling fluid temperature connector and all the connectors
2. Possibles causes
– Defective temperature sensor.
– Circuit open at the input.
– Circuit open at the sensor ground.
G6.16 MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
Engine management

Low input voltage for the engine cooling fluid temperature

temperatureprobe
A A temperatureinput temperatureground
B1 D3
A3 B3 C3 D3 E3 F3 G3 H3 J3 K3
A2 B2 C2 D2 E2 F2 G2 H2 J2 K2
A1 B1 C1 D1 E1 F1 G1 H1 J1 K1

334G6010 Fig. 15

– The input voltage for the cooling fluid temperature falls below the minimum sensor threshold. This voltage corresponds to a
temperature higher than what is physically possible for the engine cooling fluid.
– The minimum input voltage threshold for the cooling fluid temperature is 0.1 volt.
– In start mode, the engine control unit defines the engine cooling fluid temperature to the default value of –30°C (–22°F),
– In operation mode, the engine control unit defines the engine cooling fluid temperature to the default value of 90°C (194 °F),
The engine protection function offered by the engine control unit against high engine cooling fluid temperature is inhibited.

the cooling fluid temperature probe connector and all the
2. Possibles causes
– Short-circuit on the ground at the sensor input.
MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN G6.17
Engine management

Slight overheating of the engine cooling fluid

temperatureprobe
t B B Enginecoolingfluid Enginecoolingfluid
B1 D3
A3 B3 C3 D3 E3 F3 G3 H3 J3 K3
A2 B2 C2 D2 E2 F2 G2 H2 J2 K2
A1 B1 C1 D1 E1 F1 G1 H1 J1 K1
334G6010 Fig. 16

– The engine control unit detects a cooling fluid temperature above 108°C.
The engine reduces its power by 2 % a minute until reaching 95 % of its maximum power.

2. Possibles causes
G6.18 MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
Engine management

Moderate overheating of the engine cooling fluid

temperatureprobe
t B B Enginecoolingfluid Enginecoolingfluid
B1 D3
A3 B3 C3 D3 E3 F3 G3 H3 J3 K3
A2 B2 C2 D2 E2 F2 G2 H2 J2 K2
A1 B1 C1 D1 E1 F1 G1 H1 J1 K1

334G6010 Fig. 17

– The engine control unit detects a cooling fluid temperature above 113 °C.
The engine reduces its power by 40% a minute until reaching 60% of its maximum power.

2. Possibles causes
MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN G6.19
Engine management

Power supply stoppage error on the engine control unit
Ignitionswitch
Battery
K1 A2
A3 B3 C3 D3 E3 F3 G3 H3 J3 K3
A2 B2 C2 D2 E2 F2 G2 H2 J2 K2
A1 B1 C1 D1 E1 F1 G1 H1 J1 K1

334G6011 Fig. 18

– The engine control unit detects the presence of a voltage at input A2.
– The vehicle battery may get discharged if the engine control unit is still energized.

the ignition supply circuit and all the connectors connecting
them. Look for dirty, damaged or incorrectly positioned Defective connection(s)
terminals. Repair the defective connection(s).
2. Possibles causes
– Defective ignition switch.
– +12V short circuit.
– Defective switch circuit.
G6.20 MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
Engine management

High fuel temperature input voltage
Fuel temperature Fueltemperature

probe connector
Sensorground
t B B
A A Fuel
temperature
input
C3 D3
A3 B3 C3 D3 E3 F3 G3 H3 J3 K3
A2 B2 C2 D2 E2 F2 G2 H2 J2 K2
A1 B1 C1 D1 E1 F1 G1 H1 J1 K1

G1-006 Fig. 19

The fuel temperature input voltage exceeds the maximum sensor threshold. This voltage corresponds to a temperature lower
than what is physically possible for the fuel.
– The maximum threshold for the fuel temperature input voltage is 4.9 volts.
– The control unit is going to uses a default «return to the workshop» value with a fuel temperature of –20°C (–4°F) during start-
up and 40°C (104°F) during operation.
– The engine power is slightly reduced.

the fuel temperature probe connector and all the connectors
2. Possibles causes
– Circuit open at the probe input.
– Circuit open at the probe ground.
MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN G6.21
Engine management

Low fuel temperature input voltage
Fueltemperature Fueltemperature
probe connector
Sensorground
t B B
A A Fuel
temperature
input
C3 D3
A3 B3 C3 D3 E3 F3 G3 H3 J3 K3
A2 B2 C2 D2 E2 F2 G2 H2 J2 K2
A1 B1 C1 D1 E1 F1 G1 H1 J1 K1

G1-006 Fig. 20

The fuel temperature input voltage exceeds the minimum sensor threshold. This voltage corresponds to a temperature higher
than what is physically possible for the fuel.
– The minimum threshold for the fuel temperature input voltage is 0.1 volt.
– The control unit is going to use a default «return to the workshop» value for a fuel temperature of –20°C (–4°F) during start-
up and 40°C (104°F) during operation.
– The engine power is slightly reduced.

the fuel temperature probe connector and all the connectors
2. Possibles causes
– Short-circuit on the ground at the probe input.
G6.22 MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
Engine management

Moderately high fuel temperature
Fueltemperature Fueltemperature
probe connector
Sensorground
t B B
A A Fuel
temperature
input
C3 D3
A3 B3 C3 D3 E3 F3 G3 H3 J3 K3
A2 B2 C2 D2 E2 F2 G2 H2 J2 K2
A1 B1 C1 D1 E1 F1 G1 H1 J1 K1

G1-006 Fig. 21

The engine control unit detects a fuel temperature above 120°C (248 °F).
– The engine protection function is activated.
– The engine reduces its power by 2% a minute until reaching 80 % of its maximum power.
1. Preliminary check Noproblemdetected
Before carrying out this diagnosis procedure: Go to 2.
– Make sure the fuel level in the tank is not too low. Problem
– Make sure the fuel cooler is clean. Repair and carry out the test again.
2. Checking the connection

Perform a preliminary inspection of the UCE unit connector, No defective connection
the fuel temperature probe connector and all the connectors Go to 3.
3. Checking the fuel supply pressure

Determine the fuel supply pressure. See the fuel supply Fuel pressure in compliance with the specification
pressure check in chapter A1. Go to 4.
Fuel pressure below the specification
4. Looking for obstruction in the fuel return pipes Determine the cause for insufficient fuel supply pressure.
Check whether the fuel pipes are obstructed between the fuel
tank and: Fuel return pipes not obstructed
– The overflow valve on the injection pump. Defective fuel cooler
– The fuel discharge pipe at the injectors. or
Defective injection pump.
Obstruction in a fuel return pipe
Determine the cause of the obstruction.
Repair and carry out the test again.
MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN G6.23
Engine management

Extreme engine overspeed
Front cabling
B B
A A
B2 D2
A3 B3 C3 D3 E3 F3 G3 H3 J3 K3
A2 B2 C2 D2 E2 F2 G2 H2 J2 K2
A1 B1 C1 D1 E1 F1 G1 H1 J1 K1
G1-016 Fig. 22

The engine control unit detects the engine speed exceeds 3,400 rpm.
The engine control unit shuts off the fuel supply until the engine speed is below 2,800 rpm.
1. The electronic management system may be affected.

Using Métadiag, monitor whether other codes appear and look
at their diagnosis procedure.
2. In the absence of other stored or active codes, erase

the SPN 190 FMI 0 code and monitor the codes to
check whether this code appears again.
G6.24 MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
Engine management

Moderate engine overspeed
Front cabling
B B
A A
B2 D2
A3 B3 C3 D3 E3 F3 G3 H3 J3 K3
A2 B2 C2 D2 E2 F2 G2 H2 J2 K2
A1 B1 C1 D1 E1 F1 G1 H1 J1 K1
G1-016 Fig. 23

The engine control unit detects the engine speed exceeds 3,000 rpm.
The engine control unit shuts off the fuel supply until the engine speed is below 2,800 rpm.
1. The electronic management system may be affected.

Using Métadiag, monitor whether other codes appear and look
at their diagnosis procedure.
2. In the absence of other stored or active codes, erase

the SPN 190 FMI 0 code and monitor the codes to
check whether this code appears again.
MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN G6.25
Engine management

High sensor supply voltage
Sensor supply voltage

– The engine control unit supplies voltage to the various sensors depending on the application. It monitors the voltage drop
caused by the sensor and compares it with the values pre-programmed in its memory to determine the value of the parameter
measured by the sensor. In addition, the control unit checks the exact voltage on the 5-volt supply circuit to ensure measurement
accuracy.
The engine control unit detects a voltage above 5.5 volts on its supply circuit.

– The engine control unit uses default values for the sensors supplied by the input supply voltage.

Perform a preliminary inspection of the UCE unit connector. Go to 2.
Look for dirty, damaged or incorrectly positioned terminals on
all the connectors. Defective connection(s)
Repair the defective connection(s).
2. Possibles causes
– +12V short circuit.
G6.26 MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
Engine management

Low sensor supply voltage
Sensorsupplyvoltage
– The engine control unit supplies voltage to the various sensors, it monitors the voltage drop caused by the sensor and compares
it with the values pre-programmed in its memory to determine the value of the parameter measured by the sensor.
In addition, the control unit checks the exact voltage on the 5-volt supply circuit to ensure measurement accuracy.

The engine control unit detects a voltage below 4.44 volts on its supply circuit for the 5-volt sensor.
– The engine control unit uses default values for the sensors supplied by the input supply voltage.

Perform a preliminary inspection of the UCE unit connector. Go to 2.
Look for dirty, damaged or incorrectly positioned terminals on
all the connectors. Defective connection(s)
2. Possibles causes
– Ground short circuit.
MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN G6.27
Engine management

Error on the engine control unit

The engine control unit detects an internal problem.
– The engine does not start or does not run.
1. Possibles causes
– Intermittent problems – Check the harness.
G6.28 MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
Engine management

Noise at crankshaft going into position
Crankshaft sensor connector

Crankshaft position Front cabling
sensor
Crankshaft position return
B B
A
Crankshaft position entry
A
B2 D2
A3 B3 C3 D3 E3 F3 G3 H3 J3 K3
A2 B2 C2 D2 E2 F2 G2 H2 J2 K2
A1 B1 C1 D1 E1 F1 G1 H1 J1 K1

G1-016 Fig. 24

– The engine control unit detects an excessive noise (too many pulses) at crankshaft going into position.
– The engine will probably not run.

the crankshaft position sensor connector and all the connectors
2. Possibles causes
1 The SPN 637 FMI 2 code is probably due to the radiation
or the “noise conduction” from some part in the machine. This
problem may be due to grounded electrical connections or
supplies incorrectly secured to the machine. Check the
following:
– All the wire harness connectors.
– The alternator connections.
– The ground connections on the chassis, the battery ground
connection.
– Corrosion, dirt or paint likely to cause connection interrup-
tions or interferences.
– Look for open circuits or short-circuits in the wires,
particularly those of the crankshaft sensor.
– Check correct positioning of the cabling terminals on the
crankshaft sensor and the control unit connectors.
2 Other possible causes for the SPN 637 FMI 2 code:

– Electromagnetic interferences caused by an incorrectly-
installed radio transceiver.
– Interference from some radar source.
– Teeth possibly broken on the crankshaft synchronisation
ring.
MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN G6.29
Engine management

Configuration error for the crankshaft position entry
Crankshaft sensor connector

Crankshaft position Front cabling
sensor
Crankshaft position return
B B
A
Crankshaft position entry
A
B2 D2
A3 B3 C3 D3 E3 F3 G3 H3 J3 K3
A2 B2 C2 D2 E2 F2 G2 H2 J2 K2
A1 B1 C1 D1 E1 F1 G1 H1 J1 K1

G1-016 Fig. 25

– The engine control unit detects the crankshaft position entry is not correctly configured.

– The engine will probably not run.

the crankshaft position sensor connector and all the connectors Defective connection(s)
connecting them. Look for dirty, damaged or incorrectly Repair the defective connection(s).
positioned terminals.
2. Crankshaft position sensor test Between 2,500 and 3,500 ohms

1 Ignition off. Go to 3.
2 Disconnect the crankshaft position sensor connector. Less than 2,500 ohms or more than 3,500 ohms
3 Using a multimeter, measure the resistance between the Defective crankshaft position sensor.
two terminals of the crankshaft position sensor.
3. Look for opening at crankshaft sensor entry and

return Both measurements of 5 ohms or less
2 Disconnect the crankshaft position sensor connector. Any measurement of over 5 ohms
3 Disconnect the engine control unit connector. Open circuit
4 Using a multimeter, measure the resistance between: or
– Terminal A on the front cabling side of the crankshaft position Possibly reversal of terminals A end B.
sensor and terminal B2 of the engine control unit connector.
– Terminal B on the front cabling side of the crankshaft position
sensor and terminal D2 of the engine control unit connector.
G6.30 MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
Engine management
4. Checking the crankshaft sensor entry cabling All measurements of over 2,000 ohms
2 Crankshaft position sensor connector and engine control Any measurement of over 2,000 ohms
unit connector always disconnected. Defective input wire harness on the crankshaft position sensor
3 Using a multimeter, measure the resistance between ter-
minal B2 on the front cabling side and:
– A correct ground.
– All the other terminals on both control unit connectors.
5. Checking the crankshaft sensor return cabling All measurements of over 2,000 ohms
2 Crankshaft position sensor connector and engine control Any measurement of over 2,000 ohms
unit connector always disconnected. Defective input wire harness on the crankshaft position sensor.
3 Using a multimeter, measure the resistance between termi-
nal D2 on the connector and:
– All the other terminals on both control unit connectors.
6. Checking the crankshaft sensor and adjustment Allcomponentsingoodcondition

wheel Go to 7.
1 Remove the crankshaft position sensor from the injection One component defective
pump. Repair or replace the component as required.
2 Inspect the sensor and its end piece to detect any
cracks, traces of corrosion or any other foreign body.
3 Check if the crankshaft adjustment wheel notches present
any burrs or flaking.
7. Checking the pinion distribution All the pinions adjusted

1 Ignition off. Defective crankshaft position sensor connector
2 Remove the distributor casing. or
3 Check the adjustment of the camshaft pinions, the crankshaft Defective control unit connector
and the injection pump (see chapter A1). or
Defective engine control unit.
One or more pinion(s) offset
Perform any necessary adjustments to guarantee correct
adjustment.
MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN G6.31
Engine management

Pump distributor closing too long
Pump A1 A2 A3
solenoid Pump solenoid

B1 B2 B3
C1 C2 C3
connector D1 D2 D3
Pump solenoid return A3 E1 E2 E3

B B
A A Pump solenoid K2
supply F1 F2 F3
G1 G2 G3
H1 H2 H3
J1 J2 J3
K1 K2 K3

G1-008 Fig. 26

– The control unit determines the pump distributor takes too long to close.

– The engine performances may be irregular.

the pump connector and any other connector. Look for dirty,
damaged or incorrectly positioned terminals. Defective connection(s)
2. Possibles causes
– Defective pump distributor.
G6.32 MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
Engine management

Pump distributor closing too short
Pump A1 A2 A3

B1 B2 B3
C1 C2 C3
connector D1 D2 D3

B B
supply F1 F2 F3
G1 G2 G3
H1 H2 H3
J1 J2 J3
K1 K2 K3

G1-008 Fig. 27

– The control unit determines the distributor closes too quickly.


the pump connector and any other connector. Look for dirty, Defective connection(s)
damaged or incorrectly positioned terminals. Repair the defective connection(s).
2. Checking the battery voltage Equal or close to the battery voltage

1 Ignition on, engine stopped. Go to 3.
2 Measure the battery voltage. Much higher or lower than the battery voltage
Defective electrical power supply.
3. Checking the injection pump SPN 1076 FMI 1 reappears

1 Remove the injection pump and replace it by a new one. Defective engine control unit.
See the injection pump removal and the injection pump instal- SPN 1076 FMI 1 does not reappear
lation in chapter A1. Problem repaired.
2 Ignition on, engine on.
3 Read the anomaly codes on Métadiag.
MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN G6.33
Engine management

Pump solenoid circuit open
Pump A1 A2 A3

B1 B2 B3
C1 C2 C3
connector D1 D2 D3

B B
supply F1 F2 F3
G1 G2 G3
H1 H2 H3
J1 J2 J3
K1 K2 K3

G1-008 Fig. 28

– The engine control unit determines the pump solenoid circuit is open.

– The engine cannot turn.

the pump connector and any other connector. Look for dirty, Defective connection(s)
damaged or incorrectly positioned terminals. Repair the defective connection(s).
2. Checking the engine control unit Measurement of less than 5 ohms

1 Ignition off, engine stopped. Go to 4.
2 Disconnect the engine control unit connector. Measurement of 5 ohms or more
3 Using a multimeter, measure the resistance between Defective control unit connector
terminals K2 and A3. or
3. Checking the injection pump cabling Both measurements of less than 5 ohms
1 Ignition off. Defective pump connector
2 Disconnect the pump solenoid and engine control unit or
connectors. Defective injection pump
3 Using a multimeter, measure the resistance between: Any measurement of over 5 ohms
– Terminal K2 and terminal A. Defective pump connector
– Terminal A3 and terminal B. or
Defective control unit connector
or
Circuit open in the pump solenoid supply wire
or
Circuit open in the pump solenoid return wire
G6.34 MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
Engine management

Short-circuited pump solenoid circuit
Pump A1 A2 A3

B1 B2 B3
C1 C2 C3
connector D1 D2 D3

B B
supply F1 F2 F3
G1 G2 G3
H1 H2 H3
J1 J2 J3
K1 K2 K3

G1-008 Fig. 29

– The engine control unit determines the pump solenoid circuit is short-circuited.

– The engine control unit immediately switches the engine off.

2. Checking the pump solenoid supply circuit
1 Ignition off. Measurement of more than 20,000 ohms
2 Disconnect the pump solenoid and engine control unit Go to 3.
connectors.
3 Using a multimeter, measure the resistance between ter- Measurement of less than 20,000 ohms
minal K2 on the front cabling side and: Short-circuited supply wire on the pump solenoid.
– All the other terminals on the control unit connector.
3. Checking the pump solenoid return circuit Measurement of more than 20,000 ohms
2 Disconnect the pump solenoid and engine control unit
connectors. Measurement of less than 20,000 ohms
3 Using a multimeter, measure the resistance between ter- Short-circuited return wire on the pump solenoid.
minal A3 on the front cabling side and:
4. Checking the injection pump

SPN 1076 FMI 6 reappears
1 Remove the injection pump and replace it by a new one.
See the injection pump removal in chapter A1.
SPN 1076 FMI 6 does not reappear
Problem repaired.
MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN G6.35
Engine management

Pump distributor closing not detected
Pump A1 A2 A3
solenoid Pump solenoidconnector

B1 B2 B3
C1 C2 C3
D1 D2 D3

B B
supply F1 F2 F3
G1 G2 G3
H1 H2 H3
J1 J2 J3
K1 K2 K3

G1-008 Fig. 30

– The engine control unit determines it cannot detect the pump distributor closing.

2. Checking the injection pump
1 Remove the injection pump and replace it by a new one. SPN 1076 FMI 7 reappears
See the injection pump removal in chapter A1. Defective engine control unit.
3 Read the anomaly codes on Métadiag. SPN 1076 FMI 7 does not reappear
Problem repaired.
G6.36 MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
Engine management

Pump solenoid circuit short-circuited intermittently
Pump A1 A2 A3

B1 B2 B3
C1 C2 C3
connector D1 D2 D3

B B
supply F1 F2 F3
G1 G2 G3
H1 H2 H3
J1 J2 J3
K1 K2 K3

G1-008 Fig. 31

– The pump solenoid circuit is short-circuited at supply.

– The control unit immediately reduces the engine power to 50% of its maximum power.
Perform a preliminary inspection of the UCE unit connector, the Go to 2.
pump connector and any other connector. Look for dirty,
2. Checking the pump solenoid supply circuit Measurement of more than 20,000 ohms
3 Using a multimeter, measure the resistance between ter- Short-circuited supply wire on the pump solenoid.
minal K2 on the front harness and:
3. Checking the pump solenoid return circuit Measurement of more than 20,000 ohms
3 Using a multimeter, measure the resistance between ter- Short-circuited supply wire on the pump solenoid.
minal A3 on the front harness side and:
4. Checking the injection pump SPN 1076 FMI 10 reappears

1 Remove the injection pump and replace it by a new one. Defective engine control unit.
See the injection pump removal and the injection pump instal-
lation in chapter A1. SPN 1076 FMI 10 does not reappear
2 Ignition on, engine on. Problem repaired.
MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN G6.37
Engine management

Low input voltage for curve switching
Instrument
Panel
J02
9 R
J35
P02 C1
A3 B3 C3 D3 E3 F3 G3 H3 J3 K3
A2 B2 C2 D2 E2 F2 G2 H2 J2 K2
A1 B1 C1 D1 E1 F1 G1 H1 J1 K1
G1-015 Fig. 32

– The input voltage falls below 0.05V.
1. Checking the preliminary connection Nodefectiveconnection

and of the link between the UCE and the instrument panel.
Look for dirty, damaged or incorrectly positioned terminals. Defective connection(s)
2. Possibles causes
– Ground short circuit.
– defective instrument panel.
G6.38 MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
Engine management

Reduction in fuel supply

– The engine control unit detects overheating of the engine cooling fluid.
– The engine control unit detects fuel overheating.
– The engine control unit limits the fuel quantity to protect the engine.
The SPN 1569 FMI 31 code appears

– If the SPN 110 FMI 0 or SPN 174 FMI 16 anomaly code is active. Refer to their sheets.
MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN G6.39
Engine management
SPN 2 000 FMI 6 anomaly code

UCE internal failure
A1 A2 A3
B1 B2 B3
C1 C2 C3
D1 D2 D3
A3 E1 E2 E3
B B
A A K2
F1 F2 F3
G1 G2 G3
H1 H2 H3
J1 J2 J3
K1 K2 K3
G1-008 Fig. 33
The SPN 2 000 FMI 6 code is initiated if

– The engine control unit detected an internal short-circuit causing an extremely high current at the injection pump.
This is what happens if the SPN 2 000 FMI 6 code is applicable
– The engine is immediately shut down.
If the SPN 2 000 FMI 6 code appears

– Replace the UCE.
G6.40 MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
Lift management
TCE 9 management
Using Métadiag
Start the Métadiag program and choose the Celtis TCE 9 application.
334G6034 3 4 5 6 Fig. 34
Description
1 Choosing your language. 4 Help.
2 Choosing the type of lift. 5 Version.
3 Keyboard shortcut. 6 Quit.
334G6035 2 3 4 5 6 Fig. 35
Description
1 Synoptic. 4 Version.
2 Keyboard shortcut. 5 Return to the previous mask.
3 Help. 6 Quit.
MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN G6.41
Lift management
Lift synoptic
2 3 6 4 5
334G6036 Fig. 36
Description
1 Position sensor image and voltage. 4 Image and current on the lift and lower solenoid valves.
2 Effort sensor image and voltage. 5 Outside control
3 Battery charge. 6 Fault indication.
This synoptic enables to visualise the condition of the various

elements composing the TCE 9 lift control circuit. The upper
part recalls the control unit functions. The appearance of the
« » pictogram indicates a control failure: example here =
external control failure. When the mouse pointer is positioned
on the « » pictogram, the name of the incident appears (see
the chapter on the various incidents). 334G6037 Fig. 37
G6.42 MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
Lift management
TCE 9 incidents
C ode Element concerned Pin Origin of the problem
Major failures
11 Lift PSV 2-6 Circuit open on lift solenoid valve circuit or UCE failed
12 Lower PSV 14-6 Circuit open on lower solenoid valve circuit or UCE failed
Current measured in 6 too high, short-circuit between 2 and 6 or

13 Short-circuit 6
short-circuit in proportional solenoid valve
14 Lift rear button 10 —
15 Lower rear button 20 —
16 Supply voltage 12 Supply voltage lower than 9.5 volts
Medium failures
Circuit open, short-circuit or short-circuit on sensor ground, incorrect

22 Position sensor 19
adjustment
23 Position setpoint potentiometer 16 Potentiometer shorted or circuit open
24 Upper stop potentiometer 22 Potentiometer shorted or circuit open
28 Transport/stop/control button 8 Potentiometer shorted or circuit open
Minor failures
Circuit open, short-circuit or short-circuit on sensor ground, incorrect

32 Effort sensor 17
adjustment
34 Lower speed potentiometer 24 Potentiometer shorted or circuit open
36 Mixed potentiometer 4 Potentiometer shorted or circuit open
MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN G6.43
334G6038 3 4 5 6 Fig. 38
Description
2 3
334G6039 6 7 8 9 10 Fig. 39
Description 4 Parameterizing. 8 Version.

1 Synoptic. 5 Calibration. 9 Return to the previous mask.
2 Electrical tests. 6 Keyboard shortcut. 10 Quit.
3 Programming. 7 Help.
G6.44 MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
Transmission Twinshift
oil doubler Setting Program
pressure indicator 30 or 40 km/h version
Theoretical
Diagnosis forward UCE Error
Buzzer indicator speed condition code
21
Engine Reverse Reverse Forward Gearbox

speed drive drive clutch engagement
clutch clutch release switch
solenoid solenoid contact
Battery Twinshift valve Output valve Reverser +/- fast
voltage doubler current speed current lever doubler
solenoid switch
valve
334G6040 Fig. 40
MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN G6.45
UCE condition
C ond. Designations C au ses
0 — Pressure cut off for 4 sec.
1 Awaiting alarm Pressure 17 bar < 9.5 bar & engine speed < 200 rpm
2 Work Pressure < 9.5 bar & engine speed < 200 rpm
3 Awaiting work Pressure loss
4 Power take-off alarm Engine speed loss < 200 rpm (transient condition)
5 Awaiting power take-off Engine speed loss < 200 rpm (stable condition)
6 Standby Sleep
7 Parameter error Incorrect parameterizing
8 Not used —
9 High voltage Battery voltage higher than 16 volts
Error codes
Defect management: the purpose is to inform the user of the detected defect. To do so, he has a diagnosis indicator and a buzzer
that enable him to know the defect type. It is possible to detect 23 defects. To simplify the data, these defects are divided into
three classes. To each class corresponds a lighting type of the diagnosis indicator and buzzer.
Defect Drivetronic 3 Diagnosis indicator

Indicator lamps Buz z er condition
class actions on transmission condition
Forced release of immobile tractor

Class 1 Neutral on On steady On
clutches.
No action on transmission until

Forward or reverse on
Class 2 switchover to neutral or tractor Fast flashing On
then neutral on
stoppage
No action on transmission. The Forward, reverse or

Class 3 tractor remains operational (but the neutral according to Slow flashing Off
behaviour may be downgraded). the direction selected
G6.46 MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
Error codes table according to the defect class
Defect Error Action to recover all the

Possible defect Authorised functions
class co d e functions after repair
1 Short-circuit on +12V supply of

01 Revershift locked (1) Stop the tractor (2)
forward drive solenoid valve
1 02 Short-circuit on +12V supply of Revershift locked (1) Stop the tractor (2)
reverse drive solenoid valve
Before setting the lever to neutral: Re le a s e c lutc h

2 No active contact on steering
11 wi th p e d a l to c ha ng e g e a rs . No c ha ng e o f None
wheel control
d i re c ti o n. A fte r setting the lever to neutral: No ne .
2 Reverse and neutral contact at the B efore setting the lever to neutral: Re le a s e c lutc h
same time
2 Reverse and neutral contact at the B efore setting the lever to neutral: Re le a s e c lutc h
same time
Forward and reverse contact at Before setting the lever to neutral: Re le a s e c lutc h
2 14 wi th p e d a l to c ha ng e g e a rs . No c ha ng e o f None
the same time
3 03 Short-circuit on forward drive Reverse drive possible w:ith lever and pedal control. Set the lever to neutral
solenoid valve ground
3 Short-circuit on reverse drive

04 Forward drive possible w:ith lever and pedal control. Set the lever to neutral
solenoid valve ground
3 Short-circuit on forward drive

05 Reverse drive possible w:ith lever and pedal control. Set the lever to neutral
solenoid valve
3 Short-circuit on reverse drive

06 Forward drive possible w:ith lever and pedal control. Set the lever to neutral
solenoid valve
Circuit open or short-circuit on the All the functions are ensured but no progressivity on
3 15 the pedal. (Switchover to automatic pressurization None
pedal potentiometer ground management.)
All the functions are ensured but no progressivity on

3 +5V short-circuit at the pedal
16 potentiometer the pedal. (Switchover to automatic pressurization None
management.)
3 18 Short-circuit on the +12V of the All the functions are ensured but downgraded None
down contact progressivity on the pedal.
3 19 Short-circuit or circuit open on the All the functions are authorised. None
up contact ground
3 20 Short-circuit on the +12V of the up All the functions are authorised. None
contact
3 Fault on theRevershift speed

21 All the functions are authorised. None
sensor
3 No supply on the P. solenoid valve None

22 Set the lever to neutral
pilots
2 23 Parameter table reading fault All the functions are authorised. None
(1): Revershift indicator state locked.

(2): Tractor completely stopped, no ignition and no piloting pressure.
MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN G6.47
Note: J1-X corresponds to the Drivetronic connector channel.
1 2 3
334G6041 Fig. 41
Description
1 Gear engaged. – reverser lever (neutral or clutch 3 Gearbox oil pressure switch (when
2 + APC supply of FR or RR solenoid released position); the tractor is stopped, the contact
valves: – Gear change handle (clutch release is closed).
– clutch pedal down contact; contact).
1 2
334G6042 Fig. 42
Description
1 Doubler contacts. 2 Doubler solenoid valve +12V = hare.
G6.48 MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
2
3
5
4
334G6043 Fig. 43
Description
1 Reverser lever (in this case in – 2nd value: Voltage value computed 4 Revershift output speed.
neutral position). from the numerical value. 5 Intensity value in the proportional
2 Value of the clutch pedal angular 3 Pedal up contact (TOC), (Clutch forward drive solenoid valves
detector: engaged position = contact (clutch engaged phase = 1.2A).
– 1st value: Numerical value; closed).
Programming
334G6044 Fig. 44
334G6045 Fig. 45
334G6046 Fig. 46
MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN G6.49
Parameterizing
334G6047 Fig. 47
Description
1 Parameterizing unit version. 2 Choosing the type of tractor. 3 Parameterizing.
334G6048 Fig. 48
G6.50 MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
Calibration
This procedure should be performed in the following cases:

– poor progressivity;
– UCE replacement;
– replacement of one or two forward drive solenoid valves;
– mechanical intervention on the front and/or rear clutches.
334G6049 Fig. 49
334G6050 Fig. 50
MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN G6.51
334G6051 Fig. 51
G6.52 MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
Instrument panel management
334G6052 3 4 5 6 Fig. 52
Description
334G6053 3 4 5 6 7 Fig. 53
Description 3 Keyboard shortcut. 6 Return to the previous mask.

1 Synoptic. 4 Help. 7 Quit.
2 Parameterizing. 5 Version.
MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN G6.53
A C
D
B
334G6054 1 2 Fig. 54
Description
1 This function is used to light the lamps connected to the microprocessor (A), (B), (C).
– test the various displays (D) and (E);
– sound the buzzer.
2 Engine curve test.
This function is necessary to check the two engine curves (2,200 rpm and 2,350 rpm) on the Celtis 426, 436 and 446 engines.
After clicking on (2), select the desired curve using the key (3).
334G6055 Fig. 55 334G6056 Fig. 56
G6.54 MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
– Measure the desired values using the power test bench and
compare them with the injection sheet for the tractor concerned.
Important: Once the measure completed, disactivate the
test by clicking (ok).
334G6057 Fig. 57
Parameterizing
334G6058 1 2 Fig. 58
After selecting the four parameters, click on (1). During parameterizing, information is scrolled on the instrument panel digital
displays. When parameterizing is completed, “Clut” (assisted power take-off) or “Pinu” (mechanical power take-off) appears
on the upper display. “0.G” (instrument panel version) appears on the lower display. If 4WD has been parameterized, the indicator
lamp comes on. Once completed, the table returns to normal mode.
(2) is used to read the instrument panel parameters.
MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN G6.55
Personal notes
G6.56 MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
H1
CAB LIFT
H2
HEATING/AIR CONDITIONING
H3
BONDING THE WINDOWS
H4
PLATFORM LIFT
Chapter H
Celtis 03.2004 publication

CONTENTS
H1 – CAB LIFT
IDENTIFICATION ........................................................................................................................................................... H1.2
SAFETY MEASURES..................................................................................................................................................... H1.3
SLING SPECIFICATIONS .............................................................................................................................................. H1.3
CAB LIFT ........................................................................................................................................................................ H1.8
PARTICULAR POINTS WHEN PUTTING BACK AGAIN............................................................................................. H1.12
H2 – HEATING/AIR CONDITIONING
CHARACTERISTICS...................................................................................................................................................... H2.2
MAINTENANCE.............................................................................................................................................................. H2.3
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS.............................................................................................................................................. H2.3
DIAGRAM OF OPERATING PRINCIPLE....................................................................................................................... H2.4
ENGINE LAYOUT........................................................................................................................................................... H2.6
OUTSIDE AIR INLET...................................................................................................................................................... H2.8
LAYOUT IN CAB ............................................................................................................................................................ H2.8
LAYOUT IN CAB FRONT UNIT...................................................................................................................................... H2.8
USE OF RECYCLING .................................................................................................................................................... H2.9
OPERATION OF RECYCLING....................................................................................................................................... H2.9
COMPOSITION OF RECYCLING ................................................................................................................................ H2.10
REMOVAL OF CAB FRONT HEATING/AIR CONDITIONING UNIT ........................................................................... H2.11
EVAPORATOR AND RADIATOR EXCHANGE ........................................................................................................... H2.12
PRESSURE REGULATOR........................................................................................................................................... H2.16
FINAL STEPS............................................................................................................................................................... H2.17
DIAGNOSTICS ............................................................................................................................................................. H2.19
H3 – BONDING THE WINDOWS

WARNING! ..................................................................................................................................................................... H3.2
LIST OF EQUIPMENT TO USE - SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONS ....................................................................................... H3.3
PREPARATION OF WINDSCREEN BEFORE APPLYING PRIMER............................................................................. H3.5
APPLYING PRIMER....................................................................................................................................................... H3.6
PREPARATION OF THE DUAL COMPONENT BOND PRODUCT............................................................................... H3.7
REPLACEMENT METHOD ............................................................................................................................................ H3.9
60 05 030 163 – 03.2004 – EN

H4 – PLATFORM LIFT
PRESENTATION............................................................................................................................................................ H4.2
IDENTIFICATION ........................................................................................................................................................... H4.2
SAFETY MEASURES..................................................................................................................................................... H4.3
SLING SPECIFICATIONS .............................................................................................................................................. H4.3
REMOVAL / INSTALLATION ........................................................................................................................................ H4.4
PLATFORM LIFT............................................................................................................................................................ H4.7
PARTICULAR POINTS WHEN PUTTING BACK AGAIN .................................................................................................... H4.10
TOOLS
CAB AND PLATFORM LIFTING TOOL - HEATING/AIR CONDITIONING - BONDING THE WINDOWS.......................... H4.13
60 05 030 163 – 03.2004 – EN

H1 – CAB LIFT
Presentation
Identification
A B
Type serial No.
The plate (A) is located at the back of the cab, on the right-hand
side (Photo 50).
Homologation
– The plate (B) is located at the back of the cab, on the right-hand
side (Photo 50).
334H1050 Photo 50
Identification No. of the safety structure

The plate (C) is located on the sideleft-hand post of the cab (Photo
51).
C
Important: any safety structure which has been
damaged (distorted) following an accident, must
never be repaired but replaced.
334H1051 Photo 51
H1.2 MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
Presentation
Safety precautions Slinging specifications

To lift the cab, use a hoist in perfect operating condition, with an – Cab weigth about 600 kg.
underhook height sufficient to provide for proper clearance of the
cab. When lifting the cab partially, it is necessary to support the
cab.
– Put the tractor on a perfectly firm ground.
– Chockthewheels. In any case, the cab lifting should be slowly
– Mark out the working area. performed making permanently sure that no element
– Use a certified hoist and in perfect operating condition. linking the cab to the beam remained in place and
– Use the certified shackles. elements at the front or rear of the cab do not interfere with the
– Use certified slings and in perfect operating condition. parts remaining on the beam. Lift the cab only with a spreader
– Comply with safety instructions. Wear protective gloves and bar to avoid any risk of distortion of the lifting points.
shoes.
Spreader bar P/N 77 01 388 907 + 77 01 388 913
Should be banned Spreader bar

ONLY
334H1052 Fig. 52
MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN H1.3

– Drain the air conditionning system.
– Drain the cooling system (Photo 1).
– Disconnect the cable from the heating valve under the heating
unit.
– Disconnect the unions on the cab front and the electrical outlets.
334H1001 Photo 1
– Remove the wheels after supporting the tractor (jack stands at the
rear and front chassis shimming).
334H1002 Photo 2
– Remove the hoses of the windscreen washer reservoir on the LH

side.
– Remove the handbrake yoke and the two electrical outlets at the
LH rear under the cab.
334H1003 Photo 3
H1.4 MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
– Remove the yoke and the power take-off control cable (identify
the control adjustment when disassembling).
334H1004 Photo 4
– Disconnect the differential engagement and disengagement

control.
– Loosen the handbrake control.
Mark the position of the cables before disassembly.
334H1005 Photo 5
– Remove the stud bolts at the LH side and RH rear of the cab.
334H1006 Photo 6
MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN H1.5
– Loosen the handbrake control.
334H1007 Photo 7
– Remove the power take-off control assembly with its hoses

(Photo 8). In the cab, remove the knob with its control lever spring.
334H1008 Photo 8
– Remove the reservoir support screw and slightly lower the tank to
have access to the RH front stud nut.
334H1009 Photo 9
H1.6 MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
– Separate the gearbox lever removing the four bolts between its
upper part and its lower part (A) (Photo 10).
– In the cab, remove the range lever knob.
A
334H1010 Photo 10
For a mechanical lift, disconnect the draft control and position

display cables (Photo 11).
For a tractor with mechanical transmission, disconnect the dead
slow range (Photo 12) and reverser control (Photo 13).
334H1011 Photo 11
334H1012 Photo 12 334H1013 Photo 13
MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN H1.7
Cab lift Caution ! Any modification made on the spreader bar

should be checked by an approved organization. This
As the tractor cab has not the same dimensions as the other cabs working equipment is subjected to general routine
and in order to keep the existing spreader bar P/N 77 01 388 907, inspections provided for in the article R 233-11 of the Labour
a modification proves to be necessary: an additional hole on the Code.
spreader bar (Fig. 29). Locally perform two spacers as shown
(Fig. 30).
955 1 000
Place the pin in the new hole

Place the pin in the mark C
A B C D
705
Additional hole dia. 11
334H1029 Fig. 29
When installing the spreader bar, it is advisable to protect the roof edges with masking tape to prevent any scratch.
ø
10
0
50
ø
70
ø
334H1030 Fig. 30
H1.8 MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
Install the lift cab tool P/N 77 01 388 913.

It is advisable, for safety reasons, to pass a strap
inside the cab and to secure it to the lifting hook.
334H1031 Fig. 31
Caution ! Before lifting the cab, make sure that the supports (A)
are properly installed against the post on the cab front (see
photos).
334H1032 Fig. 32
Position of the holding fork (B) in relation to the

support (C) = 3.5 cm.
3,5 cm B
C
334H1033 Fig. 33
MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN H1.9
To prevent any interference between the fork (B) and the hinge
support (D), (Fig. 40).
334H1040 Fig. 40
Add two hoses (E) on the front pins of each fork (Fig. 41).
– Remove the air brake control box (for the tractors fitted with this
option), (Fig. 42).
– Disconnect the auxiliary distributor cables while marking them
E
(Fig. 42).
– Start slightly lifting the cab making sure tha it remains straight
in order not to damage the ploughing inspection window (Fig. 43).
– Mark and disconnect the supply and return pipes of the steering ø
unit. 10
0
– 19-mm flare-nut wrench for the fitting located on the steering unit
side, signal Load Sensing (LS), (Fig. 43).
50
ø
70
ø
334H1041 Fig. 41
334H1042 Fig. 42 334H1043 Fig. 43
H1.10 MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
• For tractor with air brake system option:

– Remove the fitting from the air pressure gauge located on the
air reservoir.
– Disconnect the ground wire behind the step plate on the LH side.
334H1044 Photo 44
– Remove the exhaust extension for the tractor equipped with the
side exhaust.
334H1045 Photo 45
– After sufficiently lifting the cab:

– Remove the LH and RH brake controls at the cab front.
334H1046 Photo 46
MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN H1.11
Particular points when removing
Caution when lowering the cab

– to the ploughing inspection window, which may contact the
auxiliary distributor support (recommended protection).
– to the gearbox and range levers.
– to the hydraulic filter on the cab front.
Once the cab is installed

– Connect the supply and return pipes on the steering unit. Make
sure that the LS hose (tractor with Revershift transmission) is not
twisted.
334H1019 Photo 19
– Install the hydraulic power take-off control box.
334H1020 Photo 20
H1.12 MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
Caution to the passage of the auxiliary distributor control

cables.
334H1021 Photo 21
– Instal the LH and RH brake control pins before lowering the cab.
334H1022 Photo 22
– Before completing the cab installation, make sure that the two
front stud bolts are correctly located in their housings (holes filled
withmastic).
334H1023 Photo 23
MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN H1.13
– Disengagement cable to be positionned in the 2nd hole (to be

markedwhendisassembling).
– Tightening torque of the front and rear studs.
Note: for the adjustment points, see chapters on the organs
involved.
334H1024 Photo 24
H1.14 MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
H2 – HEATING / AIR
CONDITIONING
Presentation
Specifications – filter the fluid flowing in the circuit,

– retain moisture contained in the circuit.
It is recommended to replace the dehydrator after each interven-
Heating circuit tion.
The heating circuit comprises a heating radiator located in the unit Pressure switch
on the cab front, a regulation valve and a ventilation unit. Has two functions:
Cooling fluid: RENAULT Agriculture GLACEOL RX G type – Low pressure stop, it stops the compressor operation as soon as
D50/50 - Protection temperature: – 40 C. the pressure of the low pressure circuit drops under 2 ± 0,25 bar.
– High pressure stop, it stops the compressor operation as soon as
the pressure of the high pressure circuit achieves 27.5 bar. It opens
the circuit at 21 ± 2 bar.
Cooling circuit Pressureregulator
Circuit capacity: 1,750 g ± 50 It is a pre-set device that regulates the inlet fluid flow according to
Type of cooler: R134a (HFC 134a) the compressor rotation speed variations.
The cooling circuit is made up of the following elements: Evaporator
Compressor The R134a coolant, in a liquid state, circulates through the
The compressor is delivered with a small quantity of oil of 230 ± pipes. A heat exchange occurs at the fins. Hot air cools down
20 cm3 . When charging the circuit, it is necesary to add 40 cm3 and loses moisture. The R134a turns into gas and is sucked by
of PAG 244 oil (ref. Renault Agriculture P/N 60 05 014 466). the compressor.
Condenser Electronicthermostat
The condenser makes the heat of the compressed gas cooler It controls the air temperature at the evaporator:
circulate in the ambient air. The gas cooler condenses and then • trigger threshold:
liquefies. – maximum cold: 2 °C ± 1
Dehydrator – minimum cold: 5 °C ± 1.
Has three functions:
– act as a coolant surge tank,
User advice: the air conditioning is only activated when the

ventilation gear is engaged (minimum position 1).
H2.2 60 MR029
60 05
05 334684
029 – 02.2003
693 – EN
-- 10.2003
10.2003 -- EN
Presentation
Maintenance
Because of a power requirement from the motor to compress the
coolant, it is recommended to check the level of the engine cooling
fluid rather often. Change the anti-dust filter in the cab regularly
when the tractor is used in very dusty environments. The filter is
located next to the instrument panel (Photo 32). Inspect the
cooling circuit every year. Replace the dehydrator every three
years.
Note: imperatively replace any faulty element in the circuit. In
case of a long intervention (over 15 minutes) on the cooling
system, plug every orifice in the circuit.
334H2032 Photo 32
Safety instructions Recommendations in case of

contact with the coolant
Any intervention on the cooling system must be – Rinse with clear and cold water for 15 minutes (eyes also).
performed only by a certified person, trained in air – Call a doctor as soon as possible.
conditioning system maintenance.
Instructions to apply for all operations
Never perform any welding or brazing on the cooling on the cooling circuit
circuit (infiltration of UV radiations in the circuit may – Wear protective gloves and glasses.
decompose the cooling fluid). Perform any operation – Intervene in extreme clealiness.
in the system in a well ventilated room (risk of asphyxia). – Comply with safety instructions.
– Comply with the exact quantity of coolant when filling the circuit.
The only cooler to be used is the R134a. Do not use another
one.
Activate the room gas extractor system. As cooling fluids are – Top up the oil only using the special oil recommended. Seal the
colourless and odourless, their specific weight higher than that oil cans properly after use.
of the air, never store them in wells, ditches, air chimneys, etc.
MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN H2.3
Presentation
Operating schematic diagram

Ambient air
Low pressure liquid
Fans
Evaporator Pressure
Cold air regulator
Condensed water flow
Thermostat
CAB
Low pressure steam
High pressure steam

ENGINE
High pressure liquid
Low pressure steam

High pressure
Low pressure liquid liquid
P Pressure pick-ups
High pressure steam
Compressor
Cooling fan
Engine cooling
radiator Pressure switch
Condenser
Dehydrator
reservoir
334H2001 Fig. 1
Ambient outside air High pressure liquid
H2.4 MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
Presentation
Air conditioning heating ventilation Heating ventilation
Air conditioning
AC REC AC REC
Recirculation
Indicator light*, operating only

with the toxic substance filter
kit, will be available in the
after sales market.
Ventilation rate
Heating valve control
334H2002 Fig. 2
Note: the toxic substance filter indicator can only be used with the air conditioning version.
* Indicator light: cab depressurization warning indicator which is connected to the toxic substance filter kit.
MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN H2.5
Important: in case of prolonged intervention on the circuit (over

10 minutes), imperatively plug all orifices on the circuit
components, in order to prevent any internal condensation
and oxidizing. This precaution is mandatory for the dehydrating
cartridge and to maintain the PAG oil quality for the compressor
lubrication.
Location in the engine
Condenser
– Unlock the condenser and slide it towards the tractor outside
(Photo 3).
– Pull the oil radiator (Photo 4).
– Disconnectthepressureswitch.
– Completely extract the condenser (Fig.6). (To extract it
completely, remove one attachment screw from the slide upper 334H2003 Photo 3
part).
– Clean it with a blower and compressed air, from the inside out.
– If required, reshape the condenser fins using a fin comb.
Ban the high pressure cleaner.
Figure 5
A Inlet: compressor outlet
B Outlet: dehydrator inlet
334H2004 Photo 4
334H2005 Fig. 5 334H2006 Fig. 6
H2.6 MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
Compressor (Fig. 7)
1 Suction
2 Discharge
3 Without air brake system new with oil: 6 570 g, with air brake
system: 6 770 g.
Clutch: 12V, maximum intensity 2.2A.
The compressor is delivered with a small quantity of oil of 230 ±
20 cm3 .
PAG 244 (ref. Renault Agriculture P/N 60 05 014 466).
2 1
334H2007 Fig. 7
Dehydrator (Fig. 8)
A Inlet: condenser outlet
C
B Outlet: pressure regulator inlet B D
C Fluid flow indicator
D High and low pressure switch
Pressure switch A
Low pressure stop: < 2 bar ± 0.25
High pressure stop: > 27.5 bar (circuit reestablished at 21 bar ± 2)
334H2008 Fig. 8
Air filter - heating

It is located at the front of the cab.
– Extract the cover and the filter.
– Carefully clean the filter (frequent replacement recommended).
– Install the filter in the right direction (grid on the outside).
334H2009 Photo 9
MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN H2.7
Outside air inlet

– Do not hesitate to remove the grid to clean it in case of clogging.
334H2050 Photo 50
Location in the cab
Recirculating air filters

Inside filter in the instrument panel (Fig. 51).
It exists in all cases.
334H2051 Photo 51
Location in the unit on the

cab front side
Outside filter(Fig. 51)

All versions heating and heating/air conditioning.
Remove it before cleaning it.
Pulsed air cleaning, etc.
Note: properly install the filter in the right direction
(grid on the outside).
334H2052 Photo 52
H2.8 MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
Recirculation function utilisation

3 1
1 The recirculation makes it possible to shield temporarily the AC REC
cab atmosphere against the outside atmosphere.
2 It makes it possible to accelerate the cab heating in winter.
3 It makes it possible to accelerate the cab cooling (providing
that the air conditionning is activated) in summer, mark (3).
Recirculation operation
By pressing the recirculation push button (1) the indicator lights
up and you close the outside air intake flap (2) (Photo 54). To
open it, press the button and the flap opens (Photo 55).
Note: the design of this heating-air conditioning unit

enables a quick demisting in the cool and wet 334H2053 Fig. 53
seasons while actuating the heating, the air
conditioning and the recirculation.
334H2054 Photo 54
334H2055 Photo 55
MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN H2.9
Recirculation components
1 On-off electric motor (Photo 60).
2 Recirculation flap link (Photo 61).
334H2060 Photo 60
334H2061 Photo 61
H2.10 MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
Removing heating/air conditionning

unit on the cab front side
1 On the cover side, remove the top cover nose. A
2 Drain the air conditioning circuit.
3 Drain the cooling system.
4 Remove the exhaust muffler.
5 Remove the upper part of the heat baffle plate (A).
6 Remove the two heating hoses.
7 Disconnect the heating valve control cable.
8 Remove the two air conditioning pipes fitted on the pressure
regulator.
9 Remove the ten attachment screws (B) from the heating/air 334H2062 Photo 62
conditioning unit on the cab front.
10 Remove the instrument panel LH inside lining.
11 Disconnect the two connectors behind the instrument panel
lining and the ground wire (Photo 64).
Same operation to remove:
– Evaporator.
– Heating radiator.
334H2063 Photo 63
334H2064 Photo 64
MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN H2.11
Evaporator and radiator replacement

To replace the evaporator and heating radiator
1 Extract the air conditioning/ heating unit on the cab front
(see previous page).
2 Remove the heat protection bonded on the unit or cut at the
gasket face.
3 Remove the clips and the screws from the upper unit.
4 Remove the thermostat with its probe.
5 Disassemble the link clip on the air recirculation flap .
6 Separate the two half-units (Photo 105).
7 Remove the evaporator (A).
8 Remove the radiator (B).
334H2104 Photo 104
Note: caution when installing, make sure that the different
seals are properly positioned.
B
A
334H2105 Photo 105
B
A
334H2106 Photo 106 334H2107 Photo 107
H2.12 MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
Fan removal
To remove the heating or air conditioning fan it is not necessary
to remove the unit on the cab front.
1 Remove the scoop and the air filter.
2 Move the thermostat probe on the unit side (installation with
air conditioning).
3 Move the speed regulator plate (A) while removing two screws
and the wire (+).
4 Movethesix attachmentscrewsofthefans(B)andthetwowires.
Installation
Apply the reverse removal sequence.
A
334H2108 Photo 108
334H2109 Photo 109
MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN H2.13
Description of the photos 70 and 71

1 Motor supply (orange wire)
1
2 3rd gear (white wire)
2 2nd gear (brown wire)
4 1st gear (yellow wire) 2
334H2070 Photo 70
(A) et (B) = Thermostat

(C) and (D) = Recirculation motor
4
3 B D
C
2
1 A
334H2071 Photo 71
H2.14 MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
+ APC
110
M FM22
90
FA2
R3 R9 R10 R8
1 2 4 3
D2 D3
6 12 11 1 2 3 8 1 11 5 7
VERT ROUGE
210
60 05
119 P P
MR029
HP BP
334684
250 95
– 02.2003
M
- 10.2003
– EN
- EN
3 4 2 1
Description
61 Ventilation switch
1 4 5 3 6 2
70 Recirculation/air conditioning
switch
90 Fan
95 Air conditioning compressor
70
61 L B H M 119 Air conditioning electronic ther-
3 mostat
2
1 210 HP and LP pressure switch
250 Recirculation motor
334H2072 Fig. 72
H2.15
Pressure regulator
It is possible to have access to the pressure regulator (G) without
removing the air conditioning unit.
1 Remove the LH cover.
G
2 Drain the air conditioning circuit.
3 Remove the two air conditioning pipes.
4 Remove the plastic protection (two screws).
5 Remove the two hexagonal socket head cylindrical screws
from the pressure regulator.
334H2090 Photo 90
Pressure regulator(Fig. 91)

A Inlet: dehydrator outlet
B Outlet: evaporator inlet
C D
C Inlet: evaporator outlet
B Outlet: compressor inlet
B
A
334H2091 Photo 91
Thermostat
It is located in the unit at the front of the cab, mark (H).
Adjustment Warm Cold
Potentiometric value 10 kΩ 0 kΩ
Activation treshold
21°C 5°C
contact closed
Trigger treshold
18°C 2°C
contact open
334H2092 Photo 92
H2.16 MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
Final operations
– Always replace the O-rings whenever removing/installing (oil with
PAG oil).
– To prevent thermal shocks and condensation on the cold parts
(pressure regulator, evaporator) and to ensure proper operation of
the cooling system, insulate properly all the fittings.
– Check the oil level on the compressor.
– Fill the circuit with coolant.
– To ensure proper operation of the air conditioning, the filters
must be as clean as possible, as well as the evaporator, the
condenser and the unit heater.
Inspections - Checks
Connecting points
They are located at the compressor.
(Marks P – Fig. 93). 334H2093 Photo 93
Test conditions
– Clean air filter. Oil
– Engine running at 1,800 rpm. Intervention on the air quantity
– Fan on slow speed. conditioning circuit* to be
ad d ed
– Thermostat on maximum
– Circuit loaded at 1,750 g.
– Operating time before checking: 5 to 10 minutes. C ondenser replacement 30 ml
– No air bubbles (to be checked on the dehydrator indicator).
Values at ambiant temperature of 20 °C Evaporator replacement 30 ml

Low pressure: 0.2 bar ± 0.2.
High pressure: 8 bar ± 1
Pulsed air temperature 4 °C ± 2 (nozzle outlet).
D ehydrator reservoir replacement 15 ml
Values at ambiant temperature of 35 °C
Low pressure: 1.4 bar ± 0,2.
High pressure: 14.5 bar ± 1. H ose replacement 10 ml
Pulsed air temperature 6 °C ± 2 (nozzle outlet).
Oil quantity to be added

Diagnostic – Preliminary operations
during an intervention The ambiant temperature is important to ensure effective checks.
Note: measure the oil quantity recovered during a draining Whenever possible, inspect the coolant circuit at an ambiant
operation When filling introduce this quantity (with the new temperature of 20 °C (if required, heat the cab during cold periods).
oil) adding the lost quantity of the replaced item.
* When changing a compressor, do not add, in the circuit, all the oil contained in the compressor. Only add the quantity recovered during
suction + the equivalent quantity included in the replaced compressor.
MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN H2.17
Personal notes:
H2.18 MR029
60 05 334684
– 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
Troubleshooting
Diagnostic
334H2110 Fig. 110
60MR
05334
029 –684
02.2003 – EN- EN
- 10.2003 H2.19
Notes
H2.20 60MR
05334
029 –684
02.2003 – EN- EN
- 10.2003
H3 – WINDOW BONDING
Warning !
The bonded glazing is integral part of the safety struc- It meets the specifications 1st assembly and the EEC and
ture. OECD security accreditation tests.
To enable the mechanics to perform a quick and quality inter- All the tools have been selected to meet the quality, security
vention, the GURIT two-component bonding is recommended and operating requirements in force to date in the main
for the windscreen. countries.
This technique ensures a mimimum bonding time, that is not

much linked to temperature and atmospheric moisture
constraints (as opposed to the one-component).
THESE INVESTMENTSARE HIGHLY RECOMMENDED.
The following products block

the polymerization process of the glues.
AVOID ANY CONTACT WITH THESE PRODUCTS:
THINNERS
GREASES
OILS
ALCOHOLS (windscreen washer)
CHLORINE PRODUCTS
CHROMATE-PHOSPHATE TREATMENT (rust resistant)
SILICONES
SOAP AND SOAPY WATER
H3.2 60MR
05 334
029 – 02.2003
684 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
List of the equipment to be used – Particular instructions
1. SECURITY AND PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT, SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS.

• Do not smoke during intervention. • Wear protective gloves (be careful of the risks of cut).
• Perform the intervention moving away as much as possible from • Wearsafetyglasses.
the grinding, welding, engine testing places etc. (be careful of the • When installing the windscreen, use stepladders and get help
fire risks linked to the chemicals used). from a third person.
334H3001 Fig. 1 334H3002 Fig. 2 334H3003 Fig. 3 334H3004 Fig. 4
2. ESSENTIAL AND SPECIFIC TOOLS

• Carefully clean with a vacuum cleaner the glass splinters. • Prepare the BETAGUN two-component spray gun.
• Cut the seal using the electric or pneumatic vibrating cutter. • Have straps and a spatula at your disposal.
• Take the windscreen with the suction cups and position it on the • In case of too low temperature (below 5 °C) use a hot air blower.
support.
334H3005 Fig. 5 334H3006 Fig. 6 334H3007 Fig. 7 334H3008 Fig. 8
3. CONSUMABLES
• Clean rag paper. • Degreaser(HEPTANEtype).
• Cloth backing tape. • Windscreen bonding kit.
Heptane
Nettoyant de surface
Surface cleaning
er
Oberflachenreing
smiddel
Opperviokle reinging
iale
Detergente superfic
ie
Limpiador de superfic
de superficie
Producto de limpero
334H3009 Fig. 9 334H3010 Fig. 10 334H3011 Fig.11 334H3012 Fig. 12
60MR
05 334
029 – 02.2003
684 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN H3.3
Removal
Remove:
– air filter cover, 3 4
– the windshield wiper blade, do not insert piece of glass in the air
conditioning unit,
– the instrument panel lining underside,
– the windscreen wiper motor, 2
– the sunshade curtain.
334H3013 Fig. 13
– Wear anti-cut protective gloves and safety glasses.

– Install a protection (cloth or rag) on the air conditioning
unit to avoid glass pieces.
– Use the specified vibrating cutter with the appropriate blade
(shovel blade).
– Properly sharpen the big blade of the vibrating cutter.
– From inside, cut the seal on all the surrounding edge frequently
soaking the blade in a drop of soapy water (makes the work easier).
CAUTION: when preparing the bonding for another windscreen
carefully clean the rabbet to remove any trace of soap.
334H3014 Fig. 14
– Shave, at the last minute, the old seal leaving a residual layer
(A) of about 1-mm thickness.
– Do not use an air blow gun (risk of lubricant deposit).
– Carefully degrease the surrounding edge with a HEPTANE
product.
– DO NOT SMOKE, take the usual precautions to prevent any
risk of inflammation of the degreasing agent.
– If required, clean the outside surface of the windscreen.
A
334H3015 Fig. 15
H3.4 60MR
05 334
029 – 02.2003
684 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
– Damp the suction cups.
334H3016 Fig. 16
– Fix the suction cups on the windscreen outer side.

– Place the windscreen on the support (inner side on the top).
334H3017 Fig. 17
Windscreen preparation before the

primer application Yellow stopper
– Apply on the windscreen black edge the activator contained in
the bottle with yellow stopper.
– Do not put it on the glass (should it happen wipe,
risk of marking the windscreen).
– Wipe with a clean and lint-free rag.
334H3018 Fig. 18
60MR
05 334
029 – 02.2003
684 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN H3.5
Primer application
– Shake the bottle with the GREEN stopper, till the balls rattle, Green stopper
in any case shake the bottle at least one minute.
– Use a «ball» brush to paint the black edge of the windscreen (at
the position where the glue layer will be laid down).
Note: this product favours the glue adhesion and is an
anticorrosive agent of the sheet metal parts bared when cutting
the old glue. It protects the two-component glue from the solar
ultraviolet radiation.
334H3019 Fig. 19
– Coat the cab rabbet with the same product at the positions
where the paint is removed through the cutting of the old seal.
334H3020 Fig. 20
– Wait for about 15 minutes of drying.

– Dry with a heating blower if the temperature is too low.
– Bond the adjustment patches (P/N 60 05 200 197) on the cab
rabbet according to the opposite figure. 1 2 3
10 4
7
9 8 6 5
334H3021 Fig. 21
H3.6 60MR
05 334
029 – 02.2003
684 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
Preparation of the bonding

two-component product
BEWARE of the validity date!

– If the temperature is low (below 15 °C), heat the cartridges to
improve the fluidity (water bath or hot air blower).
– Release the (red) retaining steady of the agent cartridges.
– Connect the plug to the 200 V electric network.
– Press upon the trigger and position the pushers in rear position
(see BETAGUN manual).
– Position the cartridges in the housings of the spray gun and close
the spray gun casing.
– Cut the guide tape of the V-nozzle, screw the nozzle on the spray
gun.
334H3022 Fig. 22
– Press upon the trigger to move forwards the two products that
are mixed in the nozzle.
– Lay down a volume, equivalent to a nut, of product on a piece
of paper (drying indicator).
– Position the indicator in the cab.
334H3023 Fig. 23
– Perform a displacement test around the windscreen so as to

check that nothing hinders the operation, in order to make a
continuous glue deposit.
= 12
– Apply the glue, at the centre of the black edge, adjusting the
displacement and extrusion speeds to obtain a triangular and
regular deposit, according to the drawing.
– A triangular layer makes the position of the windscreen easier.
– Carry out the junction rejoining the layers as shown by the =8
opposite figure.
334H3024 Fig. 24
60MR
05 334
029 – 02.2003
684 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN H3.7
– When the surrounding edge is completed: with the help of a

third person, and observing the safety requirements (gloves,
glasses and stepladder on each side of the engine), bond the
windscreen on the cab, fit on the top
Be careful of the passage with the work light protectors.
– Align the windscreen with the lower windows vertically and
horizontally.
334H3025 Fig. 25
– Apply the pressure required for crushing the bonded seal on

all the perimeter.
– Strap the suction cup handles with the front work light protectors
so that the windscreen does not lower.
– Strap the windscreen against the cab.
It is worthless and even not recommended to tighten too much.
334H3026 Fig. 26
– Bond cloth backing tape at the joints of the lower windows.

– Apply glue on the junction grooves and smooth the deposit
excess with a spatula.
– Install the removed equipment.
Down-time of the tractor after bonding:
30 minutes at 20 °C outside.
In case of very low temperature:
– Start the engine and switch the cab heating to defrosting
position.
– If necessary, heat the surrounding edge with the hot air blower.
– In any case, refer to the drying indicator, it should not be tacky.
334H3027 Fig. 27
H3.8 60MR
05 334
029 – 02.2003
684 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
Replacement method
Apply the same instructions as previously described:
- seal cutting ;
- degreasing, cleaning;
- primer on the rabbet and window;
- drying time. 1 2 3
- Bond the adjusting patches (P/N 60 05 020 197) on the specified
positions.
– Apply the glue layer. 8 4
– Bond the ploughing inspection window
– Chock on the bottom
– Position the adhesive tapes to maintain the window against the
cab.
7 6 5
– Remake the junction seal between the windscreen and the
ploughing inspection window (see previous page).
334H3028 Fig. 28
Note: for the rear ploughing inspection window, remove the

support plate of the license plate.
334H3029 Fig. 29
334H3030 Fig. 30 334H3031 Fig. 31
60MR
05 334
029 – 02.2003
684 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN H3.9
Personal notes
H3.10 60MR
05 334
029 – 02.2003
684 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
TOOLS
Cab lift – heating/air conditioning – window bonding tools
Tools
60 05 020 197 0197 60 05 020 330 0330
Heptane
e
Nettoyant de surfac
Surface cleaning
r
Oberflachenreinge
ngsmiddel
Opperviokle reingi
ente super ficiale
Deterg
ficie
Limpiador de super
ro de superficie
Producto de limpe
– Adjustment patches (number: 56) – Heptane bottle
60 05 712 983 2983 60 05 713 108 3108
– Air conditioning station – Electronic leak detector (P/N SNDC 400A99)
77 01 388 907 8907 77 01 388 913 8913
– Spreader bar – Spreader bar support and guides
H3.12 60MR
05 334
029 – 02.2003
684 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
H4
PLATFORM LIFT
60 05 030 163 – 03.2004 – EN

Presentation
Identification
Type series N° A
Plate (A) is situated behind the platform on the right-hand
side.
Certification
Plate (B) is situated behind the platform on the right-hand
side.
Safety structure identification N°

Plate (C) is situated on the left rear wing of the platform.
B
Important: A safety structure damaged
(deformed) as the result of an accident,
must never be repaired but must be
replaced.
841bsm01 Fig. 1
841bsm02 Fig. 2
H4.2 60 05 030 163 – 03.2004 – EN

Presentation
Safety measure Sling specifications

To raise the platform, it is essential for the hoist to be in Weight of the platform: About 400 kg.
perfect operational condition with sufficient height under
the hook to clear the platform completely. If the platform is In all cases, the platform must be lifted
being partially lifted, it is essential to prop it up with slowly, making sure at all times that no
approved stands. element remains attached to the girder .
– Place the tractor on a perfectly level surface. Check that there is no interference at the front or
– Chock the wheels. rear with parts remaining on the girder. Lift the
– Mark out the working area. platform only with a cross-piece to avoid any risk
– Use a certified hoist in perfect working order. of deforming the lifting points.
– Use certified shackles.
– Use certified slings in perfect working order.
– Respect safety instructions. Wear gloves and safety
shoes.
Prohibited Cross-piece only
001bsm01 Fig. 3
60 05 030 163 – 03.2004 – EN H4.3

Removal / installation
– Disconnect the electricity plugs (A, B, C). A
– Remove the earth cable (D). D
– Remove the rear wheels after placing the front axle on
stands. Replace the rear axle on stands.
Tracteur à 4 roues motrices: If the tractor B

is on stands, do not start up the engine. If
the engine has to be started, it is essential
to place the front axle up on axle stands too.
– Remove the handbrake control (E).

C
– Disconnect the differential clutch and declutch
control (F).
– Remove the PTO control cable (G). Note the control
setting when dismantling.
871bsm01 Fig. 4
344bsn10 Fig. 5
G
E
F
871bsm02 Fig. 6
H4.4 60 05 030 163 – 03.2004 – EN

– Remove the nuts from the rear studs of the
platform (H).
– Remove the screws from the from studs of the
platform (I).
– Remove the screws from the tank base and lower the
tank slightly to access the front right stud nut.
– Remove the PTO control unit (K) with its hoses.
Remove the control lever ball (L) with its spring (M).
H
871bsm03 Fig. 7
871bsm04 Fig. 8
871bsm05 Fig. 9
60 05 030 163 – 03.2004 – EN H4.5

– Separate the gear lever by removing the 4 screws
between the upper part (N) and the lower part.
– On the platform remove the range lever ball (O). N
– Disconnect the draft control (P) and position O
control (Q) cables.
In the case of a tractor with mechanical transmission,
disconnect the reverser control (R) and the super slow
control (S).
871bsm06 Fig. 10
871bsm07 Fig. 11
R
S
344bsm01 Fig. 12
H4.6 60 05 030 163 – 03.2004 – EN

Platform lift
As the platform is not the same size as the cab, we keep the existing cross-piece (reference n° 77 01 388 907).
871bsm09 Fig. 13
60 05 030 163 – 03.2004 – EN H4.7

– Disconnect the auxiliary distributor cables and mark
them (Fig. 14).
– Begin to raise the cab slightly making sure that it
remains straight so as not to damage the ploughing
window.
– Mark then disconnect the supply and return pipes of
the steering unit.
– Pipê wrench of 19 for the connection on the steering
unit side, Load Sensing (LS) signal (Fig. 15).
• For tractor with pneumatic braking option:
– Remove the air pressure gauge connection on the air
reservoir.
– Disconnect the earth wire behind the LH running
board.
– Remove the pneumatic brake control jar (for tractors
equipped with this option).
397bsm15 Fig. 14
491bsm01 Fig. 15
372bsm01 Fig. 16
H4.8 60 05 030 163 – 03.2004 – EN

– After freeing the cab sufficiently: Remove the RH and
LH brake controls at the front of the platform.
362bsm01 Fig. 17
60 05 030 163 – 03.2004 – EN H4.9

Particular points when putting back

again
Take care with the following when lowering
– The platform, which risks coming into contact with the
auxiliary distributors base (protection recommended).
– The gear and range levers.
– The hydraulic filter on the cab front.
– Replace the LH and RH brake control shafts before
lowering the platform.
When the platform has been lowered

– Connect up the supply and return pipes to the steering
unit. Make sure that the Load Sensing hose (tractor
with REVERSHIFT transmission ) is not twisted.
– Replace the hydraulic PTO control unit.
397bsm15 Fig. 18
871bsm05 Fig. 19
H4.10 60 05 030 163 – 03.2004 – EN

Make sure that the auxiliary distributors

control cables are clear of any obstacle.
– Before completing the platform installation, make sure

that the two front stud screws are correctly in their
housing (holes filled with filler).
– Declutching cable to be positioned in the 2nd hole (to
be marked when dismantling).
– Tightness torque of front and rear studs.
N.B.: For the adjustment points, see the chapters of
the parts concerned.
871bsm08 Fig. 20
362bsm01 Fig. 21
871bsm10 Fig. 22
60 05 030 163 – 03.2004 – EN H4.11

Notes
H4.12 60 05 030 163 – 03.2004 – EN

TOOLS
Cab and platform lifting tool - Heating/air

conditioning - Bonding the windows
60 05 030 163 – 03.2004 – EN

Cab and platform lifting tool - Heating/air conditioning -
Bonding the windows
60 05 020 197 60 05 020 330
Heptane
e
Nettoyant de surfac
Surface cleaning
r
Oberflachenreinge
ngsmiddel
Opperviokle reingi
ficiale
Detergente super
ficie
Limpiador de super
ro de superficie
Producto de limpe
Shim blocks (quantity : 56) Bottle of Heptane
60 05 712 983 60 05 713 108
Electronic leak sensor

Air conditioning unit
(ref. SNDC 400 A 99)
77 01 388 907 77 01 388 913
Lifting beam Lifting beam supports and guides
H4.14 60 05 030 163 – 03.2004 – EN

Cab and platform lifting tool - Heating/air conditioning -
Bonding the windows
60 05 006 913
Lifting beam chains
60 05 030 163 – 03.2004 – EN H4.15

Notes
H4.16 60 05 030 163 – 03.2004 – EN

J1
FRONT PTO AND
LIFT
J2
AIR BRAKE
10 - 2003 Chapter J
60 05 029 684 - 10.2003 - EN
CONTENTS
J1 – FRONT PTO AND LIFT

SPECIFICATIONS .................................................................................................................................................... J1.2
TIGHTENING TORQUES ......................................................................................................................................... J1.3
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ....................................................................................................................................... J1.4
REMOVALSPECIFICATIONS ................................................................................................................................... J1.5
J2 – AIR BRAKE
ENGINE RUNNING – TRAILER CONNECTED – BRAKES NOTACTUATED ................................................................... J2.3
ENGINE RUNNING WITH BRAKE PEDALSAND HANDBRAKE NOTACTUATED ............................................................ J2.4
ENGINE RUNNING – TRAILER CONNECTED – SERVICE BRAKESACTUATED ............................................................ J2.5
ENGINE RUNNING WITH SERVICE BRAKESACTUATEDAND
HANDBRAKE NOTACTUATED ................................................................................................................................. J2.6
ENGINE RUNNING – TRAILER CONNECTED – HANDBRAKE LOCKED ......................................................................... J2.7
ENGINE RUNNING WITH SERVICE BRAKES NOTACTUATEDAND HANDBRAKE LOCKED ........................................... J2.8
COMPRESSOR ....................................................................................................................................................... J2.9
PRESSUREREGULATOR ........................................................................................................................................ J2.9
FUELTANK ............................................................................................................................................................ J2.9
SOLENOID VALVE ................................................................................................................................................. J2.10
MAIN CONTROL VALVE ......................................................................................................................................... J2.10
TRAILER CONTROLVALVE .................................................................................................................................... J2.11
VALVE CONTROL ON BRAKE CONTROLSHAFT (12) ............................................................................................... J2.11
OIL USED FOR VALVE CONTROL ............................................................................................................................ J2.11
VALVE CONTROL (6) LINKED TO HANDBRAKE CONTROL ....................................................................................... J2.12
AIR BRAKE SYSTEM BLEEDING ............................................................................................................................ J2.12
TOOLS
LIFT TOOLS AND FRONT PTO .............................................................................................................................. J2.13
60 05 029 684 - 10.2003 - EN

60 05 029 693 - 10.2003 - EN
J1 – FRONT PTO AND LIFT
Presentation
Specifications
Lift (type) Folding arms
Number of outside cylinders 2 (double acting)
Control Auxiliary distributor (double acting)
Lift capacities
2 800 kg maximum X
Isolation valve Yes
Arm stroke 650 mm
Supply pressure 180 b ar
Pow er take off: type Single-speed
Clutch Multiple-disc w et
Control Electro-hydraulic w ith progressivity
Rotation direction Clockw ise or anticlockw ise
Rotation speed 2 200 rpm engine = 1 100 rpm of pow er take off
Output shaft 1 ” 3/8 – 6 grooves
Transmissible continuous output pow er Tractor pow er 66 kW (90 horsepow er)
Oil type Elf Tracto Renault GA 12
Capacity (reducer) 1.3 l
Housing supply pressure 17 b ar
J1.2 60MR
05 334
029 – 02.2003
684 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
Front PTO
Tightening torques
Torques: see the engine chapter
Frenetanch
5 ± 0,7 daN.m
Screws are blocked by

four punches
Frenetanch
13 ± 2,5 daN.m
Frenetanch
13 ± 2,5 daN.m
Frenetanch
26 ± 4 daN.m
334J1004 Fig. 4
60MR
05 334
029 – 02.2003
684 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN J1.3
Front PTO
Note: No intervention is required inside the housing.
16
15
13
4
10
2
3
18 14
17
1
12
7 11
24
7
9
8
23
22
21
20
19
334J1005 Fig. 5
Description 8 Protector 16 Flange

1 Housing 9 Screw 17 Screw
2 Support 10 Hydraulic clutch 18 Key
3 Screw 11 Flange 19 Bolt + washers
4 Guard 12 Screw 20 Hub
5 Screw 13 Screw 21 Coupling pulley
6 Pin 14 Screw 22 Bush
7 Grid 15 Universal joint shaft 23 Seal
J1.4 60MR
05 334
029 – 02.2003
684 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
Front PTO
Removal specifications
– Remove the guard (4) above the universal joint shaft (15).
– Disconnect the universal joint shaft on the engine side using the
STAHLWILLE socket ref. no 1054KKX-03361408 and pass with it
under the radiator.
– Disconnect the universal joint shaft on the PTO side.
– Unlock the clutch attachment (10) using an extension in the front
part.
334J1006 Photo 6
– To remove only the clutch, loosen the two lower securing screws
of the support without removing them.
– For safety reasons, sling and then remove the two upper securing
screwsofthesupport.
– Extract the clutch paying attention to the two keys inserted in the
power take-off shaft.
334J1007 Photo 7
– To extract the housing, remove the two lower securing screws of

the support.
– Turn the housing to extract it beween the lift arms.
334J1008 Photo 8
60MR
05 334
029 – 02.2003
684 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN J1.5
Front PTO
Clutch lining removal

– Remove the lining using a press.
334J1009 Photo 9
– Remove the retaining spring of the lining.

– To change the hydraulic clutch seals, remove the central clip in
order to release the dog part with its springs.
– When installing, it is mandatory to align the splines and use the
press to compress the springs.
334J1010 Photo 10
J1.6 60MR
05 334
029 – 02.2003
684 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
J2 – AIR BRAKE
Personal notes:
J2.2 600505029
60 029 684
693 - 10.2003
- 10.2003 - EN- EN
Presentation
Engine running – Trailer connected – Brakes not actuated
5
3 3 4 5
2
Description
1 Compressor
2 Solenoid valve (controlled by the
brake light contact)
3 Fuel tank
14
4 Bleed valve
5 Pressure indicator
6 Main control valve
2 7 Trailer control valve
8 Black coupling head
9 Yellow coupling head
4 10 Red coupling head
16 11 Oil tank
12 Valve control (6)
13 Handbrake (controls the valve 6)
14 Air suction
15 Bleed screw.on control (12)
1
16 Pressure regulator
10 11
15 15
12
13 7
6
9 12
Pressurized circuit
8
Control circuit
Circuit without pressure

334J2001 Fig. 1
60MR 334 684

05 029 – 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN J2.3
Presentation
Engine running with brake pedals and handbrake not actuated

5
12
1 21
1 3
4
2 Description
22 3 1-2
1 Compressor
3 20 litres tank
4 Manual bleed valve
2 5 Pressure indicator
3 6 Main control valve
7 Trailer control valve
6
10 Red coupling head
10 1 11 Pilot connector of the brake valve
8 bar 12 Pressure regulator
RED
41
11
42
9 2
0 bar
YELLOW
7
4
2
5 bar 8
1
BLACK 3
334J2002 Fig. 2
J2.4 60MR
05 334 – 02.2003
029 684 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
Presentation
Engine running – Trailer connected – Service brakes actuated
5
3 3 4 5
2
Description
1 Compressor
2 Solenoid valve (controlled via the
3 Fuel tank
14
4 Bleed valve
11 Oil tank
16
14 Air suction
15 Bleed screw.on control (12)
1 16 Pressure regulator
10 11
15 15
12
13 7
6
9 12
Pressurized circuit
8
Control circuit

334J2003 Fig. 3
60MR 334 684

05 029 – 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN J2.5
Presentation
Engine running with service brakes actuated and handbrake not actuated
5
12
1 21
1 3
4
22 3 1-2 2
Description
1 Compressor
2 Solenoid valve (controlled via the brake
light contact)
3 20 litres tank
2 4 Manual bleed valve
6 A 7 Trailer control valve
10 1
8 bar 10 Red coupling head
RED 11 Pilot connector of the brake valve
41
11
A When brakes are actuated, the valve
42 closes the outlet towards (3) in order to
maintain a pressure on the YELLOW
outlet
9 2
8 bar
YELLOW
7
4
2
0 bar 8
1
BLACK 3
334J2004 Fig. 4
J2.6 60MR
05 334 – 02.2003
029 684 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
Presentation
Engine running – Trailer connected – Handbrake locked
5
3 3 4 5
2
Description
1 Compressor
2 Solenoid valve (controlled via the
3 Fuel tank
14
4 Bleed valve
11 Oil tank
16
14 Air suction
15 Bleed screw on control (12)
1 16 Pressure regulator
10 11
15 15
12
13 7
6
9 12
Pressurized circuit
8
Control circuit

334J2005 Fig. 5
60MR 334 684

05 029 – 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN J2.7
Presentation
Engine running with service brakes not actuated and handbrake locked
5
12
1 21
1 3
4
22 3 1-2 2
Description
1 Compressor
3 20 litres tank
2 4 Manual bleed valve
10 1 10 Red coupling head
8 bar
11 Pilot connector of the brake valve
RED
41
11
42
9 2
8 bar
YELLOW
7
4
2
0 bar 8
1
BLACK 3
334J2006 Fig. 6
J2.8 6060
0505 029
029 693684 - 10.2003
- 10.2003 - EN - EN
Main components
Compressor
1 Suction. 2
1
2 Discharge.
3 Tightening torque 100 ± 10 N.m.
Fig. 7
334j2007
Pressure regulator
1 Supply (From the compressor).
2 Outlet (Towards tank). 1
2
3 Pneumatic inflation socket
4 Discharge system.
4 3
Fig. 8
334j2008
Fuel tank 3 2
1 Bleed valve.
2 Towards pressure indicator.
3 Towards solenoid valve.
4 Supply (From the pressure regulator).
1 4 Fig. 9
334j2009
60MR 334 684

05 029 – 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN J2.9
Main components
Solenoid valve
3 1
(When it is under pressure, it enables to maintain a waiting
pressure at the main control valve input).
1 Supply (From the tank)

2 Main control valve supply.
3 Electrical supply (From the brake light contact).
2
Fig. 10
334j2010
Main control valve 6

2 3 4
1 Supply (From the tank).
2 Towards RED trailer power socket.
3 Supply (From the solenoid valve).
4 Brake control system.
5 Towards YELLOW trailer power socket. 1
6 Rod connected to handbrake.
Fig. 11
334j2011
1
2 3 4
6 Fig. 12
334j2012
J2.10 60MR 334 684

05 029 – 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
Main components
Trailer control valve

3
1 Supply.
2 Towards BLACK trailer power socket.
3 Air exhaust
4 Brake control.
2
1
4
Fig. 13
334j2013
Valve control on brake control

shaft (12) 3
1 Input from the tank.
2 Outlet towards main control valve (6).
3 Bleed valve.
2 1
Fig. 14
334j2014
Oil used for valve control

ELF TRACTORENAULT GA12.
60MR 334 684

05 029 – 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN J2.11
Main components
Valve control (6) linked to

handbrake control
1 Control rod of main control valve (6).
6 Main control valve.
6
Fig. 16
334j2016
Air brake system bleeding

Before starting, check the bleed screws on the transducers
are pointing upwards (C). B C A
Fill the oil tank.
Loosen the bleed screws of each transducer and wait for

the oil to flow without any presence of air.
In case of difficult bleed, remove the control link pin (A)

on the yokes and lift the rods so that the bleed screw is at
the top.
Tighten the two screws.
Place a transparent pipe on the bleed screw of the air brake

system valve (B) and dip it in a container containing oil. Fig. 17
334j2017
Check the oil level and top up every time it is necessary.
Loosen the bleed screw on the air brake system valve and
slowly press on the coupled brake pedals.
Keep the brake pedals down, tighten the bleed screw and
slowly release the brake pedals.
Renew the operation until all air bubbles have disappeared.
Install pressure gauges on the trailer air outlets and check

the pressures.
J2.12 60MR 334 684

05 029 – 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN
TOOLS
Lift tools and front PTO
60 05 029 684 - 10.2003 - EN

Lift tools and front PTO
60 05 705 076 5076 60 05 714 428 4428
– Tester – Union
J2.14 60 MR 334684
05 029 – 02.2003 – EN
- 10.2003 - EN

Instrukcja Napraw Celtis 426-456

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Instrukcja Napraw Celtis 426-456

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Instrukcja Napraw Celtis 426-456

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

10.

A0 – ELECTRONIC INJECTION SHEETS

A0 – CHECKING PROCEDURE AND MECHANICAL INJECTION

MEASUREMENT AND CHECKING POINTS

MECHANICAL INJECTION SHEETS

Celtis 406 – 05.2005 – GB

Celtis 406 – 05.2005 – GB

Celtis 406 – 05.2005 – GB

DPS 4045 TRT 70 engine

DPS 4045 TRT 71 engine

DPS 4045 TRT 72 engine

Celtis 406 – 05.2005 – GB

A0.2 Celtis 406 – 05.2005 – GB

Return system – Hydraulic distributors in neutral.

– Transmission oil temperature: over 40°.

– Air conditioning stopped.

60 05 029 684 - 10.2003 - EN

  JN:K   

63(('6 ,GOH 1RPLQDO 0D[QRORDG

Return system – Hydraulic distributors in neutral.

– Transmission oil temperature: over 40°.

– Air conditioning stopped.

60 05 029 684 - 10.2003 - EN A0.5

63(('6 ,GOH 1RPLQDO 0D[QRORDG

Return system – Hydraulic distributors in neutral.

– Transmission oil temperature: over 40°.

– Air conditioning stopped.

60 05 029 684 - 10.2003 - EN A0.7

  &2168037,213(5+285 OK   

757 % 3   

Return system – Hydraulic distributors in neutral.

– Transmission oil temperature: over 40°.

– Air conditioning stopped.

60 05 029 684 - 10.2003 - EN

  JN:K   

757 % 3   

63(('6 ,GOH 1RPLQDO 0D[QRORDG

Return system – Hydraulic distributors in neutral.

– Transmission oil temperature: over 40°.

– Air conditioning stopped.

60 05 029 684 - 10.2003 - EN A0.11

 JN:K   

 N:        

Return system – Hydraulic distributors in neutral.

– Transmission oil temperature: over 40°.

– Air conditioning stopped.

60 05 029 684 - 10.2003 - EN A0.13

 N:        

Supply system – Hydraulic distributors in neutral.

60 05 029 684 - 10.2003 - EN A0.15

 N:        

Celtis 406 – 05.2005 – GB

List of checking operations

2. Engine oil level G

3. Hydraulic /transmission oil level

A0.18 Celtis 406 – 05.2005 – GB

Celtis 406 – 05.2005 – GB A0.19

A0.20 Celtis 406 – 05.2005 – GB

10. Fit the dynamometer

Place the tractor in an unenclosed

JN:K

&2168037,213(5+285 OK

757 % 3

JN:K

757 % 3

JN:K

N:

N:

N: